tuf^ 


^3€^-J^. 


I  ><^^ 


» ^  ^%^*  • '  ■  \  ^v*^x  ^  \r%^  \ 


^.*^        ^    V  A%    .     .       ^\\*         « 


PUBLISHED    BY   HARPER    AND    BROTHERS,    NEW-YORK. 


ANTHON'S     SERIES     OF     CLASSICAL    WORKS, 
llle  following  works,  already  published,  may  be  regarded  as  specimens  of  the 
whole  series,  which  will  consist  of  about  thirty  volumes.    They  are  all  bound  in  the 
most  durable  and  tasteful  manner,  and  are  for  sale  at  reasonable  prices  by  the  prin- 
cipal booksellers  throughout  the  United  States. 

First  Latin  Lessons,  containing 
the  most  important  Parts  of  the 
Grammar  of  the  Latin  Language, 
together  with  appropriate  Exer- 
cises in  the  translating  and  writing 
of  Latin,  for  the  Use  of  Beginners. 
12mo. 


First  Greek  Lessons,  containing 
the  most  important  Parts  of  the 
Grammar  of  the  Greek  Language, 
together  with  appropriate  Exer- 
cises in  the  translating  and  writing 
of  Greek,  for  the  Use  of  Beginners. 
12mo. 

A  Grammar  of  the  Greek  Lan- 
guage, for  the  Use  of  Schools  and 
Colleges.     12mo. 

A  System  op  Greek  Prosody  and 
Metre,  for  the  Use  of  Schools 
and  Colleges ;  together  with  the 
Choral  Scanning  of  the  Prome- 
theus Vinctus  of  .^Cschylus,  and 
the  Ajax  and  OEdipus  Tyrannus  of 
Sophocles ;  to  which  are  append- 
ed Remarks  on  the  Indo-Germanic 
Analogies.  12mo. 
Cesar's  Commentaries  on  the 
Gallic  War  ;  and  the  first  Book 
of  the  Greek  Paiaphrase ;  wii^ 
English  Notes,  critical  and  explan- 
atory, Plans  of  Battles,  Sieges, 
&c.,  and  Historical,  Geographical, 
and  Archa?ological  Indexes.  Map, 
Portrait,  &c.  12mo. 
The  above  editions  of  the  Classical  authors  are  based  on  the  latest  and 
most  accurate  texts,  and  are  accompanied  by  English  Commentaries,  con- 
taining everything  requisite  for  accurate  preparation  on  the  part  of  the  stu- 
dent and  a  correct  understanding  of  the  author. 

The  publishers  take  the  liberty  of  adding,  that  all  of  the  above  works 
have  been  repubUshed  in  England  and  Scotland.  Some  of  them,  indeed, 
have  already  passed  through  four  editions.  They  are  repubUshed  under 
the  superintendence  of  that  eminent  scholar,  James  Boyd,  LL.D.,  one  of 
the  masters  in  the  High  School  in  Edinburgh,  who  says,  "ira  superintend- 
ing the  publication,  I  have  not  felt  myself  warranted  to  make  any  alteration  on  the 
text,  as  given  by  Professor  Anthon,  nor  to  mutilate,  ty  the  slightest  omission,  his 
admirable  Explanatory  Notes." 

m?  A  more  detailed  view  of  the  plan  of  the  series,  &c.,  wiU  be  found 
on  the  next  page. 


Sallust's  Jugurthine  War  and 
Conspiracy  of  Catiline,  with 
an  English  Commentary,  and  Geo- 
graphical and  Historical  Indexes. 
Ninth  Edition,  corrected  and  en- 
larged.    12mo.     Portrait. 

Select  Orations  of  Cicero,  with 
English  Notes,  critical  and  explana- 
tory, and  Historical,  Geographical, 
and  Legal  Indexes.  A  new  Edi- 
tion, with  Improvements.  12mo. 
With  a  Portrait. 

The  Works  of  Horace,  with  Eng- 
lish Notes,  critical  and  explana- 
tory. New  Edition,  with  correc- 
tions and  improvements.    12mo. 

Jacobs's  Greek  Reader.  With 
Notes,  critical  and  explanatory.  A 
New  Edition.    12mo. 

A  Classical  Dictionary,  contain- 
ing an  account  of  all  the  Proper 
Names  mentioned  in  Ancient  Au- 
thors, and  intended  to  elucidate 
all  the  important  points  connected 
with  the  Geography,  History,  Biog- 
raphy, Archajology,  and  Mythol- 
ogy of  the  Greeks  and  Romans, 
together  with  a  copious  Chrono- 
logical Table,  and  an  Account  of 
the  Coins,  Weights,  and  Measures 
of  the  Ancients,  with  Tabular  Val- 
ues of  the  same.  By  Charles  An- 
thon, LL.D.  In  one  volume,  royal 
8vo. 


AND    METRE, 


AUTHORITIES, 


T      AND       MODERN. 


LES   ANTHON,   LL.D., 

PROFESSOR     OF     "KC    IrbEK   AND    LATIN    LANGUAGES  IN  COLUMBIA  COLLBOK) 
NKW-|ORKi  AND  RKCTOR  OF  THE  GRAMMAR-SCHOOL. 

I 


NEW-YORK: 

HARPER  &  BROTHERS,  82  CLIFF-STREET. 


18  4  2. 


V  i:^n\^ 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1841,  by 

Charles  Anthon, 
in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  Southern  District  of  New- York, 


Ac . 


TO   THE 

REV.    MATTHEW    SIMPSON,   D.D., 

President  of  the  Asbury  University  in  the  State  of  Indiana, 

THIS  WORK 

IS     RESPECTFULLY     DEDICATED, 

AS   A 

TRIBUTE    OF   ESTEEM    FOR   PROFESSIONAL   TALENT,   AND    FOR   THE 

DEEP   INTEREST   WHICH    HE    HAS    EVER   EVINCED    IN 

THE   CAUSE   OF   TRUE   LEARNING. 


4S86i3 


■t% 


PREFACE. 


The  author  of  the  present  work  prepared  several  years 
ago  a  Treatise  on  Latin  Prosody  and  Metre,  which  met  with 
no  unfavourable  reception,  and  proved,  as  he  has  reason  to 
believe,  a  somewhat  useful  guide  to  the  young  prosodian. 
This  volume  having  been  for  some  time  completely  out  of 
print,  the  author  has  been  induced  to  write  a  new  work  on 
the  subject :  one  that  may  not  only  be  more  worthy  of  his 
increased  experience  as  an  instructer,  but  may  furnish  also 
more  detailed  information  on  various  points  that  were  neces- 
sarily omitted  in  the  previous  treatise.  In  collecting  ma- 
terials for  this  purpose,  the  author  has  derived  important  aid 
from  the  Latin  Prosodies  of  Dr.  Carey  and  Professor  Ram- 
say, especially  the  latter,  and  he  has  introduced  into  the  pres- 
ent work  whatever  appeared  of  value  in  these  and  other 
publications  of  a  similar  nature.  He  does  not  entertain  a 
doubt,  therefore,  but  that  the  young  scholar  will  find  in  the 
present  volume  everything  that  may  be  needed  by  him,  not 
only  at  the  commencement,  but  also  throughout  the  several 
stages,  of  his  academic  career. 

Very  few  rules  are  given,  it  will  be  perceived,  for  the  struc- 
ture of  Latin  verse.  This  forms  a  distinct  department  of 
study,  for  which,  at  some  future  day,  a  separate  work  will  be 
prepared ;  and  this  intended  work  will  also  contain  the  Essay 
on  Leonine  and  Macaronic  Versification,  which  was  to  have 
formed  part  of  the  present  volume,  but  which  has  been  omit- 
ted through  fear  of  making  the  work  too  large  a  one. 

The  Latin  metrical  rules  of  Alvarez  were  given  in  the  pre- 
'Vious  work,  but  are  omitted  in  this.  The  practice  of  giving 
Latin  rules  in  matters  of  prosody  is  fast  going  out  of  use, 
and  deservedly  so ;  and,  besides  this,  the  rules  of  Alvarez 
are  in  numerous  instances  decidedly  erroneous. 

Columbia  College,  Aug.  2,  1841. 


PROSODY. 


SECTION  I. 

I.  Prosody  treats  of  the  Quantity  of  Syllables,  and  of  the 
different  Species  of  Verse.' 

II.  A  Syllable  is  composed  of  one  or  more  Letters ;  as, 
/,  in,  in-tus. 

III.  Letters  are  divided  into  Vowels  and  Consonants. 

IV.  Vowels,  or  open,  free-coming  sounds,  are  six  in 
number :  A,  E,  I,  O,  U,  Y. 

V.  From  the  vowels  are  formed  eight  Diphthongs :  JE, 
AI,  AU,  EI,  EU,  (E,  01,  UI. 

VI.  Consonants,  or  sounds  produced  by  the  compression 
of  the  organs  of  speech,  are  divided  into  Mutes  and  Semi- 
vowels. 

VII.  The  Mutes  are  eight :  B,  C,  D,  G,  K,  P,  Q,  T. 

VIII.  The  Semivowels,  which  have  a  sound  more  open 
than  that  of  the  mutes,  are  likewise  eight :  F,  L,  M,  N,  R, 
S,  X,  z. 

IX.  Of  the  semivowels  four  are  Liquids,  L,  M,  N,  R, 
and  they  are  so  called  because  they^oi^,  as  it  were,  from 
the  lips  with  less  exertion  than  is  required  in  articulating 
the  other  consonants. 

X.  Two  other  of  the  semivowels  are  Double  Letters,  X 
and  Z ;  the  letter  X  being  equivalent  to  CS,  GS,  or  KS ; 
and  the  letter  Z  to  DS  or  SD. 

1.  The  Doctrine  of  Accent  will  be  found  under  a  separate  head,  im- 
mediately after  that  part  of  the  present  work  which  treats  of  Versifica- 
tion. 

B 


«^  fc    »  *  •  .»  t.  "„ 


14  QUANTITY    OF    SYLLABLES. 

XI.  The  letter  H  is  to  be  regarded,  not  as  a  true  conso- 
nant, but,  as  a  mere  breathing. 

XII.  The  letter  J  was  altogether  unknown  to  the  an- 
cients. It  appears  that,  among  the  Romans,  the  letter  I 
exercised  a  double  function,  being  sometimes  purely  a 
vowel  and  sometimes  a  consonant,  answering  very  nearly 
to  our  y.  The  character  j  was  introduced,  in  later  times, 
into  those  words  where  i  had  the  power  of  a  consonant, 
and  therefore  of  itself,  when  not  followed  by  another  conso- 
nant, could  not  have  lengthened  a  short  vowel.  The  letter  J, 
accordingly,  is  not,  as  some  maintain,  a  double  consonant.' 

XIII.  The  letter  V,  in  like  manner,  represented  among 
the  Romans,  on  some  occasions,  a  consonant,  on  others  a 
vowel  sound.  And  the  character  U,  to  indicate  it  when  a 
vowel,  is,  like  the  letter  J,  a  modern  invention. 

XIV.  The  letter  Q  was  precisely  equivalent  in  sound  to 
C  or  K,  all  three  being  pronounced  hard. 

SECTION  II. 

QUANTITY  OF  SYLLABLES. 

I.  By  the  Quantity  of  a  syllable  is  meant  the  duration  or 
continuance  of  the  voice  in  pronouncing  it. 

II.  A  syllable  is  either  Short,  Long,  or  Common. 

III.  A  short  syllable  is  sounded  rapidly,  and  consists  of 
what  is  technically  termed  one  time,  like  the  a  in  the  Eng- 
lish  word  orator,  or  the  e  in  the  Ijatin  word  legere ;  and  is 
thus  marked,  legere. 

IV.  A  long  syllable  is  slowly  pronounced,  and  occupies 
twice  the  time  employed  in  sounding  a  short  one  ;  as  in  the 
a  of  the  English  word  mediator,  or  of  the  Latin  word  sedare ; 
and  is  thus  marked,  sedare. 

V.  A  common  or  doubtful  syllable  may  be  made  long  or 


1.  Consult  remarks  on  pgo  27,  wiib  regani  to  such  forms  as  ^W, 


ORIGIN    OF    PROSODIAL    RULES.  15 

short,  at  the  option  of  the  poet ;    as,  papyrus  or  papyrus ; 
fuerimus  or  fuerlmus? 

VI.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  either  natural,  that  is, 
dependant  on  the  intrinsic  nature  of  the  vowel  itself,  as  the 
re  of  resisto,  in  which  the  e  is  short  by  nature  ;  or  accident- 
al, as  the  re  in  restitif  which  becomes  long  because  it  hap- 
pens to  be  followed  by  two  consonants. 

VII.  The  quantity  of  syllables  is  determined  by  certain 
established  rules,  or,  when  these  fail,  by  the  authority  of 
the  poets. 

VIII.  In  polysyllables,  or  long  words,  the  last  syllable 
except  one  is  called  the  pcnultima,  or,  more  briefly,  the 
penult ;  and  the  last  syllable  except  two,  the  antepenuUima^ 
or  antepenult.  ^ 

SECTION  III.  - 

OF  THE  ORIGIN  OF  PROSODIAL  RULES. 

I.  Rules  in  Prosody  originate  from  a  careful  examination 
of  the  works  of  the  best  Latin  poets.^ 

II.  In  making  such  examination,  we  perceive  that,  with 
a  very  few  exceptions,  the  quantity  of  the  same  syllable  in 
the  same  words  is  always  the  same  ;  and,  by  classifying 
those  which  are  analogous,  we  arrive  by  induction  at  cer- 
tain fixed  principles,  which  are  imbo'died  in  rules. 

III.  In  a  great  many  other  cases,  however,  we  are  una- 
ble to  detect  any  fixed  principle,  and  must  rest  satisfied 
with  saying  that  we  have  the  authority  of  the  poets  for 
making  such  syllables  long  or  short.^ 

1.  Consult  remarks  on  page  29,  Observation  1,  with  regard  to  a 
short  vowel  before  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid. 

2.  For  some  remarks  on  the  relative  value  o%|he  Latin'^oets  as  met- 
rical authorities,  consult  Appendix. 

3.  All  prosodial  rules,  in  fact,  are  based  upon  the  authority  of  the  po- 
ets ;  but.  according  to  the  usage  of  prosodiatis,  those  syllables  only  are 
said  to  be  long  or  short  by  authority  which  cannot  be  reduced  to  rules. 


16  VOWEL    BEFORE    ANOTHER   VOWEL.         A 

'  SECTION  IV. 

RULES. 

1.    A    VOWEL    BEFORE    ANOTHER    VOWEL. 

I.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  or  a  diphthong,  is 
short ;  a.s,  fuit^  deus,  tinecs,  eximtcs. 

Tibull.   Quis  fuit,  horrendos  primus  qui  protulit  enses  ? 

Virg.      Ipse  ctiam  eximicB  laudis  succensus  amore. 

The  letter  H  being  merely  a  note  of  aspiration  or  breath- 
ing, is  not  regarded  in  such  cases  as  the  present ;  and  there- 
fore, when  h  stands  between  two  vowels,  the  preceding 
vowel  is  short ;  as,  nthil^  mihi. 

Pers.  De  mhilo  nihil,  in  nihilum  nil  posse  reverti. 
Virg.  Musttf  mihi  causas  memora  ;  quo  numine  Iceso. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Fio  has  the  i  long  in  all  its  tenses,  except  in 
those  where  it  is  followed  by  er ;  as,  fio,  fiebam,  fiam, 
but  fierem,  fieri} 

1.  It  has  been  conjectured  that  the  old  form  of  ^  v/asfelo,  and  that 
the  first  syllable  was  long  in  all  the  tenses  without  distinction.  Some 
of  the  parts,  however,  of  these  tenses  in  which  er  occurs,  could  not  have 
been  used  at  all  in  Dactylic  verse,  if  the  first  syllable  had  been  always 
long  :  thus,  f  teres,  fierent,  cannot  stand  in  any  place  of  a  Dactylic 
verse,  and  not  even  fierem,  fieri,  without  an  elision.  Hence,  when 
the  e  of  the  diphthong  was  dropped,  the  writers  of  heroic  verse  intro- 
duced this  change  into  the  quantity  of  those  tenses  where  it  was  most 
necessary,  preserving  the  proper  and  original  quantity  in  the  rest.  This 
opinion  receives  much  support  from  the  fact,  that  the  Comic  writers,  who 
lived  before  the  prosody  of  the  language  was  very  accurately  defined,  and 
whose  verse  required  no  such  modification  of  these  words,  constantly 
used  ficret,  &c.,  with  the  first  syllable  long  ;  as,  *'  Injurium  'st  nam  si 
essel  unde  id  fieret.'*  {Terent.,  Ad.,  1,  2,  20.)  On  the  other  hand,  in 
the  works  of  the  Christian  poets,  such  as  Prudentius,  Arator,  Tertul- 
lian,  &,c.,  not  only  the^irst  syllable  in  Jier em,  &c.,  but  in^io,  dec,  also, 
is  made  short.  Thus,  we  have  the  following  Archilochian  heptameter 
in  Prudentius  :  ♦'  lamque  tuus  fieri  maudas,  fio  Cyprianus  aUer^ 
(Pcrist.,  13.  69.)  A  less  accurate  mode  of  explanation  is  given  by 
Vossius  (Aristarch.,  2,  l:J),  founded  upon  a  passage  in  Priscian. 
{Ramsay's  Latin  Prosody,  p.  23.)  — Of  the  use  of  ei  in  earlier  Latinity, 
where,  at  a  later  day,  the  long  t  was  employed,  we  have  numerous  ex* 
amples.     Thus,  on  the  Duilian  column  we  nnd  castreis,  socieis,  cltusei», 


VOWEL   BEFORE    ANOTHER    VOWEL.  17 

Ovid.   Omnia  jam  flent^  fieri  qu(B  posse  negaham. 
Virg.    Anchiscs^  fiertt  venio  mora  ne  qua  ferenti. 

Exc.  2.  The  genitives  and  datives  singular  of  the  fifth  de- 
clension make  e  long  before  i ;  as,  diei,  speciei.  But  it 
is  found  short  in  spei,  and  common  in  fidei  or  jideij 
and  in  rei  or  m.' 

Virg.       Nunc  adeo^  melior  quoiiiam  pars  acta  diei. 

Senec.  Credi  periisse.  —  Vix  spei  quidquam  est  super. 
(lamb,  trim.) 

Lucret.  Nee  jacere  indu  manus  via  qua  munita  Jidei. 

Statius.  Quis  morum  Jideique  ?  modus  nunquamne  virili. 

Lucret.  Prater ea  rei  qvxB  corpora  mittere  possit. 

Horat.     Curt(p.  nescio  quid  semper  ahest  rei.     (Choriamb.) 

naveis,  numei ;  and  in  the  S.  C.  de  Bacch.  we  have  qvei,  virei,  sibei, 
eeis,  vobeis,  &c.  Consult  also  OrclL,  Inscript.  Lat.  Select.,  n.  626, 
•308,  3673,  4848,  &c. 

1.  According  to  some,  the  old  nominative  form  of  the  fifth  declension 
was  dieis^  specieis,  jidns,  making  in  the  genitive  dici-is,  speciei  is, 
fidei-is,  which  case  afterward  dropped  the  s,  and  became  dien,  specieii, 
fideii,  and  eventually  diei,  speciei,  fidei,  the  i  of  the  diphthong  being 
dropped.  {Ramsay'' s  Latin  Prosody,  p.  22.)  The  explanation  given 
by  Bopp,  however,  is  in  every  way  preferable.  This  eminent  philologist 
makes  the  original  form  of  the  nominative  to  have  been  die-is,  specie-is, 
fide-is,  and  the  genitive  to  have  dropped  its  characteristic  ending  s,  and 
to  have  terminated  like  the  old  locative  in?;  thus  making  die-i,  specie-i, 
&c.  If  we  write  die-is  in  Greek  characters,  6i7j-i^,  and  call  to  mind,  at 
the  same  time,  the  close  relation  that  subsists  between  the  Ionic  7]  and 
the  Doric  a,  we  will  perceive  at  once  a  remarkable  analogy  between  the 
first  and  fifth  declensions  in  I^atin,  and  why  so  many  words  are  found 
belonging,  as  it  were,  to  each  ;  as,  planitia  and  planitie-s,  canitia  and 
canities,  &c.  In  this  way,  too,  we  can  explain  the  old  form  of  the 
genitive  singular  in  the  first  declension,  by  supposing  the  nominative  to 
have  been,  for  example,  terrd-is,  musd  is,  whence  came  the  genitive 
terid-i,  musd-i,  by  dropping  the  s  and  retaining  the  locative  ending, 
while  the  Doric  a  in  the  nominative  terra  was  displaced  by  the  .^olic  a. 
{Bopp,  Vergleichende  Grammatik,  p.  141,  scqq. — Id  ib.,  p.  '2,11 ,  seqq .) — 
It  remains  now  to  account  for  such  forms  2iS  fidei,  rei,  &c.  In  all  prob- 
ability we  have  here  merely  an  attempt  to  reduce  the  old  forms  with  the 
long  penult  to  the  operation  of  the  general  rule.  It  is  worthy  of  re- 
mark, too,  that  the  examples  of  fidei  all  occur  in  writers  of  the  lower 
age.  with  whom  it  is  very  common.  The  subject  of  the  identity  of  all 
the  Latin  declensions,  which  has  been  merely  glanced  at  in  this  note, 
may  be  seen  more  fully  discussed  in  Bopp's  work  just  referred  to,  and  in 
Struve's  tareatise,  ^'Ueber  die  Lateinische  DeclinatioTt^''^  &c.,  p.  38,  seqq. 
B2 


18  VOWEL   BEFORE    ANOTHER   VOWEL. 

Exc.  3.  Genitives  in  ius  have  the  i  long  in  prose,  but 
common  in  poetry.  Altenus,  however,  has  the  i  al- 
ways short,  alius  always  long.^ 

Virg.     Posthahita  coluisse  Samo ;  hie  illXus  arma. 

Id.  Tufaciem  illius  noctem  non  amplius  unam. 

Id.         Ipsius  AnchiscB  longcBvi  hoc  munus  hahebis. 

Id.         Nunc  ultro  ad  cineres  ipsius  et  ossa  parentis. 

Horat.  NulUus  addictus  jurare  in  verba  magistri. 

Virg.     Non  te  nullius  exercent  numinis  ir(B. 

Id.         TJnius  ob  noxam  et  furias  Ajacis  O'ilei. 

Id.         Navibus  infandum  amissis  unius  ob  iram. 


Exc.  4.  Such  proper  names  as  Caius,  Pompeius,  Vul- 
teius,  as  also  Veins,  and  the  like,  have  the  a  or  c  long 
before  i.^ 

1.  The  authority  for  the  remark  that  genitives  in  im*  have  the  penult 
long  in  prose,  is  furnished  by  Quintilian  :  "  Prccterea  quce  Jiunt  spali^ 

sive  cum  syllaha longa  corripitur,  ut  unTus  ob  noxam  et 

furias;  extra  carmen  non  deprehendas.^^  (Inst.  Or.,  1,  5,  18.) — Bopp 
considers  the  Latin  genitive-ending  ius  analogous  to  the  Sanscrit  termi- 
nation sya,  the  a  being  changed  to  u  before  the  final  j  by  a  very  usual 
process  in  early  Latin.  (Compare  the  Sanscrit  vrka-s  with  the  Latin 
lupu-s,  and  yung'mas  with  jungimus.)  In  accordance  with  this  view  of 
the  subject,  the  old  genitive  forms  of  illius,  ipsius,  nullius,  &c.,  will 
have  been  illi-ius,  ipsi-ius,  nulli-ius,  &c.,  which,  when  changed  to  illius, 
&c.,  preserved  their  proper  quantity  in  prose,  although  the  poets  took 
advantage  of  the  circumstance  of  the  i  being  followed  by  a  vowel,  to 
bring  them,  when  it  suited  their  purpose,  under  the  general  rule. 
(Bopp,  Vergleich.  Gramm.,  p.  220.) — With  regard  to  alterius,  it  may 
be  remarked,  that  although  no  instance  can  be  found  in  any  poet  of  its 
occurring  with  the  long  penult,  yet  there  can  be  no  doubt  of  its  having 
been  once  employed.  Indeed,  Terentianus  Maurus,  the  grammarian, 
actually  uses  alterius  on  one  occasion  ;  in  the  following  Trochaic 
tetiameter  catalectic  (cap.  3,  de  Fed.,  v.  1352): 

••  Sescuplo  vel  una  vincet  alterius  si7igulum." 
Priscian  ascribes  the  short  penult  in  alterius  to  the  circumstance  of  the 
genitive's  exceeding  the  nominative  by  two  syllables;  '* quod  duabus 
syllahis  vincil  gcnitivus  nonmm/irum"  (lib.  6,  c.  7,  p.  695,  e4.  Putsch.). 
A  most  singular  explanation,  certainly,  and  yet  advocated  by  Vossius 
(de  Art.  Gram.,  2,  13,  p.  150,  ed.  Focrtsch.). — The  reason  assigned  by 
Scaliger  for  the  long  penult  of  genitives  in  ius,  namely,  that  they  were 
originally  written  etus,  is  adopted  by  Ramsay,  but  is  far  inferior  to 
Bopp's  explanation  given  above.     (Scat,  de  Caus.  L.  L.,  c.  43.) 

S.  According  to  Priscian  (7,  6,  p.  739X  «uch  words  as  Caiusy  Pom- 


t 


VOWEL    BEFORE    ANOTHER    VOWEL.  19 

CatuU.     Cinna  est  Cuius,  is  sibi  paravit,     (Phalaecian.) 
Mart.        Quod  peto  da,  Cd'i,  non  peto  consilium.     (Pentam.) 
Ovid.       Accipe,  Pompei,  deductum  carmen  ab  illo. 
Propert.  Forte  super  partes  dux  VBiius  adstitit  arcem. 


Exc.  5.  The  a  is  long  in  the  penult  of  the  old  genitive  and 
dative  of  the  first  declension  ;  as,  auld'i,  terrain  Slc} 
Virg.       Aulai  in  medio  libabant  pocula  Bacchi. 
Lucret    Terraique  solum  subigentes,  cimus  ad  ortus. 


Exc.  6.  The  verb  aio  is,  in  some  of  its  parts,  pronounced 
with  the  first  syllable  forming  a  diphthong,  and,  conse- 
quently, long ;  while  in  other  parts  the  a  and  i  form 
two  short  syllables.  Thus,  we  have  aio,  uiunt,  aiebam, 
aiebas,  aiebat,  &c. ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  ais,  ait,  &c.* 

Horat.   Servus ;  habes  pretium,  loris  non  ureris,  uio. 

Id.         Plebs  eris  ;  at  pueri  ludentes.  Rex  eris,  aiunt. 

Id.  Felicem  !  alebam  tacitus.      Quum  quidlibet  ille. 

Id.  Non  sum  moechus  ais.  Neque  ego,  hercule,fur,  ubi 
vasa. 

Id.         Nil  ait  esse  prius,  melius  nil  cmlibe  vita. 


Exc.  7.  In  ohe^  and  Diana*  the  first  syllable  is  common ; 

pe'ius,  Vulte'ius,  &c.,  were  originally  written  Caiius,  Pompeiius,  Vul- 
teiius.  On  this  supposition  we  may  easily  account  for  the  long  quantity 
of  the  first  syllable;  and  hence  the  vocatives  Cat,  Pompei,  &c.,  are  in 
reality  Cai-i,  Pompei-i,  which  last  undergoes  another  contraction,  in 
Horace,  into  Pompei.  {Horat.,  Od.,  2,  7,  5.)  In  like  manner,  VuUa-i 
becomes,  in  the  same  poet,  Vultei.     {Epist.,  1,  7,  91.) 

1.  The  principle  on  which  this  exception  is  based  has  already  been 
stated,  in  note  1,  page  17. 

2.  The  verb  aio  was  originally  written  aiio,  and  in  all  probability  pro- 
nounced (u-yo.  One  of  the  i's  being  dropped,  the  a  and  remaining  i 
sometimes  formed  a  diphthong,  as  in  the  original  form,  and  sometimes 
two  short  syllables.  {Ramsay's  Latin  Prosody,  p.  24.)  Quintilian 
informs  us  that  Cicero  actually  wrote  aiio.  {Inst.  Or.,  1,  4,  11. — 
Consult  Spalding,  ad  loc.) 

3.  Ohe,  the  interjection,  follows  its  primitive  O,  which,  since  it  can- 
not be  elided,  because  words  of  this  nature  require  a  strong  emphasis, 
is  made  either  long  or  short  when  it  falls  before  a  vowel.  {Ramsay's 
Lat.  Pros.,  p.  25.) 

4*  Diama  was  originally  Deiva  lana,  the  lunar  goddess,  contracted 


20  VOWEL   BEFORE    ANOTHER    VOWEL. 

in  ehev}  and  lo^  (the  daughter  of  Inachus)  it  is  long. 
The  interjection  w  follows  the  general  rule. 

Mart.  Ohe  jam  satis  est,  ohe,  libelle.     (Phalajcian.) 

Virg.  JExercet  Diana  choros  ;  qnam  mille  secutm. 

Id.  Constiteruntf  sylva  alta  Jovis  lucusve  Diutkb. 

Tibull.  Ferreus  est,  eheu,  quisquis  in  urbe  manet.    (Pentam.) 

Virg.  Ad  levem  clypeum  sublatis  cornibus  lo. 

Ovid.  Ante  oculos  lo,  quamvis  aversus,  habebat. 

Virg.  Clamat  lo  matres,  audite,  ubi  qutsque  LatincB. 


Exc.  8.  In  many  words  of  Greek  origin  a  vowel  is  long, 
though  immediately  followed  by  another ;  as,  aer, 
Achelous,  Enyo,  Troas,  Troius,  &c.,  the  Latin  quan- 
tity being  controlled  by  that  of  the  Greek  words 
whence  they  are  derived.  Others,  however,  would 
appear  to  differ  in  quantity  from  their  archetypes  ;  thus, 
in  Latin  we  have  chorea  and  chorea,  while  in  Greek  we 

subsequently  into  Deiana,  and  at  last  becoming  Diana.  The  e  of  the 
diphlhong  being  dropped,  gave  rise  to  the  double  quantity  of  Diana, 
since  it  could  be  brought  under  the  general  principle  of  0!ie  vowel  be- 
fore another.  (Voss  ,  de  Art.  Gram.,  2,  IS.— Varro,  R.  R,  1,  37,  3. — 
Grczv.,  Thes.,  vol.  8,  p.  311. — Nigid.  ap.  Macrob.,  Sat.,  1,  9. — Creuzcr, 
SymboHk,  par  Guigniaut,  vol.  2,  pt.  1,  p.  433.) 

1.  The  interjection  ekeu  is  generally  thought  to  have  been  abbreviated 
by  the  transcribers  from  heu  heu.  (Hcyne,  ad  Virg.,  Eclog.,  2,  58. — 
Wagner,  ad  eund.) 

2.  As  regards  lo  the  proper  name,  and  io  the  interjection,  a  differ- 
ence of  opinion  exists.  The  ordinary  doctrine  is,  that  the  first  syllable 
of  both  is  doubtful,  and  so  the  rule  is  given  in  most  works  on  Latin 
prosody.  A  more  correct  view  of  the  subject,  however,  teaches  us  that 
the  first  syllabic  is  always  short  in  the  interjection,  and  always  long  in 
the  proper  name.  In  Silius  Italicus  (14,  TilT),  the  old  reading  was 
"  Quaqve  fercbatur  ductor  Sidonius,  io,'^  where  the  interjection  occurs 
with  a  long  penult;  but  the  true  lection  is  now  given  as  "  Quaque  ve- 
hebalnr  Grantor  Sidonius,  lo,^^  where  lo  is  the  name  of  a  ship. — Wilb 
regard  to  lo,  the  daughter  of  Inachus,  two  lines  are  found  which  give 
the  word  a  short  penult  {Ovid,  Her.,  14,  103.— W.,  Ibis,  024).  But  in 
the  first  of  these  the  MSS.  vary,  and  some  commentators  even  regard 
Ihe  term  as  an  interjection  ;  while  the  other  is  drawn  from  a  poem  of 
doubtful  authenticity,  and  the  text  of  which  is  notoriously  corrupt.  In- 
deed, in  this  latter  line,  most  editors  now  adopt  the  emendation  of  Hcjn- 
8IU8,  and  read  Jon  for  lo.  In  Greek,  also,  this  word  is  always  lu. 
(,Ranuay'«  Lai,  Prot.,  p.  26.) 


VOWEL    BEFORE    ANOTHER    VOWEL.  21 

find  ;!^op£m  alone  ;  and  so  also  platea,  which  is  no- 
thing more  than  the  feminine  adjective  TrXarela} 

Virg.      Consurgunt  venti,  atque  in  nubem  cogitur  a'er. 

Ovid.      Opperiuntur  aqucR  vultus  Achelous  agrestes. 

Claud.  Eruhuit  Mavors,  aversaque  risit  Enyo. 

Virg.      DesidicB  cordi,  juvat  indulgere  choreis. 

Id.  Pars  pedihus  plaudunt  choreas  et  carmina  dicunt. 

Horat.   Puree  sunt  platecB,  nihil  ut  meditantibus  obstet. 

CatuU.  Istos  qui  in  platea  modo  hue  modo  illuc.  (Phalas- 
cian.) 


Exc.  9.  Those  words  which  are  written  in  Greek  with 
the  diphthong  ei  (et),  and  in  Latin  with  a  single  e  or  i, 
have  that  e  or  i  long  ;  as,  JEneas,  Alexandria^  Anti- 
ochia,  C(Bsarea,  &c.^ 

Virg.         Atpius  jEneas^  per  noctem  plurima  volvens. 

Propert.  Noxia  Alexandrea,  dolis  aptissima  tellus. 


Exc.  10.  On  the  same  principle  as  stated  in  the  prece- 
ding exception,  most  adjectives  in  eiis,  formed  from 
Greek  proper  names,  have  the  e  long ;  and  it  continues 
long  when  resolved  into  ei ;  as,  Cythereus  and  Cythe- 
reius ;  Pagaseus  and  Pagaseius ;  Pelopeus  and  Pela- 
peius? 

Virg.      Parce  metu  Cytherea  ;  manent  immota  tuorum. 

Ovid.      Imwcat  Hippomenes,  Cythereta,  comprccor  ausis. 

Lucan.  Eumenidum  vidit  vultus  Pelopeus  Orestes. 

Ovid.      Quid  quod  avus  nobis  idem  Pelopeius  Atreus  ? 

1.  Ramsay  endeavours  to  explain  these  anomalies  by  supposing  that 
the  Romans  were  in  possession  of  authorities  unknown  to  us.  {hat. 
Pros.,  p.  27.)  Prudentius  uniformly  makes  it  platea,  but  his  authority 
is  of  no  value. 

2.  Many  words  of  this  class,  such  as  names  of  towns,  temples,  or 
monuments,  are  in  reality  only  adjectives,  with  a  noun  understood  ;  as, 
'AXe^uvSpeia  (TroXif),  "  Alexandria,^''  or  the  city  of  Alexander;  ^lovaei- 
ov  {iepov),  "  Museum,"  or  temple  of  the  Muses  ;  ^lavauXeiov  {[iVTjfiec- 
ov),  "  Mausoleum,"  or  sepulchre  of  Mausdlus,  &c. 

3.  Consult  remarks  on  "•  Diareais"  p.  121. 


6  VOWEL    BEFORE    ANOTHER    VOWEL. 

Exc.  11.  Greek  genitives  in  eos,  and  accusatives  in  ea, 
from  nominatives  in  eus,  have  the  penult  short  accord- 
ing to  thie  common  dialect,  but  long  according  to  the 
Ionic  ;  as,  Orpheos,  Orphea ;  Antheos,  Anthea  (in 
*"  Greek,  'Op(peog,  'Opcpea ;  'Avdeog,  'Avdia,  by  the  com- 
mon dialect)  ;  but  Idomeneos,  Idomenea ;  Ilioneos,  II- 
ionea  (in  Greek  ^l6oiiev7]og,  'Idofievria  ;  ^IXLOvrjog,  'lA- 
lovTjaj  by  the  Ionic).' 

Ovid.  At  non  Chionides  Eumolpus  in  Orphea  talis. 

Virg.    Prospectum  late  pelago  petit,  Anthea  si  quern. 

Id.        Idomenea  ducem,  desertaque  litora  Crel(B. 

Id.        Ilionea  petit  dextra  Imvaque  Serestum. 


Exc.  12.  Academia  ought  to  be  regarded  as  having  a  long 
penult.^     In  the  proper  name  Orion  the  second  sylla- 

1.  We  frequently  .find  the  quantity  vary  in  words  taken  from  the 
Greek,  because  they  appear  in  the  original  language  under  a  double  form, 
which  often  depends  on  the  dialect  used  by  the  poet.  Thus,  we  have 
Conopium  and  Conopeum,  because  we  find  in  Greek  KuvoiiTLOv  and  Kw- 
vuTrelov.  So  also  'Eous  and  "Eous,  in  Greek  ^wof  and  twof  ;  Malea 
and  Malca,  from  MdXeia  and  MaXea ;  Nereides  and  Nereides,  from  Nj;- 
pTftSeg  and  Njjpetdec ;  Rhea  and  Rhea,  from  'Peia  and  'Perj ;  Dcedaletis, 
Dcedaleus,  Dcedalus,  from  the  triple  AatdaAeiOf,  ^aLhaXeog,  AaidaXo^^ 
&c.     {Ramsay's  Latin  Prosody,  p.  27.) 

2.  It  is  always  long  in  the  Greek  authors,  as  the  following  examples 
will  prove. 

'AXk'  elg  ' A-Kadrifuav  kutiuv  vtto  toX^  fiopiaic  aKodpi^ei.       {Ana- 
past.  Tclram.  Cat. — Aristoph.,  Nub.,  1001.) 
'Avr'  'XKadriula^  BopSopov  kv  irpoxoalg.     {Pentam. — Theocr.,  Ch, 

ap.  Brunck,  Anal.,  vol.  1,  p.  184.) 
'AKadrjfilag  ijKovaa  Xoyuv.     {Anapast.  Dim. — Epicrat.  ap.  Athen., 
2,  p.  r>9,  D) 
.         AvKetov  'AKadrifxlav   Qldeiov    irv?,ac.     (Iamb.   Trim.  —  Alex.   ap. 
*  Athcn.,  8,  p.  336,  E  ) 

The  two  Latin  lines  quoted  in  the  text  give  the  received  quantity  of 
Academia  in  Cicero's  time,  the  first  being  taken  from  the  treatise  "  De 
Divinalione'^  (I,  13),  and  the  second  from  Laurea  Tullius,  one  of  Cice- 
ro's freedmen,  in  an  epigram  preserved  by  Pliny  (31,  2).  This  decides 
the  question  as  far  as  the  practice  of  the  golden  age  of  Roman  literature 
is  concerned.  In  opposition  to  all  this  array  of  authoriliea  in  Greek  and 
Latin  writers,  we  have  merely  one  from  Claudian,  and  another  from  a 
still  later  poet,  Sidonius,  who  both  use  Academia  with  a  short  penult. 
(Claud.,  de  Cons.  M.,  I,  94 — Sidon.,  Ap.,  15,  120.)  Hermann  thinks 
that  the  penult  of  ^Ajcadtifua  was  short  by  nature,  but  lengthened  by  the 


CONTRACTION.  28 

ble  is  always  long  in  every  good  Latin  writer,  although 
it  is  common  in  Greek.  On  the  other  hand,  the  first 
syllable  is  common  in  Latin,  but  always  long  in  Greek ; 
and  the  third  syllable  in  the  oblique  cases  is  also  com- 
mon in  Latin  and  long  in  Greek.' 

Cic.  Inque  Academia  umhrifera  nitidoque  Lyccso. 

Laur.  Tull.  Atque  Academics  celebratam  nomine  villam. 

SECTION  V. 

CONTRACTION. 
Rule.  Every  syllable  formed  by  contraction  is  long ;  as, 
cogOj  contracted  for  cbago  or  condgo  ;  tibicen^  contracted  for 
tibidcen  or  tihucen^  &c. 

Virg.    Bis  gravidas  cogunt  fcztus,  duo  tempera  messis. 
Ovid.   Cur  vasus  incedit  tola  tibicen  in  urbe. 

o 


Obs.  L  Among  the  contractions  of  most  frequent  occur- 
rence, the  following  may  be  here  enumerated  : 
\.  Two  vowels  uniting  into  one. 
ambages^  contracted  for  ambedges^ 
inddgOf  "  "    indudgo,^ 

alius,  **  '*    aliiust 

dis,  "  "    diisj 

audlSj  "  "    audiis* 

fill,  "  "  fiUe, 

force  of  the  accent,  as  the  term  was  one  in  frequent  and  common  use. 
(Hcrm.  ad  Aristoph.,  Nub.,  1001. — Id.  de  Metris,  c.  23. — Class.  Journ., 
vol.  6,  p.  123.) 

1.  It  is  erroneous  to  say,  as  some  do,  that  Orion  has  the  second  syl- 
lable common.  The  true  rule  is  given  in  the  text.  In  Greek,  however, 
the  t  in  'OpLcjv,  gen.  'Op/wi'Of,  is  of  variable  measure  in  Homer  and  the 
epic  poets,  but  short  in  the  tragedians.     (Spitzner^s  Gr.  Pros.,  p.  112.) 

2.  Amhe  was  an  old  form  of  amh  or  am.  Compare  the  Greek 
iifit^i.     {Varro,  L.  I/.,  7,  3.) 

3.  Indu  or  endo  was  an  early  form  for  in.  Compare  the  Greek 
kvdol. 

4.  The  third  conjugation  is  regarded  now  as  the  oldest,  and  the  1st, 
2d,  and  4ih  as  merely  contracted  conjugations  derived  from  it.  (Con- 
sult Slruve,  "  Ueber  die  Laleinische  Declination  und  Conjugation^* 
Konig-gbcrgf  1823) 


24 


i;U«TK,ACT10N. 

proles,     contracted  for  prooles, 

copia,               " 

"     cbopia. 

fructus,            " 

"    fructmsj 

anus,                " 

**     anuis. 

luxu,  (dat.)      " 

"     Zwa;wi, 

chely,                " 

"     cAcZyc. 

2.  The  letter  A  dropped  between  two  vowels. 

ml,        contracted  for      rnihi, 
ml,  "  '»        m^l/, 

vemens,        "  "        vehemens, 

nemo,  "  *'        nehomo. 

3.  The  letter  v  dropped  between  two  vowels. 

bubus,  from     bdihus,  and  that  from  bovibus. 


bucula. 

(( 

boicula,            " 

bdvicula. 

junior, 

{( 

juenior,            " 

juvenior. 

frora 

1  juvenis. 

jutum, 

<( 

juatum,           " 

juvatum. 

{( 

juvo. 

jumentum, 

« 

juamentum,    " 

juvamentum. 

(( 

juvo. 

mbbilis, 

« 

molbilis,          « 

movibilis, 

" 

moveo. 

momentum, 

« 

motmentum,    " 

mommentum. 

<i 

moveo. 

mdlo, 

« 

maoZo,             " 

mdvolo, 

u 

magis-vdlo. 

nonus, 

« 

noenus,           " 

novenus, 

(( 

novem. 

obit, 

<( 

oJm^               " 

obtvit. 

prudens, 

" 

pr  Oldens,        " 

providcns. 

4. 

Other  letters 

similarly  dropped. 

denus. 

deenus. 

decenus,      from  decern. 

blgCB, 

hug(B, 

buvgcB. 

quadrlgi 

OB,    quadrugcB, 

quadruugcB. 

' 

Obs.  2.  It  sometimes  happens,  however,  that  when  two 
vowels  meet  in  a  compound  word,  one  of  them  is  elided  or 
struck  out  altogether,  in  which  case  the  quantity  of  the  re- 
maining one  suffers  no  change ;  thus,  in  magnopere,  com- 
pounded of  magno  opere,  the  o  of  magno  is  struck  out  alto- 
gether, and  the  o  in  opere  retains  its  natural  quantity.  So 
in  semdnimis,  gravolens,  suavolens,  &c. 

Obs.  3.  In  a  few  words,  the  ancients  seem  cither  to  have 
blended  the  two  vowels  into  one,  or  to  have  struck  out  one 


DIPHTHONGS.  25 

of  them  at  pleasure,  and  hence  the  quantity  of  such  syllables 
is  variable.  Thus  the  participle  ambitus,  from  ambio,  has 
the  penult  long,  because  it  is  regarded  as  a  contraction  for 
amheitus ;  while  ambitus,  the  substantive,  has  the  same  syl- 
lable short,  because,  in  this  case,  the  e  was  supposed  to  be 
elided  before  the  t. 

SECTION   VI. 

DIPHTHONGS.  :,^.,,,, 

Rule.  A  diphthong  is  long,  whether  in  a  Greek  or  Latiii 
word  ;  but  pr(B  preceding  a  vowel  in  a  compound  term  is 
usually  short.^ 

Virg.    Ultima  Cummi  venit  jam  carminis  (Bias. 
Ovid.  Exit  et  in  Maias  sacrum  Florale  Calendas. 
Virg.    Fertur  equis  auriga  neque  audit  currus  habenas. 
Id.        Caucasiasque  refert  volucres,  furtumque  Promethei. 

Ovid.    Quas  ubi  viderunt  prcBacutcs  cuspidis  hastas. 
Virg.    Nee  tola  tamen  ille  prior  prmeunte  carina. 
Id.        Stipitibus  duris  agitur,  sudibusve  prcRustis. 

1.  The  syllable  prcz  being  originally  prdi  or  prat,  the  latter  of  the 
two  vowels  is  tacitly  elided.  Thus  praustus,  prccacutus,  prato,  be- 
come pra'ustus,  prd'acutus,  prcCeo,  and  the  a  is  necessarily  short  by  its 
position  before  the  succeeding  vowel.  There  is  one  example,  however, 
in  Statius,  where  pra  is  lengthened  in  prctiret,  namely,  "  PrcBviia,  cum 
vacuus  domino  pr'direi  Avion'''  (Theb.,  6,  519);  but,  besides  this,  other 
instances  of  such  lengthening  are  found  only  in  the  latest  poets,  as,  for 
example,  praesse  in  Sidonius  Apollinaris  {Carm.,  23),  and  praoptare  in 
Martianus  Capella  (lib.  1,  pag.  9,  ed.  Grot.);  but  such  instances  are  of 
no  value.  (Consult  Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  1,  p.  103.) — In  some  of  the 
cases  where  prce  occurs  short  in  composition,  we  may  obviate  this  by 
having  recourse  to  synaeresis  ;  this,  however,  will  not  answer  on  all  occa- 
sions. (Compare  Max.  Vict.,  p.  1965,  ed.  Putsch,  and,  on  the  other 
side,  Vossiiis,  de  Art.  Gram.,  2,  15,  p.  161,  ed.  Foertsch.) — Ovid,  on 
one  occasion,  shortens  the  diphthong  in  Mckotis  {Trist.,  3,  12,  2),  in 
which  he  is  imitated  by  Seneca  (Ocd.,  474),  but  it  is  made  long  by  him 
elsewhere,  as  well  as  by  other  poets.  The  same  poet  has  also  Aeeia 
(Heroid.,  6,  103).  In  this  and  in  Mceotis  he  appears  to  have  followed 
the  Greek  license.  (Consult  Buttmann,  Ausf.  Gr.  Gr.,  <J  7,  anm.  25.) 
— ^The  old  reading  Dionceus  in  Catullus  (29,  7)  has  long  since  been 
changed.  {Doering,  ad  Catull.,  I.  c. — Vossius,  de  Art.  Gram.,  2,  33, 
extr.) 

c 


26  DIPHTHONGS. 

Obs.  1.  Greek  proper  names  in  eus  (genitive  eos)  always 
have  the  eu  a  diphthong,  in  both  Greek  and  Latin  ;  as, 
Orpheus,  gen.  Orpheos,  Pantheus,  gen.  Pantheos,  &c. 

Obs.  2.  Frequently,  however,  a  proper  name  in  eus  is 
declined  according  to  the  forms  of  the  second  declension  in 
liatin,  and  then  the  diphthong  disappears  ;  as,  Orpheus, 
gen.  Orphei ;  dat.  Orpheo,  <fcc. 

Obs.  3.  The  combination  yi  also  forms  a  diphthong  in 
some  Greek  words,  since  it  answers  to  vi ;  as,  Orithyia 
(^Opeidvla)  ;  Harpyia  {"ApirvLa) ;  Agyieus  (^Ayvievg),  &c. 
Ovid.     Orithyian  amans  fulvis  complectitur  alts. 
Virg.     Et  patrio  insontes  Harpyias  pellere  regno. 
Horat.  Levis  Agyieu.     (Dactylic  dimeter.) 


Obs.  4.  It  is,  strictly  speaking,  erroneous  to  rank  such 
combinations  as  t/a,  ue,  ui,  uo,  uu,  among  diphthongs  ;  on 
the  contrary,  the  letter  u  seems  to  have  been  pronounced 
in  such  cases  like  our  w ;  as,  lingua  (equivalent  to  ling-wa), 
sanguis  (sang-wts),  equus  {ek-ivus) ;  and  so  also  in  mono- 
syllables ;  as,  quis  (equivalent'  to  kwis),  quod  (kwod),  que 
(kwe)^  «fee' 

Obs.  5.  In  some  cases,  it  is  true,  such  combinations  are 
long  :  this,  however,  is  not  because  they  then  form  a  diph- 
thong, but  because  the  vowel  with  which  u  happens  to  be 
united  is  in  itself  long  ;  as,  suadet  (swddet),  suetus  (swetus), 
&c.  So  also  in  the  monosyllables :  qui  (km),  huic  (hwick), 
quo  (kwo),  &c. 

Obs.  6.  In  several  words,  again,  u  and  the  vowel  by 
which  it  is  followed  always  form  distinct  syllables  ;  as, 
sua,  sues,  sms,  suds,  suus,  Slc. 

1.  The  whole  question  is  «bly  discussed  by  Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  1, 
p.  324,  seqq. 


POSITION.  27 

SECTION  VII. 

POSITION. 

Rule.  A  vowel  before  two  consonants  either  in  the 
same  word,  or  in  different  words,  or  before  a  double  conso-J 
nant,  is  long  by  position ;  as,  terra,  respexit,  gdza,  &c.* 

Virg.   Terra  tremit :  fugere  ferce,  et  mortalia  cor  da. 

Id.       Libertds  quce  sera  tanien  respexit  inermem. 


Obs.  1.  The  letter  h  is  not  regarded  in  prosody  as  a 
consonant,  but  a  mere  breathing  ;  hence,  in  such  words  as 
dhhinc,  ddhuc,  «fee,  the  first  syllable  is  short.  So  also  if  a 
word  end  in  a  consonant,  and  the  succeeding  word  begin 
with  the  letter  h,  there  is  no  length  by  position.^ 

Virg.  OrOj  siquis  ddhuc  precibus  locus,  exue  mentem. 
Id.        Tempora  quce  messor,  qu<B  curvus  aratdr  haberet. 


Obs.  2.  A  vowel  is  often  found  long  before  the  consonant 
j.  This,  however,  is  not  because  j  is  a  double  consonant ; 
but  the  truth  is,  that  the  words  in  question  were  originally 
all  written  with  a  double  ^ ;  as,  for  example,  cuiius,  huiiuSy 
eiius,  peiius,  maiius,  <fec.,  and  would  seem  to  have  been 

1.  The  time  occupied  in  pronouncing  the  two  consonants,  or  the 
double  one,  produces  the  length  by  position.  A  vowel  thus  situated  is 
in  fact  shorter  than  one  which  is  long  by  nature ;  but  still  in  verse  they 
are  regarded  as  both  of  equal  length.  {Kriigcr,  Grundriss  der  Metrik, 
p.  18.) 

2.  That  the  h  never  produces  length  by  position  when  joined  with  a 
consonant  either  preceding  or  following  it,  is  expressly  asserted  by 
Terentianus  Maurus,  v.  789,  seqq. 

"  Sola  nee  vocalis  vsum,  nee  tuetur  consonce, 
Tempus  aut  ministrat  ullum  hrevibus  usquam  syllabis" 
To  the  same  effect  are  the  remarks  of  Vossius  {de  Art.  Gram.,  2,  15, 
extr.).  The  opposite  doctrine  is  incorrectly  maintained  by  Velius 
Longus  (p.  2217.  ed.  Putsch),  and  also  by  some  modern  scholars  ;  as, 
for  example,  by  Barth  {Advers.,  21,  17).  Some  of  the  lines  adduced  in 
support  of  this  latter  opinion  have  the  syllable  lengthened  by  the  arsis  ; 
in  others  the  reading  is  erroneous.  Equally  unfounded  is  the  remark, 
that  the  h  is  sometimes  employed  to  prevent  the  hiatus  in  a  line. 
{Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  1,  p.  180,  not.) 


28  OF    THE    INITIAL   X   AND    Z. 

pronounced  cux-yus^  hui-yus^  ei-yus,  pei-yus^  mai-yus,  &c. ; 
so  that  the  first  syllable  was  long  in  each,  a  quantity  that 
was  retained  after  one  of  the  two  «'s  was  dropped.^ 


Of  the  initial  SC,  SM,  SP,  SQ,  ST,  <Sfc, 
Rule.  A  short  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word,  when  followed 
by  a  word  beginning  with  sc,  sm,  sp,  sq,  st,  &c.,  is  rarely,  if 
ever,  allowed  to  remain  short,  in  serious  compositions,  by  the 
poets  who  flourished  after  the  time  of  Lucretius ;  but  they 
generally  avoid  with  care  such  a  collocation.'^ 


Of  the  initial  X  and  Z. 

Rule.  A  short  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word,  before  a  word 
beginning  with  x  or  z,  remains  short.  At  least,  there  is  no 
evidence  at  all  that  it  was  ever  lengthened.'' 

Ennius.  Pontibus  instratis  conjunxit  litord  Xerxes. 

Virg.       Jam  medio  apparet  fluctu  nemorosa  Zacynthus. 

1.  Consult  note  1,  page  18. 

2.  The  whole  question  is  discussed  with  great  ability  by  Schneider 
(L.  G.,  vol.  2,  p.  694)  and  Ramsay  {Lat.  Pros.,  p.  260,  seqq.).  The 
canon  of  Dawes  on  the  subject  is  particularly  examined  by  the  latter. 
— Proper  names,  in  the  use  of  which  the  poels  have  always  very  natu- 
rally allowed  themselves  considerable  license,  and  the  names  of  stones, 
trees,  &,c.,  when  such  cannot  be  used  in  the  metre  without  transgressing 
the  rule  in  the  te.Kt,  are  exceptions,  of  course.  This  applies  to  such 
words  as  Smaragdus,  Scamander,  neither  of  which  could  be  employed 
in  hexameter  verse  at  all  without  a  license  of  this  kind.  And  it  is 
worthy  of  notice,  that  these  words  are  frequently  found  in  good  MSS., 
both  Latin  and  Greek,  without  the  iS  at  all;  as,  Mdpay^of,  Maragdus; 
Kufiavdpo^,  Kamander  {Dawes,  Misc.  Crit.,  p.  6-148,  ed.  Kidd.)  ; 
which  would  seem  to  indicate  that  it  was,  in  certain  cases,  softened 
down  in  pronouncing  them.  (Ramsay^s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  261,  not. — 
Compare  Knight,  Proleg.  in  Horn.,  79. — Spitzner,  Gr.  Pros.,  ^  7,  6. — 
Thiersch,  Gr.  Gr.,  «J  146,  8.) 

3.  The  line  from  Ennius  is  merely  conjectured  by  Columna  to  have 
been  written  by  that  poet ;  a  conjecture,  however,  without  any  founda- 
tion. (Ennii  Fragm.,ed.  Column.,  p.  129.)  Terentianus  Maurus  (v. 
1160)  quotes  it  without  naming  the  author,  and  subjoins  another  imme- 
diately after  as  follows  :  "  Sanguine  turbaius  miscebat  litord  Xerxes.** 
It  is  more  than  probable  that  both  lines  are  bis  own  composition.  An- 
other instance  is  sometimes  cited  from  Lucan  (2,  072) :  "  Talis  fama 
eantt  tumidum  super  aquora  Xerxen  ;*'  but  the  text  is  now  altered  so 

M  to  read  " super  aquora  Persen.^*     (Consult  Cort.,  ad 

he.)    The  Greek  poets  do  not  appear  to  have  ever  indulged  iu  this  U- 


MUTE    AND    LIQUID.  29 

»  - 

SECTION  VIII. 
MUTE  AND  LIQUID. 
Rule.  A  short  vowel  before  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid, 
both  of  which  are  in  the  following  syllable,  is  common  in 
poetry,  but  always  short  in  prose  }  as,  volucris  and  volucris ; 
pdtrem  and  pdtrem ;  pharetra  and  pharetra ;  cochleare  and 
cochleare  ;   Cyclops  and  Cyclops ;  cycnus  and  cycnus,  &c.l 
Ovid.     Et  primo  similis  volucri,  mox  vera  volucris. 
Virg.     Natum  ante  era  pdtris,  pdtrem  qui  ohtruncat  ad  arcs. 
Id.  Virginihus  Tyriis  mos  est  gestare  pharetram. 

Id.  Succinctam  pharetra  et  maculosa  tegmine  lyncis, 

Horat.  Multa  DirccBum  levat  aura  cycnum.     (Sapphic.) 
Id.  Donatura  cycni  si  liheat  sonum.     (Choriambic.) 


Obs.  1 .  This  rule  depends  on  three  conditions ,  viz. : 

1.  The  liquid  must  follow  the  mute.  If  it  stand  before 
the  mute,  the  preceding  vowel,  though  naturally  short, 
becomes  always  long;  ^s,fert,fertis. 

2.  The  mute  and  liquid  must  belong  to  the  same  syllable. 
If  they  belong  to  different  syllables,  the  preceding 
short  vowel  becomes  long ;  as,  db-luo,  dd-nitor,  quam- 
oh-rem. 

cense. — With  regard  to  z,  numerous  examples  are  found  of  a  vowel  re- 
maining short  before  it.  {Ovid,  tier.,  1,  87.— Sil.  Ilal,  1,  275.— /i., 
2,  m'i.— Martini,  2,  68,  \.—Auson.,  Prof.,  22,  W.—Id.  ih  ,  13,  3.— 
Senec,  Here.  Fur.,  916. — Id.,  Agam.,  433,  &c.)  In  many  of  these 
instances,  however,  the  words  commencing  with  z  could  not  otherwise 
appear  in  the  verse,  unless  a  short  vowel  were  allowed  to  precede.  This 
same  principle  regulates  the  admissibility  of  such  words  into  Greek 
verse.  {Horn.,  11.,  2,  634.— /rf.,  Odyss.,  1,  246.— /<Z.  ib.,  9,  24.— 
Theocrit.,  4,  Z2.—0ppian,  Hal.,  1,  367,  &c.)  The  dramatic  poets, 
however,  never  allowed  themselves  this  license. 

1.  This  rule  applies  more  frequently  to  the  liquids  I  and  r  than  to  m  and 
n.  The  latter  are  found  for  the  most  part  in  words  derived  from  the 
Greek. — The  position  which  a  mute  and  liquid  make  is  termed  by 
grammarians  "  dchilis  positio,''^  or  weak  position.  The  license  in  po- 
etry, therefore,  consists,  not  in  having  the  vowel  short,  but  in  making  it 
long.  The  natural  quantity,  on  the  other  hand,  prevails  in  prose. 
{Vossius,  de  Art.  Gram.^  2,  \^.^ Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  2,  p.  676, 
teqq.) 

C  2 


so  MUTE    AND    LIQUID. 

3.  The  vowel  must  be  short  by  nature.  A  vowel 
naturally  long  is  never  rendered  short  by  a  mute 
and  liquid  following  ;  as,  matris,  salubris,  dtri.^ 


Obs.  2.  The  lengthening  of  a  vowel  before  a  mute  and 
liquid  takes  place  most  frequently  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot. 
Examples  of  a  similar  lengthening  in  the  thesis  are  com- 
paratively rare.^ 

Obs.  3.  Even  in  the  arsis,  however,  the  poets  do  not 
seem  to  have  lengthened  at  pleasure  any  syllable  that  was 
followed  by  a  mute  and  liquid.  A  particular  usage  appears 
to  have  prevailed  on  this  head,  which  forbade  them,  for  ex- 
ample, to  lengthen  the  vowel  in  arbltror,  genetrix,  locuples, 
&c.,  while  in  other  words,  containing,  in  like  manner,  a 
vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid,  the  long  quantity  was 
more  customary  than  the  short.** 

Obs.  4.  The  mute  and  liquid  are  sometimes  found  in 
the  beginning  of  the  next  word  ;  as, 

Virg.      Excursusque  breves  tentant,  et  scspe  lapillos. 
Auson.  Jane  nove,  primo  qui  das  tua  nomina  mensi. 

1.  To  determine  whether  a  vowel  which  we  find  long  before  two  con- 
sonants be  naturally  loner,  or  only  rendered  so  by  that  position,  we  must 
look  to  the  word  in  a  different  state,  where  the  position  does  not  occur. 
In  some  few  instances  it  is  quite  impossible  to  determine  with  any  cer- 
tainty the  natural  quantity  of  the  vowel ;  as,  for  example,  in  Venafrum, 
hybrida,  &c.     {Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  2,  p.  677,  nut.) 

2.  Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  2,  p.  676. 

3.  Thus  we  find  coluhris  only  in  Valerius  Flaccus  (6,  175),  but  fre- 
quently coluhras  and  coluhris.  So  in  Lucretius  (4, 406)  we  have  rubruniy 
but  everywhere  else  rubri,  rubro,  &c.  Again,  we  have  Ubri,  tibro,  &c., 
in  only  a  very  few  places;  as,  for  example,  Horat.,  Serm.,  1,  10,  63. — 
Id.,  Epist.,  2,  1,  217.— Auson.,  Idyll,  II,  11.— Id.,  Epist.,  4,  98  ;  but 
very  frequently  libri,  &c.  In  like  manner,  we  find  the  oblique  cases  of 
niger,  with  the  short  i,  in  Catullus  (43,  2),  Horace  (Orf.,  1,  32,  11  :  3,  0, 
4  ;  4,  12,  11),  Virgil  {Mn.,  8,  353),  &c.,  while  those  with  the  long  i 
occur  far  more  frequently. — With  regard  to  migro,  it  is  to  be  observed, 
that  it  is  found,  together  with  its  compounds,  having  the  short  penult  in 
many  passages  of  Plautus,  and  once  al^o  in  Terence,  Lucretius,  and 
Manilius  {Heusing.,  Obs.  Antibarh.,  p.  375);  but  Virgil,  Horace,  Mar- 
tial, Juvenal,  and  other  poets  uniformly  have  migro.  Hence  it  has  been 
•apposed  that  migro  at  first  had  the  short  t,  and  retained  this  down  to 
the  time  of  Catullus,  but  afterward  change  d  it  to  the  long  quantity ; 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  latro  (another  word  which  has  given  rise 


REDUPLICATING    PRETERITES.  ^ 

SECTION  IX. 

REDUPLICATING  PRETERITES. 

Rule.  Reduplicating  preterites,  or  such  as  double  the 
first  syllable,  have  both  the  first  and  second  syllables  short ; 
as,  cecidi  (from  cado),  cecini,  didici,  tetigi,  &:c,' 
Virg.    Inter  cunctantes  cecldit  moribunda  ministros. 
Id.        Tityre^  te  patulcB  cecini  sub  tegmine  fagi. 
Ovid.  Mox  didici  curvo  nulla  subesse  tholo.     (Pentameter.) 
Virg.    Nee  victor  is  heri  teiigit  captiva  cubile. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

But  cecidi,  from  cmdo,  and  pepedi,  from  pedo,  have  the 
second  syllable  long. 

Juv.       Ebrius  ac  petuJans,  qui  nullum  forte  cecldit, 
Horat.  Nam,  displosa  sonat  quantum  vesica,  pepedi. 


Obs.  The  rule  does  not,  of  course,  apply  to  the  second 
syllable  when  it  is  long  by  position ;  as  in  momordi,  cucurri, 
peperci,  and  the  like  ;  still,  however,  the  first  or  prefixed 
syllable  is  short. 

Mart.       Docti  lima  momorderit  Secundi,    (Phalaecian.) 
Propert.   Cum  vicina  novis  turba  cucurrit  agris.     (Pentam.) 

t,o  remark)  substituted,  in  process  of  time,  the  long  a  for  the  short. 
{Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  2,  p.  679,  seq.) 

1.  The  first  syllable  is  short  as  a  matter  of  course,  since  it  consists 
of  a  short  prefix.  The  second  syllable  follows  the  quantity  of  the  ver- 
bal root.  Hence  arise  the  two  exceptions  mentioned  immediately  after, 
namely,  ccedo  and  pedo,  where  the  first  syllable  of  the  verbal  root  is 
long;  and  so  also  the  forms  momordi,  cucurri,  &c.  The  early  form  of 
the  perfect  of  cado  must  have  been  ceccedi.  (Consult  Priscian,  10,  4, 
p.  489,  ed.  Putsch.  —  Pott,  Etymol.  Forsch.,  vol.  1,  p.  19,  seqq. — 
Kuhner,  Gr.  Gr.,  vol.  I,  p.  84,  seqq. — Bopp,  Vergleich.  Gramm.,  p, 
697,  seqq.) 


32  PRETERITES  OF  TWO  SYLLABLES. 

SECTION  X. 

PRETERITES  OF  TWO  SYLLABLES. 
Rule.  Preterites  of  two  syllables,  their  compounds,  and 
tlie  tenses  formed  from  them,  have  the  first  syllable  long  ; 
as,  vtdi,  veni,  fbvi,  fugi ;  while,  in  the  present  tense,  videOy 
venio,  foveo,  fugio,  have  the  first  short.' 
Virg.   XJt  vidi,  ut  perii,  ut  me  mains  abstulit  error. 
Id.       Respexit  tamen,  et  longo  post  tempore  venit. 
Id.       Fovit  humum ;  cape  saxa  manu,  cape  robora  pastor. 
Id.        Vipera  delituit,  calumque  exterrita  fugit. 


EXCEPTION. 

Seven  dissyllabic  preterites,  however,  have  the  first  syl- 
lable short,  namely,  hibi,  dedi,fidi  (from  jindo),  scidi 
(from  scindo),  steti,  stiti,  and  tuli.^ 

1.  According  to  the  theory  of  Grimm  {Deutsche  Grammatik,  vol.  1, 
p.  1056),  those  verbs  which  change  a  short  vowel  in  the  root,  or  present 
tense,  into  a  long  e  in  the  perfect,  had  originally  a  reduplication.. 
Pango,  or,  rather,  pago,  makes  pcpigi,  but  compingo  makes  compegi. 
This  proves  the  analogy  of  the  two  forms ;  and  on  the  model  of  pago^ 
pepegi,  contracted  pegi,  we  have 

veni, 
vtdi, 
fovi, 

&c. 

It  is  observed,  in  confirmation  of  this  remark,  that  such  verbs  have  in 
many  instances  a  reduplication,  or,  what  is  allied  to  it,  an  internal  in- 
flection, in  the  cognate  languages  ;  thus  fugi  resembles  -Kt^vya  ;  and 
veniOy  veni,  the  Maeso- Gothic  verb,  which  is  analogous  to  "come"  and 
♦'came,"  &c.  {Fritchard,  Origin  of  the  Celtic  Natio7is,  p.  l.'il.)  It 
must  be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  the  remarks  here  made  about  the 
mode  of  forming  veni,  vidi,  &c.,  do  not  apply  to  such  preterites  as  lUsi, 
risi,  misi,  6cc.,  from  ludo,  rideo,  mitto,  &c.,  the  preterite  in  these 
verbs  having  been  formed  by  the  insertion  of  s;  as,  ludsi,  ridsi,  mittsi, 
and  the  consonant  or  consonants  before  the  s  having  been  subsequently 
dropped  for  the  sake  of  euphony.  (Pritchard,  I.  c. — Ramsay,  Lot. 
Pros.,  p.  100. — Struve,  Ucber  die  Lateinische  Declination  und  Conju- 
gation, p.  150.) 

2.  These  seven  are  in  reality  no  exceptions  at  all,  but  belong  to  th« 
preceding  rule,  since  they  are  all  reduplicating  preterites,  some  of  which 
have  dropped  the  first  syllable,  instead  of  contracting  the  first  two  into 
one.     Thus  tuli  and  scidi  were  anciently  teluli  and  sciscidi.     The  form 


vemo, 

vevent. 

veeni, 

video, 

vhndi, 

viidi, 

foveo, 

fovovi, 

foovi, 

fugio. 

fuf-ugi, 

fuugi, 

&c.. 

&c.. 

&c., 

SUPINES    OF    TWO    SYLLABLES.  33 

Horat.  Lusisti  satis^  edisti  satis,  atque  hibisti. 

Virg.  Hie  mihi  responsum  primus  dedit  ille  petenti. 

Horat.  Demersa  exitio  ;  diffidit  urhium.     (Choriambic.) 

Statius.  Gaudia,  jiorentesque  manu  scidit  Atropos  annos. 

Virg.  Explicuit  legio,  et  campo  stetit  agmen  aperto. 

Id.  Constttit  atque  oculis  Phrygia  agmina  circumspexit. 

Id.  Cui  mater  media  sese  tulit  obvia  sylva. 


Obs-  Abscidi,  from  cado,  has  the  middle  syllable  long ; 
but  abscidi,  from  scindo,  has  it  short. 

Lucan.  Abscidit  nostrcB  multum  sors  invida  nostrcs. 
Id.  Abscidit  impulsu  ventorum  adjula  vetustas. 

SECTION  XI. 
SUPINES  OF  TWO  SYLLABLES. 
Rule.  Supines  of  two  syllables,  and  the  parts  of  the 
verb  supposed  to  be  derived  from  them,  have  the  first  syl- 
lable long  ;  as,  visum,  lUsum,  motum ;   vlsus,  visurus,  &c.* 
Virg.      Terribiles  vlsu  forrruB  ;  Letumque  Laborque, 
Id.         Len<BOs,  ea  visa  salus  morientibics  una. 
Id.         Nascitur  et  casus  abies  visura  marinos. 
Horat.  Lusum  it  M(Bcenas,  dormitum  ego  Virgiliusque, 
Virg.      Quos  ego — sed  motos  prcsstat  componere  jluctus. 

teiuli  occurs  in  Plautus  (Amphitr.,  2,  2,  84,  168. — Meruzchm.,  4,  2,  25, 
66. —  P(Bnul.,  3,  1,  58. — Rud.  prol.,  68):  in  Accius  and  Caecilius  (ap. 
Non.y  2,  839);  in  Catullus  {Carm.,  63,  47,  52;  66,  35);  in  Terence 
(Andr.,  4,  5,  13  ;  5,  1,  13);  and  in  the  grammarians  Diomedes  (lib.  2, 
p.  435)  and  Priscian  (10,  6,  p.  497,  seq.). — Of  the  form  sciscidi  Priscian 
gives  examples  from  Afranius,  Atlius,  Naevius,  and  Ennius  (lib.  10,  p. 
890. — Compare  Aul.  GelL,  7,  9).  On  the  same  principle,  fidi  would 
be  originally /z/ldz,  fwmfido.  The  form  btbi  is  an  actual  reduplication 
from  bio,  the  same  as  the  Greek  ttuj.  Bibo  in  the  present  arose  from 
the  digammatized  form  IIIFQ.  As  for  steti  and  stiti,  they  are  merely 
different  forms  of  the  reduplication  of  sto,  just  as  dedi  and  didi  from  do. 
{Ramsai/s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  100. — Struve,  Ueber  die  Lat.  DecL,  &c.,  p. 
160. — Pott,  Etymol.  Forschungen,  vol.  1,  p.  188.) 

1.  The  Sanscrit  infinitive  is  preserved  in  the  I..atin  first  supine  ;  as, 
palttuw.,  alitum  ;  santtum,  cinctum.  (Kennedy.,  Researches,  p.  256. — 
Wilkins^s  Sanscrit  Grammar,  p.  123.) — The  old  form  of  visum  ap- 
pears to  have  been  vidsum ;  of  lusum,  ludsum ;  of  motum,  movitum 
(moitum) ;  of  Jlelum,,  flevitum  (JleUum) ;  of  minutum,  minuiium  ;  of 


84  SUPINES    OF    TWO    SYLLABLES. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

In  the  following  dissyllabic  supines  the  first  syllable  is 

short ;    namely,   citum,   from   cieo ;    datum,  from  do ; 

ttum,  from  eo ;   litum,  from  Uno ;  quitum,  from  queo ; 

rdtum,  from  reor ;  rutum,  from  ruo ;  satum,  from  sero  ; 

situm,  from  sino ;  and  futum,  from  fuo,  whence  fu- 

turns. 
Horat.    Puppes  sinistrorsum  cit<B.     (Iambic.) 
Virg.       Intraro,  gentique  me(B  data  mcenia  cernam. 
Lucret.  Nee  repentis  itum  quojus  vis  cumque  animantis. 
Ovid.       In  tefingebam  violentos  Troas  ituros. 
Virg.       Ardentes  auro  et  paribus  Uta  corpora  guttis. 
Id.  Nos  abiisse  rati,  et  vento  petiisse  Mycenas. 

Virg.       Impulerat  torrens,  arbustaque  diruta  ripis. 
Id.  Deinde  satis  jiuvium  inducit  rivosque  sequentes. 

Horat.    Aurum  irrepertum  et  sic  melius  situm.     (Alcaic.) 
Id.  Quid  sitfuturum  eras  fuge  qucsrere.     (Alcaic.) 


Obs.  1.  There  is  some  doubt  with  regard  to  the  quantity 
of  statum.  In  Lucan,  Martial,  Statius,  and  Claudian,  we 
find  statura,  constatura,  obstdtura,  pr<Bstdtura,  with  the  a 
long ;  while  the  derivatives,  stdtim,  status  both  substan- 
tive and  adjective,  stdtio,  stdtor,  are  used  by  Catullus, 
Ovid,  and  others,  with  the  first  short.  It  seems  best,  how- 
ever, to  follow  the  authority  of  Priscian,  and  make  the  first 
syllable  of  the  supine  long.' 

Obs.  2.  Cttum,  from  cieo  of  the  second  conjugation,  has 
the  first  syllable  short ;  whence  citus,  "  quick ;"  concttus 
and  excitusj  "  aroused  ;"  but  cttum,  from  cio  of  the  fourth 

aculum,  acuitum,  &c.  Contraction  rendered  the  syllable  long.  But 
futam,  rutum,  &c.,  are  formed  by  syncope,  and  therefore  continue 
■bort. 

1.  "  Steti  veto  statum  supinum  penuUima  produeta  debet  facere." 
(Priscian,  9,  p.  863,  ed.  Putsch.) — The  variation  in  quantity,  noticed 
in  the  text,  seems  to  have  arisen  from  the  prosodial  difference  in  statum 
and  slitum,  as  we  see  exemplified  in  prastUum  and  prastdtum,  which 
are  both  attached  to  praslo  as  its  supines.  {Ramsay^s  Latin  Pros.,  p. 
Ifid.'-Vossius,  de  Art.  Gramm.,  2,  22.) 


POLYSYLLABIC    SUPINES5.  35 

conjugation,  has    the   first   syllable   long ;    whence  dtuSf 
"  excited ;"  accitus,  concitus,  excltus,  and  incitus} 

Virg.      Altior  insurgens  et  cursu  concitus  heros. 

Ovid.      Nee  fruitur  somno  vigilantibus  excita  curis. 

Lucan.   Unde  ruunt  toto  concita  pericula  mundo. 

Id.  Rupta  quies  populis,  stratisque  excita  juventus. 


Obs.  3.  Ruo  has  ruttum  and  rutum  in  the  supine.  Its 
compounds  form  the  supine  in  utum.  having  the  penult 
short,  whence  dirutus,  erutus,  ohrutus? 

Ovid.  Diruta  sunt  aliis,  uni  mihi  Pergama  restant. 

Virg.    Nee  mihi  cum  Teucris  ullum  post  eruta  helium. 


Obs.  4.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind,  as  regards  the  deriva- 
tives of  itum,  that  the  participle  is  ambitus,  but  that  the 
substantive  is  ambitus. 

Ovid.    Jussit  et  amhitm  circumdare  littora  terra}. 

Horat.  Et  properantis  aqu<B  per  amoenos  ambitus  agros. 

SECTION  XII. 

POLYSYLLABIC  SUPINES. 

Rule  1.  Supines  in  utum,  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
and  the  parts  of  the  verb  formed  from  them,  have  the  pe- 
nult long;  as,  solutum,  volHtum,  minutum,  argutum.^ 

1.  But  scitum  is  always  long,  whether  it  comes  from  scio  or  scisco. 
Scttus,  from  scio,  signifies  ^*  skilful,'^  ^^  graceful,''''  &c.  ;  but  scitus, 
from  scisco,  "  ordained,''''  '*  decreed ;"  whence  we  have  pleUs-scitum, 
**  a  decree  of  the  commons.'''' 

2.  It  has  been  supposed,  and  with  great  appearance  of  probability, 
that  ui,  in  the  supine  of  ruo,  was  pronounced  as  one  short  syllable, 
rvntum;  whence  dirvntum,  erwttum,  &.C.,  which  afterward  became 
dirutum,  erutum,  on  the  dropping  of  the  i.  (Ramsav^s  Lat.  Pros., 
p.  103.) 

3.  Solutum  and  volutum  do  not  come  from  solvo  and  volvo,  where  v 
is  a  consonant,  but  from  the  earlier  forms  soluo  and  voluo.  The  supines 
in  question  will,  according  to  this  view,  have  been  originally  solidtum, 
voluitum,  changed  afterward  by  contraction  to  solutum,  volutum.  The 
same  principle  of  contraction  operates,  as  already  remarked,  in  the  case 
of  other  supines  in  utum.  Thus  minutum  is  contracted  from  minmtum  ; 
argiUum  from  arguitum ;  triMtum  from  tribuitum,  &c. 


36  POLYSYLLABIC    SUPINES. 

Virg.       humina  rata  micant,  somno  vinoque  soluti. 
Id.  Ecce  autem  flammis  inter  tahulata  volutus. 

Lucret.   Conveniehat  enim  fruges  quoque  s<£pe  minutas. 

Rule  2.  Supines  in  itum,  from  preterites  in  ivi,  and  the 
parts  of  the  verb  formed  from  them,  likewise  have  the  penult 
long  ;  as,  cupivi,  cupitum ;  petlviy  petUum  ;  condiviy  conditum, 

Ovid.      Mens  videt  hoc,  visumque  cupit,  potiturque  cuptto. 
Virg.       Telaque  trunca  viri  et  his  sex  thoraca  peiitum. 
Horat.    Ne  male  conditum  jus  apponatur ;  ut  omnes. 


Rule  3.  But  supines  in  itum,  from  preterites  not  in  ivi, 
have  the  i  short ;  as,  monui,  monitum  ;  tacui,  tacttum,  &lc? 
Virg.  Discite  justitiam  montti,  et  non  temnere  divos. 
Id.        Quis  te,  magne  Cato,  taciturn,  aut  te,  Cosse,  relinquat. 
Id.        Conditus  in  nubem,  medioque  refugerit  orhe. 


Obs.  The  rule  last  given,  however,  does  not  extend  to 
polysyllabic   compounds    from    supines  of  two   syllables. 

1.  Here  also,  as  in  the  previous  rule,  contraction  operates  to  lengthen 
the  penult.  Thus  we  have,  oldest  form  pctivitum  {pctiwitum),  by  ihrow- 
inp  out  the  v  (or  rather  w),  pclntum,  and,  by  still  farther  contraction, 
pditum.  So,  also,  cupivttum  (cupiwttum),  cupntum,  cupitum;  condivt- 
tum  {condlvntum),  condntum,  conditum,  &c. 

2.  In  the  case  of  supines  in  Htxim  and  itum,  the  contraction  is  effect- 
ed by  a  blending  of  the  two  vowels  into  one  long ;  but  in  supines  in 
itum,  a  syncope  operates,  or,  in  other  words,  one  of  the  vowels  is  drop- 
ped, and  the  remaining  one  is  left  with  its  short  quantity.  Thus, 
monuitum,  mon'ttum ;  tacuilum,  tacltum,  &c. — Recensittim  is  often 
adduced  as  an  exception  to  the  rule  given  in  the  text.  It  is  only,  how- 
ever, a  deviation  in  appearance,  being  formed,  not  from  rcccnsui,  but 
from  the  old  perfect  recevsiri.  The  simple  verb  censeo  made  ccnsui 
and  ccnsivi  in  the  perfect,  censum  and  censilum  in  the  supine.  Hence 
we  find,  in  an  old  inscription,  ccnsita  sunt  for  censa  sunt ;  and,  in  some 
of  the  writers  on  the  civil  law,  ccnsiti  for  censi ;  so,  also,  the  noun 
censor  is  a  contraction  from  ccnsitor,  and  occurs  in  this  latter  form  in 
other  inscriptions  which  have  come  down  to  us,  as  well  as  in  the  wri- 
tings of  the  ancient  lawyers.  {Ulpian,  Die-,  lib.  50,  tit.  l.'i,  leg.  4. — 
Jrucript.  ap.  Grut.,  p.  417,  n.  5. — lb.,  p.  439,  n.  5. — Orelt.,  Inscrivt. 
Lat.,  n.  208,  3044,  36.')2.)  Analogous  to  this  is  the  verb  pono,  which 
inade  in  the  perfect  posivi  as  well  as  posut.  Plautus  uses  posivimus 
(Vidul.  ap.  Prise  ,  10,  7,  p.  499,  cd.  Putsch);  Apulerus  apposiverunt 
(ap.  eund.);  Lucilius  ovpostvit  (Fragm.,  p.  211,  ed.  Bip.);  Catullus 
deposivii  (34, 8),  <&c.    (Compare  Burmann,  ad  Antkol.  Lat.,  3, 130, 16.) 


DERIVATIVES.  37 

These  follow  the  quantity  of  the  simple  supines  from 
which  they  are  formed;  as,  itum,  obitum;  datum,  abditum; 
conditum,  redditum  ;  sdtU7n,  insitum,  (fee,  except  cognttum 
and  agnitum,  from  notum} 

SECTION  XIII. 

DERIVATIVES.2 
Rule.  Derivatives  follow  the  quantity  of  the  words  from 
which  they  are  formed. 


Obs.  1.  This  rule  applies  strictly  to  the  modifications 
which  words  undergo  in  declension,  comparison,  and  con- 
jugation, in  so  far  as  those  syllables  are  concerned  which 
are  not  affected  by  the  inflections. 

Thus,  since  the  first  syllable  in  aries  is  short  in  the  nomi- 
native, it  remains  short  in  arietis,  drieti,  &c.,  since  its  form 
does  not  change  with  the  inflections  ;  but  the  same  cannot 
be  said  of  the  last  syllable,  which  is  long  in  the  nominative, 
although  in  the  oblique  cases  the  corresponding  syllable  is 
short :  arietis,  arieti,  &c.  So  also  from  mttis  comes  mltia: 
durus,  durior,  durissimus,  &c. 

In  like  manner,  the  first  syllable  in  lego  being  short,  it 
remains  short  in  all  the  tenses  which  are  formed  from  the 
present  ;  as,  Icgebam,  legam,  legerem,  &c. ;  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  first  syllable  in  the  preterite  legi  being 
long,  it  will  be  long  in  legeram,  legerim,  legissem,  &;c.,  and 
all  other  parts  of  the  verb  formed  from  the  preterite. 

Obs.  2.  The  rule  applies  to  all  words  which  are  clearly 
and  distinctly  formed  from  other  words,  by  the  addition  of 
certain  terminations  or  suffixes,  according  to  well-estab- 
lished analogy.* 

1.  Many  of  the  Latin  supines  are  simple  contractions,  made  long  by 
the  rule  of  position  ;  thus,  legitum,  legHum,  lectxim ;  rumpilum,  rump^- 
tum,  ruptum ;  nubitum,  nuftum,  nvptum  ;  scribitum,  scriVtum,  scrip- 
turn  ;  docitum  (dokitum),  doc' turn,  doctum,  &c. 

2.  Ramsay's  Latin  Prosody,  p.  9,  seqq. 

3.  Still,  however,  there  are  some  exceptions  to  this.     Thus,  from 

D 


38 


'                                             DERIVATIVES. 

Thus,  from  animus 

we 

have  animosuSj 

ndtura 

"     ndturalis, 

rosa 

"     rdsetum. 

viola 

"     violariumj 

sanguinis 

"     sanguineus, 

puheris 

"     pulverulentus, 

labor 

"     lahoriosus. 

Obs.  3.  But  when  two  words  are  merely  connected  to- 
gether by  derivation  from  a  common  root,  we  cannot,  even 
when  they  resemble  each  other  in  structure,  with  any  cer- 
tainty infer  that  the  quantity  of  the  corresponding  syllables 
will  be  the  same  ;  for,  although  this  happens  much  oftener 
than  otherwise,  yet  the  exceptions  are  too  numerous  to  ad- 
mit of  the  principle  being  broadly  stated. 

Obs.  4.  Among  the  exceptions  alluded  to  in  the  prece- 
ding remarks,  the  following  are  most  deserving  of  attention. 
1.  Several  kindred  verbs  which  have  two  forms,  one 
active  and  the  other  neuter,  or  which  differ  otherwise 
in  meaning,  differ  also  in  quantity.'     Thus, 
placare,         placer  e, 

sidere,     sedesy 


sedare, 

sedere, 

legare, 

legere, 

dicarCf 

dicercj 

Idbare, 

labL 

2.  Words  which  differ  in  meaning,  but  which  are  spelt 
in  the  same  way,  often  differ  in  quantity.  This  arose, 
probably,  from  the  pronunciation  being  purposely  va- 
ried, to  prevent  confusion.     Thus, 

moles  we  have  mbleslus  ;  from  refro,  repula  ;  from  luceo,  lucerna,  &c. 
With  regard  to  these  and  others  of  the  kind,  we  may  use  the  language 
of  Varro  :  "  Cum  in  vcstitu,  adt/iciis,  sic  in  supcllectile,  cibo,  catercis 
omnibus,  qua  usu  ad  vitam  sunt  adsumpta,  dominelur  inaqualitas  ;  in 
sermonn  qnogue,  qui  est  usxU  causa  constitutus,  ea  non  repudiandaV 

1.  Eiceptions,  however,  to  this  remark  not  unfrequenily  occur. 
Thus,  we  nave  clarare  and  cldrerc ;  rigare  and  rigcre ;  fugnrt  and 
fuigtrt ;  jticere  and  fiic^c,  &c. 


COMPOUND    WORDS.  39 

ditcis,     from     ducOf     but     ducis,  from  dux. 

regis  J        "        rex,        "       regis,       "  rego. 

legis,         "        Z(?a:,         "       legis,        **  Zc^o. 

voces,        "        voa:,        "       voces,       "  uoco. 


Obs.  5.  The  entire  class  of  verbs  in  wn'o,  called  desid- 
erativeSf  have  the  u  short,  though  derived  from  the  future 
participle  in  urus,  of  which  the  penult  is  invariably  long  ; 
as,  parturit,  esurit,  coBnaturit,  nupturit,  &c. 

Obs.  6.  The  following  deviations  in  quantity,  on  the 
part  of  other  derivatives,  are  also  worthy  of  notice. 

homo,  but  humanus. 

humus,  humilis,  humare,  but  humor,  humidus,  humeus,  &LC. 

persono,  but  persona. 

tego,  but  tegula. 

macer,  maceo,  mdcies^  but  mdcero. 

lateo,  but  laterna. 

sopor,  soporus,  soporifer,  soporo,  but  sopio,  sopitus, 

quater,  but  quatuor. 

dicere,  but  dicax. 

vddo,  but  vddum. 

SECTION  XIV. 

COMPOUND  WORDS. 

Rule.  Compound  words  retain,  in  general,  the  quantity 
of  the  simple  words  from  which  they  are  formed. 

Thus,  in  perlego,  relego,  the  middle  syllable  is  short,  be-  ' 
cause  it  is  short  in  the  simple  lego.     But  in  the  perfects 
perlegi,  relegi,  it  is  long,  because  lengthened  in  the  simple 
legi. 

Again,  attigi,  concidi,  diffidi,  ehihi,  rescidi,  have  the  pe- 
nult short,  because  the  corresponding  vowel  is  short  in 
their  primitives,  tetigi,  cecidi,  fidi,  bibi,  and  sctdi. 

Oblitum,  from  ohlino,  has  the  short  penult,  because  the 
vowel  is  short  in  the  simple  lUum.  But  oblitus  is  from 
oUiviscor,  / 


40  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION. 

I  j  Obs.  The  quantity  of  the  simple  words  is  preserved  in 
^  I  the   compounds    though  the  vowel  be   changed.      Thus, 

/  concido,  excido,  incido,  occido^  recido,  from  cado,  shorten  the 
/  penult ;  and,  in  like  manner,  eligo^  seligo,  «fee,  from  lego. 
I  On  the  other  hand,  concido^  excido,  incido,  recido,  oocido, 
I  from  ccBdo,  have  the  penult  long.  So  also  allldo,  from 
I     l<Bdo  ;  exquiro  and  requiro,  from  qucEro,  (fee. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

The  following  shorten  the  penult,   though   the    corre- 
sponding vowels  in  the  simple  words  are  long ;  as, 
dejero,  pejero,  from    jura, 

pronuba,  innuba,  "        nubOf 

maledicus,  causidicus,  &c.,      "        dico, 
semisopitus,  "        sopio, 

cogmtum  and  agmtum,  "        notum. 

\  Obs.  1.  The  participle  ambitus,  as  has  already  been  re- 
j  marked,  has  the  penult  long  ;  but  the  noun  ambitus  has  it 
■  fihort.^ 

Obs.  2.  The  second  syllable  in  connubium  is  naturally 
;  short,  but  it  is  occasionally  lengthened  by  the  poets  in  the 
/  arsis  of  the  foot. 

Virg.   Connubio  ju7igam  stabili,  propriamque  dicabo. 

Id.       Hectoris  Andromache,  Pyrrhin^  connubia  sendas  ? 

SECTION  XV. 
PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 
Rule  1.  The  prepositions  a,  e,  de,  di,  and  se,  in  compo- 
sition are  long,  except  di  in  dirimo  and  dtsertus} 

1.  Besides  amino,  ambitum,  a  simple  derivative  from  ambe,  there 
probably  was  also  amb-eo,  amh-ttum,  a  compound  from  eo. 

2.  The  old  form  of  dirimo  was  disimo,  and  hence  the  inseparable 
preposition  in  dirimo  and  diaertns  is  in  fact  dXs,  not  di.  In  disertus 
the  original  form  appears  to  have  been  dissertus  (the  participle  of 
distero),  and  one  of  tne  two  «*s  was  subsequently  dropped. 


PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION.  41 

Virg.  Amissos  longo  socios  sermone  requirunt. 

Prop.  Conjiigis  Evadne  miseros  elata  per  ignes. 

Virg.  Deducunt  socii  naves,  et  littora  complent. 

Id.  Tergora  diripiunt  costis  et  viscera  nudant. 

Lucret.  Dissidio  potis  est  sejungi  segue  gregari. 


Virg.       Cede  deo  dixitque  et  proelia  voce  diremit. 
Mart.       Causas  inquit  agam  Cicerone  disertius  ipso. 


Rule  2.  Re  is  short ;  as,  relinquo,  refero  ;  but  the  im- 
personal verb  refert  ("it  concerns,"  &c.),  from  the  noun 
res,  has  the  first  syllable  long.' 
Ovid.  Propellit  Boreas,  cestus  et  unda  refert.     (Pentam.) 
Virg.   PrcBterea  nee  jam  mutari  pahula  refert. 

Rule  3.  The  prepositions  ah,  ad,  in,  ob,  per,  and  subj 
are  short  in  composition  before  vowels,  since  they  are 
short  in  their  simple  state  ;  as,  abeo,  adoro,  ineo,  obeo, 
perambulo,  subigo. 

1.  The  impersonal  refert  is  only  mentioned  here  in  order  to  guard 
against  the  possibility  of  a  mistake  in  pronunciation,  since  it  is  not  a 
compound  of  the  inseparable  preposition  re,  but  comes,  according  to 
some,  from  rei,  the  dative,  according  to  others  from  re,  the  ablative,  of 
the  noun  res,  and  the  verb /ero.  Verrius  Flaccus,  the  ancient  gramma- 
rian, as  cited  by  Festus,  was  in  favour  of  the  dative  :  "  Refert  cum 
dicimus,  errare  nos  ait  Verrius,  esse  enim  rectum  rei  fert,  dativo  scilicet, 
non  ahlativo  casu  ;  sed  esse  jam  usu  possessum.^*  (Festus,  p  ccvii.,  ed. 
Seal)  Reisig,  on  the  contrary,  maintains  that  refert  comes  from  the 
ablative  re  and  the  verb  fert,  and  makes  refert  mea,  for  example,  equiv- 
alent to  re  fert  med,  "  it  brings  something  to  bear  in  my  case."  In 
the  same  way  some  modern  scholars  imagine  that  interest  mea  is  to  be 
explained,  and  they  advance  the  opinion  that  inter  and  premier  in  early 
Latin  governed  the  ablative.  Hence  they  account  for  the  quantity  of  the 
final  syllable  in  intered,  prcetered.  (Reisig,  Vorlesungen,  p.  640,  ed. 
Haase. — Benanj,  Romische  Lautlehre,  vol.  1,  p.  37. — Hartung,  uber 
die  Casus,  p.  84. — Bopp,  Vergleich.  Gramm.,  p.  21.5. — Schmid,  de 
Pronom.,  p.  79.)  An  opposite  doctrine,  however,  with  regard  to  the 
etymology  of  refert,  is  maintained  by  Perizonius  (ad  Sanct.  Min.,  3,  5. 
—  vol.  1,  p.  581,  ed.  Bauer),  and  after  him  by  Scheller  (Lat. 
Dcutsch.  Worterb.,  vol.  4,  col.  9188,  seqq.),  both  of  whom  deduce  it 
from  refero,  and  regard  the  change  of  quantity  merely  as  an  expedient 
for  distinguishing  between  refert  and  refert,  with  their  different  signifi- 
cations. 

D  2 


42  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION. 

Virg. .  Tityrus  hinc  aherat ;  ipscB  te  Tityre  pinus. 

Id.  Bella  gero  :  et  quisquam  nurmn  Junonis  ddoret  ? 

Id.  Et  lituo  pugnas  insignis  ohibat  et  hasta. 

Id.  Prima  leves  ineunt  si  quando  proelia  Parthi, 

Herat.  Recte  necne  crocum  floresque  perambulet  Attce. 

Virg.  Arvina  pingui,  suhiguntque  in  cote  secures. 


Obs.  1.  06  in  composition  sometimes  drops  the  h  before 
a  consonant,  in  which  case  the  o  remains  short ;  as, 
omitto. 

Horat.  Pleraque  differat,  et  prcBsens  in  tempus  omittat. 


Obs.  2.  Trans  frequently  drops  the  last  two  letters  in 
composition,  but  preserves  its  proper  quantity  ;  as,  trano 
(from  transno) ;  trdduco  (from  transduce) ;  trado  (from 
transdo). 

Virg.  lUafretus  agit  ventos,  et  turhida  tranat. 

Id.       Atque  satas  alio  vidi  traducere  messes. 

Id.        Trddit  equum  comiti,  paribusque  resistit  in  armis. 


Rule  4.  Pro  is  short  in  Greek  words  ;  as,  Propontisj 
Prometheus ;  but  in  Latin  words  it  is  usually  long ;  as, 
prodo,  procudo,  procurvus,  &c.' 

Ovid.  Fas  quoque  ab  ore  freti  longceque  Propontidos  undis. 
Virg.  .Caucasiasque  refert  volucres,  furtumque  Promethei. 
Id.       Proderc  voce  sua  quemquam  ant  opponere  morti. 
Id.       Maturare  datur  ;  durum  procudit  orator. 
Id.       Exoritur  procurva  ingens  per  littora  jletus. 


Obs.  1.  There  are,  however,  some  Latin  words  in  which 

1.  "  It  is  impossible,"  observes  Ramsay,  "  to  agree  with  Dr.  Carey 
in  supposing  that  -pro  was  in  reality  always  doubtful,  and  lengthened  or 
shortened  as  might  suit  the  convenience  of  the  poets.  Since  we  find 
80  many  words  \\\  which  it  is  uniformly  long,  a  few  in  which  it  is  always 
short,  and  not  above  two  or  three  at  most  in  which  it  is  doubtful,  such 
an  hypothesis  must  be  pronounced  extravagant."  {Ramsay'»  Latin 
Prosody,  p.  89.) 


a,  e,  i,  u,  AND  y,  in  composition.  43 

pro  is  uniformly  short,  viz.,  the  compounds  of  cello,  fanum,  ^V 
fari,  faterif  festus,  fugio,  /undo,  fundus,  nepos,  neptiSy 
torvus ;  as,  procello,  procella,  profari,  profano,  profanus, 
profiteri,  profestus,  profugio,  profugus,  profundo,  profundus, 
pronepos,  proneptis,  protervus,  protervitas,  to  which  add 
proficiscor,  profextuSy^  prbfecto} 

Obs.  2.  The  following  have  the  pro  doubtful,  namely, 
propago  (both  noun  and  verb)  and  propino.  To  which 
some,  without  sufficient  grounds,  add  procumho,  procuro, 
propello,  which  have  the  first  syllable  always  long  in  the  best 
writers  ;  and  profari,  profundo,  in  which  it  is  always  short.'' 
Virg.  Sylvarumque  alicB  pressos  propaginis  arcus. 
Id.  Sed  truncis  olecB  melius,  propagine  vites. 

Id.  Sit  Romana  potens  Itala  virtute  propago, 

Lucret.  Propagare  genus  possit  vitamque  tueri. 
Id.  Ecficis  ut  cupide  generatim  scRcla  propagent. 

Mart.      Crystallinisque  murrhinisque  propinat.    (Scazon.) 
Id.  PrcBstare  jussi,  nutibus  propinamus.     (Scazon.) 

SECTION  XVI. 
A,  E,  I,  U,  AND  y,  IN  COMPOSITION. 

Rule  1.  If  the  first  part  of  a  Latin  compound  end  in  a, 
that  vowel  is  long ;  as,  trano,  traduco,  trado  f  but  if  it  end 
in  e,  the  e  is  in  general  short ;  as,  trecenti,  nefas^  » 

Virg.  Expertes  belli  juvenes  ;  ast  Ilva  trecentos. 

Juv.     Credebant  hoc  grande  nefas  et  morte  piandum. 

1.  Ramsay'' s  Latin  Prosody,  p.  84. 

2.  In  the  two  lines  from  Virgil,  quoted  immediately  after,  in  which 
propago  is  used  in  its  primitive  sense,  of  the  sucker  or  layer  of  a  tree 
or  shrub,  the  pro  is  long  ;  in  all  other  places  it  is  employed  in  the  figu- 
rative sense  of  progeny,  race,  stock,  and  has  the  first  syllable  uniformly 
short.     (Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  88.) 

3.  These,  as  has  already  been  remarked,  were  originally  written 
transno,  transduco,  transdo ;  and  hence  the  quantity  of  the  a  in  the 
initial  syllables. 

4.  The  quantity  of  the  a  in  Greek  compounds  is  to  be  learned  from  the 
rules  of  Greek  prosody.  Thus  a  is  sometimes  short ;  as,  adipsos ; 
aometimes  long ;  as,  Nedpolis,  genedlogus. 


44  a,  e,  i,  u,  and  y,  in  composition. 

Obs.  1.  Verbs  compounded  of  facio  or  fio  have  the  e 
almost  uniformly  short,  and  not  common,  as  is  generally 
maintained.  In  the  following  the  e  is  always  short :  Cale- 
facioy  calejio,  calefacto ;  lahefacio,  labefo,  labefacto ;  made- 
facio^  madejio  ;  pavefacio,  pavejio  ;  rubcfacio,  rubefio  ;  stu- 
pefacio,  stupejio  ;  tremefacio^  tremefio  ;  tumefacio,  tumejio} 

Obs.  2.  The  only  verbs  in  which  any  doubt  exists  re- 
specting the  quantity  of  the  e,  are  patefacio,  putrefaciOj 
tfpefacio,  and  liquefacio ;  and  yet  even  in  these  the  vowel 
is  much  more  frequently  short  than  long.'^ 

Obs.  3.  The  exceptions  to  the  rule  of  e  short  in  compo- 
sition are,  for  the  most  part,  based  upon  peculiarities  of 
derivation.  Thus  the  following  have  the  e  long,  namely, 
nequis,^  itequa,  nequod,  &c.,  nequitia,  nequam,  nequaquam, 
riequidquam^  nequando ;  videlicet,'^  venefica,^  semodius,^  se- 
mestris,''  sedecim,^  <fcc.  Martial,  however,  makes  the  first 
syllable  pf  selibra  short  in  several  instances,  and  never 
long. 

Rule  2.  If  the  first  syllable  of  a  compound  terminate  in 

1.  Ramsay's  Latin  Pros.,  p.  94. 

2.  Patefacio  has  the  e  long  only  in  two  instances,  both  of  which  oc- 
cur in  Lucretius  (4,  346,  and  6,  1000) ;  to  which  some  add  a  line  quo- 
ted from  Ennius  by  Isidorus  :  "  Indc  patefecit  radiis  rota  Candida 
calumV  —  The  verb  putrefacio  is  found  with  the  long  vowel  in  one 
passage  of  Lucretius  (2,  898) ;  and  so  likewise  one  solitary  instance  of 
the  long  e  is  found  in  iepefacio.  {Catullus,  64,  361.)  Two  instances  of 
long  e  occur  in  liquefacio.     (CatulL,  90,  6. — Ov.,  Met.,  7,  161.) 

3.  The  difference  in  quantity  between  necesse,  nefas,  nefandus,  ne- 
fastus,  nefarius,  nequeo,  and  ncquis,  nequam,  nequitia,  &c.,  is  proba- 
bly owing  to  the  following  circumstance,  that  in  the  former  class  of 
words  the  ne  was  formed  by  apocope  from  the  conjunction  nee,  and  so 
retains  its  original  quantity  ;  whereas  in  the  latter  it  is  either  the  adverb 
ne,  which  is  always  long,  or  else  the  c  of  nee  was  in  these  cases  retain- 
ed in  pronunciation,  though  omitted  in  writing. 

4.  From  vidcre  and  liect,  just  as  scilicet  comes  from  scire  licet,  and 
ilieet  from  ire  licet. 

5.  From  venennm  and  facio. 

6.  By  contraction  from  semimodius. 

7.  Semcstris,  "  half  monthly,"  is  by  contraction  from  semis  and 
mensis  ;  and  semcstris,  "  half  yearly,"  from  six  and  mensia.  In  either 
(^se,  therefore,  the  e  is  long. 

8.  From  scxdecim. 


a,  e,  iy  u,  AND  y,  in  composition.  45 

i  or  u,  the  vowel  is  generally  shortened  ;  as,  ommpoiens, 

causidicus,  biceps,  ducenti,  quadrupes. 
Virg.    Turn  pater  ommpotens,  rerum  cut  summa  potestas. 
Mart.  Et  te  patronum  causidicumque  putas.     (Pentara.) 
Virg.    Tollit  se  arrectum  quadrupes,  et  saucius  auras. 


Rule  3.  When  y  terminates  the  first  member  of  a  Greek 
compound,  that  vowel  is  short  ;  as,  Thrasyhulus,  Eurypy- 
lus,  Polydarnas,  polypus ;  unless  rendered  common  by  a 
mute  and  liquid,  or  long  by  position  ;  as,  Polycletus,  which 
has  the  y  common,  and  Polyxena,  in  which  it  is  long. 
Auson.  Anna  superveheris  quod,  Thrasybule,  tua.  (Pentam.) 
Ovid.      Vel,  cum  De'iphoho,  Polydamanta  roga.     (Pentam.) 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  But  in  ludimagister,  lucrifacio,  lucrijio,  and  com- 
pendlfacio  (which  are  properly  not  compounds,  but 
each  a  combination  of  two  distinct  and  complete 
words),  the  i  is  long  ;  and  the  same  may  be  said  of 
agricultura,  though  the  i  is  short  in  the  compound 
agricola} 

Exc.  2.  The  masculine  idem^  as  also  higce,  quadrig(B^ 
siquis,  siqua,  slquod,^  scilicet,^  himus,^  trimus,  quadri- 


1.  Tubtcen,  according  to  the  general  rule,  has  the  i  short,  whereas  in 
tihlcen  the  middle  syllable  is  long,  because,  as  has  already  been  remark- 
ed, it  is  a  crasis  of  two  short  vowels  into  one  long,  from  the  original 
tibncen  or  tibiacen.  In  liticen  (by  syncope  from  litmcen)  the  penult  is 
short. 

2.  The  old  form  for  the  masculine  idem  was  isdem  (is-deni),  where  the 
i  was  long  by  position,  a  quantity  retained  after  the  *  was  dropped. 
The  neuter,  on  the  other  hand,  has  the  short  vowel  (idem),  with  which 
we  may  compare  the  Sanscrit  t-dam.  {Bopp,  Vergleich.  Gramm., 
p.  500.) 

3.  BigcB  and  quadrigae  have  already  been  explained,  being  mere  con- 
tractions from  btjugcB,  guadnjugcB.     (Vid.  page  24.) 

4.  In  siquis,  siqua,  siquod,  the  long  i  follows  the  analogy  of  si. 

5.  Scilicet  is  from  scire  licet,  just  as  ilicet  is  from  ire  licet. 

6.  Bimus,  trimus,  quadrimus,  &c.,  are,  according  to  Scaliger  and 
Vossius,  contractions  from  biennis,  trtennis,  quadrtennis.  {Voss.,  Ety~ 
mol.  Lat.,  s.  v.) 


46  a,  e,  i,  u,  and  y,  in  composition. 

mus^  qmvis,  quidam,  qutUbet,^  tantldem^  hiduum,  tridu- 
um^  quotidie^^  and  the  other  compounds  of  dieSi  have 
the  i  long. 
Virg.       Omnibus  idem  animus,  scelerata  excedere  terra. 
Mart.       Si  totus  tihi  trlduo  legatur.     (Phalaecian.) 
Phaedr.    Nam  vita  morti  propior  est  quotidie.     (Iambic.) 
Terent.   Quotidiance  vitcB  consuetudinem.     (Iambic.) 
Phaedr.    Idem  facturum  melius  se  postridie.     (Iambic.) 
Enn.        Tanttdem,  quasi  f eta  canis,  sine  dentibu'  latrat. 


Exc.  3.  In  ubicunque  and  ubivis^  the  i,  as  in  the  primi- 
tive ubi,  is  common ;  while  in  ubique  and  ibidem  the 
middle  syllable  is  generally  long;  though,  strictly 
speaking,  it  should  also  be  regarded  as  common.^ 

1.  In  quivis,  quidam,  and  qullibet,  the  i  follows  the  quantity  of  the 
simple  qui.  The  termination  dam,  in  quidam,  is  compared  by  Bopp 
with  the  similar  termination  in  the  Sanscrit  i-dam.  {Vergleich.  Gramm.y 
p.  500.) 

2.  Tantidem  has  the  short  penult  in  Varro  (ap.  Non.,  c.  7,  n.  105). 

"  Hospes  quid  miras  nummo  curare  Serapim  1 
Quid  1  quasi  non  cures  tanttdem  Aristofeles.''* 
Supposing  the  reading  to  be  correct,  we  may  conjecture  that  tantidem 
was  formed  by  crasis  from  tandidem,  but  tanCtdem,  on  the  other  hand, 
by  syncope.     The  word  indldem  (from  indeidem)  affords  an  argument  in 
favour  of  this  supposition.     {Carey,  Lat.  Pros.,  §  10,  p.  49.) 

3.  Originally,  perhaps,  bisduum,  trisduum. 

4.  Quotidie  has  the  i  everywhere  long,  except  in  Catullus  (68,  139), 
where  we  have  qudtidiana.  This,  however,  is  either  a  corrupt  reading, 
as  some  maintain  (Doering,  ad  CatulL,  I.  c. — var.  lect.),  or  else,  in  scan- 
ning, we  must  read  quottidiana,  and  pronounce  it  quotlid-ydna,  making 
the  line  a  Spondaic  one. 

5.  The  middle  syllable  in  ubique  should  be  considered  common,  for 
the  reason  that  the  corresponding  syllable  in  ubicunque  and  ubivis  is  re- 
garded as  such,  they  being  all  derived  from  ubi.  The  authorities,  how- 
ever, to  prove  that  the  middle  syllable  of  ubique  was  short  as  well  as 
long,  are  very  rare.  Wasse  cites  two  lines  from  Plantus  {Bacch.,  5,  1, 
1. — Cas.,  2,  3,  38),  in  which  he  maintains  that  ubique  is  found  with  the 
short  penult ;  and  he  then  goes  on  to  remark  :  "  Totum  discrimen  in 
hoc  verti  videtur,  quod  ubi,  cum  dcsinat  in  ancipitem,  quoties  adjicitur 
particula  copulativa,  ultimam  corripiat ;  quoties  expletiva,  producat : 
apud  reccnliorea  quidem,  discretionis  causa ;  non  item  apud  vetustis- 
simos.''^  The  difference  in  quantity  here  alluded  to,  though  it  may  not 
have  any  very  strong  arguments  in  its  favour,  may  yet  be  recommended 
'*  discretionis  causa,**  and  will  be  found  not  inconvenient.  For  exam- 
ple, in  reading  Sallust,  where  ubique,  in  the  sense  of  et  ubi,  frequently 


0    IN    COMPOSITION.  47 


SECTION  XVII. 
O  IN  COMPOSITION. 
Rule  1.  In  words  of  Greek  origin,  where  the  first  part 
of  the  compound  ends  in  o-micron  (or  short  o),  that  vowel 
is  short ;  as,  schoenobates^  bibliopola,  areopagiis,  Cleopatra ; 
unless  rendered  common  or  long  by  position  ;  as,  chiro- 
graphus,  Hippocrene^  Pkiloxenus,  Nicostratus. 
Juv.        Augur,  schoenobates,  medicus,  magus,  omnia  novit. 
Mart.      Non  habeo,  sed  habet  bibliopola  Tryphon.  (Pentam.) 
Lucan.  Hesperios  auxit  tantum.  Cleopatra  furores. 


Rule  2.  But  if  the  first  part  of  the  compound  word  end 
in  an  o-mega  (or  long  o),  the  o  is  long  in  Latin  ;  as,  Mind- 
taurus,  geometres,  geographus,  lagopus, 

Virg.   Minotaurus  inest,  Veneris  monumenta  nefand(B. 

Mart.  Si  mens  aurita  gaudet  lagopode  Flaccus. 


Obs.  In  compound  Latin  words, the  o  is  sometimes  long; 
as,  alioquin,  quandoque,  nolo  ;  and  sometimes  short ;  as 
quandoquidem,  hodie,  duodeni? 

Horat.      Mendosa  est  natura,  alioquin  recta,  velut  si. 
Id.  Indignor  quandoque  bonus  dormitat  Homerus. 

Propert.  Hanc  utinamfaciem  nolit  mutare  senectus. 

occurs,  we  may  pronounce  the  word  with  the  penult  shortened,  ubtque, 
reserving  the  long  penult  for  ubique,-w\\er\  it  signifies  '■^everywhere  "  '■'in 
every  place.'''' — With  regard  to  ibidem,  though  found  long  in  the  best 
writers,  it  nevertheless  occurs  with  the  penultiina  short  in  Juvencus  and 
Mamercus,  'whose  authority,  though  by  no  means  equal  to  that  of  Hor- 
ace and  Virgil,  is  still  not  to  be  overlooked  in  a  case  of  this  kind.  Plau- 
tus  also  shortens  the  penult  of  the  same  word  in  several  instances. 
{Merc,  2,  3,  ^9.— Most.,  2,  2,  51.— Trm.,  1,  2,  IQQ.—  Captiv.,  4,  2, 
94.— 5acfA.,  2,  3,  79.  — Stick.,  2,  3,  12.) 

1.  Since  quando  has  the  last  syllable  common,  it  is  more  than  proba- 
ble that  the  o  was  likewise  common  in  both  quandoque  and  quandoqui- 
dem, although  no  instances  can  be  adduced  of  a  short  penult  in  the  case 
of  the  former,  or  a  long  antepenult  in  that  of  the  latter. — In  like  man- 
ner, as  duo  has  the  o  common,  the  same  vowel  may  have  been  common 
likewise  in  duodeni. 


48  INCREMENTS    OF    NOUNS. 

Virg.  Dicite,  quandoquidem  molli  consedimus  herba. 

Horat.  Non  dices  hodie,  quorsum  hcBC  tarn  puiida  tandem. 

Virg.  Per  duodena  regit  mundum  sol  aureus  astra. 


\- 


SECTION  XVIII. 

INCREMENTS  OF  NOUNS. 

I.  By  the  increments  of  nouns  is  meant  the  syllable  or 
syllables  by  which  an  oblique  case  exceeds  the  nomina- 
tive. 

II.  When  a  word  of  one  or  more  syllables  increases,  the 
penult  is  regarded  as  the  increment.  Thus,  the  re  in  re- 
gis, from  rex,  is  the  increment,  the  last  syllable  never  be- 
ing considered  such  in  any  word. 

III.  When  there  are  more  increments  than  one,  which 
seldom  happens  but  in  the  plural,  they  are  to  be  reckoned 
in  the  retrograde  order,  beginning  with  the  penult. 

IV.  If  a  noun  has  one  syllable,  in  an  oblique  case,  more 
than  in  the  nominative,  it  is  said  to  have  one  increment  or 
increase  ;  as, 

rex.,  re-gisy 

sermo,  ser-mo-nis. 

V.  The  quantity  of  the  increment  of  all  the  other  oblique 
cases  is  regulated  by  that  of  the  genitive  ;  as,  sermoni, 
sermonem,  sermonibus,  (fee,  in  which  the  o  is  long,  because 
the  0  of  sermonis  is  long.  There  is  but  one  exception  to 
this  remark,  namely,  bobus,  from  bos^  bovis ;  but  this  is,  in 
reality,  a  contraction  from  bovibus} 

VI.  Nouns  in  general  have  but  one  increase  in  the  sin- 
gular ;  but  iter,  jecur  (when  its  genitive  is  jecinoris),  supeU 
lext  and  the  compounds  of  caput  ending  in  ps,  have  two 
increments.     Thus, 


1.  Botfibu»  is  the  same  as  bowibus,  which  by  contraction  becomes 
howbusy  or,  when  written  with  the  long  o,  Ixtbua. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    FIRST    DECLENSION.  49 

I  2 

iter  J  I—  ti  -ne-ris. 

jecur^  je—  ci  -no-ris, 

supellex,  supel-lec-ti-lis. 
anceps,         an-  ci  -pi-tis, 

VII.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  the  third  declen- 
sion, in  ibus,  have  generally  two  increments  ;  as, 

1         2 

ser-mo-ni-bus. 
But  the  words  mentioned  in  the  previous  paragraph  have 
three  increments  in  these  two  plural  cases.*     Thus, 

1         2        3 

i-  ti—ne-ri-bus. 

je—  ci-no—ri—bus. 

supel-lec-  ti-li-bus. 

an—  ci  —pi—ti-bus. 

SECTION  XIX. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  FIRST  AND  SECOND  DECLEN- 
SIONS. 

FIRST   DECLENSION. 

Rule.  The  vowel  a,  in  the  old  increment  of  the  first 

1.  The  uncommon  increase  of  these  words  is  owing  to  their  having 
come  originally  from  nominatives,  now  obsolete,  which  consisted  of  a 
greater  number  of  syllables  than  the  nominatives  to  which  they  are  at  pres- 
ent assigned.  Iter  has  for  its  regular  formation  in  the  genitive  ileris ;  and 
Charisius  (p.  108)  adduces  examples  of  this  form  of  the  genitive  from  Pa- 
cuvius  and  Hyginus.  Priscian  (p.  695)  finds  this  same  form  in  Naevius. 
The  ablative  itere  occurs  in  Lucretius  (5,  652).  Besides  iter,  however, 
there  was  another  form  for  the  nominative,  namely,  itiner,  from  which 
comes  the  ordinary  genitive  itineris,  and  the  other  cases  similar  to  it. 
(Compare  Charis.,  p.  16,  34,  63,  109.— Priscian,  p.  646,  659.)  This 
nominative  itiner  is  found  in  Lucretius  (6,  338). — The  remarks  just 
made  respecting  iter  apply  equally  to  jecur,  supellex,  and  anceps. 
Thus,  besides  jecur,  there  was  another  form  for  the  nominative,  jecmur 
or  jecinor,  whence  came  jecimiris  or  jecinoris.  {Charis.,  p.  34. — 
Priscian,  p.  707.)  So  also  supellex  borrows  its  oblique  cases  from  an 
adjective,  supelleclilis,  supellectile  {Charis.,  p.  34,  67. — Priscian,  p. 
724) ;  while  anceps  obtains  them  from  an  old  nominative  ancipes,  which 
made  ancipitis  in  the  genitive,  just  as  miles  makes  militis.  This 
nominative  ancipes  occurs  in  Plautus  {Rud.,  4,  4,  114).  In  like  man- 
ner, prcBceps  borrows  its  genitive  prcecipitis,  and  other  oblique  cases, 
from  the  old  form  precipes. 

E 


60         INCREMENTS    OF   THE    SECOND    DECLENSION. 

declension,  is  always  long ;  as,  aulai^  aurai,  longai^  pic- 
tax} 

Virg.  Aulai  in  medio  libahant  pocula  Bacchi. 

Id.       JEUiereum  sensum,  atque  aurai  simplicis  ignem. 


SECOND    DECLENSION. 

Rule.  The  increments  of  the  second  declension  are 
short ;  as,  miser ^  miseri  ;  vir,  vlri ;  saiur,  saturi ;  puer, 
pueri.^ 

Virg.      Non  ignara  mali,  miseris  succurrere  disco. 

Id.  Arma  viri  !  ferte  arma  !  vocat  lux  ultima  victos. 

TibuU.    Turbaque  vernarum,  saturi  bona  signa  coloni. 


EXCEPTION. 

Iber  and  its  compound  Celtiber  have  the  penult  of  the 

genitive  long ;  as,  Iberi,  Celtiberi.^ 
Lucan.   Quique  feros  movit  Sertorius  exsul  Iberos. 
Mart.      Vir  Celtiberis  non  tacende  gcntibus.     (Iambic.) 


Obs.  The  increment  in  ins  has  already  been  noticed  in 
section  IV. 

•  SECTION  XX. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

INCREMENT    IN    fl. 

Rule.  The  increment  in  a  of  nouns  of  the  third  declen- 

1.  The  principle  on  which  this  long  penult  depends  has  already  been 
explained.     Consult  page  17,  note  1. 

2.  In  strictness  these  are  no  increments  at  all,  since  miser,  vir,  satur, 
fucr,  &c.,  are  merely  contractions  from  forms  in  us ;  as,  miserus,  virus, 
saturus,  puerus,  &c.  The  vocative  puere  in  Plautus  {Asin.,  2,  3,  2) 
can  only  come  from  a  nominative  puerus.  Oiher  examples  of  puerus 
and  puere  are  given  by  Priscian  (p.  697  and  738).  So,  again,  the  form 
vira,  of  which  Festus  speaks,  could  only  come  from  virus.  (Ft:*/.,  n. 
411,  ed  Amslel,  s.  v.  Qvcrquctulana. — Serv.  ad  Mn,,  12,  468.)      .,< 

3.  These  forms,  again,  like  those  mentioned  in  the  prevrous  note,  are 
not  actual  increments  ;  on  the  contrary,  the  nominatives  Iher  and  Celti- 
ber are  merely  contractions  from  JU>us  and  CeUihcms,  in  Greek 
'ISTfpo^  and  KeAriGijpof. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION.  51 

sion  is  chiefly  long  ;  as,  vcctigal,  vectigalis  ;  pax,  pacts ; 
calcar,  calcdris,  &c. 

Horat.  JurgatuT  verbis,  ego  vectigalia  magna. 

Ovid.    Jane  fac  cBternos  pdcem  pdcisque  ministros. 

Mart.     Accipe  helligercB  crudum  thordca  Minerv(B. 


i 


EXCEPTIONS. 

/Exc.  1.  Masculine  proper  names  in  al  and  ar  (except 
Car  and  Nar)  increase  short ;  as,  Hannibal,  Hanni- 
bdlis  ;  Hamilcar,  Hamilcdris  ;'   C(Bsar^  CcBsdris. 
Sil.  Hannibdlem  Fahio  ducam  spectante  per  urbem. 

Id.  Cui  s<Bvum  arridens  narrabis  Hamilcdris  umbris. 

Propert.  Galium  per  medios  ereptum  Casdris  enses. 


Exc.  2.  The  adjective  par  and  its  compounds  ;  the  sub- 
stantive par ;  the  noun  sal,  whether  neuter  or  mascu- 
line ;  and  also  hcpar^  nectar,  baccar,  vas  (vddis),  mas, 
anas,  lar,  andjubar,  have  the  increase  short. 

Virg.      Ardentes  auro  et  paribus  lita  corpora  guttis. 

Horat.    Damnati  populo  pdria,  atque  epulum  arbitrio  Arri  et. 

Virg.       Vela  dabant  IcBti,  et  spumas  sdlis  (Ere  ruebant. 

Mart.     Ipsa  merum  secum  portat,  et  ipsa  sdlcm.    (Pentam.) 

Horat.    Quinta  parte  sui  nectdris  imbuit.     (Choriambic^.) 


1.  Ennius  and  other  early  authors  wrote  Hannihdlis,  Hamilcdris, 
Hasdruhdlis,  with  the  long  penult.  Aulus  Gelfius  informs  us,  that  the 
grammarian  Valerius  Probus  followed  this  same  pronunciation,  and  as- 
serted that  Plautus,  Ennius,  and  many  other  writers  of  that  period,  as 
we  have  already  remarked,  gave  the  penult  long.  He  adds,  however, 
that  Probus  cited  merely  one  verse  from  the  "  Scipio"  of  Ennius,  be- 
longing to  the  trochaic  class  :  "  Quique  propter  Hannibdiis  capias  con- 
sideranlV  {AuL  GelL,  4,  7.)  It  cannot  be  denied  that  this  is  the  more 
accurate  pronunciation,  since  Ennius  and  the  others  lived  nearer  to  the 
Carthaginian  times  ;  still,  however,  the  authority  of  their  successors,  who 
shortened  the  penult,  is  the  rule  to  be  followed  in  modern  days.  It  may 
be  remarked  in  favour  of  the  long  penult,  that  this  harmonizes  with  the 
etymology  of  the  names  in  question  ;  since  both  Hanmbal  and  Hasdru- 
hal  obtain  the  latter  part  of  their  form  from  the  Oriental  Baal,  where  the 
two  vowels  coalesce  into  one  long:  while  Hamilcar  is  to  be  adduced, 
in  part  likewise,  from  Milcar,  where  the  final  syllable  is  also  long. 
(Consult  Gesenius,  Phoen.  Man-,  p.  407. — Gronov.  ad  GelL,  I.  c.) 


52    INCREMENTS  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

Virg.      Errantes  hederas  passim  cum  haccare  tellus. 
Ovid.      Sacra  BoncB,  mdribus  non  adeundaj  Decs.    (Pentam.) 
Avien.    Latipedemque  anatem  cernas  excedere  ponto. 
Tibull.  Sed  patrii  servate  Lares,  aluistis  et  idem. 
Virg.      It  portis,  juhdre  exorto,  delecta  juventus. 


( 


Exc.  3.  Greek  nouns  in  a  and  as  increase  short ;   as, 

poema,  po'emdtis  ;  lampas,  lampddis. 
Horat.  Non  quivis  videt  immodulata  poemdta  judex. 
Ovid.     Undique  collucent  prmcinctcB  lampddes  auro. 

/  Exc.  4.  Nouns  ending  in  s,  preceded  by  a  consonant, 
/  and  many  nouns  in  ax,  increase  short  in  the  genitive ; 
Y        as,  trabs,  trdhis  ;   Arabs,  Ardbis  ;  fax,  fdcis  ;   arcto- 

\     phylax,  arctophyldcis  (and  many  other  compounds  of 
<pvXa^) ;  climax,  climdcis  ;  dropax,  dropdcis,  &c.' 
Virg.     Auratasque  trdbes,  veterum  decora  alta  parentum. 
Horat.   Otia  divitiis  Ardbum  Uberrima  muto. 
Virg.     Jamque  fdces  et  saxa  volant,  furor  arma  ministrat. 
Mart.     Psilothro  faciem  loivas,  et  dropdce  calvam, 

Obs.  The  proper  name  Syphax  is  commonly  supposed 
to  have  in  the  genitive  Syphdcis  and  Syphdcis.  This, 
however,  is  incorrect,  as  the  short  quantity  turns  merely 
on  an  erroneous  reading  in  Claudian,  and  the  true  form  of 
\^the  genitive  is  consequently  Syphdcis.^ 


/ 


■  — v' 

^  INCREMENT    IN    6. 

Rule.  The  increment  in  e,  of  the  third  declension, 


1.  These  nouns  in  x  are  in  fact  nothing  more  than  nouns  ending 
in  *  preceded  by  a  consonant,  the  letter  x  being  equivalent  to  cs,  gs, 
or  ks. 

2.  The  line  of  Claudian  occurs  in  the  poem  "  De  Bella  Gildonico^* 
(v.  91),  and  is  as  follows  :  "  Compulimus  dirum  Syphdcem,  fractumgue 
Metelloy  The  passage,  however,  of  which  this  line  forms  part,  in- 
volves a  palpable  historical  error,  if  the  reading  Syphacem  be  retained; 
and  Hannibalem  has  therefore  been  substituted  by  Barih;  an  emenda- 
tion approved  of  by  Broukhusius  {ad  Propcrt.,  3,  9,  61)  and  other  schol- 
ars, although  the  common  reading  is  retained  by  Artaud  in  Lemaire's 
Collection. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD   DECLENSION.  53 

mostly  short ;    as,  grex^  gregis  ;  pes,  pedis  ;  teres,  teretis  ; 

mulier,  mulieris. 

Ovid.    Nohiliumque  greges  custos  servabat  equarum. 

Fur.      Pressatur  pede  pes,  mucro  mucrone,  viro  vir. 

Virg.     Incumhens  tereti  Damon  sic  ccepit  olivcB. 

Afran.  Hcbc  sunt  venena  formosarum  mulierum.     (Iambic.) 


V 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Iber,  Iberis,  and  genitives  in  enis,  have  the  pe- 
nult long  ;  as,  ren,  renis  ;  Siren,  Sirenis  ;  except  that 
of  hymen,  which  increases  short. 

Prise.    Quern  juxta,  terras  habitant  Orientis  Iheres. 

Horat.   Si  latus  avt  renes  morbo  tentantur  acuto, 

Ovid.     Monstra  maris  Sirenes  erant,  quae  voce  canora. 


Exc.  2.  Yer,  raansues,  locuples,  hcB-res,  merces,  quies,  lex, 
rex,  plebs,  vervex,  seps,  and  halec,  increase  long  ;  as, 
veris,  mansuetis,  locupletis,  hcBredis,  mercedis,  quietis^ 


V 


legis,  regis,  plebisy  vervecis,  septs,  halecis. 

Virg.  Vere  novo  gelidus  canis  cum  montibus  humor, 

Horat.  Tu  mefecisti  locupletem.      Vescere,  sodes. 

Mart.  JEdent  hceredes,  inquis,  mea  carmina  quando. 

Id.  Turba  gravis  pad,  placidcBque  inimica  quieti. 
Propert.  Illorum  antiquis  onerentur  legibus  aures, 

Horat.  Fortunam  et  mores  antiquts  plebis  et  idem. 

Mart.  Capparin,  et  putri  cepas  halece  natantes. 


Exc.  3.  Hebrew  and  other  foreign  names  in  el  increase 
/         long  ;  as,  Daniel,  Danielis  ;  Michael,  Michaelis} 
Alcim.  Magnum  ilium  Dominum  atque  deum  Danielis  ado- 


rans. 


Exc.  4.  Greek  nouns  in  es  and  er  increase  long  ;    as, 

1.  Hebrew  names  in  el  follow  the  analogy  of  the  long  vowel  in  that 
language. 

E  2 


64  INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION. 

tapes,  tapetis ;  trapes,  trapetis;  lebes,  lehetis ;  soter, 
soteris  ;  crater,  crateris ;  except  csther  and  a'er,  which 
increase  short.' 

Sid.  Ap.  Ipse  per  attonitos  bacca  pendente  trapetas. 

Ovid.         Viginti  fulvos  operoso  ex  (ere  lebetas. 

Virg.         Crateras  magnos  statuunt,  et  vina  coronant. 

J[d»  Quacumque  ilia  levem  fugiens  secat  cBthera  pennis. 

Id.  Si  nigrum  obscuro  comprenderit  dera  cornu. 

INCREMENT    IN    %   AND   y,  * 

Rule.  The  increment  in  i  or  y,  of  the  third  declension, 
is  for  the  most  part  short ;  as,  stips,  stipis  ;  nemo,  nemmis  ; 
pollex,  polUcis  ;  chlamys,  chlamydis  ;  chalybs,  chalybis. 
Ovid.  Die,  inquam,  parva  cur  stipe  qucerat  opes.     (Pentam.) 
Virg.    Qualem  virgineo  demessum  polUce  florem. 
Ovid.  Anchism  sceptrum,  chlamydem  pharetramque  nepoti. 
Virg.    Insula  inexhaustis  chalybum  generosa  metallis. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Genitives  in  inis  or  ynis,  from  nouns  of  Greek 
0  origin,  have  the  penult  long ;  as,  delphin,  delphmis ; 

Phorcyn,  Phorcynis  ;  Salamis,  Salamlnis. 
Virg.  Orpheus  in  silvis,  inter  delphmas  Arion. 
Id.       Laomedontiaden  Priamum  Salamma  petentem. 


Exc.  2.  The  following  also  have  the  long  penult  in  the 
genitive  :  Dis,  Ditis ;  glis,  gUris  ;  vibex,  vibicis ; 
gryps,  gryphis ;  Samnis,  Samnttis ;  Quiris,  Quiritis ; 
Nesis,  Nesidis, 

Virg.   Noctes  atque  dies  patet  atrijanua  Ditis. 

Mart.  Somniculosos  ille  porrigit  gUres.     (Scazon.) 

Pers.    Si  puteal  multa  cautus  viblce  jlagellas. 

Virg.    Huic  horret  thorax  Samnttis  pcllibus  urscp.. 

1.  Greek  nouns  in  es  and  er  which  increase  long  in  the  genitive, 
have  1)  in  the  penult  of  that  case  in  Greek.  On  the  contrary,  alher  and 
air  have  e  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  alOepoc,  cicpof. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD   DECLENSION.  55 

Luc.     Tradite  nostra  viris,  ignavi,  signa,  Quintes. 
Stat.     Silvaque  qu(B  Jixam  pelago  Nesida  coronal. 


INCREMENT    FROM    IX    AND    yx. 

Rule.  Nouns  in  ix  or  yx  have,  for  the  most  part,  the  pe- 
nult of  the  genitive  long  ;  as,  homhyx^  bombycis  ;  perdix, 
perdlcis  ;  pernix,  pernicis  ;   coturnix,  coturnicis ;   lodix,  /o-- 
duis,  , 

Propert.  Nee  si  qucR  Arabico  lucet  bomhyce  puella. 

iSeren.      Sen  f el  perdlcis  parili  cum  pondere  mellis. 

Virg.        Progenuit  pedibus  celerem  et  permcibus  alis, 

Ovid,        Ecce  coturmces  inter  sua  pr<Blia  vivunt. 

Mart.        Lodices  mittet  docti  tibi  terra  Catulli. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Nixy  Cilix,  strix,  fornix,  histrix,  choenix,  varix,  salix, 
Jilix,  larix,  coxendix,  pix,  calix,  calyx,  Eryx,  Styx, 
lapyx,  Phryx,  onyx,  and  some  others,  have  their  in- 
crease short,  as  have  likevjrise  some  proper  and  gen- 
tile names ;  such  as  Ambiorix,  Vercingetorix ;  Bitu- 
rix,  Caturix. 

Virg.        Perque  nives  alium  perque  korrida  castra  secuta  est. 

Luc.         Armenios  Cilicesque  feros,  Taurosque  subegi. 

Propert.  Et  strlgis  invented  per  busta  jacentia  plumcB. 

Calph.      Venit  ;  et  hirsuta  spinosior  histrice  barba. 

Seren.      Scspius  occultus  victa  coxendice  morbus. 


Obs.  1.  Mastix,  mastichis,  "a  gum,"  increases  short; 
but  mastix,  mastlgis,  "  a  whip,"  or  "  scourge,"  has  the  in- 
crement long. 

Seren.      Pulegium,  abrotonum,  nitida  cum  mastiche  coctum. 
Horn.       ''Qg  apa  (pcjvrjaag  Ifiaaev  [idarlyt  (paeiv^. 
Prudent.  Nunc  mastigophoris,  oleoque  et  gymnadis  arte. 


Obs.  2.  Appendix  is  generally  considered  as  increasing 


56  INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION. 

short  in  the  genitive ;'  and  perpendiculum,  a  noun  of  kin- 
dred origin,  has  the  penult  short  in  Ausonius  (.Parental. , 
\5,  8). 
/   Obs.  3.  Behryx  and  sandix  have  the  increment  common. 
Val.  Flacc.  Behrycis  et  Scythici  procul  inclementia  sacri. 
Sil.  Ital.        Possessus  Bacchn  scsva  Behrycis  in  aula. 
Propert.        Illaque  plebeio,  vel  sit  sandlcis  amictu. 
Gratius.        Interdum  Libyco  fucantur  sandice  pinncB. 


INCREMENT    IN    0. 

Rule.  O,  in  the  increment  of  the  third  declension,  in 
words  of  Latin  origin,  is  for  the  most  part  long  ;  as,  sol, 
solis ;  vox,  vocis ;  victor,  victoris  ;  and  all  other  verbal 
nouns  in  or  ;  ros,  roris  ;  dos,  dutis  ;  statio,  stationis ;  and 
all  other  feminine  verbals  in  io  ;  Cato,  Catonis,  and  other 
Latin  proper  names  in  o. 

Ovid.      Regia  solis  erat  suhlimihus  alta  columnis. 

Tibull.  Ille  liquor  docuit  voces  injlectere  cantu. 

Virg.      Nee  victoris  heri  tetigit  captixm  cubile. 

Lucan.  Ire  vetat,  cursusque  vagos  statione  moratur. 

Id.  Et  mala  vel  duri  lacrymas  motura  Catonis. 

X  ^ 

^N  EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  I.  Nouns  in  o  or  on,  taken  from  the  Greek  6>v, 
preserve  in  Latin  the  same  quantity  of  the  increment 
.  which  they  have  in  the  Greek.     If  that  increment  be 

j  an   omicTon,  it   is    short ;    if   an    omega,  it   is   long. 

Thus,    sindon,  a'edon,  Agamemnon,  Jason,  Philemon, 
&c.,   increase   short ;    whereas   Laco,  Plato,  Solon, 
Sicyon,  &c.,  increase  long. 
Mart.      Cultus  sindone  non  quotidiana.     (Phalaecian.) 
Paulin.  Si  confers  fulicas  cycnis,  et  aedona  parra. 
Horat.    Pythagoran,  Anytique  reum,  doctumque  Platona. 
Mart.      Et  gratum  nautis  sidus  fulgere  Laconum. 

1.  It  is  80  given,  for  instance,  by  Scheller  {Lat.  Dcutsck.  Wdrterh.,g» 
9.)  and  Freund  {Wbrterb.  der  Lot.  Sprache,  «.  v.). 


c 


INCREMENTS    OF   THE    THIRD   DECLENSION.  57 

Obs.  Sidon,  Orion,  JEgcBon,  have  the  increment  common, 
and  so  likewise  has  Britto,  "  a  native  of  Britain."     SaxOt 
Seno,  and  some  other  gentile  nouns,  increase  short. 
8il.  Ital.  Stat,  fucare  colos  nee  Sidone  vilior,  Ancon^  ^ 

Virg.         Atque  equidem  Teucrum  memini  Sidona  venire. 
Ovid.        Quorum  si  mediis  Bceoton  Oriona  quaras, 
Lucan.     Ensiferi  nimium  fulget  latus  Orionis. 
Claud.      II(EC  centumgemini  strictos  JEg<Bdnis  enses. 
Ovid.        jT^gceona  suis  immunia  terga  lacertis. 
Juv.  Qua  nee  terrihiles  Cimbri,  nee  Brittones  unquam. 

Mart.        Quam  veteres  braccce  Brittonis  pauperis,  et  quam. 


\ 


Exc.  2.  Genitives  in  oris,  from  Latin  nouns  of  the  neu- 
ter gender,  have  the  penult  short ;  as,  marmor,  mar" 
moris  ;  corpus,  corporis  ;  ebur,  eboris. 
Ador,  however,  which  is  of  the  masculine   gender, 
makes  adoris  and  adoris ;  it  being  found  short  in 
Ausonius,  and  both  long  and  short  in  Gannius,  an 
old  poet  quoted  by  Priscian.^ 
Auson.  Mox  ador,  atque  adoris  de  polline  pultijicum  far. 
Gann.    Illam  sponte  satos  adoris  stravisse  maniplos. 
Id.  Emicat  in  nubes  nidoribus  ador  adoris. 


Exc.  3.  Greek  proper  names  in  or,  and  appellatives,  as 

rhetor,  increase  short. 

Val.  Flac.  Ingemit  et  dulci  f rater  cum  Castore  Pollux. 

Ovid.  Et  multos  illic  Hectoras  esse  puta.     (Pentam.) 

1.  Hence  we  have  adoreus  in  Virgil,  and  adorea  in  Horace  and  Clau- 
dian. — It  is  possible  that  the  variation  of  quantity  in  adoris  and  adoris 
may  be  connected  with  a  difference  of  gender.  Priscian  considers  ador 
an  irregular  noun,  which,  though  ending  in  or,  still  shortens  the  penult 
of  the  genitive,  and  which  terminates  in  or,  though  of  the  neuter  gender. 
For  this  he  is  censured  by  Scaliger,  who  maintains  that  ador  properly 
makes  only  adoris  in  the  genitive,  and  that  adoris  comes  from  the  obso- 
lete nominative  adus,  of  the  neuter  gender.  (Seal,  ad  Fcst.,  vi. — Pris- 
cian, 6,  9,  49 — vol.  I,  p.  251,  td.  Krehl.)  Scaliger,  however,  is  himself 
in  error  when  he  derives  ador  from  the  Greek  udvp.  It  is  to  be  traced 
to  the  Sanscrit  ad,  *'  to  eat."     {Lindemann  ad  FesL,  p.  302.) 


58  INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION. 

Mart.  Peleos  et  Priami  transit  vel  Nestoris  (Btas. 

Id.  Dum  modo  causidicum,  dum  te  modo  rhetorajingis. 


Exc.  4.  Os,  oris ;  and  adjectives  of  the  comparative  de- 
gree, have  their  increment  long  ;  as,  majoris^  pejoris, 
mdioris, 

Virg.     Componens  manibusque  manus,  atque  orihus  ora. 

Id.         Nate  dea,  nam  te  mojoribus  ire  per  altum. 

Uorat.  Mutius,  indignum  quod  sit  pejoribus  ortus. 


Exc.  5.  The   compounds  of  novg,  as,  tripus,  polypus, 
CEdipus ;  and  also    memor,  arbor,  lepus,  bos,  compos, 
and  impos,  increase  short. 
Juv.     Stantibus  mnophorum,  tripodas,  armaria,  cistas. 
Mart.  Phineas  invites,  Afer,  et  CEdipodas.     (Pentam.) 
Virg.    Strata  jacent  passim  sua  quaque  sub  arbbre  poma. 
Mart.  Mavis,  Rufe,  coquum  scindere  quam  leporem.     (Pen- 
tam.) 


Exc.  6.  Cappadox,  AUobrox,  prcscox,  and  other  nouns 
which  have  a  consonant  immediately  before  s  in  the 
nominative  ;  as,  scobs,  scrobs,  ops,  inops,  jEthiops,  Ce- 
crops,  Dolops,  increase  short ;  except  Cyclops,  Cercops, 
and  hydrops. 

Horat.    Mancipiis  locuples,  eget  aris  Cappadocum  rex. 

Senec.  Materna,  letum  prcBcbcis  mali  tulit.     (Iambic.) 

Juv.        A  scrbbe  vel  sulco  redeuntibus  altera  ccena. 

Virg.      Nort  Ikbc  humanis  opibus,  non  arte  magistra. 

Ovid.      Virginibusque  tribus  gemino  de  Cecrope  natis. 

Manil.  Et  portentosos  Cercopum  ludit  in  ortus. 

Ovid.      Tela  reponuntur  manibus  fabricata  Cyclopum. 

INCREMENT    IN    U. 

Rule.  The  increment  in  u  of  the  third  declension  is  for 
the  most  part  short ;  as,  murmur,  murmuris ;  furfur,  fur^ 
furis  ;  dux,  ducts ;  prasul,  prasulis ;  turtur,  turturis. 


PLURAL  INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS.         59 

Virg.      Aspice,  ventosi  ceciderunt  murmuris  aurcB. 
Seren.  Furfuribusque  novis  durum  miscehis  acetum, 
Pedo.     Consule  nos,  duce  nos,  duce  jam  victore  caremus. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


^  Exc.  1.  Genitives  in  udis,  uris,  and  utis,  from  nomina- 
tives in  us,  have  the  penult  long;  sls,  palus,  paludis ; 
incus,  incudis ;  tellus,  telluris ;  virtus,  virtutis. 

Virg.    Quum  primum  sulcos  (Equant  sata  ?  quique  paludis. 

Mart.    Turn  grave  percussis  incudihus  (Bra  resultant. 

Virg.    Vix  e  conspectu  Siculce  telluris  in  altum. 

Id.        Mittatur  Pallas,  quern  non  virtutis  egentem. 


Exc,  2.  The  following  also  increase  long :  fur,  furis  ; 
lux,  lucis  ;  Pollux,  Pollucis  ;  and  frugis,  from  the  old 
nominative  frux.  But  intercus,  pecus,  and  Ligus,  in- 
crease short. 

Virg.      Quid  domini  faciant,  audent  cum  taliafures? 

Tibull.  Luce  sacra  requiescit  humus,  requiescit  arator. 

Ovid.     Pollucem  pugiles,  Castora  placet  eques.     (Pentam.) 

SECTION  XXI. 

PLURAL  INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS. 
The  penult  of  the  genitive  or  dative  plural  is  called  the 
plural  increment  of  a  noun  when  either  of  these  cases  con- 
tains more  syllables  than  the  nominative  plural ;  as,  mus<Bt 
musdrum ;  ambo,  amborum,  ambobus ;  res,  rerum,  rebus  ;  in 
the  first  of  which  the  syllable  sa,  in  the  second  bo,  in  the 
third  re,  are  the  respective  plural  increments.  So  also  hi 
in  nubium,  nubibus  ;  quo  in  quorum  ;  qui  in  quibus. 


PLURAL    INCREMENTS    IN    a,  6,  0,  I,  U. 

Rule.  In  the  increase  of  the  plural,  a,  e,  and  a  are  long, 
i  and  u  short ;  as,  qudrum,  hdrum,  Musdrum;  rerum,  rebus; 
korum,  qudrum  ;  quibus,  trlbus,  montibus,  lacuhus. 


60  INCREMENT    OF   VERBS. 

Virg.    Qudrum  qu<B  forma  pulcherrima,  De'iopeam. 
Ovid.   Cum  tamen  a  turha  rerum  requieverit  harum.   . 
Virg.   Jupiter,  et  rebus  nox  ahstulit  atra  colorcm. 
Id.        At  Capys,  et  qudrum  melior  sententia  menti. 
Id.        Montibus  in  nostris  solus  tibi  certet  Amyntas. 
Ovid.  Pr(Bmia  de  lacubus  proxima  musta  tuts.     (Pentam.) 


A 


Obs.  Bubus  has  already  been  explained  under  section  V. 


SECTION  XXII. 

INCREMENT  OF  VERBS. 

I.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  present  tense,  in- 
dicative active,  is  the  measure  by  which  to  estimate  the  in- 
crement of  verbs.  If  any  tense  or  person  of  a  verb  do  not 
contain  a  greater  number  of  syllables  than  the  above  stand- 
ard, the  verb  is  said,  in  that  tense  or  person,  to  have  no  in- 
crement. Thus,  in  amat,  amant,  ama,  amem,  amans,  the 
verb  amo  has  no  increment,  because  they  all  contain  only 
two  syllables,  like  amas. 

II.  If,  however,  a  tense  or  person  exceed  the  given 
standard,  then,  if  that  excess  be  by  one  syllable,  the  verb 
is  said  to  have  in  that  part  a  single  increment ;  if  by  two 
syllables,  a  double  ;  if  by  three,  a  triple  ;  if  by  four,  a  four- 
fold increment.  Thus,  in  oMkmus  there  is  a  single  incre- 
ment, which  is  the  penult,  for  the  final  syllable  is  never 
called  an  increment ;  in  aMkBkmus  there  is  a  double  in- 
crement ;  in  aMAVERIww5  a  triple  increment ;  and  in  au- 
DIEBAMIm  a  fourfold  increment. 

III.  In  determining  the  increments  of  deponent  verbs, 
we  may  imagine  an  active  voice,'  and  obtain  from  this  the 
requisite  standard  for  the  regulation  of  the  increments  ;  or 
we  may  be  guided  by  analogy,  and  estimate  them  by  means 

1.  Most  deponent  verbs  had,  in  fact,  in  earlier  Latin,  an  active  voice, 
which  was  dropped  during  the  more  cultivated  period  of  the  language. 
Consult  S/ruve,  iiber  die  Lot.  Dccl.  und  Conj.,  p.  80— Reisig,  Vorle- 
sungen,  p.  243,  ^  150. 


INCREMENT    OF    VERBS.  61 

of  Other  verbs  of  the  same  conjugation  which  have  an  active 
voice.  Thus,  for  the  verb  largior,  we  may  either  form  an 
imaginary  active,  largio,  largis,  of  the  fourth  conjugation, 
or  be  guided  by  the  tenses  of  audior,  which  has  a  real  ac- 
tive. 

IV.  The  final  syllable,  as  has  just  been  observed,  is 
never  regarded  as  an  increment.  The  first  syllable,  how- 
ever, becomes  one  when  the  standard  tense  is  a  monosyl- 
lable. Thus,  in  the  case  of  do  B-ndfieo,  the  tenses  by  which 
we  are  to  estimate  their  respective  increments  are  das  and  / 
fles,  and  consequently  in  damus,  daham^  dare ;  flemus,  fie- 
ham,  flere,  the  initial  syllables  are  the  increments  of  the 
vexbs. 


VERBAL    INCREMENT    IN    a. 

Rule.  The  vowel  a  is  long  in  the  increments  of  verbs 
of  every  conjugation  ;  as,  staham,  stares,  properdmus,  doce- 
bdmus,  audiebdmini,  &c. 

Virg.  Trojaque  nunc  stares,  Priamique  arx  alia  maneres. 

Ovid.  Serius  aut  citius  sedem  properdmus  ad  unam. 

Horat.  Pugndhant  armis,  qu<B  post  fahricdverat  usus. 

Mart.  Festindvit  Arabs,  festindvere  Sabm. 

Ovid.  Ipse  guberndbit  residens  in  puppe  Cupido. 

Id.  Clam  tamen  intrdto,  ne  te  mea  carmina  Icedant, 

Virg.  Et  cantdre  pares,  et  respondere  pardti. 

Mart.  Esse  videbdris,  fateor,  Lucretia  nobis. 


exception. 
The  first  increase  of  the  verb  do  is  short ;  as,  damns,  da- 
bunt,  dare ;  and  hence  the  pronunciation  of  circumdd- 
mus,  circumddbunt,  circumddre ;  venumddbo,  venumddre, 
&LC.,  with  the  penult  short.* 

1.  This  violation  of  analogy  on  the  part  of  do,  to  which  Priscian  al- 
ludes (9,  6 — vol.  1,  p.  453,  ed.  KrehL),  may  be  accounted  for  by  suppo- 
sing that  the  verb  was  originally  conjugated,  do,  dere,  didi,  dttum,  as  we 
have  it  in  the  compound  dedo  (de-do).     It  would  thus  have  belonged  at 

F 


62  INCREMENT    OP   VERBS. 

Virg.      His  lacrymis  vitam  damns,  et  miserescimus  ultro. 
Mart.     Mille  ddbam  numns  ;  noluit  accipere.     (Pentam.) 
Tibull.  Quamvis  magna  ddretj  quamvis  majora  ddturus. 
Virg.       Taurino  quantum  possent  circumddre  tergo, 
Ovid.     Multa  roorant  utenda  dari.  data  reddere  nolunt. 


Obs.  The  second  increase  of  do,  not  being  excepted,  fol- 
lows the  general  rule,  and  is  long;  as,  ddbdmuSj  ddbdtis, 
ddbdmur,  ddbdtur,  dabdmini. 

Virg.  Nam  quod  consilium,  aut  qu(B  jam  fortuna  ddbdtur. 


VERBAL    INCREMENT    IN    6. 

Rule.  The  vowel  e  is  long  in  the  increase  of  verbs ;  as, 
Jlebam,  rebar,  lacereris,  docerem,  legerunt. 

Ovid.  Flebat  Aristceus,  quod  apes  cum  stirpe  necatas. 
Virg.  Sic  equidem  ducebam  animo,  rebarque  futurum. 
Mart.  D<Bdale  Lucano  cum  sic  lacereris  ab  urso. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1 .  But  e  before  r  in  the  Jirst  increase  of  every  pres- 
ent and  imperfect  of  the  third  conjugation,  and  also  in 
the  terminations  beris  and  bere,  is  short ;  as,  cognos- 
cere,  legere,  legerem,  legeremus,  legeris,  celebraberiSf 
celebrabere. 

Virg.  Jam  legere,  et  qu<B  sit  poteris  cognoscere  virtus. 

Id.       Semper  honore  meo,  semper  celebrabere  donis. 


Obs.  1.  But  in  the  second  increment,  where  the  word 
terminates  in  reris  or  rere,  the  e  is  long ;  as,  diripereris, 
loquereris,  loquerere,  prosequerere. 
Ovid.     Cum  consternatis  diripereris  equis.     (Pentam.) 
Mart.     Hoc  tibi  Roma  caput,  cum  loquereris,  erat.  (Pentam.) 
Claud.  Jungebam  Phrygios,  cum  tu  raperere  leones. 

firit  to  iho  third  conjugation,  and  afterward  have  been  transferred  to 
the  first,  with  a  change  of  e  to  a.  Such  form»,  therefore,  as  circurnddrct 
vermmddre,  6lc.,  were  originally  oiroumdere,  venumdirtk 


i 


INCREMENT    OF   VERBS.  63 

Obs.  2.  The  forms  velim,  velis,  velitj  &c.,  have  the  e 
short. 

Herat.  Musa,  velim  memores  :  et  quo  patre  natus  uterque. 
Mart.     Esse  velis,  oro,  serus  conviva  Tonantis. 


Exc.  2.  The  vowel  e  before  ram,  rim,  ro,  of  every  con- 
jugation, is  short ;  as,  amaveram,  amaverim,  amavero  ; 
feceram,  fecerim,  fecero  ;  and  the  quantity  remains  the 
same  in  the  other  persons ;  as,  amaveris,  amaverit, 
amaverimus,  amaveritis  ;  fecerimus,  feceritis. 

Ovid.     Fecerat  exiguas  jam  sol  altissimus  umbras. 

Catull.  Dein  cum  millia  multa  fecerimus.     (Phalaecian.) 


Obs.  This  rule  does  not  apply  to  those  syncopated  tenses 
which  have  lost  the  syllable  ve  ;  2iS,  fleram,  fierim,  flero  ; 
the  e  in  these  contracted  forms  retaining  the  same  quantity 
which  it  possessed  previously  to  the  syncope  ;  viz.,^e(ve)- 
ram,  Jle{ve)rim,  JIe{ve)ro. 

Virg.    Implerunt  monies,  jlerunt  RhodopeicB  arces. 

Ovid.  Nerunt  fatales  fortia  fila  decB,     (Pentam.) 


Exc.  3.  The  poets  sometimes  shorten  e  before  runt,  in 
the  third  person  plural  of  the  perfect  indicative  active/ 
Virg.      Ohstupui,  steteruntque  comcB,  et  vox  faucihus  hcBsit. 
Id.  Matri  longa  decern  tulerunt  fastidia  menses. 

Herat.    Di  tihi  divitias  dederunt  artemque  ftuendi. 
TibuU.  Nee  cithara,  intonsce  prqfueruntve  comcB.    (Pentam.) 
Mart.      Nee  tua  defuerunt  verba  Thalasse  mihi.     (Pentam.) 
Sil.  It.    Terruerunt  pavidos  accensa  Ceraunia  nautas. 


VERBAL   INCREMENT  IN   I. 

Rule.  The  vowel  i  in  any  of  the  increments  of  verbs  is 
short,  whether  such  increment  be  the  first,  second,  third,  or 
fourth ;   as,  linqmmus,   amabimus,  docebimini,  audiebammiy 

1.  Consult  remark»  under  the  article  Systole,  page  127. 


64  INCREMENT    OP   VERBS. 

&c.,  and  veriimus,  comperimus^  reperimus,  &;c.,  of  the  per- 
fect tense. 

Virg.     Linqmmus  Ortygi<B  partus^  pelagoque  volamus, 

Horat.   Infra  se  positas ;  extinctus  amabttur  idem. 

Manil.    Victuros  agimus  semper,  nee  vivimus  unquam. 

Claud.    Vidimus,  expuUmus ;  facilis  jam  copia  regni. 

Plant.    Quapropter  id  vos  factum  suspicamini  ?    (Iamb.) 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  But  the  i  is  long  in  nolito,  nolite,  nolimus,  noUtis ; 
vellmus,  velitis ;    mallmus,  malltis ;    simus,  sitis ;   and 
their  compounds,  possimus,  adsimus,  proslmus,  &c. 
Mart.  Nolito  fronti  credere,  nupsit  heri.     (Pentam.) 
Calp.   Credere,  pastores,  levibus  noUte  puellis. 
Mart.  Ne  nimium  simus,  stultorum  more,  molesti» 
Calp.  Possitis,  ter  quisque  manus  jactate  micantes. 


Exc.  2.  The  penult  of  the  preterite  in  ivi,  of  any  conju- 
gation,  is  long  ;  as,  petlvi,  audivi. 
Virg.   Cessi,  et  sublato  montem  genitore  pettvi. 
Id.       Adventumque  pedum,  fatusque  audivit  equorum. 


Exc.  3.  In  the  first  increase  of  the  fourth  conjugation, 
whenever  a  consonant  immediately  follows,  the  i  is 
long ;  as,  audimuSf  audltis,  audtte,  audirem,  audire,  au- 
dimur,  auditur,  audirer,  auditor,  audiri ;  to  which  add 
the  contracted  form  of  the  imperfect,  audibam,  and  the 
old  form  of  the  future,  audibo,  which  we  uniformly 
find  in  Ibam  and  tbo,  from  eo,  as  well  as  in  qulbam  and 
quibo,  from  queo. 
Senec.     Audimur,  en,  en,  sonitus  Herculei  gradus.    (Iamb.) 
Virg.        Montibus  audiri  fragor,  et  resonantia  longe, 
Horat.     Alterius  sermone  meros  audiret  honores. 
Virg.        Ferre  rotam,  et  stabulo  frenos  audits  sonantes. 
Id.  Tu  ne  cede  malts  sed  contra  audentior  ito. 


INCREMENT   OF  VERBS.  ^ 

Virg.        Jungimus  hospitio  dextras^  et  tecta  subimus. 
'  Id.  Nutrlbat,  teneris  immulgens  uhera  labris. 

Propert.  Lentbunt  tacito  vulnera  nostra  sinu.     (Pentam.) 

Obs.  1.  Venimus,  comperimus^  reperimus,  &;c.,  of  the  pres- 
ent tense,  fall  under  the  previous  exception,  and  are  long ; 
whereas  vemmus,  compenmus,  repenmus,  «fee,  of  the  perfect 
tense,  have  the  penult  short,  as  has  been  mentioned,  ac- 
cording to  the  general  rule. 

Obs.  2.  When  a  vowel,  and  not  a  consonant,  immediately 
follows  the  i  in  the  first  increase  of  the  fourth  conjugation, 
the  i  becomes  necessarily  short  by  position  ;  as,  audiuntt 
audiebam,  audiam,  audiar,  audiens,  &;c. 

Obs.  3.  The  i  in  the  penult  of  the  first  and  second  per- 
sons plural  of  the  indicative  future  perfect,  or  second  future, 
and  the  perfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  doubtful.' 
Liicret.   Quas  ob  res  ubi  viderimus  nil  posse  creari. 
CatuU.    Dein  cum  millia  multa  fecerimus .    (Phalaecian.) 
Ovid.       Videritis  Stellas  illic  ubi  circulus  axem. 
Id.  H(RC  ubi  dixerttis,  serve t  sua  dona,  rogate. 

Id.  Accepisse  simul  vitam  dederttis  in  unda. 

Id.  Et  maris  Jonii  transierttis  aquas.     (Pentam.) 

Id.  Consulis  ut  limen  contigeritis,  erit.     (Pentam.) 

Virg.      Egerlmus,  nosti ;  et  nimium  meminisse  necesse  est. 

1.  We  have  given  the  rule  as  equally  applicable  to  both  the  indica- 
tive future  perfect  and  the  perfect  subjunctive.  It  holds  good,  however, 
more  certainly  of  the  former  than  the  latter  tense.  With  regard  to  the 
perfect  subjunctive,  it  is  frequently  impossible  to  distinguish  it  from  the 
future  perfect,  since  in  very  many  cases  where  the  one  is  employed,  a 
very  slight  modification  of  the  sense  would  render  the  use  of  the  other 
equally  appropriate.  The  only  example  discovered  by  prosodians  where 
this  tense  undoubtedly  occurs  in  such  a  position  as  to  determine  its 
quantity,  is  in  the  line  from  Virgil  cited  above,  and  which  is  found  in  Mn., 
6,  514. — The  old  grammarians  are  at  variance  on  this  subject.  Diome- 
des  (p.  331)  and  Agroetius  (p.  2267)  assert  that  the  penult  of  n'mw-s  and 
rilis  in  the  future  perfect  is  long,  and  in  the  perfect  subjunctive  is 
short.  Probus,  on  the  other  hand  (p.  1412 — p.  1434),  affirms  that  the 
syllable  is  long  in  both  tenses  ;  and  both  Probus  and  Servius  {ad  Virg., 
I.  c.)  expressly  declare,  that  the  penult  of  egerimus,  in  the  passage  quoted, 
was  shortened  by  Virgil  *•  meiri  necessitate."    {Voss.f  de  Art.  Gram.t 


2,  31.) 


F  2 


66  FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

VERBAL    INCREMENT    IN    0   AND    U. 

Rule.  In  the  increase  of  verbs  o  is  always  long,  but  u 
is  generally  short ;  as,  facitbte^  habetote ;  sumus^  possumus, 
volumus. 

Ovid.     Cumque  loqui  poterit,  matrem  facitote  salutet. 
Id.         Hinc  quoque  prcBsidium  Icbscb  petitote  figurm. 
Horat.  Nos  numerus  sumus,  et  fruges  consumere  nati. 
Virg.     Dicite,  Pierides  :  non  omnia  possumus  omnes. 
Horat.  Si  pairia  volumuSy  si  nobis,  vivere  cari. 


EXCEPTION. 

But  u  in  the  penult  of  the  future  participle  in  rus  is  al- 
ways long;  as,  perituruSjfacturuSj  amaturus. 
Virg.  Si  periturus  abis,  et  nos  rape  in  omnia  tecum. 
Id.        Tarda  venit,  seris  factura  nepotibus  umbram. 

SECTION  XXIII. 

FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

The  quantity  of  final  syllables  is  ascertained,  in  some 

cases,  by  position  ;  b.s,  prudens,  prcBcox  ;  in  others  by  their 

containing  a  diphthongal  sound ;  as,  mus<B,  penncB  ;  but  in 

most  by  special  rules,  which  follow. 


FINAL   a. 

Rule  1.  A  in  the  end  of  words  not  declined  by  cases  is 
long  ;  as,  circa,  citrd,  contra,  extra,  frustrd,  intra,  <fec. ;  to 
which  add  the  imperative  of  the  first  conjugation ;  as,  mem- 


ord,  amd} 


1.  In  imperatives  of  the  first  conjugation  the  final  a  is  long,  because 
formed  by  contraction  from  ae.  Thus,  memorde,  mcmord ;  amde,  amd, 
&c.  {Slruve,  iiber  die  Lat.  Declin.  und  Conj.,  p.  \'3f>.) — With  regard 
to  circa,  citra,  contra,  «Sec,  various  opinions  exist.  Scheller  views  them 
as  old  ablatives  singular  feminine  of  the  first  declension,  with  an  ellipsis 
of  parte,  or  ofcra,  or  some  other  equivalent  term.  {Scheller,  Lat.- 
Deutsch.  Worterb.y  s.  v.)  Ramsay,  on  the  other  hand,  regards  most 
of  them  as  old  imperatives  of  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  of  which 
frustro,  intra,  supero  (or  snpro),  are  still  in  use  ;  while,  as  respects  such 
forms  as  anted,  posted,  intered,  prater ed,  &c.,  he  agrees  with  the  author 


FINAL    SYLLABLES.  67 

Horat.  Circa  mite  solum  Tihuris  et  moBnia  Catili.    (Chori- 

ambic.) 
Ovid.     Dextera  diriguit,  nee  eitrd  mota,  nee  ultra, 
Virg.      Contra  non  ulla  est  oleis  eultura,  neque  ill<B. 
Horat.   Laudet  ametque  domi,  premat  extra  limen  iniquus. 
Id.  Frustra,  nam  scopulis  surdior  Icari.    (Choriambic.) 

Virg.      Musa,  mihi  causas  memora ;  quo  numine  1<bso. 
Plaut.    Si  auctoritatem  posted  defugeris.     (Iambic.)* 


EXCEPTIONS. 

But  eid,  itd,putd^  (the  adverb),  and  quidf^  have -the  final 
vowel  short ;  and  also  the  names  of  letters ;  as,  alphdj 
beta,  &c.,  which  latter  follow  the  quantity  of  the  Greek. 

Val.  Flac.  Ferret  ad  aurigercB  caput  arboris :  Eia  per  ipsum. 

Virg.  Incolimus  ;  sed  vos,  sifert  itd  corde  voluntas. 


of  a  paper  in  the  "  Journal  of  Education"  (vol.  1,  p.  106),  who  supposes 
them  to  be  formed  from  ante  earn,  post  earn,  &c.,  the  correlatives  ante- 
guam,  postquam,  still  retaining  the  final  letter.  (Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros., 
p.  38.) 

1.  Posted  occurs  with  the  final  vowel  short  in  Ovid  {Fast.,  1,  165) ; 
but  the  difficulty  may  be  obviated  either  by  writing  post  ed,  or  by  pro- 
nouncing the  word  as  a  dissyllable,  postyd,  making  it,  in  this  latter  case, 
have  the  long  final  vowel. 

2.  Putd  is  short  only  when  taken  adverbially.  When  it  stands  as  an 
imperative  the  a  is  long.  Some  doubt,  however,  has  been  attempted  to 
be  thrown  upon  the  quantity  of  the  final  letter  in  puta  when  an  adverb. 
It  is  found  short  in  Persius  (4,  9),  and  also  in  Martial  (3,  26,  5 ;  9,  96, 
5 ;  11,  95,  2),  in  accordance  with  the  exception  in  the  text,  and  it  has  been 
allowed  to  stand  by  several  editors,  where  others  have  given  puto.  Ca- 
saubon  and  Konig,  for  example,  retain  putd  in  the  text  of  Persius,  and 
Priscian,  the  ancient  grammarian,  as  cited  by  the  former,  observes,  "Ita 
solum  a  correptum  habet,  quamvis  quidam  puta  adverbium  esse  accipiunt, 
ideoque  Persium  id  corripuisse,  ut,  hoc,  puta,  non  justum,"  etc.  {Prise., 
lib.  15 — vol.  1,  p.  617,  ed.  Krehl.)  Servius  likewise,  in  his  commentary 
on  Virgil  {JEn.,  2,  651 — vol.  1,  p.  167,  ed.  Lion),  after  observing  that 
adverbs  in  a  are  long,  expressly  excepts  putd  and  itd.  Still,  in  all  the 
instances  cited  above,  many  MSS.  give  puto,  which  leaves  the  matter 
involved  in  some  degree  of  uncertainty. 

3.  Dr.  Carey,  on  the  authority  of  a  single  line  in  Phsedrus,  pronounces 
the  final  vowel  in  quia  doubtful.  The  hne  is  as  follows  :  "  Ego  primam 
tollo  nominor  quid  leo.''''  {Phcedr.,  1,  7.)  But  almost  all  editors  agree 
in  considering  the  line  corrupt,  and  most  of  them  read  "  Ego  prinuim 
tollo  quoniam  nominor  leo." 


68  FINAL   SYLLABLES. 

Virg.  Sed  quia  non  aliter  vires  dabit  omnibus  aquas. 

Juv.  Hoc  discunt  omnes  ante  Alpha  et  Beta  puellds. 

Rule  2.  A  in  the  end  of  words  declined  by  cases  is 
short,  except  the  ablative  singular  of  the  first  declension, 
and  Greek  vocatives  from  nominatives  in  as ;  as,  anckoroj 
de  prora,  jEned,  Palla,} 

Virg.  Anchord  de  prord  jacitur ;  slant  littore  puppes. 
Id.       Quid  miserumy  jEned,  laceras  ?  jam  parce  sepulto. 


Obs.  1.  Greek  names  in  es  and  e  are  frequently  changed 
by  the  Latins  into  a ;  as,  Atridd  for  Atrides ;  Orestd  for 
Orestes ;  Circa  for  Circe.  In  nouns  of  this  class,  the  final 
a  in  the  vocative  is  short .^ 

Obs.  2.  Some  prosodians  make  the  final  a  in  numerals 
either  long  or  short.  The  true  quantity,  however,  is  the 
long  one  ;  as,  trigintd^  quadragintd,  sexagintd.^ 


FINAL    e. 

Rule.  E  final  is  for  the  most  part  short;  as,  nate.fuge, 
eripCj  ille,  sine,  pcBne^  Szc. 

1.  The  final  a  in  the  ablative  singular  of  the  first  declension  is  long, 
because  contracted  from  ai.  The  old  dative  and  ablative  singular  of  the 
first  declension  had  this  latter  ending ;  as,  terrai  for  terra ;  terra'i  for  terra. 
{Plank  ad  Enn.,  Med.,  p.  80.— Gru/cr,  Inscr.,  2,  12.— 7rf.,  Ind.,  p.  84.) 

2.  The  short  a  in  these  fornris  is  obtained  from  the  ^olic  d  (Com- 
pare the  Greek  forms  vefeXijyep^Td,  InrcoTd,  evpvoTra,  and  the  Latin 
poetd,  from  ttoi^ttj^.)  In  Virgil  (vEn  ,  3,  475)  we  have  Anchisd  in  the 
vocative,  which  some  deduce  from  a  Doric  nominative  Anchisas.  It  is 
better,  however,  to  ascribe  the  length  of  the  final  vowel,  in  this  instance, 
to  the  force  of  the  caesura  or  arsis. 

3.  To  support  the  position  that  the  final  a  in  numerals  is  common,  the 
following  line  from  Manilius  has  been  adduced  :  "  Tcr  trigintd  quadrum 
partes  per  sidera  reddant.'*  (Manil.,  2,  322.)  Bentley,  however,  in- 
sists that  the  reading  here  is  erroneous,  especially  since  triginta  occurs 
six  lines  lower  down,  in  the  same  poet,  with  the  final  vowel  long.  In 
all  the  oldest  MSS.  of  the  classics,  numbers  were  expressed  by  marks, 
not  by  words  ;  hence,  when  the  transcriber  found  LXXXX  in  his  copy, 
he  ignorantly,  according  to  the  English  critic,  rendered  it  by  tcr  triginta 
instead  of  nongenta,  which  latter  reading  Bentley  of  course  restores. 
Some  other  examples  of  numerals  with  the  short  final  vowel  arc  adduced 
from  Martial  and  Ausonius,  but  the  MSS.  here  give  different  Yeadingt. 
The  rule,  therefore,  laid  down  above  is  undoubtedly  the  true  one. 


FINAL    SYLLABLES.  69 

Virg.  Heu  fuge,  nate  Dea,  teque  his  ait  eripe  Jlammis. 
Id.       Ille  mihi  ante  alios  fortunatusque  lahorum. 
Id.       Queis  sine  nee  potuere  seri  nee  surgere  messes. 
Id.       PtBne  simul  tecum  solatia  rapta  Menalca, 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  E  final  is  long  in  all  cases  of  the  first  and  fifth 
declensions ;  as,  JEgle,  Thisbe,  Melpomene,  die,  fide, 
fame,  re ;  and  in  adverbs  derived  from  the  latter  ;  as, 
liodie^  pridie,  quare,  &c.' 

Virg.     JEgle  Ndiadum  pulcherrima,  jamque  videnti. 

Ovid.    Saspe  ut  constiterant,  hinc  Thisbe,  Pyramus  ilUnc. 

Horat.   Quern  tu  Melpomene  semel.     (Choriambic.) 

Virg.     Forte  die  solemnem  illo  rex  Areas  honorem. 

Id.         Libra  die  somnique  pares  ubi  fecerit  horas. 

Horat.  Effare ;  jussas  cum  fide  pcKnas  luam.     (Iambic.) 

Virg.     Amissis,  ut  fama,  apibus  morboque  fameque. 

Id.         Pro  re  pauca  loquor  ;  nee  ego.hanc  abscondere  furto, 

Horat.  Muneribus  servos  corrumpam ;  nan  hodie  si. 

Id.  Quare  per  divos  oraius  uterque  penates. 

1.  The  final  e  is  long  in  all  cases  of  nouns  of  the  first  declension,  be- 
cause answering  to  the  Greek  rj.  It  is  long  in  all  cases  of  the  fifth  de- 
clension, because  it  is  a  contracted  syllable.  {Schneider,  L.  G.,  vol.  3, 
p.  3.55,  seqq.) — Under  this  same  exception  falls  the  ablative /cwie  (Virg., 
JEn.,  6,  421),  the  noun  fames  having  been,  according  to  Aulus  Gellius 
(9,  14),  originally  of  the  fifth  declension, /ame5,/ama;  \\ke  plebes,  ple- 
bei. — The  vocatives  Ulysse  and  Achille  have  also  the  final  e  long.  These 
are  Greek  forms.  The  ^Eolo-Doric  tribes  changed  the  termination  evg 
into  Tjg,  and  said  'Op<pjj^  for  'Opcpevg,  'Odvaarjc  for  'Odvaaevg,  'Kxil'krjg 
for  'A;t;aAei;?,  &c.  (Maitlaire,  Gr.  D.,  p.  183.)  The  Latins,  in  imi- 
tation of  these,  used  Ulysses  and  Achilles,  with  some  others,  as  nouns 
of  the  third  declension,  making  in  the  vocative  Ulysse,  Achille,  &c., 
with  the  final  e  long,  because  answering  to  the  Greek  ij.  Another  Latin 
form,  and  one  of  more  frequent  recurrence  in  poetry,  is  that  in  eiis,  of 
the  second  declension  ;  as,  Ulysseus,  Achilleiis,  making  in  the  genitive 
Ulysse'i,  AcUllei,  contracted  into  Ulyssi,  Achilli.  The  vocative  of  such 
a  form  will  be  Ulyssee,  Achillee.  We  may  suppose  Achille,  in  Proper- 
tius  (4,  11,  40),  to  be  formed  from  it  by  apocope,  if  we  retain  the  com- 
mon reading,  "  Quique  tuas  proavus,  /regit,  Achille,  domosV  But 
Heyne  has  given  the  true  lection :  "  Qui  tumidas  proavo  /regit  Achille 
domos,''^  which  makes  Achille  the  ablative,  with  the  final  vowel  short,  as 
a  matter  of  course.     (Heyne  ad  Mn.,  6,  840.) 


70  FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

Exc.  2.  E  final  is  long  in  the  contracted  nominative  and 
accusative  plural  of  the  third  declension,  in  words 
transplanted  from  the  Greek;  as,  ccte,  mele,  pelage, 
tempe,  &c.,  the  plural  vowel  in  such  words  answering 
to  the  Greek  eta,  or  long  e.^ 

Sil.  Ital.  Dum  cete  ponto  innahunt,  dum  sidera  ccrIo. 

Lucret.     At  Musma  mele  per  chordas  organici  qum. 

Id.  At  pelage  multa  et  late  substrata  videmus. 

Catull.      Tempe  qucB  sUvcb  cingunt  super  impendentes. 


Exc.  3.  Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  have  e  final 
long  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative 
active  ;  as,  gaude,  salve,  vale,  &;c.  But  cave  has  the 
last  syllable  either  long  or  short.^ 

Propert.  Gaude,  quod  nulla  est  (Bque  formosa,  doleres. 

Virg.        Salve  magna  parens  frugum,  Saiurnia  iellus. 

Id.  Cat.    Vale,  Sabine,  jam  valete  formosi.     (Scazon.) 


Horat.      Cave,  cave  !  namque  in  malos  asperrimus.  (Iambic.) 
Id.  Tu  cave  ne  minuas,  tu  ne  majus  facias  id. 

Ovid.        Neu  cave  defendas,  quamvis  mordebere  dictis. 


Exc.  4.  Adverbs  in  e,  formed  from  adjectives  in  us,  have 
the  final  e  long;  as,  placide, probe,  late,  longe,  <fcc.,  ex- 
cept bene,  male,  inferne,  and  superne. 

1.  Thus,  KTjTta,  contracted  ktjtti  ;  fisT^ea^  fieXij ;  neXdyea,  iztXdyrj ; 
Te/xirea,  Tefiirri,  &c. 

2.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  present  imperative  active,  in 
verbs  of  the  second  conjugation,  is,  like  the  corresponding  tense  in  verbs 
of  the  first,  a  contracted  form.  Thus,  gaudee,  gaude  ;  salvee,  salve ; 
valec,  vale,  &c. — The  double  quantity  in  cave  or  cavB  arises  from  the 
following  circumstance,  that  anciently  two  forms  of  the  verb  were  in  use, 
one  belonging  to  the  second,  and  the  other  lo  the  third  conjugation ;  just 
as  we  find  both  fcrvco  and  fcrvo ;  fulgeo  and  fulgo ;  oleo  and  olo,  &c. 
{Struve,  ixbcr  die  Lat.  Decl.,  &c.,  p.  189. — Voss.,  de  Art.  Gramm.,  2, 
25.)— Besides  cave  or  cave,  we  find  it  frequently  asserted  that  vale,  vide, 
responde,  and  salve  have  the  last  syllable  common  ;  but  it  will  be  dis- 
covered, on  examination,  that  there  is  little,  if  any,  evidence  to  prove 
this.  The  question  will  bo  found  disoussed  in  Ramsay's  Latin  Pros- 
ody, p.  44,  scqq. 


FINAL   SYLLABLES.  71 

Mart.  Excipe  sollicitos  placide,  mea  dona,  libellos. 

Catull.  Suffenus  iste,  Vare,  quern  probe  nosti.     (Scazon.) 

Virg.  DirectcBque  acies,  et  late  fluctuat  omnis. 

Juv.  JEquora  transiliet,  sed  longe  Calpe  relicta. 


Virg.  Si  bene  quid  de  te  merui,fuit  aut  tihi  quidquam. 

Id.  Insequitur,  cumulosque  ruit  male  pinguis  arena.. 

Lucret.  Ne  tibi  sit  fraudi  quod  nos  inferne  videmus. 

Id.  Remorum  recta  est,  et  recta  superne  guberna. 


But  adjectives  neuter  of  the  third  declension,  used  as  ad- 
verbs, retain  the  final  e  short ;  as,  sublime,  suave,  dulce^ 
facile,  &c. 

Virg.   Cantantes  sublime  ferent  ad  sidera  cycni. 
Id.       Ipse  sed  in  pratis  aries,jam  suave  rubenti. 

Exc.  5.  The  adverbs  ferme,  fere,  and  ohe  have  the  final 
vowel  long.  Fere,  however,  has  the  last  short  in  the 
later  writers. 

Juv.        Rarus  enim  ferme  sensus  communis  in  ilia. 

Horat.    Vina  fere  dulces  oluerunt  mane  CamcencB. 

Id.  Importunus  amat  laudari  donee  ohe  jam. 

Auson.  Nam  tecum  fere  totus  ero  quocumque  recedam. 


Exc.  6.  Monosyllables  in  e  are  also  long ;  as,  de,  me,  te, 
se,  and  ne  (lest  or  not) ;  except  the  enclitics  que,  ve, 
ne,  and  the  syllabic  additions  pte,  ce,  te,  de  ;  as,  in  su. 
apte,  nostrapte,  hosce,  tute,  quamde.^ 

Virg,  De  ccdo  tactas  memini  pratdicere  quercus. 

Id.       Me  me,  adsum  qui  feci ;  in  me  convertite  ferrum. 

1.  The  lengthening  of  monosyllahles  which  consist  of,  or  terminate  in 
a  vowel,  depends  upon  an  established  principle  of  metrical  harmony,  since 
they  would  be  nearly  lost  in  the  reading  if  the  voice  did  not  dwell  upon 
them,  and  make  them  necessarily  long.  In  the  case  of  enclitics  and  syl- 
labic additions,  however,  the  principle  does  not  apply.  These  are  con- 
nected so  closely  with  the  preceding  word,  that  they  form  but  one  word 
with  it  in  the  rapidity  of  pronunciation,  and  are  no  longer  considered  as 
separate  monosyllables. 


72  PmAL    SYLLABLES. 

Virg.  Te  veniente  die,  te  decedente  canehat. 

Id.  Ne  pueri,  ne  tanta  animis  adsuescite  hella. 

Id.  Arma  virumque  cano,  TrojcB  qui  primus  ah  oris. 

Id.  Si  quis  in  adversum  rapiat,  casusve  Deusve. 

Id.  Tantane  vos  generis  tenuit  Jlducia  vestri  ? 

Enn.  O  Tite  tute  Tati  tibi  tanta  tyranne  tulisti. 


FINAL  i  and  y. 
Rule.  I  final  is  for  the  most  part  long ;   as,  frumentt, 
scrihendi,  nulli,  partiri,  Jierl,  &c. 

Virg.        Paullatim  et  sulcis  frumenti  quasreret  herbam. 
Horat.      Garrulus,  atque  piger  scrihendi  ferre  laborem. 
Propert.  NulU  cura  fuit  externos  qumrere  divos. 
Virg.        Ne  signare  quidem  aut  partiri  limite  campum. 
Id.  Pastores,  mandat  fieri  sibi  talia  Daphnis. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  I  final  is  short  in  nisi  and  quasi.^ 

Virg.  Nee  veni,  nisi  fata  locum  sedemque  dedissent. 
Ovid.  Quid  quasi  natali  cum  poscit  munera  libo. 


Exc.  2.  The  final  i  and  y  are  short  in  Greek  neuters ; 
as,  gummt,  sinapi^  moly ;  in  the  dative  singular  of  Greek 
nouns  ;  as,  Palladi,  Thetidi,  Phyllidi ;  in  Greek  voca- 
tives ;  as,  Adorn,  Alexi,  Tiphy,  Tethy,  chely  (but  not 
in  Tethy,  the  contracted  dative  for  Tethyi) ;  and  in 
datives  and  ablatives  plural  in  si ;  as,  heroist,  Dryastf 
Troasi^ 

1.  Quasi  occurs  with  the  i  long  in  Lucretius  (2,  291,  and  5,  728), 
and  in  Avienus  {Phccn.,  554,  1465,  1567,  1654);  but  the  final  vowel 
in  all  these  instances  may  be  considered  as  made  long  by  the  arsis,  es- 
pecially since  we  find  quasi  twice  in  Lucretius  (4,  1011,  and  6,  972). — 
Nisi  also  has  the  final  vowel  long  in  the  following  Phaleecian  line  from 
Statius  (Sylv.,  4,  3,  59) :  "  His  parvus,  Lcchice  nisi  vetarent ;"  but  the 
MSS.  here  are  hopelessly  corrupt,  and  scarcely  two  editors  read  the  pas- 
sage in  the  same  way.  The  Bipont  edition  has  *^  His  parvus,  Lecheo 
nihil  vetante,^^  which  is  retained  in  that  of  Lemaire. 

2.  It  often  happens  that  in  such  Greek  datives  as  Thetidi,  PdrtcR, 
T^nddndi,  <Stc.,  the  final  vowel  is  lengthened  by  the  arsis,  since  other- 


t'INAL   SYLLABLES.  73 

Ovid.  Moly  vocant  superi ;  nigra  radice  tenetur. 

Stat.    Palladi  litorec^  celehrahat  Scyros  honorem. 

Ovid.  Semper  Adorn,  mei,  repetitaque  mortis  imago. 

Id.        Quid  tibi  cum  patria,  navita  Tiphy,  mea.     (Pentam.) 

Id.        Troasin  invideo,  qucB  si  lacrymosa  suorum.^ 


Exc.  3.  In  mihi^  tibi,  sibi,  ibi,  and  ubi,  the  final  i  is  com- 
mon.* 

Virg.     Nan  miht  si  lingucB  centum  sint,  oraque  ceMum. 

Id.  Tros  Tyriusque  miht  nullo  discrimine  agetur. 

Id.         Hand  obscura  cadens  mittet  tibt  signa  Bootes. 

Id.  Cuncta  tibl  Cererem  pubes  agrestis  adoret. 

Id.         Jam  sibi  turn  curvis  male  temperat  unda  carinis. 

Herat.  Quanto  quisque  sibi  plura  negaverit.     (Choriambic.) 

Virg.     Aut  ibijiava  seres  mutato  sidere  farra. 

Id.  Ter  conatus  ibi  collo  dare  brachia  circum. 

Id.         Nosque  uhi  primus  equis  oriens  affiavit  anhelis. 

Horat.  Instar  veris  enim  vultus  uhi  tuus.     (Choriambic.) 

Obs.  1.  The  quantity  of  the  final  vowel  in  uti  is  involved 
in  some  uncertainty.  Most  prosodians  make  it  long,  a 
quantity  which  it  is  always  found  to  possess ;  and  so,  too, 
it  is  always  long  in  veluti.     If,  however,  any  stress  is  to  be 

wise  forms  like  these  could  not  find  a  place  (on  account  of  their  containing 
three  short  syllables  in  succession)  in  dactylic  verse.  Instances  of  such 
lengthening  occur  in  Catullus  (64,  21),  Propertius  (3,  8,  29,  seq.),  Va- 
lerius Flaccus  (1,  190),  Ovid  {Heroid.,  20,  60),  Id.  {R.  A.,  711),  &c. 

1.  In  this  example,  the  n  added  to  Troasi  is  placed  there  merely  to 
prevent  the  hiatus  at  the  meeting  of  the  two  vowels,  and  makes  no  dif- 
ference whatever  in  the  quantity.  It  is  like  the  v  k(pe7iKVGTiKov  of  the 
Greeks. 

2.  These  words  originally  ended  in  the  diphthong  ei,  as  mihei,  tibei, 
sibei,  ibei,  ubei,  and  under  this  shape  they  are  frequently  found  in  inscrip- 
tions (compare  note  1,  page  16)  and  MSS.,  especially  those  of  Lucre- 
tius. One  of  the  vowels  of  the  diphthong  being  subsequently  dropped, 
they  would  sometimes  appear  as  mihe,  tibe,  sibe,  &c.,  and  sometimes  as 
mihi,  tibi,  sibi,  &c.  In  the  former  case,  the  final  e  being  short  in  Latin 
words,  except  under  particular  circumstances,  the  last  syllable  would  be 
made  short  by  the  poets ;  in  the  latter  case,  the  final  i  being  long  in 
Latin  words,  the  syllable  would  retain  its  original  quantity,  as  it  probably 
always  did  in  prose.     {Ramsai/s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  50.) 

G 


74  FINAL   SYLLABLES. 

laid  upon  the  fact  that  the  t  is  always  short  in  sicuttj  uti- 
nam,  and  utique,  the  final  vowel  in  uti  ought  rather  to  be 
regarded  as  common. 

Obs.  2.  In  necubi,  sicuhi,  uhinam,  and  uhivis,  the  i  of  ubi 
is  always  short ;  but  if  we  are  to  be  guided  by  the  quantity 
of  the  final  letter  of  ubi  out  of  composition,  as  also  by  the 
circumstance  of  the  i  being  long  in  ublque  ("  everywhere'')/ 
but  common  in  ubicunque,  we  shall,  in  all  probability,  be 
more  correct  in  making  the  i  of  ubi  common  also  in  the 
compounds  first  mentioned. 

Exc.  4.  Cut,  when  a  dissyllable,  generally  has  the  i 
short. 
Sen.    Mittat  et  donet  cmcumque  terns.     (Sapphic.) 
Mart.  Sed  norunt  cm  serviunt  hones.     (Phalaecian.) 
Id.       Drusorum  cm  contigere  barbcs.         (Ditto.) 
Id.       Et  credit  cm  Postumilla  dives.         (Ditto.) 


Obs.  Cui  is  commonly  considered  as  forming  a  mono- 
syllable in  poetry.  Instances,  however,  occur,  in  which 
it  may  be  regarded  as  a  dissyllable,  even  in  hexameter 
verse,  without  any  injury  to  the  metre,  but  with  advantage, 
rather,  to  the  smoothness  and  harmony  of  the  line ;  as  in 
the  following,  among  others  : 

Juv.     Cantabat  patriis  in  montibus :  et  cm  non  tunc. 
Virg.  At  puer  Ascanius  cm  nunc  cognomen  lulo. 
Id.      Munera  vestra  cano.     Tuque  O  cm  prima  ferentem. 
Id.       Incipe  parve  puer  :  cm  non  risere  parentes, 

FINAL  o. 

Rule.  O  final  is  common,  though  more  generally  long 
than  short. 

Herat.    Quando  pauperiem,  missis  ambagibus,  horres. 
Mart.     Quando  morce  dukes,  longusque  a  CcRsare  pulvis. 
Virg.     Praterea  duo  nee  tuta  mihi  valle  reperti, 

1.  CouBult  note  6,  page  46. 


FINAL   SYLLABLES.  75 

Auson.  Europam  Asiamque  duo  vel  maxima  terr<B. 

Mart.      Capto  tuam,  pudet  heu  !  sed  captb  Pont\ce  ccenam. 

Gall.       Obruta  Virgo  jacet :  servat  quoque  nomina  turns, 

Ovid.      Victa  jacet  pietas ;  et  virgo  cmde  madentes. 

Mart.     Miscuit,  Elysium  possidet  amho  nemus.     (Pentam.) 

Virg.     Amho  jlorentes  <Btatibus,  Arcades  amho, 

Obs.  1.  O  final  in  nominatives  of  the  third  declension  is, 
with  very  few  exceptions,  long  in  the  writers  of  the  Augus- 
tan age  and  their  predecessors.  In  proper  names,  how- 
ever, o  final  is  common  even  in  the  best  writers ;  as.  Car' 
thago,  Pollio,  Scipio,  Curio,  Vinio.^ 

Obs.  2.  O  final  in  verbs  is  very  rarely  shortened  by  wri- 
ters of  the  Augustan  age  and  their  predecessors,  except  in 
scio,  nescio,  puto,  volo,  which  are  for  the  most  part  used 
parenthetic  ally  .^ 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  All  cases  in  o  of  Greek  noyns,  written  in  the 
original  with  an  o-mega,  or  long  o,  have  the  final  vow- 
el long ;  as,  nominative,  lo,  Ino,  Clio ;  genitive,  An- 
droged ;  accusative,  Atho,  Clotho,  &c. 

Propert.  Id  versa  caput  primos  mugiverat  annos. 

Auson.     Clio  gesta  canens  transactis  tempora  reddit. 

Virg.        In  foribus  letum  Androged  :  tum  pendere  pcenas. 

Pedo.       Quondam  ego  tentavi  Clothoque  duasque  sorores, 

1.  It  was  not  until  the  age  of  Lucan  that  the  practice  of  shortening  o 
final  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension  became  general.  In  the  writings 
of  this  poet  we  find  cardo,  pulmo,  tiro,  turbo,  &c. ;  and  in  Martial  and 
bis  contemporaries  it  is  perhaps  oftener  short  than  long.  {Ramsay^s 
Lat.  Pros.,  p.  55.) 

2.  No  example  occurs  in  Lucretius,  Virgil,  or  in  the  Odes  of  Horace, 
of  the  final  o  in  a  verb  being  left  short,  except  in  scio  and  nescio,  which, 
as  well  as  puto,  volo,  rogo,  credo,  do  not  form  real  exceptions,  for  these 
words  were  either  used  parenthetically,  or  in  colloquial  formulae  enun- 
ciated rapidly. — The  shortening  of  the  final  o  in  verbs  is  very  rare  in 
Catullus,  in  TibuUus,  in  Propertius,  and  in  Ovid  ;  it  gradually  becomes 
more  common  in  the  writers  who  follow  them,  and  when  we  come  down 
to  the  age  of  Statius  and  Martial  it  is  to  be  found  on  every  page.  {Raith- 
gay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  56. — Lennep  ad  Ov.,  Ep.,  15,  33.X 


W  PINAL   SYLLABLES. 

Exo.  2.  Monosyllables  in  o  are  long ;  as,  0,  d5,  sto^  prOf 

Virg.  0  <?ecw^,  o  fames  merito  pars  maxima  nostrcB. 
Id.       Do  quod  vis ;  et  me  victusque  volensque  remitto. 
Id.      Pro  molli  viola,  pro  purpurea  narcisso. 


Exc.  3.  O  final  is  long  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singu- 
lar of  the  second  declension  ;  as,  viroj  vento,  auroysic- 
CO,  &,c.^ 

Virg.        Cut  se  pulchra  viro  dignetur  jungere  Dido. 

Ovid.       Nutritur  vento,  vento  restinguitur  ignis, 

Propert.  Auro  pulsa  fides,  auro  venalia  jura. 

Virg.        In  sicco  ludunt  fulic<B  ;  notasque  paludes. 

Exc.  4.  O  final  in  the  gerund  is  perhaps  never  found 
short,  except  in  writers  subsequent  to  the  Augustan 
age.^ 

Virg.      Frigidus  in  pratis  cantando  rumpitur  anguis. 

Ovid.     JEt  voluisse  mori,  et  moriendo  ponere  sensus. 

Juv.       Plurimus  hie  <Bger  moritur  vigilando,  sed  ilium. 

Auson.  Qu<B  nosti  meditando  velis  inolescere  menti. 


Exc.  5.  Adverbs  formed  from  adjectives  have  the  final  o 
for  the  most  part  long ;  as,  multo,  rarOf  crebro,  consul' 
to,  &,c.* 

1.  Compare  note  1,  page  71. 

2.  The  linal  vowel  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singular  of  the  second 
declension  is  the  result  of  contraction,  and  therefore  long.  The  primi- 
tive termination  was  oi.     {Struve,  iiber  Declin.,  &c.,  p.  14.) 

3.  Two  passages  oppose  this  doctrine,  which,  however,  is  generally 
recognised  by  scholars.  One  is  from  TibuUus  (3,  6,  3)  :  "  Aufer  et 
ipse  meum  pariter  medicando  dolorein,^*  where  Heyne  reads  medicande, 
from  Broukhusius.  Dissen  also  gives  this  same  lection.  On  the  whole 
question  respecting  the  shortening  of  the  final  syllable  in  gerunds,  consult 
Heyne  ad  TibulL,  I.  c. — Broukhus.  ad  TibulL,  I.  c. — Heins.ad  Ov.,  Ep., 
9,  125. —  Burmannad  Anthol.  Lat.,  vol.  1,  p.  298. — Perizon.  ad  Sanct. 
Min.,  vol.  1,  p.  148,  ed.  Bauer. — Ramsay^s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  57. 

4.  These,  in  fact,  retain  the  quantity  of  the  dative  singuiar,  from  which 
they  are  formed. 


FINAL    SYLLABLES.  77 

Juv.      Pcena  autem  vekemens,  et  multo  scBvior  illis. 
Ovid.    Adde  quod  iste  tuus,  tarn  raro  prtBlia  passus. 
Horat.  Est  mihi  purgatam  crehro  qui  personet  aurem. 
Id.         Extenuantis  eas  consulto  ;  ridiculum  acri. 


Exc.  6.  O  final  is  never,  perhaps,  found  short  in  ergo, 
ideo,  immo,  porro,  postremo,  sero,  vero,  except  in  writers 
subsequent  to  the  Augustan  age.' 
Virg.        Ergo  non  hiemes  illam,  non  fiabra  neque  imhres. 
Horat.      Ergo  Quintilium  perpetuus  sopor.     (Choriambic.) 
Propert.  Ergo  velocem  potuit  domuisse  puellam. 
Ovid.       Ergo  dum  Stygio  sub  terris  gurgite  labor, 
Lucan.     Ergo  pari  veto  gessisti  bella  juventus. 
Juv.         Impune  ergo  mihi  recitaverit  ille  togatas. 
Mart.       Sed  tamen  esse  tuus  dicitur,  ergo  potest.  (Pentam.) 
Horat.      Ac  ne  me  foliis  ideo  brevioribus  ornes. 
Mart.       An  ideo  tantum  veneras  ut  eocires  1     (Scazon.) 
CatuU.     Frustra  ?  immo  magno  cumpretio  atque  malo.  (Pent.) 
Mart.       Adeo  bene  emit  1  inquis :  immo  non  solvit.  (Scazon.) 
Id.  Vendere,  nil  debet,  fcenerat  immo  magis.    (Pent.) 

CatuU.     Sed  dicam  vobis,  vos  porro  dicite  multis. 

1.  Some  of  the  ancient  grammarians,  and  almost  all  the  modern  ones, 
make  ergo,  when  it  signifies  "  on  account  of,''^  have  the  final  syllable 
long,  and  short  when  it  means  "  ihereforey  The  distinction  does  not 
appear  to  be  a  correct  one,  for  the  two  meanings  are  in  fact  the  same, 
and  the  word  in  either  case  is  merely  epycj,  the  dative  of  epyov.  The 
line  quoted  by  Dr.  Carey,  from  the  Ciris,  to  prove  that  ergo,  *'  therefore," 
occurs  in  good  writers  with  the  final  syllable  short,  cannot  be  received 
as  authority,  since  the  Ciris,  which  few  suppose  to  have  been  the  work 
of  Virgil,  is  notorious  for  its  corrupt  text.  The  line  is  as  follows :  "  Ergo 
metu  capiti  Scylla  est  inimica  paterno^^  (v.  386).  Barth  reads  **  Ergo 
turn  capiti,'^  and  Heinsius  "  Ergo  iterum  capiti,"  which  latter  emenda- 
tion is  adopted  by  Heyne.  The  passage  sometimes  cited  from  Proper- 
tius  (3,  7,  1),  *'  Ergone  sollicitcR  tu  causa,  pecunia,  vitce  es,"  is  given  in 
the  best  MSS.  and  editions  as  follows ;  '<  Ergd  sollicitcs  tu  causa,  pecu- 
nia, vitcE.  es."  One  instance,  however,  occurs  in  Ovid  (Her.,  5,  59), 
where  ergo  has  the  o  short,  according  to  the  received  reading.  It  is  as 
follows ;  "  Votis  ergo  meis  alii  rediture  redisti."  It  is  very  probable, 
however,  that  some  error  lurks  here  in  the  text,  since  Ovid  everywhere 
else  makes  the  final  syllable  of  ergo  long.  {Heins.  ad  Ov.,  Trist.,  1, 1, 
87. — Ramsay'' s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  58.) 

G  2 


T8  PINAL   SYLLABLES. 

Juv,  Multos  porro  vides,  quos  s<Bpe  elusus,  ad  ipsum. 

Id.  Et  Scauros  et  Fabricios  postremo  severos. 

Tibull.  Heu  sero  revocatur  amor  seroque  juventus. 

Juv.  H(BC  animo  ante  tubas.     Galeatum  sero  duelli. 

Mart.  Sero  dedit  paenas.     Discerpi  noxia  mater. 

Virg.  Hie  vero  victus  genitor  se  tollit  ad  auras.  ■'-' 

Stat.  Tu  potior,  Thebane,  queri,  nos  vero  volentes. 

Exc.  7.  O  final  is  always  short  in  the  following  words 
in  good  writers  :  cito,  ego,^  modo  the  adverb,  and  its 
compounds  dummodo,  postmodo,  quomodo,  tantummodo^ 
together  with  the  numeral  octo. 

Herat.     Quicquid  prmcipies  esto  brevis,  ut  cito  dicta. 

Ovid.      Nee  cito  credideris,  quantum  cito  credere  Imdat. 

Yirg.       S(Bpe  ego  J  quumflavis  messorem  induceret  arvis. 

Lucret,  Non  modo  non  omnem  possit  durare  per  <Bvom. 

Virg.       Hie  inter  densas  corulos  modo  namque  gemellos. 

1.  Ego  is  said  to  have  the  final  o  common.  "  The  fact,  however,  is," 
observes  Ramsay, "  that  there  are  many  hundred  instances,  in  writers  of  all 
ages,  in  which  ego  is  found  with  the  last  short,  and  three  or  four  at  most, 
in  decent  metrical  authotities,  where  it  is  found  long ;  but  even  here,  in  ev- 
ery case,  if  I  mistake  not,  under  suspicious  circumstances. — It  may  serve 
to  set  at  rest  the  question  with  regard  to  the  final  o  in  ego  and  modo  (the 
adverb),  if  I  state  that  I  have  marked  532  examples  of  ego  with  the  o 
short  in  Ovid  alone,  91  in  Propertius,  90  in  Horace,  64  or  65  in  Virgil, 
53  in  Tibullus,  27  in  Catullus,  and  five  in  Lucretius,  in  all  862 ;  while 
in  the  same  authors  I  have  been  unable  to  find  more  than  two  with  the 
long  0 ;  one  of  these  {Catull.y  19,  1)  is  from  a  poem  which,  though  often 
placed  among  the  works  of  Catullus,  is  found  in  no  MS.  of  that  author, 
and  is  now  left  out  by  the  best  editors  ;  the  other  from  Ovid  (Her.f  13, 
135),  in  a  line  where  the  MSS.  afford  half  a  dozen  different  readings.  I 
am  aware  that  other  examples  are  to  be  found  in  old  editions,  but  these 
have  all  disappeared  upon  a  careful  examination  of  the  MSS. ;  as,  for 
example,  Propcrt.,  1,  8,  31 ;  4,  2,  3,  &c.  Such  being  the  evidence,  I 
feel  justified  in  reversing  the  judgment  pronounced  by  Broukhusius  (ad. 
Propert.,  I.  c),  Drakenborch  (ad  Sil.  ltd.,  17,  357),  and  Ruperti  {ad 
Sil.y  I.  c.)  in  favour  of  the  o  final  in  ego  being  common,  and  in  laying 
down  the  rule  as  I  have  given  it. — With  regard  to  modo  (the  adverb),  1 
have  marked  363  examples  in  Ovid,  48  in  Propertius,  22  in  Horace,  13 
in  Virgil,  six  in  Catullus,  two  in  Lucretius  ;  in  all  of  these  (454)  the 
final  0  is  short,  against  which  there  is  one  in  Lucretius  where  it  is  length- 
ened by  the  arsis.  The  same  holds  good  of  its  compounds,  with  tbo 
single  exception  of  quomodo  in  Catullus  (10, 7)."  {Ramsay' i  ImI.  Pro»»t 


FINAL   SYLLABLES.  79 

Horat.  Herculis  ritu  modo  dictus  O  plebs.     (Sapphic.) 

Ovid.  Nam  modo,  vos  animo,  dulces  reminiscor  amid. 

Lucret.  Dummodo  ne  totum  corrumpas  luminis  orbem, 

Horat.  F(£num  hahet  in  cornu,  longe  fage  ;  dummodo  risum. 

Id.  Postmodo,  quod  mi  ohsit,  dare  certumque  locuto. 

TibuU.  Postmodo  qua  votis  irrita  facta  velit.     (Pentam.) 

Horat.  Cum  vidore  sequor.     McBcenas  quomodo  tecum. 

Id.  Proximus  esse.      Velis  tantummodo,  qucB  tua  virtus» 

Manil.  Sed  regione  NepcB  vix  partes  octo  trahentis. 

Juv.  Sic  crescit  numerus,  sicfiunt  octo  mariti. 

Mart.  Vix  octo  nummis  annulum  unde  ccBuaret.   (Scazon.) 


FINAL   U. 

Rule.  U  final  is  long ;  as,  cornu,  metu,  partH,  Panthu, 
vitatu,  diu.^ 

Horat.  Cornu  decorum,  leniter  atterens.     (Alcaic.) 
Virg.     Parce  metu  Cytherea,  manent  immota  tuorum. 
Id.         Mumenidesque  satcB  ;  tum  partQ,  terra  nefando. 
Id.         Quo  res  summa  loco,  Panthu,  quam prendimus  arcem  ? 
Horat.  Aiehat  sapiens  vitatu,  quidque  petitu. 
Virg.     Phosbe  diU,  res  siqua  diu  mortalibus  ulla  est. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Indu,  the  old  form  of  in,  and  nenu  for  non,  both 
Lucre tian  words,  have  the  u  short.^ 

1.  Final  u  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singular  of  the  fourth  declension 
is  the  result  of  contraction  from  ui,  and  therefore  long.  {Struve,  uber 
Dedin.,  &c.,  p.  36. — Burmann  ad  Propert.,  p.  119.)  Hence  metu  is 
for  metui,  and  partu  for  partui,  or,  rather,  partue. — Some  of  the  old 
grammarians  maintained  that  neuter  nouns  in  u  had  the  final  vowel  short 
in  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  singular,  but  long  in  the 
other  cases.  This  doctrine,  however,  is  condemned  by  Priscian  (vol.  1, 
p.  351,  ed.  Krehl). — The  u  in  Panthu  represents  the  diphthong  ov  in 
the  original  Greek  word. — Diu  is  an  old  ablative  from  dius,  as  is  evident 
from  the  common  phrase  diu  noctuque.     {Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  62.) 

2.  Indu  appears  to  have  come  from  the  yEolic  Ivdov  for  evdov.  Nenu 
is  said  to  have  been  the  parent  of  the  Latin  non.  According  to  Wake- 
field, the  more  correct  orthography  for  indu  is  endu  when  it  stands 
singly,  and  indu  when  compounded.  {Wakef.  ad  Lucret.,  1,  83,  et  2, 
10S5.)    liis  authority,  however,  is  of  no  great  weight,  especially  as  the 


80  FINAL   SYLLABLES. 

Lucret.  Necjacere  indu  manus,  via  qua  munitafideu 
Id.  Nenu  queunt  rapidei  contra  constare  leones. 


Exc.  2.  The  u  continues  short  in  those  words  which 
naturally  end  in  short  us,  and  are  only  deprived  of  the 
s  by  the  more  ancient  mode  of  pronunciation,  in  order 
to  preserve  the  syllable  from  becoming  long  by  its  po- 
sition before  a  consonant  at  the  beginning  of  the  follow- 
ing word  ;  as,  plenu^  for  plenus,  bonu'  for  bonus,  &c.' 
Ennius.  lUe  vir  haud  magna  cum  re,  sed  plenu*  fidei. 
Id.  Suavis  homo,  facundu* ,  suo  contentu\  beatus. 


FINAL   y. 

Rule.  Y  final  is  short ;  as,  moly,  chely,  Coty,  Tiphy? 
Ovid.  Moly  vacant  superi ;  nigra  radice  tenetur. 
Stat.     Cedamus  chely,  jam  repone  cantus.     (Phalaecian.) 
Ovid.   O  Coty,  progenies  digna  parente  tuo,    (Pentam.) 
Id.       Ars  tua,  Tiphy,jacet  si  non  sit  in  mquore  fluctus* 


final  b,  d,  t. 
Rule.  Final  syllables  ending  inb  ox  d  are  short,  as  also 
those  ending  in  t  pure,  that  is,  t  immediately  preceded  by 
a  vowel ;  as,  db,  dd,  quid,  illud,  eti  at,  amdt. 
Ovid.      Ipse  docet  quid  agam.     Fas  est  et  db  hoste  doceri. 
Virg.      Dixit :  dt  illafurens,  acrique  incensa  dolore. 
Tibull.  Luce  sacra  requiescdt  humus,  requiescdt  arator. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  But  if  t  be  preceded  by  another  consonant,  or 
the  ^  or  (i  by  a  diphthong,  the  syllable  must  of  course 
remain  long ;  as,  dst,  amdnt,  out,  haud. 

Ovid.  Ast  ubi  blanditiis,  agitur  nihil  horridus  ira. 


iEolic  change  of  e  into  t  is  well  known.     {Maitt.,  Dial.,  p.  208,  ed. 
Stun.) 

1.  Consult  remarks  under  "Ecthlipsis." 

2.  The  final  y  answers  to  the  short  final  v  in  Greek.    This  rule  is  in 
part  repeated  from  page  72. 


FINAL    SYLLABLES.  81 

Virg.  Aut  onera  accipiunt  venientum,  out  agmine  facto. 
Id.       Hdud  ohscura  cadens  mittet  tibi  si^na  Bootes, 


Exc.  2.  Those  third  persons  singular  of  the  perfect  tense, 
active  voice,  which  contract  ivit  or  iit  into  it,  or  amt 
into  at,  have  the  final  syllable  necessarily  long ;  as, 
pefit  for  petut  or  petivit ;  obit  for  obiit  or  obivit ;  irriiat 
for  irritavit ;  disturbat  for  disturbamt. 
Ovid.   Flamma  petit  altum,  propior  locus  aera  cepit. 
Juv.     Magnus  civis  obit  et  formidatus  Othoni. 
Lucr.  Irritdt  animi  virtutem,  ecfringere  ut  arcta. 
Id.        Disturbat  urbes,  et  terr(B  motus  obortus. 


FINAL    C. 

Rule.  C  final  has  the  preceding  vowel  long ;  as,  illic, 

illuc,  dc,  SIC,  hue,  the  adverb  hlc,  the  ablative  hoc, 

Virg.  Illic,  oxidant  IcBtis  nefrugibus  herbcs. 

CatuU.  lonios  fluctus  postquam  illuc  Arrius  isset. 

Horat.  Si  sapiat  vitet  simul  dc  adoleverit  <Btas. 

Virg.  Sic  oculos,  sic  ille  manus,  sic  ora  ferebut, 

Catull.  Hue,  hue  adventate  ;  mens  audite  querelas, 

Virg.  Classibus  hic  locus,  hlc  acies  certare  solebant. 

Ovid.  Aut  hoc,  autsimili  carmine  notuseris.i^enidiXa,) 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Nee,  donec^  and  the  imperative  yac^  are  short. 
Ovid.      Parve,  nee  invideo,  sine  me  liber  ibis  in  urbem, 

1.  Donee  is  merely  an  abbreviation  of  domcum,  a  word  of  frequent  oc- 
currence in  Plautus,  and  itself  evidently  an  adjective  of  the  neuter  gen- 
der. 

2.  Vossius  says  that  fac  is  always  long,  and  cites  the  following  lines 
in  support  of  his  opinion : 

Hos  fac  Armenios,  hcBc  est  Dana'eia  Persis.     (Ov.,  A.  A.,  1,  225.) 
Durius  incedit,  fac  ambulet,  omne papillce.     {Id.,  JR,.  A.,  337.) 

Heinsius,  however,  upon  unexceptionable  MS.  authority,  restored  in  tho 
first  Hos  facito  for  Hos  fac,  and  in  the  second /ac  inambulet  for  fac  am- 
bulet.— In  almost  all  cases  where  fac  is  followed  by  a  vowel,  the  MSS. 
vary  between /ac  and  face.    {Ramsay^s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  33.) 


8^  FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

Ovid.  Donee  erisfelix  multos  numerahis  amicos, 

Lucret.  Non  possunt ;  fac  enim  minimis  e  partibus  esse. 

Mart.  Signa  rarius,  out  semelfac  illud.    (Phalaecian.) 


Exc.  2.  Hie  the  pronoun  is  common,  but  much  more 
frequently  long  than  short. 

Virg.  Solus  hie  injlexit  sensus  animumque  lahantem. 

Id.  Hie  vir  hlc  est,  tihi  quem  promitti  scspius  audis. 

Id.  H(BC  finis  Priami  fatorum,  hie  exitus  ilium, 

Ovid.  Atque  ait,  Hie,  hie  est,  quem  ferns  urit  amor.  (Pent.) 

Exc.  3.  The  neuter  hoc  is  also  common,  but  no  example 
can  be  quoted,  except  from  the  comic  writers,  in  which 
it  is  found  short.' 

Ovid.   Dicendum  tamen  est,  hoc  est,  mihi  erede,  quod  <Bgra. 
Id.        Hoc  dens  et  vates,  hoe  et  mea  earmina  dieunt, 
Plaut.  Heus !   ecquis  hie  est  1    ecquis  hoe   aperit  ostium  ? 

(Iambic.) 
Id.        Quid  hoc  hie  clamoris  audio  ante  (sdes  meas  ?  (Iambic.) 

FINAL   Z. 
Rule.  L  final  has  the  preceding  vowel  short ;  as,  Han- 
nibal,^ semel,  nihil,  procul. 

1.  The  facts  respecting  the  usage  of  the  poets  in  the  case  of  hie  and 
hoc  are  given  in  the  text.  The  opinions  expressed  by  the  old  gramma- 
rians respecting  the  quantity  of  these  words  differ  widely  from  each  other. 
Velius  Longus  and  Priscian  seem  to  think  that  hie  and  hoc  are  both  nat- 
urally short,  and  that  in  all  passages  where  they  are  found  long  they 
ought  to  be  written  hicc,  hocc,  and  regarded  as  abbreviations  of  hiccCf 
hocce.  Terentianus  Maurus,  Marius  Victorinus,  Probus,  Charisius,  and 
Martianus  Capella,  on  the  other  hand,  assert,  that  in  these  words  c  has 
the  same  force  in  pronunciation  as  a  double  consonant ;  that,  conse- 
quently, hie  and  hoe  ought  always  to  be  long,  and  that  Virgil  was  guilty 
of  an  inaccuracy  in  changing  the  pronunciation  and  quantity  of  hie  in  the 
two  passages  from  the  iEneid  cited  in  the  text.  Vossius  says  that  hoc 
is  short  in  the  nominative  and  vocative ;  but  he  is  unable  to  bring  any 
better  authority  than  that  of  two  anonymous  poets  in  the  collections. 
(Priscian,  vol.  1,  p.  564,  ed.  Krehl. — Velius  Longus,  p.  2219,  cd.  Putsch. 
•^Marius  Victorinus,  p.  2471. — Probus,  p.  1390. — Charis.,  p.  4,  seg. — 
Terent.  Maur.,  v.  l657.~Mart.  Capeli,  lib.  S.—  Voss.,  Art.  Gramm., 
2,  29. — ClassicalJournal,  vol.  9,  p.  3Z9.— Ramsay's  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  35.) 

2.  Consult  note  1,  page  61,  where  it  would  appear  probable  that  the 


FINAL    SYLLABLES.  83 

Juv.    Hannibal,  et  stantes  Collina  turre  mariti. 
Virg.   Quum  semel  Imserunt  arvis  aurasque  tulerunU 
Virg.   Versando  terram  experti,  nihil  improhus  anser. 
Id.       Arboris  acclinis  trunco,  procul  (zrea  ramis. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

2 


Exc.  1.  Saly^  sol^  and  nil  contracted  from  mMl,  are  long. 
Stat.      Non  sal,  oxyporumve,  caseusve.     (Phalaecian.) 
Auson.  Sal  oleum  panis,  mel,  piper,  herba,  novem.  (Pent.) 
Ovid.      Ulterius  spatium  medio  sol  alius  habebat. 
Claud.  Nil   opis  externcs  cupiens,  nil  indiga  laudis. 


Exc.  2.  Hebrew  names  ending  in  I  have  the  final  sylla- 
ble generally  long ;  as,  Daniel,  Raphael,  Ismael.^ 
Tert.       Quum  magnus  Daniel,  qualis  vir,  quanta  potestas  ! 
Fortun.  Qualiler  aut  Raphael  occur  sum  impenderit  alma. 
Victor.   Nee  tamen  Ismael,  Agar  de  semine  natus. 

earlier  quantity  of  Hannibal,  and  other  similar  Carthaginian  names,  was 
Hannihdl. 

1.  There  is  great  doubt  whether  *aZ  ought  to  be  regarded  as  an  ex- 
ception to  this  rule.  It  appears  to  be  nothing  more  than  an  abbreviation 
of  the  old  nominative  sale,  still  extant  in  a  hne  of  Ennius  preserved  by 
Aulus  Gellius  (2,  26) :  "  Cceruleum  spumat  sale  conferta  rate  pulsum." 
Dr.  Carey,  therefore,  thinks  that  it  was  in  reality  short,  and  that  Statius 
and  Ausonius  made  it  long  merely  by  poetic  license.  The  apocope  could 
never  of  itself  lengthen  sal  from  sale,  since  even  those  nouns  in  al,  which 
had  the  a  long  in  die  before  the  apocope  took  place,  thence  became  short ; 
as,  cervical,  tribunal,  vectigdl. 

2.  Cicero's  derivation  of  sol  from  solus  would  supply  us  with  a  suffi- 
cient reason  for  the  long  a  in  the  former,  if  the  etymology  were  really 
worth  anything.  His  remark  is  as  follows :  *'  Cum  sol  dictus  sit,  vet 
quia  solus  ex  omnibus  sideribus  est  tantus,  vel  quia,  cum  est  exortus, 
obscuratis  omnibus  solus  apparet"  {N.  D.,  2,  27).  So  also  Boethius 
{Cons.  Phil ,  5,  metr.  2) : 

"  Quern,  quia  respicit  omnia  solus, 
Verum  possis  dicere  solem.^^ 

The  Latin  sol  is  rather  to  be  traced  to  sauil,  one  of  the  three  Gothic 
forms  for  "  sun,"  and  both  sol  and  sauil  are  related  to  the  Sanscrit  su- 
ria.  {Grimm,  Deutsch.  Gramm.,  vol.  1,  p.  611. — Pott,  Etymol.  Forsch., 
vol.  1,  p.  130.) 

3.  The  Hebrew  words  have  in  the  last  syllable,  in  the  original  tongue, 
the  long  vowel  tser6. 


84  PINAL   SYLLABLES. 

FINAL  m. 

Rule.  When  a  word  ends  in  wi,  and  is  immediately  fol- 
lowed by  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  A,  the  poets  of  the 
Augustan  age  and  their  successors  generally  elide  the  m  by 
a  figure  termed  ecthlipsis,  and  also  cut  off  the  vowel  prece- 
ding the  m  by  another  figure  termed  synalcepha :  as,  monstr* 
horrend^  informe  for  monstrum  horrendum  informer  &c.^ 
Virg.  Monstrum  horrendum  informe  ingens  cui  lumen  ademp- 
tum. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  The  older  poets,  or  those  prior  to  the  Augustan 
age,  frequently  preserved  the  final  m  from  elision,  and 
made  the  preceding  vowel  short. 
Ennius.  Insignita  fere  turn  millia  militum  octo. 
Id.  Dum  quidem  unus  homo  Roma  tola  superescit. 

Lucil.      Pr<Btext(B  ac  tunic(B,  Lydorum  opu^  sordidum  omne, 
Lucret.     Vomerem  atque  loceis  avertit  seminis  ictum. 
Id.  Nam  quodfiuvidum  est,  e  levibus  atque  rotundis. 

Id.  Sed  dum  ahest  quod  avemus,  id  exsuperare  videtur, 

Obs,  1,  An  instance  of  m  being  retained  before  a  vowel 
occurs  even  in  Horace  (^Sat.,  2,  2,  28)  : 

Quam  laudas,  pluma  ?  cocto  num  adcst  honor  idem  ? 

1.  Consult  remarks  on  Eclhlipsis  and  Synaloepha,  among  "Figures  of 
Prosody." — In  strictness,  no  grammatical  figure,  such  as  ecthlipsis  (ek- 
6?[.iiljLg,  i.  e.,  ^' a  dashing  out"),  takes  place  here,  but  the  whole  is  a  mero 
matter  of  pronunciation.  The  final  m  was  never  fully  sounded  among  the 
Romans,  as  Priscian  expressly  remarks  :  "  M  obscurum  in  extremitatc  die- 
tionum  sonat."  Quintilian  also,  who  in  one  part  calls  m  a  *'  quasi  mu- 
giens  litterd'^  (12,  10, 31),  observes  in  another  passage,  "M  littera,  quo- 
ties  ultima  est,  et  vocalem  verbi  scquentis  ita  corUingit  ut  in  earn  transire 
possity  etiamsi  scribitur  tamen  parum  exprimitur,  ut  multum  ille,  et  quan- 
tum erat ;  adeo  ut  pane  cujusdam  nova:  littera  sonum  reddat ;  ncqu^ 
enim  eximitur  sed  obscuratur,  et  tantum  aliqua  inter  duas  vocales  velut 
nota  est  ne  ipsa  coeanf''  (9,  4,  40).  It  would  appear,  therefore,  that  the 
Romans  did  not  give  to  such  a  syllable  as  om  or  um  a  full  labial  sound, 
with  a  close  compression  of  the  lips,  but  uttered  the  m  with  a  slight  na- 
sal sound,  such  as  the  French  give  it,  for  example,  in  the  word  /aim, 
and  as  the  Portuguese  enunciate  it  even  in  Latin  words.  It  would  seom 
that  even  in  Hebrew  the  final  mem  was  not  very  clearly  enunciated  ;  at 
least,  such  is  the  opinion  of  Gesenius  {Hcbr.  Gramm.  Anm.,  ^78, 2  o). 


PINAL  SYLLABLES.  85 

Obs.  2.  But  the  best  and  purest  writers  seem  in  general 
to  have  retained  this  practice  only  in  words  compounded 
of  com  (or  con)  and  of  circum  ;  as,  comes,  comedo,  circumago, 
circumeo. 

Ovid.   Tu  tibi  dux  comiti ;  tu  comes  ipsa  duci.     (Pentam.)  * 
Juv.     Luctantur  pauccB,  comedunt  coliphia  pauccB. 
Id.        Quo  te  circumagas  ?  qucz  prima  aut  ultima  ponas. 
Stat.     Circumeunt  hilares,  et  ad  alta  cubilia  ducunt. 


FINAL   n. 

Rule.  N  final  has  the  preceding  vowel  for  the  most  part 
long,  both  in  Latin  words  and  in  those  of  Greek  origin ;  as, 
non,  en,  ren,  splen,  Siren,  Hymen,  Pan,  Titan,  quin,  sin, 

Virg.      De  grege  non  ausim  quicquam  deponere  tecum. 
Id.  Dixerit,  Hos  calamos  tibi  dant  (en  accipe)  Musds» 

Ser.        Et  trita  illinitur  :  vel  splen  apponitur  hmdi, 
Catull.  Hymen,  O  Hymenme  I     Hymen,  ades,  O  Hymenc^e  ! 
TibuU.  Lacte  madens  illic  suherat  Pan  ilicis  umhrcs, 
Lucret.  Flammiger  an  Titan  ut  alentes  hauriat  undas, 
Ovid.      Non  potuit  mea  mens,  quin  esset  grata,  teneri. 
Phaedr.    Quern  si  leges,  IcBtahor ;  sin  autem  minus.     (Iamb.) 


To  these  add  Greek  accusatives  in  an  from  nominatives 
in  as^  and  accusatives  in  en  from  nominatives  in  e  or  es ; 
as  also  all  Greek  genitives  plural  in  on ;  as,  jEnedn,  Tire- 

1.  Ramsay  gives  the  rule  of  n  final  as  making  the  previous  vowel 
short.  We  have  thought  it  more  advisable,  however,  to  retain  the  old 
form  of  expression. — In  Greek  nouns,  such  as  Siren,  Hymen,  &c,,  there 
is  a  long  vowel,  in  the  original,  in  the  final  syllable. 

2.  There  is  some  doubt  with  regard  to  the  accusative  in  an  from  short 
a  in  the  nominative,  since  some  examples  occur  in  which  it  is  made  long. 
In  all  of  these,  however,  the  syllable  is  in  the  arsis,  and  we  may  there- 
fore safely  pronounce  it  to  be  naturally  short.  Thus,  we  have  in  Ovid 
{Trist.,  2,  395),  "  Qui  legis  Electrdn  et  egentem  mentis  Orestem  ;"  and 
again  {Met.,  4,  756),  *'  Protenus  Andromcddn,  et  tanti  prcemia  facti.^^ 
But  then,  on  the  other  hand,  we  have  Orithyidn  (Ov.,  Met.,  6,  707); 
Ossdn  {Propcrt.,  2, 1,  19.— Oy.,  Fast.,  1,  307);  IpUgenidn  {Ov.,  E.  P., 
3,  2,  62,  &c. — Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  67).  Consult  Exc.  4  under 
this  rule. 

H 


86  FINAL   SYLLABLES. 

sidn,  Penelopeny  Anchiserif  Cimmeridn^  Chalyhdrif  Metam- 

orphoseon,  <fcc.' 

Virg.      Et  s(Bvum  jT^nearif  agnovit  Turnus  in  armis. 

Id.  Occurrit ;  veterem  Anchisen  agnoscit  amicum. 

CatuU.  Jupiter !  ut  Chalyhon  omne  genus  pereat !  (Pentam.) 

Tibull.  Cimmerion  etiam  obscuras  accessit  ad  arces.       ./    , 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  An,  forsan,  forsitan,  in,  tameny  viden\  sattn\^  are 
short. 
Horat.     Quis  scit  an  adjiciant  hodierncB  crastina  summ<B. 
Virg.       Mittite  ;  forsan  et  hxBc  olim  meminisse  juvabit. 
Id.  Forsitan  et  Priami  fuerint  qu(B  fata  requiras. 

Ovid.      Ludit  tn  humanis  divina  potentia  rebus. 
Virg.       Hie  tamen  ille  urbem  Patavi  sedesque  locavit» 
Tibull.    Vota  cadunt :  viden\  ut  trepidantibus  advolet  alis  1 
Terent.  Satm^  id  est  ?     Nescio,  hercle :  tantum  jussu*  sum. 
(Iambic.) 


Exc.  2.  Nouns  in  en,  which  increase  short  in  mis  in  the 
genitive  case,  have  the  final  syllable  short  in  the  nom- 
inative ;  as,  nomen  (nomtnis),  flumen  {flummis),  tegmen 
[tegmmis),  augmen  {augmtnis). 

Ovid.  Nomen  Arionium  Siculas  impleverat  urbes. 

Virg.    Casperiamque  colunt,  Forulos,  et  fiumen  Himellcs, 

Id.        Tegmen  habent  capiti ;  vestigia  nuda  sinistri. 

1.  As  the  Greek  genitive  plural  ends  in  ov,  the  Latin  on  formed  from 
this  is  of  course  long.  The  later  Latin  poets,  however,  malte  errors  al- 
most continually  in  words  borrowed  from  the  Greek,  which  in  the  latter 
language  end  in  uv.  Thus,  we  have  in  Prudentius  (Peristepk.,  2,  505) 
the  following  iambic  dimeter  :  "  Dum  darrion  invictum  dei,'^  where  the 
on  in  dcemon  is  erroneously  shortened,  the  Greek  form  being  Saifujv.  So, 
again,  in  the  same  writer  {Psychom.,  857),  the  following  hexameter  oc- 
curs :  "  Hie  chalcedon  hebes  perfunditur  ex  hyacinthi,^*  where  chalcedon 
has  the  final  syllable  short,  although  the  Greek  form  is  x^-^V^^v. 

2.  Viden'  is  a  colloquial  form  of  videsne,  and  the  change  of  quantity 
is  supposed  to  have  resulted  from  the  former  being  employed  as  a  short 
interrogation.  So  satin'  for  scUtsne  is  of  very  frequent  occurrence  in  tho 
comic  writers.     {Ramsay's  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  67.) 


FINAL    SYLLABLES.  87 

Exc.  3.  The  final  syllable  on  is  short  in  the  singular 
cases  of  Greek  nouns,  which  have  those  cases  written 
in  the  original  with  an  omicron  or  short  o ;  as,  nom- 
inative, lUon,  ErotioTij  Pelion ;  accusative,  Cerberon, 
Menelaon,  Rhodon, 

Ovid.    Ilion  et  Tenedos,  Simoisque  et  Xanthus,  et  Ide. 

Mart.    Pallida  nee  nigras  horrescat  Erotion  umbras. 

Ovid.     Cerberon  abstraxit^  rabida  qui  percitus  ira. 

Id.         Tu  fore  tarn  lentum  credis  Menelaon  in  armis  1 

Horat.  Laudabunt  alii  claram  Rhodon,  aut  Mytilenen. 


But  Greek  accusatives  in  on,  of  the  Attic  dialect,  having 
an  omega  or  long  o,  in  the  original,  are  long ;  as, 
Athon,  AndrogeoUf  Peneleon,  Demoleon. 


Exc.  4.  Greek  accusatives  in  an,  of  the  feminine  gender, 
are  also  short ;  as,  Maian,  Iphigenian,  Orithyian} 
Ovid.  Maian  et  Electram  Taygetamque  Jovi.     (Pent.) 
Id.       Nescio  quam  dicunt  Iphigenian  iter.     (Ditto.) 
Id.        Orithyian  amans  fulvis  amplectitur  alis. 

Exc.  5.  Greek  accusatives  in  in  and  yn  are  likewise 
short ;  as,  Thyrsin,  Daphmn,  Parin,  Thetm,  Ityn. 
Propert.   Thyrsin  et  attritis  Daphmn  arundinibus.  (Pentam.) 
Ovid.        Tantaque  nox  animi  est,  Ityn  hue  areessite,  dixit. 


FINAL    r. 

Rule.  R  final  has  the  preceding  vowel  for  the  most  part 
short ;  as,  ealcar,  audiar,  oleaster,  iter,  glorier,  ealor,  robur, 
cmditur. 

Ovid.   Creseit,  et  immensum  gloria  calear  habet.     (Pentam.) 
Id.        Trans  ego  tellurem,  trans  latas  audiar  undas. 
Virg.    Infelix  super  at  foliis  oleaster  amaris. 
Id.        Angustum  formica  terens  iter^  et  bibit  ingens. 
Ovid.  Fratre  magis,  dubito,  glorier,  anne  viro.     (Pentam.) 

1.  Consult  note  2,  page  85. 


88  PINAL   SYLLABLES. 

Virg.  Seu  plures  color  ille  vias  et  ctBca  relaocat. 

Id.  Vomis  et  inflexi  primum  grave  robur  aratri. 

Id.  C(Bditur  et  tilia  ante  jugo  levis  altaque  fagus. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Cur  is  long,  and  also  Nar^far^fur^  and  ver} 
Horat.  Multa  quidem  dixi,  cur  excusatus  ahirem. 
Virg.     Sulfurea  Nar  alius  aqua,  fontesque  Velini. 
Ovid.    Far  erat,  et  puri  lucida  mica  salts.     (Pentam.) 
Mart.     Callidus  effracta  numos  fur  auferet  area. 
Ovid.    Et  ver  auctumno,  hrumm  miscebitur  cestas. 


Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  er,  which  in  the  original  end  in 
Tjp,  and  which  increase  in  the  genitive,  have  the  final 
syllable  of  the  nominative  long ;  as,  aer  (drjp,  depog), 
(Bther  (aWrjp,  aiOepog),  crater  (fcparrjp,  KpaTrjpog),  &c. 
But  pater  and  mater  (narTjp,  narpog ;  [irjTTjp,  [j,7]Tp6g) 
have  the  final  syllable  short. 

Lucret.  Inde  mare,  inde  aer^  inde  atker  ignifer  ipse.  'M: 

Ovid.      Summus  inaurato  crater  erat  asper  acantho. 

Virg.       Est  mihi  namque  domi  pater,  est  injusta  noverca. 

Id.  Non  jam  mater  alit  tellus  viresque  mtnistrat. 


Obs.  Hector,  Nestor,  and  Castor,  however,  though  com- 
ing from  "EwTwp,  Nearwp,  and  KaffTwp,  have  the  final  syl- 
lable short. 

Ovid.    Hector  erat :  turn  colla  jugo  candentia  pressos. 

Id.  Cum  sic  Nestor  ait,  vestrofuit  unicus  (bvo. 

Horat.  Infamis  Helen<B  Castor  offensus  vice.     (Iambic.) 


Exc.  3.  Iber  is  long,  but  Celtiber  has  the  final  syllable 
long  in  Catullus  and  short  in  Martial. 

1.  Cur  is  merely  a  contraction  from  quur,  and  consequently  long. 
{Priscian,  vol.  1,  p.  45,  ed.  Krehl.) — Fiir  apparently  gets  its  long  quan- 
tity from  the  Greek  ^w/j. — Far,  if  we  may  judge  from  its  genitive /arm, 
was  originally  written  fdrr,  being  long  by  position. — Ver  is  from  the 
Greek  ^p  (a  contraction  from  ^ap)  with  the  digamma  prefixed. 


FINAL    SYLLABLES.  89 


Lucan.   Si  tihi  durus  Iber,  aut  si  tihi  terga  dedisset. 
Catuil.   Nunc  Celtiher  es  :  Celtiberia  in  terra.     (Scazon.) 
Mart.      Ducit  ad  auriferas  quod  me  Salo  Celtiher  oras. 


Obs.  1.  Par  and  lar  are  usually  accounted  long ;  and  so, 
indeed,  they  are  found,  the  former  very  frequently,  the  lat- 
ter in  one  instance  in  Ovid  (Fast.,  5,  141)  ;  but  it  would 
seem  more  consistent  with  accuracy  to  call  them  common.' 

Obs.  2.  The  quantity  of  cor  has  also  been  made  a  matter 
of  dispute.  The  best  opinion,  however,  is  in  favour  of  its 
being  accounted  short.^ 


FINAL  as. 
Rule.  Final  as  is  long;    as,  terras,  tempestas,  tractdsj 
veniebas? 

Virg.     Turbabat  ccelo,  nunc  terras  ordine  longo. 
Id.         Forte  sua  Lihycis  tempestds  appulit  oris. 
Horat.   Tractds  et  incedis  per  ignes.     (Iambic.) 
Ovid.    Dure  quid  ad  miseros  veniebds  exulis  annos. 

1.  The  reasons  that  have  been  assigned  in  support  of  this  latter  opin- 
ion are  as  follows  :  1.  Par  and  lar  increase  short ;  and  all  other  nouns 
in  ar,  which  have  a  short  increment,  have  the  final  syllable  short. — 2. 
Even  those  which  from  are  (with  the  a  long)  are  reduced  by  apocope  to 
ar,  have  the  ar  short ;  as,  calcdr,  pulvindr,  torculdr. — 3.  Valerius  Pro- 
bus  says,  ^^  Nominativus  singularis,  R  literafinitus,  omni  genere  .... 
brevem  hahet.'''  (Putsch,  Gram.  Lat.,  col.  1393) ;  and  Servius  {ad 
Mn.,  3,  91)  remarks,  "  Omnia  monosyllaba  ad  ariem  non  pertinent.^' — 
4.  The  compounds  of  par  are  found  short  in  Prudentius  (In  Symm.,  8, 
5),  Avienus  (Fab.,  23,  8),  and  Martianus  Capella  (6,  55),  whose  author- 
ity (though  not  sufficient  to  outweigh  that  of  earlier  writers)  may  be  al- 
lowed to  have  some  weight  in  a  doubtful  or  probable  case,  when  sup- 
ported by  reason  and  analogy.     (Carey^s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  140,  3d  ed.) 

2.  It  is  shortened,  for  example,  by  Cicero  (Tusc.  Qucest.,  3,  26),  by 
Ovid  (Trist.,  6,  8.—Ep.  ex  Pont.,  1,  3,  32.— Met.,  5,  384),  by  Mar- 
tial (10,  15),  and  by  Paulinus  (de  Cels.  Ob.,  379).  In  opposition  to  all 
these  authorities,  the  following  line  has  been  cited  from  Ovid  (Her.,  15, 
79) :  "  Molle  meum  levibus  cor  est  violabilc  telis.''^  Burmann,  however, 
conjectures,  "  Molle  mihi  levibusque  cor  est  violabilc  telis ;"  and  a  Frank- 
fort MS.  has  ^^  Molle  meum  levibusque,^^  &c. 

3.  In  terras,  and  other  accusatives  plural  of  the  first  declension,  as  is 
long  because  contracted  from  aes. — In  nominatives  like  tempestas,  it  is 
long  because  the  old  form  was  tempestdts. — In  tractas  and  the  like,  it  is 
long  because  contracted  from  aw. 

H  2 


90  riNAL   SYLLABLES. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Anas,  "a  duck,"  has  the  final  syllable  short. 
Petron.  Et  pictus  anas  enotata  pennis.     (Phalaecian.)* 

Exc.  2.  Final  as  is  short  in  the  nominative  of  Greek  nouns 
which  form  their  genitive  singular  in  dos  (or  in  the  Latin 
dis) ;  as,  Areas,  genitive  Arcados  or  Arcadis ;  PallaSy 
genitive  Pallados  or  Palladis. 
Mart.  Cum  quibus  Alcides,  et  plus  Areas  erat.     (Pentam.) 
Ovid.  Bellica  Pallas  adest,  et  protegit  cBgide  fratrem. 


Obs.  But   Pallas,  genitive  Pallantis,  Calehas,  genitive 
Calchantis,  and  the  like,  follow  the  general  rule,  and  have 
as  long. 
Virg.    Tela  manusque  sinit :  Hine  Pallas  instat  et  urget, 
Ovid.   Quam  postquam  reddit  Calehas  ope  tutus  Achillis. 


Exc.  3.  Final  as  is  also  short  in  Greek  accusatives  plural 
of  the  third  declension  ;  as,  heroas,  lampadds,  delphinds, 
Virg.     Permistos  heroas,  et  ipse  videbitur  illis. 
TibuU.  Aecendit  geminas  lampadds  acer  Amor.  (Pent.) 
Virg.     Orpheus  in  sylvis,  inter  delphinds  Arion, 


FINAL   es. 
Rule.  Final  es  is  long ;  as,  spes,  noetes,  vides,  pones,* 
Ovid.        Una  tamen  spes  est,  qu(B  me  soletur  in  istis. 

1.  This  line  occurs  in  Petronius  Arbiter  (c.  93,  4),  but  Burmann  con* 
jectures  avis  for  anas. 

2.  Ennius  furnishes  one  instance  of  the  Latin  plural  es  being  short,  in 
the  following  line :  '•  Virgine'  nam  sibi  quisquc  domi  Romanus  hahet  sas^* 
{Enn.,  Fragm.,  p.  32,  ed.  Column.).  Cicero  is  said  to  give  another  in 
a  fragment  of  his  poetical  version  of  Aratus  (v.  472) :  "  Obruitur  Pro- 
cyan;  emergunt  alites  wna ;"  but  Ernesti  reads,  ^*  Obruitur  Procyon; 
emergunt  alite  lapsu"  <fec.  The  common  text  of  Ovid  {Her.,  10,  86) 
also  contains  a  reading  which  exhibits  es  in  the  accusative  plural  short : 
*'  Quis  scit  an  hcec  s<zvas  insula  tigres  habet."  Burmann,  however, 
cives  the  line  as  follows  :  •'  Quis  scit,  an  hctc  sccvas  tigridas  insula  ha- 
het ?"  and  observes,  "  Duo  sunt  qua  in  hoc  versu  offendunt.  Primo, 
quod  Latine  haud  dicilur,  Quis  scit  an  habet,  sed  an  habeat.  Dcinde 
quod  poslenorem  in  tigres  corripit."    {Burmann  ad  Ov.,  I.  c.) 


FINAL   SYLLABLES.  91 

Virg.        Nodes  atque  dies  patet  atri  janua  Diiis. 

Propert.  Hoc  quodcunque  vides,  hospes,  quam  maxima  Roma, 

Horat.     Pones  iambis  sive  fiamma.     (Iambic.) 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc,  1 .  Nouns  in  es  of  the  third  declension,  which  in- 
crease short  in  the  genitive,  have  es  in  the  nominative 
short ;  as,  hospes,  ccBspes,  ales,  miles,  prcBpes,  &c.  (in 
the  genitive  hospitis,  ccBspitis,  alitis,  miUtis,  prcBpetis). 

Ovid.    Vivitur  ex  rapto  :  non  hospes  ah  hospite  tutus. 

Rutil.  JExiguus  regum  rectores  ccBspes  habebat. 

Virg.    Namque  volans  rubra  fulvus  Jovis  ales  in  cethra. 

Id.        Myrmidonum  Dolopumve  aut  duri  miles  TJlixi. 

Id.       Acer,  anhelanti  similis,  quern  prcepes  ab  Ida, 


Obs.  But  aries,  abies,  paries,  and  Ceres,  as  also  pes,  with 
its  compounds,  follow  the  general  rule. 
Virg.     Creditur  :  ipse  aries  etiam  nunc  vellera  siccat. 
Id.         Populus  in  jluviis,  abies  in  montibus  altis. 
Horat.   Votiva  paries  indicat  uvida.     (Choriambic.) 
Virg.     Flava  Ceres  alto  nequidquam  spectat  Olympo. 
Manil.  Desuper  Aurigce  dexter  pes  imminet  astro. 
Horat.    Omnia  magna  loquens :  modo  sit  mihi  mensa  tripes  et. 
Virg.      Stat  sonipes,  ac  frena  ferox  spumantia  mandit. 
Id.  ToUit  se  arrectum  quadrupes,  et  calcibus  auras. 


Exc.  2.  Es,  in  the  present  tense  of  the  verb  sum,  is 
short,  together  with  its  compounds  poles,  abes,  ades, 
obes,  prodes,  Slc.^ 

1.  In  many  passages  of  Plautus,  an  enumeration  of  most  of  which 
may  be  found  in  Wasse  (cap.  16,  p.  226,  seqq.),  es  from  sum  occurs 
with  a  long  quantity.  These  passages  are  too  numerous  to  permit  our 
supposing  the  syllable  lengthened  by  a  mere  license,  or  by  the  force  of 
the  arsiSy  and  it  is  therefore  probable  that,  in  the  time  of  Plautus,  es 
from  sum,  corresponding  as  it  did  to  the  Greek  cZf,  was  actually  long, 
and  was  only  shortened  at  a  subsequent  period.  Such,  at  least,  is  the 
opinion  of  Schneider  {Gr.  Lat.,  vol.  2,  p.  757.) — According  to  Vossius, 
es,  "  thou  eatest,"  the  second  person  of  edo,  is  long,  being  contracted, 


92  FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

Virg.  Quisquis  es,  amissos  hinc  jam  ohliviscere  Graios. 

Id.  Tu  potes  unanimos  armare  in  -pradia  fralres. 

Id.  Tuque  ades  inceptumque  una  decurre  laborem. 


Exc.  3.  The  preposition /jene^  has  the  final  syllable  short. 
Horat.  Quern  penes  arbitrium  est,  et  jus,  et  norma  loquendi. 
Ovid.    Me  penes  est  unum  vasti  custodia  mundi. 


Exc.  4.  Es  is  likewise  short  in  Greek  neuters ;  as,  ca- 
coethesy  hippomenes^  &c. ;  and  in  Greek  nominatives 
and  vocatives  plural  of  the  third  declension,  from  nouns 
which  increase  in  the  genitive  singular,  but  which  do 
not  form  that  case  in  eos  ;  as,  Tritones,  Arcades,  Tro- 
es,  Amazones,  Troades,  &ic} 

Juv.     Scribendi  caco'ethes,  et  (Bgro  in  corde  senescit. 

Stat.    Armigeri  Tritones  eunt,  scopulosaque  cete. 

Virg.  Ambo  fiorentes  mtatibus,  Arcades  ambo. 

Id.       Pulsant,  et  pictis  bellantur  Amazones  armis. 


Obs.  1.  But  nominatives  and  vocatives  plural  in  es,ixom 
Greek  nominatives  forming  the  genitive  singular  in  eos,  are 
long;  B.S,  h(Breses,  crises, phrases,  metamorphoses,^  &c. 

Obs.  2.  "Where  the  Latin  es  represents  the  Greek  rjg,  it 
is  of  course  long  ;  as  in.  Alcides,  Brontes,  Palamedes,  from 
^AXKeCdTjg,  Bpdvrrjg,  UaXaiirjdrjg. 


FINAL    IS   AND    t/S. 

Rule.  Final  is  and  ys  are  short ;  as,  dulcis^  lapis,  Jw, 
amabis,  bibis,  Thetis,  Tethys,  Itys,  Capys? 
Horat.    Dulcis  inexpertis  cultura  potentis  amici. 
Tibull.  Fac  lapis  his  scriptus  stet  super  ossa  notis.   (Pent.) 

probably,  from  edis.     (Voss.,  de  Art.  Gramm.,  2,  31.)     Carey  opposes 
this,  but  on  weak  grounds. 

1.  Es  here  answers  to  the  Greek  ec,  and  is  short,  as  a  matter  of  course, 

2.  Because  es  here  answers  to  the  Greek  etc. 

8.  Final  ys  corresponds  to  the  Greek  vg,  which  is  for  the  most  port 
chort. 


riNAL   SYLLABLES.  93 

Lucan.  Ante  Ms  exactum  quam  Cynthia  conderet  orhem. 

Mart.  Et  bibis  immundam,  cum  cane,pronus  aquam.  (Pent.) 

Ovid.  Tethys  et  extremo  s(Bpe  recepta  loco  est.     (Pentam.) 

Virg.  At  Capys,  et  quorum  melior  sententia  menti. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  All  plural  cases  ending  in  is  have  that  syllable 
long ;  as,  Musis,  terns,  nobis,  vobls,  ilUs,  amaris} 

Mart.      Carmina  quod  scribis,  Musis  et  Apolline  nullo. 
Lucret.  Secernunt,  ccdumque  a  terris  omne  retentant. 
Id.  Nobis  est  ratio,  soils  lurueque  meatus. 

Ovid.  Abstulit  omne  Phaon  quod  vobis  ante  placebat. 
Virg.  Pinguia  concipiunt,  sive  illis  omne  per  ignem. 
Id.  Strymonimque  grues,  et  amaris  intuba  Jibris. 


Exc.  2.  Final  is  is  long  in  the  second  person  singular  of 
verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  ;  as,  sentis,  fastidis,  au- 
dis ;  to  which  add  f  is,  from^o.* 
Horat.      Sentis,  ac  veluti  stet  volucris  dies.    (Choriambic.) 
Id.  Pocula,  num  esuriens  fasti(Us  omnia  prcBter. 

Propert.  Non  audis  ?  et  verba  sinis  mea  ludere,  cum  jam* 
Horat.      Lenior  ac  melior  fis,  accedente  senecta  ? 


Exc.  3.  Glis,  VIS  whether  noun  or  verb ;  velis  and  sis,^ 
with  their  compounds,  as  quamvis,  noUs,  maUs,  adsis, 
possis,*  have  the  final  is  long. 

1.  Plural  cases  in  is  were  anciently  written  with  the  diphthong  ei; 
as,  Museis,  terreis,  &c. 

2.  The  syllable  is  in  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  is  the  result  of 
contraction,  and  therefore  long.  Thus,  we  have  audiis,  contracted  au- 
dis ;  sentiis,  sentis,  &c. 

3.  Sis  is  formed  by  contraction  from  sies.  The  old  forms  sieniy  sies, 
siet,  occur  frequently  in  Plautus. 

4.  In  Juvenal  (5,  10)  some  read  possh  with  the  final  syllable  short. 
Ruperti,  however,  condemns  this  reading,  and  substitutes  possit.  So  in 
Ovid  {Her.,  12,  71),  nescis  is  said  to  occur  with  the  final  syllable  short, 
but  erroneously.  It  appears  neither  in  the  edition  of  Heinsius  nor  in 
that  of  Burmann.  The  latter  merely  mentions  it  in  a  note,  as  a  reading 
which  is  in  direct  violation  of  the  metre. 


94  FiNAt   SYLLABLES. 

Mart.  HcBC  tihi  si  vis  est,  si  mentis  tanta  potestas* 

Id.  Bellus  homo  et  magnuSy  vts  idem,  Cottay  videri. 

Id.  Esse  vetis  ore  serus  conviva  Tonantis, 

Horat.  Cum  sis,  et  prove  sectum  stomacheris  oh  unguem. 

Propert.  Quamvis  ille  sua  lassus  requiescat  avena, 

Juv.  Et  cui  per  mediam  noUs  occurrere  noctem. 

Horat.  Magnas  GrcBcorum  malts  implere  catervas. 

Virg.  Adsis,  O  Tegecee,  favens ;  olecsque  Minerva. 

Horat.  Non  possis  oculis  quantum  contendere  Lynceus. 


Exc.  4.  The  adverbs  fonsy  gratis,  and  ingratis  have  the 
final  syllable  long.' 
Horat.    Ne  biberis  diluta,  foris  est  promus  et  atrum. 
Phaedr.  Gratis  anhelans,  multa  agendo  nil  agens.   (Iambic.) 
Lucret.  Effugere  haud  potis  est,  ingratis  hc^ret  et  angit. 


Exc.  5.  Final  is  is  long  in  those  nouns  which  form  their 
genitiv^e  singular  in  entis,  inis,  or  itis,  with  the  penult 
long ;  as,  Simois  (gen.  Simoentis),  Salamis  (gen.  Sal' 
aminis),  Samnis  (gen.  Sammtis),  lis  (gen.  litis). 
Ovid.    Hac  ibat  Simois ;  h(Bc  est  Sige'ia  tellus. 
Lucil.  Samnis  in  ludo  ac  rudibus  causis  satis  asper. 


Exc.  6.  The  final  syllable  ris,  in  the  second  future  of 
the  indicative  and  perfect  subjunctive,  is  common  ;  as, 
amaveris  or  amaveris? 

Exc.  7.  Final  ys  is  long  in  such  contracted  plurals  as 
Erinnys  for  Erinnyes  or  Erinnyas.  The  following 
line  of  Seneca  (CEdip.,  644)  shows  the   use  of  the 

1.  Forts  is  in  reality  the  ablative  of  fora,  '*  a  door,"  the  same  as  foris 
of  the  third  declension.  Gratis  and  ingratis  are  contracted  datives  for 
gratiis  and  ingraliis,  which  are  found  in  the  open  form  in  the  comic 
writers. 

2.  Almost  all  the  examples  in  which  it  is  found  long  are  in  the  arsis ; 
1)ut  there  is  at  least  one  instance  in  Horace  which  cannot  be  explained 
upon  this  principle:  "<St  ttire  placarh  et  homo"  {Oil.,  3,  23,  3). — A. 
numerous  list  of  instances  where  ris  occurs,  either  with  the  long  or  short 
quantity,  noay  be  seen  in  Ramsay^ $  Lot.  Proa.,  p.  77.  ■ 


FINAL   SYLLABLES.  95 

word,  though  it  cannot  be  made  any  proof  of  the  quan- 
tity: 

Et  mecum  Erinnys  pronubas  thalami  traham. 


FINAL    OS. 

Rule.  Final  os  is  long;  as,  viros, pueros,  custas,  ventoSf 
jactatos. 

Virg.        Inter  se  coiisse  viros,  et  cernere  ferro, 
Propert.  Differ  at  in  pueros  ista  tropcsa  suos.    (Pentam.) 
Horat.      Custos  amatorem  trecentm.     (Iambic.) 
Virg.        Ventos  et  varium  ccbU  prcBdiscere  morem. 
Id.  His  accensa  super,  jactatos  (squore  toto. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Final  os  is  short  in  compos,  impos,  os  ("  a  bone"), 
and  its  compound  exos. 

Ovid,      Insequere,  et  voti postmodo  compos  eris.  (Pent.) 
Lucret.  Exos  et  exsanguis  tumidos  perfluctuat  artus. 


Exc.  2.  Final  os  is  likewise  short  in  Greek  words,  writ- 
ten in  tbe  original  with  an  omicron  or  short  o;  aLS^Ili- 
OS,  Tyros,  Samos,  Chios,  Rkodos,  epos} 
Ovid.      Turn  cum  iristis  erat,  defensa  est  Ilios  armis, 
Lucan.  Et  Tyros  instabilis,  pretiosaque  murice  Sidon. 
Horat.    RomcB  laudetur  Samos  et  Chios,  et  Rhodos  ahsens. 
Id.  Facta  canit,  pede  ter  percusso,  forte  epos  acer. 


FINAL  us. 

Rule.  Final  us  is  short ;  as,  taurus,  tempus,  cultuSf  im- 

probus,  solibus,  scindimus,  intus, 

Virg.   Taurus,  et  adverso  cedens  Cams  occidit  astro. 

Id.        Tempus  humo  tegere,  et  jamdudum  incumbere  aratris. 

Id.        Conveniat,  qu(B  cura  boum,  qui  cultus  habendo. 

Id.       Improbus,  et  duris  urgens  in  rebus  egestas. 

1.  But  those  words  in  which  the  Latin  os  represents  the  Greek  «f  re- 
tain their  original  quantity ;  as,  herds  {rjpug),  Minds  (Mtvwf),  &c. 


96  FINAL   SYLLABLES. 

Virg.  Puherulenta  coquat  maturis  solibus  <Bstas. 
Id.       At  prius  ignotum  ferro  quam  scindimus  (squor. 
Id.       Intus  aqu<B  dulces,  vivoque  sedilia  saxo, 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Monosyllables  in  us  are  long ;  as,  jus,  plus,  pus, 
thus.^ 
Pedo.    Sed  rigidumjus  est  et  inevitahile  mortis. 
Mart.    Emi  hortos ;  plus  est :  instrue  tu ;  minus  est.    (Pent.) 
Horat.  Proscripti  Regis  Rupilt  pus  atque  venerium. 
Id.        Angulus  ille  feret  piper  et  thus  ocius  uva. 


Exc.  2.  Final  us  is  long  in  nouns  which  increase  with 
long  u  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  virtus  (gen.  virtutis),  tellus 
{telluris),  servitus  (servitutis),  palus  {paludis)? 
Horat.     Virtus  indigno  non  committenda  poetce» 
Prise.     Divitias  magnas  hie  tellus  ipsa  ministrat. 
Phaedr.  Brevi  docebo.     Servitus  ohnoxia,     (Iambic.) 
Virg.      Cocyti,  tardaque  palus  inamabilis  unda. 


Exc.  3.  Final  us  is  also  long  in  the  genitive  singular, 
and  in  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural, 
of  the  fourth  declension;  as,  genitive  sing.,  mantes ; 
nom.,  accus.,  and  voc.  plural,  manus.  But  nominative 
and  vocative  singular,  manus,^ 

Pedo.     Scilicet  immunis  si  luctus  una  fuisset, 

Lucret.  Sensus  ante  ipsam  genitam  naturam  animantis. 

Virg.       Saltus  et  saturi  petito  longinqua  Tarenti. 


Exc.  4.  Final  us  is  also  long  in  words  transplanted  from 

1.  This  exception  and  the  one  immediately  following  belong  in  strict- 
ness to  the  same  head,  namely,  that  of  a  long  increment  in  the  genitive. 

2.  Horace  {Ep.  ad  Pis.,  65)  furnishes  a  solitary  instance  of  paliis 
with  the  final  syllable  short.  Bentley  proposes  a  different  reading.  The 
line,  however,  is  retained  unaltered  in  the  best  editions.— (For  some  re- 
marks on  the  verse,  consult  Horat.,  cd.  Arith.,  p.  326,  not.  crit.) 

3.  In  the  genitive  singular  of  the  fourth  declension  the  final  u«  is  a 
contraction  from  uis ;  and  in  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative 
plural,  from  ties.     Both,  therefore,  arc  long,  of  course. 


FINAL   SYLLABLE    OF   A   VERSE.  OY 

the  Greek,  in  which  us  represents  the  Greek  ovg, 
whatever  the  case  may  be ;  as,  Panthus  (Ilavdovg), 
Amathus  ('A/xa^ovf),  Mantus  (Mavrovg),  Didus  (At- 
6ovg)j  &c. 

Virg.     Panthus,  Othryades,  arcis  Phzbique  sacerdos. 

Id.         Est  Amathus,  est  celsa  mihi  Paphos,  atque  Cythera. 

Id.         FatidicfB  Mantus  et  Tuscijilius  amnis. 

Varro.  Didus  atque  suum  misceri  sanguine  sanguen. 


Obs.  1.  Polypus  has  the  final  syllable  short  in  Horace 
(Epod.^  12,  5),  which  it  gets,  not  from  the  common  Greek 
form  TTO^vTTovg,  but  from  the  Doric  7T(*)Xvnog,  which  will 
account  also  for  the  lengthening  of  the  initial  syllable.* 

Obs.  2.  The  sacred  name  lESUS  (in  Greek  IHSOTi:) 
is  included  in  this  exception,  and  has  the  final  syllable 
long. 

SECTION  XXIV. 

FINAL  SYLLABLE  OF  A  VERSE. 
The  final  syllable  of  every  verse  (except  the  Anapaestic 
and  Ionic  a  minore)  may  be  either  long  or  short,  at  the  op- 
tion of  the  poet ;  that  is,  a  long  syllable  may  be  used  to 
close  a  verse,  though  the  measure  require  one  that  is  short ; 
or  a  short  syllable  may  be  used,  though  the  measure  re- 
quire one  that  is  long.  Thus,  in  the  first  of  the  following 
lines,  the  long  syllable  r<e  is  made  to  stand  in  place  of  a 
short ;  and,  in  the  second,  the  short  syllable  que  stands  in 
lieu  of  a  long. 

Herat.  Jam  satis  terris  nivis  atque  dirds.     (Sapphic.) 
Virg.     NescBe,  Spioque,  Thaliaque,  Cymodoceque. 

1.  Athenaeus  (7,  107)  quotes  the  following  line  from  Epicharmus, 
where  the  Doric  form  occurs  :  TiuXvKoi  te,  cr]mai  re,  koI  Troraval  rev- 
dideg  ;  and  another  from  Archestratus  :  UuXvTroL  h>  re  Qda(p  kuI  Kapig, 
dalv  aptcTOL.  Ho  then  goes  on  to  remark,  ^upulg  S*  avrov  Sia  tov  w 
Ka'^vat  iTQ^VTroVf  ug  ''Emxapnog'  koI  ^Lfxcividrjg  S"  ^<J)t)-  ^tzuT^vtzov 
di^TJfievog.^*  ^AttikoI  6e  ttoXvttovv.  (Athen.,  7. —  vol.  3,  p.  169,  ed. 
Schweigh.)    So  the  Greeks  used  both  OidiTcovg,  -odog,  and  OidiTroc,  -ov. 

1 


98   THE  QUANTITY  OF  THE  PENULT  OF  WORDS.* 

Obs.  1.  The  principle  on  which  the  above  rule  depends 
is  not  that  the  syllable  in  question  undergoes  any  actual 
change  of  quantity,  but  simply,  that,  by  reason  of  its  posi- 
tion at  the  end  of  the  line,  and  the  interruption  which  the 
metre  there  sustains,  the  same  strictness  is  not  required  as 
in  other  syllables  differently  situated ;  and  hence  the  real 
quantity  of  the  syllable  becomes  so  comparatively  unimpor- 
tant, that  the  poet  has  the  license  of  which  we  are  treating 
allowed  him.^ 

Obs.  2.  The  exceptions  in  the  case  of  the  Anapaestic 
and  Ionic  a  minore  measures  will  be  explained  when  we 
come  to  treat  of  those  two  kinds  of  verse. 

SECTION  XXV. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  QUANTITY  OF  THE  PENULT  OP 
WORDS. 

I.  Patronymics  in  ides  or  ades  usually  shorten  the  penult; 
as,  PriamideSj  Atlantiades,  &c.  Unless  they  come  from 
nouns  in  eus ;  as,  PeUdes,  Tydides,  &c.^ 

1.  Compare  the  remarks  of  Hermann :  "  Quum  in  numeris  tempora 
omnia  certa  esse  ac  definita  dchcant,  facile  intclligitur^  in  numeris  ipsis 
nihil  usquam  posse  anceps  esse;  itaque  si  qua  inveniuntur  ancipitet 
syllaba,  i.  e.,  quce  breves  sint  quum  longa  esse  debeant,  vel  longce  quum 
debeant  breves  esse,  eas,  quod  ad  numerum  attinet,  pro  talibus  numerari, 
quotes  debeant  ease,  etsi  non  sint  tales.  Id  autem  nemo  non  videt  sic 
tantum  fieri  posse,  si  qui  sint  in  numeris  loci  in  quilms  pravitas  ista 
mensura  nihil  aut  parum  offensionis  habeat.  Hujus  modi  loci  duo  sunt. 
Unus  e^t  in  Anacrusi  ex  una  brevi  syllaba.  Alter  est  in  fine  ordinis, 
ubi,  quoniam  nihil  sequitur,  quod  terminum  ponat  ccrtum,  ac  potiug 
pausa  qucedam  succedit,  pariter  delitescit  mensurce  pravitas.  Unde  vel 
brevis  syllaba  longa  locum  tenere  potest^  vel  longa  pro  brevi  m#c." 
(Herm.,  Elem.  Doctr.,  1,9.) 

2.  In  a  paper  on  "  Greek  patronymics^*  (published  in  the  European 
Magazine  for  August,  1817),  Dr.  Carey,  in  remarking  on  the  patronym- 
ics 'ATpeiSrii,  tlnXetdric,  &c.,  and  their  corresponding  Latin  forms 
(which  he  writes  with  ci  instead  of  the  long  i  alone,  as),  Atreides,  Pe- 
leides,  observes,  •'  I  conceive,  that  wherever,  in  Greek  or  Latin  poetry, 
we  find  one  of  those  patronymics  in  such  a  position  as  to  allow  the  alter- 
native of  one  long  syllable  or  two  short,  we  are,  if  not  bound,  at  least 
authorized,  to  pronounce  the  ei  as  two  distinct  syllables ;  thus  producing. 
in  each  of  the  following  instances,  a  dactyl  instead  of  the  spondee,  which 
results  from  the  ordinary  mode  of  pronunciation ;  ex.  gr., 


THE    QUANTITY    OF   THE    PENULT    OP   WORDS.        99 

II.  Patronymics  and  similar  words  in  dis,  eis,  itis,  dis, 
Otis,  ine,  and  one,  commonly  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  Achd- 
'is,  Ptolemdis,  Chryseis,  JErieis,  Memphitis,  Latois,  Icario' 
tis,  Nerine,  Arisione.  Except  Thebdis  and  Phocdis ;  and 
Nereis,  which  is  common. 

III.  Adjectives  in  acus,  icus,  idus,  and  imus  for  the  most 
part  shorten  the  penult ;  as,  JEgyptidcus,  academicus,  lepi- 
dus,  legitimus ;  also  superlatives,  as  fortissimus,  &c.  Ex- 
cept opdcus,  amicus,  apncus,  pudicus,  mendicus,  posticus,  ft- 
dus,  infidus  (but  perfldus,  oi per  a,nd  fides,  is  short),  himus, 
quadrimus,  patrimus,  matrimus,  opimus  ;  and  two  superla- 
tives, imus,  primus. 

IV.  Adjectives  in  emus  have  the  penult  long ;  as,  postre- 
mus. 

V.  Adjectives  in  alis,  anus,  arus,  irus,  ivus,  orus,  osus, 
udus,  urus,  and  utus,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  dotdlis,  ur- 
hdnus,  avdrus,  deUrus,  cBStivus,  decorus,  formosus^  percrudus, 
edurus,  astutus.     Except  barbdrus,  opipdrus. 

VI.  Adjectives  in  His,  if  derived  from  verbs,  shorten  the 
penult;  as,  agilis,  facilis, habilis,  &c.  But  derivatives  from 
nouns  usually  lengthen  it ;  as,  anilis,  civilis,  herilis,  <fec.  To 
these  add  exilis,  suhtilis ;  and  names  of  months  ;  as,  Aprl- 
lis,  Quinctilis,  Sextilis  :  except  humilis,  parilis,  and  also 
similis.  But  all  adjectives  in  atilis  are  short ;  as,  versatt- 
lis,  volattUs,  umbratilis,  &Lc. 

VII.  Adjectives  in  inus,  derived  from  inanimate  things, 


'Arpetdrjg  te,  uva^  avdpQv,  koc  Slog  ^Axi2,Xevg. 
Atrcidas,  Priamumque,  et  scRvum  amhohus  Achillem. 

Thus  also,  instead  of  spondaic  lines  in  the  following  instances  {Iliad,  2, 
9,  and  17.  191), 

^EWuv  £f  Kltairiv  ' Aya/xe/nvovog  'ArpetSao, 
or  Tcpori  aarv  (pepov  KkvTa  revx^a  Tlri%ei6ao, 

we  should  have  verses  of  the  regular  form,  with  the  dactyl  in  the  fifth 
place  ;  and  the  same  remark  applies  to  Ilr]2,Eio)va,  which  often  occurs  in 
the  Iliad,  and  to  various  other  patronymics,  which  it  is  not  here  neces- 
sary to  enumerate." 


%«* 


100   THE  QUANTrTY  OF  THE  PENULT  OP  WORDS. 

as  plants,  trees,  stones,  &;c. ;  from  adverbs  of  time,  or 
from  substantives  denoting  the  four  seasons  of  the  year, 
shorten  the  penult ;  as,  amaracinuSy  crocinus,  hyacinthmus  ; 
cednnuSjfagmus,  oleaginus ;  adamantmus,  crystalUnuSy  smo' 
ragdinus ;  crastmus,  diutmus,  serotinus;  earmus,  oponnus, 
ehimennusy  thennus ;  also  annoUnus,  hornotmus^  To  which 
add  hombycinuSj  elephantmus,  which  seem  to  refer  rather  to 
the  silk  and  ivory  than  to  the  animals  themselves. 

VIII.  Adjectives  in  inusj  derived  from  living  things, 
numeral  distributives,  proper  names,  and  gentile  nouns, 
lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  agriinuSy  camnus.  leporinus ;  binus, 
trinus,  quinus  ;  Albinus,  Cratlnus,  Justmus ;  Alexandrinus, 
Lattnusy  VenusinuSy  &c.  To  which  add  adjectives  of 
place ;  as,  colUnus,  marmus,  vicmus ;  and  those  derive^ 
from  nouns  denoting  time ;  as,  matutmus,  vespertlnus ;  to- 
gether with  all  other  adjectives  in  inus  not  included  in  the 
preceding  rule  :  as,  festmuSy  libertmus,  inopinus,  peregnnusy 
suplnus,  &c. 

IX.  Diminutives  in  olusj  ola,  oluniy  and  ulus,  ula^  ulum, 
always  shorten  the  penult;  as,  urceolusj filiolat  musaolum; 
lectuluSj  ratiuncula,  corculum,  &c. 

X.  Adverbs  in  tim  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  oppiddtim, 
vintinif  tribuiim.     Except  affdtim,  perpetim^  and  stdtim,^ 

XI.  Desideratives  in  urio  shorten  the  antepenultima, 
which  in  the  second  or  third  person  is  the  penult ;  as,  esu^ 
rio,  esuris,  esurit.  But  other  verbs  in  urio  lengthen  that 
syllable  ;  as,  ligurio,  liguris ;  scatHrio,  scaturis. 

1.  But  stdtim,  signifying  ^' on  the  upot,'*  ^*  steadily,**  **  constantly,'* 
has  the  penult  long.  It  occurs  in  Plautu»  (Amph.,  1,  1,  84;  lb.,  120) 
and  in  Terence  {Phorm.,  6,  3,  7).  It  is  said  to  be  derived,  in  common 
with  stdtim,  from  the  same  verb,  sto. 


SECTION  XXVI. 
FIGURES  OF  PROSODY. 

I.    C^SURA.^ 
Part  I. 

I.  The  term  Caesura  is  used  in  two  different  senses  by 
prosodians  ;  first,  with  reference  to  whole  verses,  and,  sec- 
ondly, as  regards  single  feet. 

II.  In  the  former  acceptation,  it  means  the  division  of  a 
verse  into  two  portions  or  members,  affording  a  short  pause 
or  rest  for  the  voice  in  some  convenient  part,  where  that 
pause  may  take  place  without  injury  to  the  sense  or  to  the 
harmony  of  the  line  ;  as, 

Virg.   Tant<B  molis  erat  H  Romanam  condere  gentem. 
Id.       Errabant  actifatis  ||  maria  omnia  circum, 

III.  In  this  sense,  however,  it  is  usually,  for  distinction* 
sake,  styled  the  Ccssural  Pause,  and  is  chiefly  connected* 
with  the  consideration  of  hexameter  verse.  It  will  there- 
fore be  treated  of  more  at  large  under  that  head. 

IV.  In  its  application  to  single  feet,  the  caesura  means 
the  division  or  separation  which  takes  place  in  a  foot,  on 
account  of  the  syllables  which  compose  that  foot  belonging 
to  different  words  ;  as, 

Virg.  Pasto\res  ovi\um  iener\os  de\pellere  \  fcztus. 
In  this  verse  the  caesura,  in  its  second  acceptation,  occurs 
three  times,  viz.,  in  the  second  foot,  between  res  and  ovi  ; 
in  the  third,  between  um  and  iener ;  and  in  the  fourth,  be- 
tween OS  and  de? 

V.  There  are  three  kinds  of  caesura  in  its  second  accep- 

1.  Casura,  "a  cutting  off"  (in  Greek  Tofiri),  from  ccsdo,  "to  cut." 

2.  Some  give  the  name  Caesura  to  the  syllable  that  remains  after  the 
completion  of  a  foot ;  as,  res,  um,  and  os,  in  the  line  given  in  the  text. 
The  best  prosodians,  however,  consider  it  more  accurate  to  confine  the 
term  to  the  separation  or  division  which  takes  place  in  a  foot,  and  to  call 
the  residuary  long  syllable  simply  a  long  syllable,  or  a  semifoot. 

I  2 


102  '_  \\;j|^VB3S  OF  paosoDY. 

tation,  namely,  the  Syllabic,  the  Trochaic,  and  the  MonO' 
syllabic. 

VI.  The  Syllabic  CcBSura  is  that  in  which  the  first  part 
of  the  divided  foot  consists  of  the  last  syllable  of  a  word ; 
as, 

Virg.    Sylvejs\trem  tenu\i  mus\am  medi\taris  av\ena. 
Here  the  syllables  irem  (of  sylvestrem),  i  (of  tenui),  and  am 
(of  musam),  are  instances  of  this  species  of  caesura. 

The  Syllabic  Cmsura  may  take  place  in  a  heroic  verse 
at  what  are  technically  called  the  triemimeris^  pentkemime' 
ris,  hephihemimeris,  and  sometimes  at  the  ennehemimeris.^ 
Thus, 

3  6  7 

Virg.  Si  cani\mus  sylv\as  sylv\dB  sint  \  consule  |  digncs. 
Id.  Ille  la\tus  nive\um  moll\i  fult\us  hya\cintho. 
Here  the  caesural  syllables  mus  (of  canimus)  in  the  first 
line,  and  tus  (of  latus)  in  the  second,  are  in  the  triemime' 
ris,  or  third  half-foot  of  the  line  ;  the  syllables  as  (of  sylvas) 
and  urn  (of  niveum)  are  in  the  penthemimeris,  or  fifth  half- 
foot  ;  the  syllables  <e  (of  sylv<E)  and  i  (of  molli)  are  in  the 
heplUhemimeris,  or  seventh  half-foot ;  and  the  syllable  us 
(oifultus)  is  in  the  ennehemimeris,  or  ninth  half-foot. 

VII.  The  Trochaic  C(Bsura  is  that  in  which  the  first  part 
of  the  divided  foot  consists  either  of  a  long  and  short  sylla- 
ble, or,  in  other  words,  a  trochee  ("  "),  remaining  at  the  end 
of  a  word,  or  of  an  entire  word  composed  of  one  long  and 
one  short  syllable  ;  as, 

Virg.  Fortu\ndtus  et  \  tile  de\os  qui  \  novit  a\grestes, 

1.  These  terms  owe  their  origin  to  the  practice,  geDerally  adopted  by 
the  old  grammarians,  of  measuring  lines  by  half-feet.  Thus,  the  triem- 
imeris  is  that  portion  of  a  verse  (counted  or  measured  from  the  beginning  • 
of  a  line)  which  contains  three  half-parts  (jptl^,  **  three,^^  rjfii,  "half,^' 
and  fiepi^,  "a  part''),  i.  e.,  three  half-feet,  or  a  foot  and  a  half  (two  short 
syllables  being  counted  as  one  long).  Again,  the  penthcmimeris  indi- 
cates Jive  half-parts  (Trcvre,  '*Jive"  yfit,  and  fiepig),  or  two  feet  and  a 
half ;  the  hephthemimeris,  seven  half-parts  {inra,  "  »et>«n,"  fifii,  and  /le- 
ptc) ;  and  the  ennehemimiris  nine  half-parts  {hvia,  "  nine,''  ijfu,  and 
/icpif). 


FIGURES    OF   PROSODY.  103 

Here  natus  in  the  second  foot,  tile  in  the  third,  and  novit  in 
the  fifth,  form  each  a  trochee,  and  in  each  of  these  divis- 
ions of  the  line  a  trochaic  caesura  takes  place. 

The  Trochaic  CcBsura  may  occur  in  either  of  the  first  five 
feet  of  a  verse ;  as, 

Virg.  Arma  pro\cul  curr\usque  vir\um  mi\ratur  in\anes. 

Id.        Talia  \  voce  re\fert,  o  |  terque  qua\terque  belati. 
Two  siwcessive  trochees,  however,  in  the  second  and  third 
feet  must  be  avoided,  since  they  give  the  verse  a  flippant 
and  undignified  air.     Thus, 

Ennius.  Ergo  ma\gisque  ma\gisque  vir\i  nunc  |  gloria  \  claret. 
Propert.  Et  gravi\dra  re\pendit  in\iquis  |  pensa  qua\sillis. 
In  the  third  and  fourth  they  are  nearly  as  disagreeable  ;'  as, 
Ennius.    Prudent\em  qui  j  multa  lo\quwe  ta\cereve  |  posset. 
But  two  successive  trochees  may  agreeably  occur  in  the 
first  and  second  feet ;  as, 

Virg.  ckre  ci\ere  vir\os  Mart\emque  ac\cendere  \  cantu. 
Or  in  the  fourth  and  fifth ;  as, 
Virg.  Et  glau\cas  sali\ces  casi\amque  cro\cumque  ru\hentem. 

VIII.  The  Monosyllabic  Caesura  is  that  in  which  the  first 
syllable  of  the  divided  foot  is  a  monosyllable  ;  as, 

Virg.  Hie  vir  hie  |  est  tihi  \  quern  pro\mitti  \  s<epius  \  aiidis. 

IX.  Of  the  three  kinds  of  caesura  which  have  been  here 
enumerated,  the  syllabic  seems  to  have  been  the  principal 
one  in  Latin  versification ;  and  but  few  harmonious  lines 
can  be  found  in  which  it  is  not  introduced.  Next  in  met- 
rical effect  is  the  trochaic. 

1.  In  Homer,  however,  we  have  two  remarkable  instances  of  the  use 
of  successive  trochees  in  producing  a  beautiful  onomatopoeia.     Thus, 

TldXkd  (5*  av\a.vTa,  KdT\dvTd,  ndp\dvTa  te,  \  doxfJ-td  \  r',  tjTSov. — (7Z,, 

23,116.) 
cvTtf  tTc\elrd  'KE6\dv6£  Kv7i\iv8ETo  \  Adaf  dv\ai8'^g. — {Od.,  11,598.) 

The  following  striking  passage  may  also  be  cited  from  Virgil  (-^n.,  1, 85) : 

Una  Eu\rusquc  Not\usque  ru\unt  cre\berque  pro\cellis. 


104  FIGURES    OF    PROSODY. 

X.  On  the  caesura  depend,  in  a  very  great  degree,  the 
beauty  and  melody  of  a  verse.  While  its  presence  serves 
to  give  animation  to  the  line,  and,  by  connecting  together 
the  different  words  of  which  it  is  composed,  imparts  to  it 
an  air  of  gracefulness  and  ease,  its  absence,  on  the  other 
hand,  is  marked  by  a  total  want  of  poetic  harmony.  A 
line  in  which  the  caesura  is  either  wholly  omitted,  or  in  a 
great  degree  neglected,  has,  in  fact,  little  to  distinguish  it 
from  common  prose,  and  can  only  be  admitted  into  Latin 
poetry  on  occasions  in  which  harmony  is  purposely  avoid- 
ed, as  in  many  of  the  neglected  hexameters  of  Horace. 

XL  The  following  lines  may  serve  to  show  the  uncouth- 
ness  and  inelegance  attendant  upon  the  neglect  of  the  cae- 
sura. 
Ennius.  Spar  sis  \  hastis  \  late  \  campus  \  splendet  et  \  hor- 

ret. 
Id.  Disper\ge  hostes  |  distrahe  \  diduc  \  divide  |  differ. 

Propert.  Non  me  \  moribus  \  ilia  sed  \  herbis  |  improha  |  vicit. 

XIL  A  caesura,  however,  is  not  indispensably  requisite 
in  everi/  foot  of  a  verse.  Although  the  most  melodious 
lines  are  certainly  those  in  which  the  caesura  is  frequently 
introduced,  still  a  long  uninterrupted  series  of  them  would 
have  any  other  than  a  pleasing  effect ;  and  therefore  it  be- 
comes advisable  occasionally  to  omit  the  caesura  in  one  or 
more  of  the  feet,  and  in  this  way  to  produce  an  agreeable 
variety. — The  following  rules  have  been  laid  down  on  this 
subject,  and  deserve  attention. 

L  In  the  first  foot  of  a  verse  the  caesura  may  generally 
be  omitted ;  as, 

Virg.  Pauperis  |  et  tugur\i  con\gestum  \  cespite  \  culmen. 

2.  Li  the  second  foot  the  caesura  is  often  omitted ;  but, 
when  this  omission  takes  place,  the  word  which  be- 
gins the  foot  is  generally  of  sufficient  len^h  to  com- 


FIGTJRES    OF    PROSODY.  105 

plete  it,  and  leave  a  caesural  syllable  in  the  next  foot  ;* 
as, 
Virg.  Squamea  \  convolv\ens  suh\lato  \  pectore  \  terga, 

3.  The  caesura  is  not  so  frequently  omitted  at  the  pen- 
themiraeris  as  it  is  in  the  other  feet ;  and  when  it  is 
omitted  in  the  third  it  always  occurs  in  the  fourth,  and 
generally  in  the  second  foot.  When  this  omission  of 
the  caesura  at  the  penthemimeris  takes  place,  the  third 
foot  generally  consists  of  the  first  two  or  three  sylla- 
bles of  a  word,  which  is  finished  in  the  next  foot ;  as, 

Virg.    Jussa  mor\i  qu(B  \  sorti\tus  non  \  pertulit  \  ullos. 

4.  In  the  fourth  foot  the  caesura  is  not  necessary,  if  there 
be  one  at  the  penthemimeris ;  as, 

Virg.    Pinguis  et  \  ingra\t(z  preme\retur  \  caseus  |  urhi, 

5.  The  syllabic  and  monosyllabic  caesuras  are  seldom 
introduced  after  the  fourth  foot,  but  the  trochaic  often 
occurs  at  the  ennehemimeris,  and  in  most  instances  is 
conducive  to  the  harmony  of  the  line  ;  as, 

Virg.  ScBpe  le\vi  somn\um  sua\dehit  in^re  su\surro. 

Id.       Hinc  al\ta  sub  \  rupe  can\et  frond\dtdr  ad  |  auras. 

6.  When  there  is  but  one  caesura  in  a  verse,  it  is  gener- 
ally in  the  third  foot,  sometimes  in  the  fourth,  but  nev- 
er in  the  second  ;  as, 

Virg.   Quern  mea  \  carmini\hus  meru\isset  j  jistula  \  caprum, 

7.  In  a  pentameter  verse,  a  syllabic  caesura  generally 

1,  The  frequent  recurrence  of  the  verb  nescio  as  a  dactyl,  and  of  the 
prepositions  inter  and  intra  as  spondees,  forming  the  second  foot,  appears 
at  first  view  inconsistent  with  this  rule ;  but,  in  reality,  it  is  quite  in  accord- 
ance with  it.  It  has  been  clearly  ascertained  that  the  preposition  and  its 
case  were  frequently  pronounced  with  one  accent  as  one  word,  and  there 
is  reason  to  suppose  that  nescio  was  often  connected  in  a  similar  manner 
with  the  word  which  followed  it.  Thus,  the  words  inter  se  were  pro- 
nounced, and  consequently  regarded  in  versification,  as  though  they  were 
written  interse,  and  nescio  quis  as  though  written  nescioquis.  A  similar 
connexion  is  not  unusual  in  English  words;  thus,  same  body  is  pronoun- 
ced somebody;  no  body,  nobody;  can  not,  cannot.  {Bradley^ s  Lai. 
Pros.,  p.  49.) 


106  FIGURES    OP   PROSODY. 

takes  place  at  the  penthemimeris,  and  a  trocliaic  in 
the  foot  preceding  the  final  syllable  in  the  second  hem- 
istich or  half-verse ;  as, 
Ovid.  Nee  guere\rer  tard\os  \\  ire  re\licta  di\es. 
Id,       Nil  mihi  \  rescrih\as,  ||  attamen  |  ipse  ve\ni, 

8.  There  is  sometimes  a  monosyllabic  caesura  at  the 
penthemimeris  of  a  pentameter,  when  the  preceding 
word  is  a  monosyllable  ;  as, 

Ovid.    Magna  tam\en  spes  \  est  \\  in  honit\ate  de\i. 

9.  The  trochaic  caesura  is  sometimes  neglected  in  the 
foot  preceding  the  final  syllable  of  a  pentameter,  and 
the  verse  is  concluded  by  a  word  of  four  or  more  syl- 
lables; as, 

Ovid.   Lis  est  \  cumform\a  |I  magna  pu\diciti\<B» 

C  JE  S  U  R  A. 
Part  II. 
T.  A  syllable  naturally  short  is  occasionally  lengthened 
when  it  is  caesutal.'  This,  however,  takes  place  chiefly  in 
hexameter  verse,  and  more  sparingly  in  elegiac  and  lyric 
versification.  Thus,  in  hexameters  we  have,  among  other 
instances,  the  following : 

Virg.     Pectori\hus  inhi\ans  spir\antia  \  consuUt  \  exta. 
Id.         Emicat  \  Eurya\lus  et  \  munere  |  victor  a\mici* 
Horat.  Cum  gravi\us  dors\o  subi\it  onus,  \  Incipit  |  ille. 
Virg.     Graius  hom\o  infect\os  linq\uens profu\gus  hymen\<Bos. 

1.  In  ordinary  language  we  ascribe  this  to  the  force  of  the  casura  ; 
but  the  true  principle  on  which  the  rule  depends  is  simply  this ;  that  the 
pressure  of  the  voice  is  exerted  on  the  syllables  in  question,  and  produ- 
ces the  same  effect  as  if  they  were  pronounced  with  double  length.  The 
stress  of  the  voice  in  dactylic  versification  always  falls,  it  must  be  re- 
membered, on  the  first  part  of  the  foot.  This  part  is  called  the  arsis 
(upai^),  or  •'  elevation,"  the  tone  of  the  voice  being  here  somewhat  ele- 
vated ;  while  the  remaining  portion  is  termed  the  thesis  (^iat^),  or  "  de- 
pression," the  voice  being  in  this  part  of  the  foot  comparatively  depress- 
ed.—(Compare  the  remarks  of  Maltby  on  the  Ictus  Melricus,  ch.  8,  p. 
xii. — Lex.  Pros.) 


FIGURES    OF    PROSODY.  107 

In  the  second  line  of  the  elegiac  distich  we  have  the  fol- 
lowing : 

TibuU.      Quicquid  ag\at  sang\uis  ll  est  tamen  \  tile  tu\us. 
Propert.    Vinceris  |  aut  vin\cis  \\  hcBC  in  am\ore  rot\a  est. 
Ovid.        In  liquid\um  redi\it  11  (Bthera  |  Martis  eq\uis. 
In  lyrics  the  following  occur : 

Horat.  Si  non  \  peri\ret  ||  immisera\bilis. 

Id.  CcBca  tim\et  ali\unde  |  fata. 

Id.         Perru\pit  Acheront\a  Herculeus  \  labor. 

Id.         Sifiigit  adamant\inos. 

Id.  Angu\lus  ri\det  uhi  \  non  Hym\etto, 
II.  Instances  even  occur  in  which,  on  account  of  the  in- 
fluence of  the  caesura  (to  adopt  the  common  phraseology), 
the  final  m  remains  unelided  before  a  vowel  in  the  begin- 
ning of  the  word  following,  and  forms,  with  its  own  prece- 
ding vowel,  a  long  syllable.  The  following  are  among  the 
number : 

Propert.  O  me  \  feli\cem  I    O  \  nox  mihi  \  Candida  et  \  0  tu. 
TibuU.    Et  tant\um  vene\ratur  vir\um  kunc  \  sedula  \  curet. 
Luc.         Scit  non  \  esse  cas\dm,     O  \  vitm  \  tuta  fa\cultas. 
Manil.     Emerit\us  cod\um  et  \  Claudia  |  magna  pro\pago. 


II.  Elision. 


Elision  is  the  cutting  off  of  the  final  vowel  or  diphthong, 
or  of  the  two  final  letters,  of  a  word,  and  is  divided  into 
Synal(Bpha  and  Ecthlipsis. 


Synalcepha. 
I.  Synalcepha  is  the  elision  of  a  vowel  or  diphthong  at 
the  end  of  a  word,  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a 
vowel,  a  diphthong,  or  the  letter  h  ;^  as, 

1.  Quintilian  applies  the  term  Synalcepha,  in  one  place  (1,  5,  18),  to 
what  is  commonly  called  Synczresis ;  as,  Phatlion  for  Pha'ethon :  and  in 
another  (9,  4,  36),  to  what  is  usually  styled  Ecthlipsis ;  as,  PrcBsidi*  est 
for  Prasidium  est.     As  a  general  definition,  however,  he  terms  avvaX- 


lite  FIGURES    OF    PROSODY. 

Virg.  Conticuere  omnes,  intentique  ora  tenehanU 

Id.       Dardanid<B  e  muris :  spes  addita  suscitat  iras. 

Id.       Savus  ubi  JEacid(B  telo  jacet  Hector^  ubi  ingens. 

Id.      Humida  solstitia  atque  hyemes  orate  serenas. 
Which  lines,  in  scanning,  are  read  as  follows  : 

Conticuer'  omnes,  intentiqu*  ora  tenebant.  i 

Dardanid'  e  muris  :  spes  addita  suscitat  iras. 
SdBvus  ub''  j^acidcB  telo  jacet  Hector ,  uh*  ingens, 
Humida  solstiti'  atqv)  yemes  orate  serenas. 

This,  however,  is  done  only  in  scanhing,  and  not  in  wri- 
ting, nor  in  the  most  approved  mode  of  pronouncing  a 
verse.  In  the  two  latter  cases,  the  lines  are  always  writ- 
ten, and  generally  pronounced,  without  any  elision.' 

II.  Synaloepha  affects  not  only  a  single  syllable,  but  also 
two  syllables  sounded  as  one  by  synaeresis  ;  as, 

Virg.      Stellio  ;  et  lucifugis  congesta  cubilia  blattis, 
CatuU.  Et  earum  omnia  adirem  furibunda  latibula.   Gal. 

Here,  in  the  first  line,  stellio  et  is  pronounced  stell  yet; 
and,  in  the  second,  omnia  adirem  becomes  omn  yadirem, 

III.  In  addition  to  the  elisions  already  mentioned,  the 
earlier  Latin  poets  were  in  the  habit  of  frequently  eliding 
the  letter  s,  in  words  ending  in  is  and  us,  when  followed 
by  a  word  beginning  with  a  consonant,  and  thus  permitting 
the  vowel,  which  would  otherwise  have  been  long  by  posi- 
tion, to  remain  short  ;^  thus, 

OL^ai  "  co'euntes  litercB^^  (9,  4,  36). — The  word  Synaloepha  is  from  the 
Greek  avva/lot^^,  and,  according  to  its  etymology,  refers,  not  so  much 
to  the  elision  of  one  vowel  before  another,  as  to  the  blending  of  two 
vowels  or  syllables  into  one.  On  this  account,  some  have  considered 
the  term  Synalcepha,  as  commonly  used,  an  improper  one,  and  recom- 
mend that,  instead  of  Synalospha  and  Ecthlipsis,  the  general  term  Eli- 
sion be  substituted. 

1 .  The  best  opinion  with  regard  to  the  ancient  mode  of  pronooncing 
Latin  verse  is  this,  that  much  of  the  apparent  harshness  of  elisions  was 
removed,  by  giving  the  elided  syllable  so  slight  and  imperfect  a  sound 
that  it  could  hardly  be  distinguished,  and,  consequently,  interrupted  but 
little  the  measure  of  the  verso. 

2.  Ennius,  Lucilius,  Lucretius,  and  the  comic  writers  furnish  the  most 


FIGURES    OF   PROSODY.  109 

Enn.       Te  nunc  sancta  precor  VenuSj  et  genetrix  patn^s) 

nostri. 
Id.  Versihu{s)  quos  olim  Fauni  Vatesque  canehant. 

Lucret.  Ut  quasi  transactis  s<Bpe  oinnibu{s)  rebu{s)  profuU" 

dant. 
CatuU.    Atfixus  nostris  tu  dabt(s)  suppUcium,     (Pentam.) 

IV.  We  may  notice  here  a  peculiar  species  of  elision  or 
abbreviation  not  unfrequently  employed  in  short,  quick 
questions,  by  which  the  vowel  is  dropped  in  the  interroga- 
tive particle  ne  before  a  consonant ;'  thus, 

Catull.      Ten'  provincia  narrat  esse  hellam  ?     (Phalaecian.) 
Propert.    Vidistin'  toto  sonitus  procurrere  ccrIo  1 
Virg.        Hectoris  Andromache  Pyrrhin'  connuhia  servas  ? 
Horat.      Men^  moveat  cimex  Pantilius  ?  aut  cruciet  quod. 

V.  It  has  already  been  remarked,  under  the  rules  for  final 
n,  that  in  such  forms  as  viden'  ut,  the  s  is  dropped  before  n, 
and  the  vowel  shortened.  Both  this  and  the  last-mentioned 
abbreviation  are  combined  in  viden'  (for  videsne)  and  vin* 
tu  (for  visne  tu). 

Catull.  Nostra  verba.      Viden'  ?  faces. 
Horat.   Tempore  dicam ;  hodie  triccsima  sabbata ;  vin*  tu. 
These  expressions,  as  might  be  expected,  are  very  com- 
mon in  the  comic  writers.^ 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  Synalcepha  never  takes  place  in  the  words  O, 

numerous  examples  of  this  license.  Some  instances  also  occur  in  Cicero's 
translation  of  Aratus,  though  comparatively  few  in  number.  About  the 
time,  however,  when  Cicero  wrote  his  Orator,  the  custom  of  dropping 
the  s  before  a  consonant  appears  to  have  been  fast  going  out  of  use  ;  at 
least  the  following  passage  from  the  work  just  referred  to  is  in  favour  of 
such  an  opinion  :  "  Quin  eiiam,  quod  jam  subrusticum  videlur,  olim  au- 
tem  politius,  eorum  verborum  quorum  eadem  erant  postrema  ducB  litera 
qua  sunt  in  optumus  postremam  literam  detrahebant,  nisi  vocalis  inse- 
quebatur.  Ita  non  erat  offensio  in  versibus  quam  nunc  fugiunt  poetcB 
novi ;  ita  eriim  loqucbantur  ;  qui  est  omnibu'  princeps,  non  omnibus 
princeps,  et  vita  ilia  dignu'  locoque,  non  dignus."  (Czc,  Or a^,  48,  ^ 
161.— Compare  Qui7itil.,  9,  4,  38.— Mar.  Vict.,  p.  2472.) 
1,  Ramsay^s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  114. 

K 


110  FIGURES    OF    PROSODY. 

heuj  ally  aif  to,  proh,  V(p,  vah,  hei,  and  tlie  like  interjec- 
tions, which  sustain  the  voice,  and  retard  the  pronun- 
ciation, on  account  of  the  feeling  or  passion  which 
they  express ;  as, 
Virg.      O  pater^  |  o  ho7mn\uin  div\umque  ai\terna  potYsias, 
Id.  i/erZ  uhi  \  pacta  jid\es?  uhi  |  qu(B  jur\are  sol\ebas. 

Tibull.  Ah  ego  \  ne  poss\im  \\  tanta  vid\ere  mal\a.     (Pent,) 
Ovid.     Ipse  su\os  gemit\us  foU\is  in\scribit  et  \  at  at. 
Id.  Et  bis  i\d  Areth\usa  i\d  Areth\usa  voc\avit. 

Exc.  2.  Elision  is  sometimes  apparently  neglected  in 
the  case  of  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong ;  and  this  gen- 
erally happens  when  the  unelided  vowel  or  diphthong 
is  in  the  caesural  syllable.  Hence  arise  the  following 
rules  : 

First.  When  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  occurs  in  a 
caesural  syllable,  and  the  word  that  follows  begins 
with  either  a  vowel  or  diphthong,  then  the  long  vow- 
el or  diphthong  sometimes  apparently  remains  une- 
lided; but,  in  fact,  the  long  vowel  or  diphthong 
parts,  by  means  of  elision,  with  one  of  its  two  short 
component  vowels,  and  the  remaining  short  vowel, 
being  in  the  caesura,  is  lengthened  again  by  the  stress 
of  the  voice. 
Secondly.  When  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  occurs,  not 
in  a  C(Bsural  syllable,  and  the  word  that  follows  be- 
gins with  a  vowel  or  diphthong,  then  the  long  vowel 
or  diphthong  sometimes  apparently  remains  uneli- 
ded ;  but,  in  fact,  the  long  vowel  or  diphthong  parts, 
by  means  of  elision,  with  one  of  its  two  short  com- 
ponent vowels,  and  the  remaining  short  vowel,  not 
being  in  the  cajsura,  continues  short. 


FIGURES    OF   PROSODY.  Ill 

ILLUSTRATIONS  OF   EXCEPTION    SECOND. 

Rule  First. 
Virg.     Et  succ\us  pecor\i,  et  \  lac  suh\ducitur  j  agnis. 
Id.         Siant  et  \  juniper^  et  j  castane\cR  hirs\ut<B. 
Id.  Ter  sunt  |  cona\ti  im\ponere  \  Pelio  \  Ossam} 

Id.         Amphi\on  Dir\c(Bus  in  \  Act(B\d  Ara\cyntho. 
Ovid.    Et  celer  \  Ismenjus  cum  j  Phocai\co  Erym\aniho. 


Rule  Second, 
CatuU.   TJno  in  |  lectulo  \  erud\itul\i  amho.     (Phalaecian.) 
Virg.      Credimus?  \  an  qui  am\ant  ips\i  sibi  j  somnia  \fin- 

gunt  ? 
Id.         Nomen  et  \  arma  loc\um  serv\ant  te  am\ice  neq\uivi. 
Id.         Et  long\um  form\ose  val\e  vale  \  inquit  I\ola. 
Id.  Insulce  |  Ioni\o  in  magn\o  quas  j  dira  Cel\(Eno. 

Id.  Te  Coryd\on  o  Al\€xi  trah\it  sua  \  quemque  vol\uptas. 

Horat.  Et  Esq\uili\naB  al\ites.     (Iambic.) 


Obs.  The  only  exception  in  Virgil  to  the  remarks  con- 
tained in  the  preceding  paragraph,  occurs  in  the  following 
line : 

Glauco  \  et  Pano\pe(B  et  \  Ino\o  Meli\cert<B.  {Georg.,  1,  437.) 
Here  the  o  in  Glauco  is  not  elided,  but  is  allowed  to  remain 
long,  though  not  in  caesura.  The  line,  however,  in  all 
probability,  contains  a  false  reading,  and  for  Glauco  we 
should  substitute  Glaucoque? 

1.  Tn  this  line,  the  o  in  Pelio  furnishes  an  illustration  of  rule  second. 

2.  Ramsay's  usual  accuracy  deserts  him,  when  he  regards  this  line  as 
transplanted  without  change  from  some  one  of  the  Greek  poets,  who 
were  much  less  strict,  in  matters  of  this  kind,  than  the  Latins.  It  hap- 
pens, unfortunately  for  this  remark,  that  the  Greek,  in  that  event,  would 
be,  T'kavKCji  koI  liavoirEiri  W  'Iv(J6j  MeAt/cppr?/,  in  which  case  the  last 
syllable  of  TAav/cw  would  be  long,  as  a  matter  of  course,  without  any  li- 
cense whatever.  '  Aulus  Gellius  (13,  26)  informs  us  that  Virgil  borrow- 
ed the  line  from  the  Greek  poet  Parthenius,  in  whom  it  ran  as  follows  : 
TlavKu  Kal  Nrjp^i  kcI  'Iv^cj  Me/lt/ccpr??.  (Compare  Macrob.,  5,  17. — 
Fulv.  Urs.,  Virg.  cum  GrcBc.  Scrip.  Coll.,  p.  130.)     This  form  of  the 


112  FIGURES    OP   PROSODY. 

Exc.  3.  Very  rarely  is  a  short  vowel  left  unelided.  Tliis 
happens  only  twice  in  Virgil,  and  in  both  cases  there 
is  a  pause  after  the  word  ending  with  the  short  vowel, 
so  that  in  repeating  the  line  the  effect  would  not  be 
disagreeable.'  Thus, 
Addam  \  cerea  \  pruna  :    hon\os    erit  |  huic    quoque  j  porno. 

{Ed.,  2,  53.) 
Et  ve\ra  incess\u  patu\it  Dea.  \  Ille  uhi  |  matrem.    (^n.,  1, 
405.) 


Obs.  For  some  remarks  on  elision  at  the  end  of  a  verse, 
when  the  next  verse  begins  with  a  vowel  or  diphthong,  con- 
sult the  article  Synapheia. 


ECTHLIPSIS.2 

I.  JEcthlipsis  is  the  eliding  of  the  consonant  m  at  the 
end  of  a  word,  when  the  following  word  begin»  with  a 
vowel  or  the  letter  h  ;  and  after  the  m  is  removed  by  ecth- 
lipsis,  a  synaloepha  immediately  operates,  and  cuts  off  the 
TQwel  which  preceded  the  m.     Thus, 

CatuU.   Omnia  tecum  una  perierunt  gaudia  nostra. 
Id.         Sternum  hoc  sanctcR  fcedus  amiciti<B.     (Pent.) 

In  scanning  which  lines  we  must  read  them  as  follows  : 
Omnia  tec^  una  perierunt  gaudia  nostra. 
JEtern^  hoc  sanctce  foedus  amicitim. 

Greek  line,  however,  still  remains  hostile  to  Ramsay's  opinion.  Wag- 
ner, on  the  other  hand,  maintains  that  the  true  reading  in  Virgil  is  Glau- 
coque,  as  we  have  remarked  in  the  text.  His  words  are  as  follows : 
"  Nullus  dubilo,  quum  nusquam  longam  syllabam  in  eo  positu  produxe- 
rit  Virgilius,  pessumdata  etiam  soni  elegantia,  quin  scripserit  Glauco- 
que.  Apparct  autem  nusquam  facilixis  excidere  potuisse  hanc  copularrif 
per  simplex  q  scilicet  cxprimi  solitam,  quam  hoc  loco,  pracedeniibus  du- 
abus  ipsi  Q  similibus  Uteris,  altera  quidcm  simillima,  C  et  0.  Sic  in 
Medic.  JEn.,  1,  69,  a  m.  pr.  scriptum  est  SUBMERSASQ.  BRUE  pro 
submersasq.  obrue,  &.c.     {Wagner,  Qucest.  Virgil.,  11,  3.) 

1.  Ramsay^s  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  116. 

2.  The  subject  of  Ecthlipsis  has  been  in  part  anticipated  in  the  re- 
marks respecting  m  final,  p.  84,  scqq. 


FIGURES    OF    PROSODY.  113 

II.  Ecthlipsis  sometimes,  by  the  aid  of  Sjmapheia,  strikes 
out  a  syllable  at  the  eni  of  a  line,  when  the  next  line  be- 
gins with  a  vowel,  and  no  long  pause  intervenes  ;  as, 
Virg.  Jamque  iter  emensij  turres  ac  iecta  Latino\rum 
Ardua  cernehant  juvencSj  murosque  subihant. 

Here  the  second  line  is  to  be  read  r* Ardua  cernebant,  &c., 
the  last  syllable  of  Latinorum  being  cut  off  from  the  first 
verse  and  prefixed  to  the  second. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc.  1.  The  elision  of  m  is  sometimes  neglected,  espe- 
cially by  the  older  poets,  and  in  this  case  the  syllable 
ending  in  m,  when  not  a  csesural  one,  is  short  ;^  as, 

Lucret.  Nam  quod  Jluvidum  est,  e  levihus  atque  rotundis. 

Id.  Sed  dum  abest  quod  avemus,  id  exsuperare  videtur. 


Exc.  2.  In  some  instances  the  caesura  operates  to  pre- 
serve the  final  m  unelided,  in  which  case  the  syllable 
thus  saved  from  elision  becomes  long ;  as, 

Propert.  O  mefelicem  !   O  nox  mihi  Candida  I  et  O  tu. 


Before  quitting  the  subject  of  elision,  it  may  not  be  amiss 
to  add  the  following  rules,  which  regulate  its  use. 

1.  A  verse  in  which  there  are  more  than  two  elisions,  is 
most  commonly  deficient  in  harmony  ;  as,  for  exam- 
ple, the  following  pentameter  line  : 
Catull.  Quam  modo  qui  me  unum  atque  unicum  amicum  habuit. 


2.  Elisions  may  generally  be  introduced  into  a  verse 
without  diminishing  its  harmony,  when  the  final  vow- 
el of  a  word  is  the  same  as  that  which  begins  the  next 
word,  and  when  the  elided  vowel  is  either  naturally 
short,  or  is  followed  by  a  long  syllable  ;  as, 

1.  This  and  the  succeeding  exception  have  been  partially  anticipated 
in  the  remarks  relative  to  final  m. 

K2 


114  FIGURES    OF    PROSODY. 

Virg.  Ipse  ego  cana  legam  tenera  lanugine  mala. 
Id.       Turn  casia  atque  aliis  in^exens  suavihus  herhis. 


3.  An  elision  has  seldom  a  good  effect,  either  when  it 
occurs  in  the  first  syllable  of  a  verse,  or  in  the  end  of 
the  fifth  foot  of  an  hexameter,  or  immediately  after  the 
penthemimeris  in  a  pentameter,  or  in  a  word  ending 
with  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong  before  a  word  be- 
ginning with  a  short  vowel ;  as, 

Horat.    Nam  ut  ferula  ccsdas  meritum  majora  suhire. 

Juv,       Loripedem  rectus  derideat  jEthiopem  Albus. 

Catull.   Troja  nefas  !  commune  sepulcrum  Europae  Asiceque. 

Id.         Me  misero  eripuisti  omnia  nostra  bona.     (Pentam.) 


Ill  Synthesis. 

I.  Synaeresis  is  the  contraction  of  two  syllables  into  one, 
and  is  resorted  to  by  the  poets  in  order  to, make  a  word  ad- 
missible into  hexameter  or  other  verse,  which  could  not 
otherwise  be  introduced  without  some  degree  of  inconve- 
nience or  dissonance,  or  perhaps  not  at  all. 

II.  Hence  we  have,  among  others,  the  following  instan- 
ces of  this  species  of  poetic  license. 

1.    CONTRACTION    OF    ea. 

aured  is  pronounced  as  aura, 
cerd. 
alvdria. 

respondydmus  (4  syllables).' 
antydctos  (3  syllables).* 
antydmhulo  (4  syllables). 
antydc  (2  syllables). 


cerea 

alvedria 

respondedmus 

antedctos 

antedmbulo 

antehdc 


Virg.      Aurea  composuit  sponda,  mediamque  locavit, 

1.  The  y  is  to  be  pronounced  here  like  the  same  letter  when  it  stands 
at  the  beginning  of  an  English  word. 

2.  This  word  and  the  two  that  follow  may  otherwise  be  pronounced 
anVactoi,  anCambulo,  anfac,  and  the  vowel  e  may  be  supposed  to  have 
been  actually  elided  before  the  one  that  succeeds. 


FIGURES    OF    PROSODY.  115 

Herat.     Abdiderant  furtim  terris,  et  imagine  cerea. 
Virg.       Seu  lento  fuerint  alvearia  vimine  texta. 
Lucret.  Quid  respondeamus  nisi  justam  intendere  litem. 
Tibull.    Cum  memor  anteactos  semper  dolor  admonct  annos» 
Mart.      Anteambulones  et  togatulos  inter.     (Scazon.) 
Horat.     Antehac  nefas  depromere  Ccscuhum.     (Alcaic.) 


2.    CONTRACTION 

OF  ei. 

(Breih 

pronounced 

as  <En. 

aranei 

« 

ii 

aram. 

baltei 

(( 

t( 

baltl. 

ferret 

« 

u 

ferri. 

aurels 

(( 

a 

auris. 

anteirent 

11 

u 

antirent. 

anteis 

a 

11 

antls. 

anteit 

(( 

tt 

antit. 

Virg.  Centum  aerei  claudunt  vectes  (Bternaque  ferri. 

Lucret.  Nee  nebulam  noctu,  neque  aranei  tenuiafila. 

Virg.  Exanimem,  rapiens  immania  pondera  baltei. 

Id.  Ferreij'Me  Eumenidum  thalami  et  Discordia  demens. 

Id.  Atria,  dependent  lychni  laquearibus  aureis. 

Id.  Qui  candore  nives  anteirent  cursibus  auras. 

Horat.  Te  semper  anteit  sceva  necessitas.     (Alcaic.) 


3.    CONTRACTION    OF    60. 

alveo  is  pronounced  as  alvo. 

aureo         "  "         auro. 

Typhoed        "  "         Typhoo. 


Virg.  Deturbatf  laxatque  foros,  simul  accipit  alveo. 

Id.       Vulcanum  alloquitur,  thalamoque  Jkbc  conjugis  aureo. 

Id.       Inarime  Jovis  imperiis  imposta  Typhoeo.' 

1.  The  nominative  of  this  proper  name  is  Typhoeus  (three  syllables), 
never  Typhczus. 


116  FIGURES    OF    PROSODY. 

4.    CONTRACTION    OF   ia. 

vindemiator  is  pronounced  as  vindemyator  (4  syllables).* 
Formiano        "  "        Formyano  (3  syllables). 


Horat.    Vindemiator,  et  invictus,  cui  scBpe  viator, 
CatuU.  Formiano  saltu  nonfalso  Mentula  dives. 


5.    CONTRACTION    OF    H, 

connuhns  is  pronounced  as  connubyis  (3  syllables). 

denariis        "  "        denaryis  (3  syllables). 

PtBonus        "  "         Pmonyls  (3  syllables). 

Tceniis        "  *'         T<Bnyis  (2  syllables). 


Virg.  Connubiis  arvisque  novis  operata  juventus. 

Mart.  Denariis  tibi  quinque  Martialem.     (Phalaecian.) 

Virg.  Paeoniis  revocatum  herbis  et  amore  DiancB? 

Id.  Puniceis  ibant  evincti  tempora  taeniis. 


6.    CONTRACTION    IN    io. 

connubw  is  pronounced  as  connubyb  (3  syllables). 
Idomenws        "  "         Idomenyos  (4  syllables). 


Virg.     Connubio  jungam  stabili  propriamque  dicabo. 
Catull.  Idomeniosne  petam  montes  ?  at  gurgite  in  alto. 


7.    CONTRACTION   IN   tU. 

promontdrium  is  pronounced  as  promontoryum  (4  syllables). 

Antium        **  "         Antyum  (2  syllables). 

omnium        "  "        omnyum  (2  syllables). 

mcnsium        "  "        mensyum  (2  syllables). 

lacrymdntium        "  "        /acryman^yti»»' (4  syllables). 

1.  The  y,  as  has  already  been  remarked,  is  to  be  here  pronounced 
like  the  same  letter  at  the  beginning  of  an  English  word. 

2.  In  scanning  this  line  some  erroneously  make  Pacmi  a  dactyl.  The 
second  syllable,  on  the  contrary,  is  long,  the  corresponding  Greek  form 
being  Hatuvio^.  Such  a  form  as  Paoniis  could  only  refer  to  the  P»- 
onians  {Uaiovac)  of  Thrace.  (Consult  Heyne  ad  Virg.,  JEn.,  7,  779, 
not.  cril.) 

3.  Genitives  in  turn  are  frequently  written  without  inserting  the  t. 


FIGURES    OF   PROSODY.  117 

Ovid.     Inde  legit  Capreas  promontormmg-we  Minerv(B. 
Id.  Et  tellus  Circcjea,  et  spissi  litoris  Antium. 

Lucret.  Imbecillorum  esse  mquum  miser erier  omnium. 
Ovid.      Cum  tua  sint  cedantque  tibi  confinia  mensium. 
Virg.      Exclusi,  ante  oculos  lacrymantium^we  ora  parcntum. 


8.    CONTRACTION   IN    00. 

cooluerint  is  pronounced  as  coluerint. 

cooperiant        "  *'         coperiant. 

cooperuisse        "  "         coperuisse. 


Lucret.   Tandem  cooluerint  ea  qu(B  conjecta  repente. 
Id.  Cooperiant  maria  ac  terras  immensa  superna. 

Id.  Per  terras  omneis  atque  oppida  cooperuisse. 


9.  CONTRACTION  IN  ee. 

deesse  is  pronounced  as  desse, 

deest        "  "  dest. 

deerat        "      "  derat. 

deero        "      "  dero. 

deerrarunt        "  **  derrarunt. 

deerraverat        "  "  der  raver  at. 


Lucret.   Talihus  in  rebus  communi  deesse  saluti. 
Virg.      Deest  ^"am  terra  fugcB:  pelagus  Trojamne  petamus. 
Id.  Divitis  uber  agri  TrqjcBve  opulentia  deerit. 

Lucret.  Deerrarunt  passim  motus  ab  sensibus  omnes. 
Virg.       Vir  gregis  ipse  caput  deerraverat,  atque  ego  Daph- 


II.  Synaeresis  may  sometimes  be  referred  to  synaloepha, 
or,  in  other  words,  the  first  vowel  in  several  instances  may 
rather  be  considered  as  elided,  than  as  uniting  with  the  fol- 

as,  parentum,  serpentum,  mensum,  &c.  The  poets,  however,  use  the 
open  form  also,  when  it  can  be  conveniently  introduced  ;  as,  parentium, 
serpentium,  &c.  ;  nor  must  it  be  supposed  that  the  contraction  is  purely 
a  poetic  license,  since  it  is  found  in  the  best  MSS.  of  prose  authors. 
{Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  134.) 


118  FIGURES    OF    PROSODY. 

lowing  one  to  form  one  syllable.  Thus  many  words  com- 
pounded with  semi  followed  by  a  vowel,  or  by  the  letter  h 
with  a  vowel,  such  as  semianimis,  semianimus,  semiadaper- 
tus^  semihianSf  semihomo,  semiustus^  &c.,  lose  by  elision  the 
final  vowel  of  semi,  and  are  to  be  pronounced  in  verse, 
semianimis,  semianimus,  sem^adapertus,  sem'hians,  sem'homo, 
sem^ustus,  &Lc} 

Virg.      Seraianimesg-wc  micant  digiti  ferrumque  retractant. 
Lucret.  Languida  semianimo  cum  corpore  membra  videres. 
Ovid.      Obliquum  capiat  semiadaperta  latus,     (Pentam.) 
CatuU.    Semihiante  lahello.     (Choriambic.) 
Virg.       Semihominis  Caci  fades  quam  dira  tenehat. 
Id.  Fama  est  Enceladi  semiusium  fuhnine  corpus. 


III.  Words  which  contain  an  h  between  two  vowels  oc- 
casionally drop  the  h,  and  contract  the  two  vowels  into  one 
syllable  ;  thus,  we  have  vehemens,  vehementi,  vehementer, 
vehementius,  and  also  vemens,  vementi,  vementer ;  so  prehensi 
and  prensi,  dehinc  and  deinc,  nthzlum  and  nilum,  miht  and 
ml,  prohlheat,  pronounced  prolbeat  (three  syllables),  &c.^ 
Virg.  Transit  equum  cursu,  frenisque  adversa  prehensis. 
Id.  Ingentes  tollent  animos,  prensique  negabunt. 

Id.  Cervici  subnecte  dehinc  ubi  libera  colla. 

Id.  Eurum  ad  se  Zephyrumque  vocat,  dehinc  taliafatur. 

Lucret.  Nam  sive  est  aliquid  quod  prohibeat  efficiatque. 

IV.  More  violent  than  these  are  ostreoy  eadem,  ebdem, 
ecedem,  eosdem,  torreat,  deorsum,  seorsum,  seorsusi  omntdf 
vTetis,  Gabn,  oriundi,  patrui,  flmtant^  pronounced  as  dissyl- 
lables ;  precantia,  Tazyges,  duellica,  prabptarit,  as  trisylla- 
bles ;  prout,  a  monosyllable ;  all  of  which  might  be,  and 
most  of  them  often  aie,  employed  without  being  contracted.' 

1.  Among  these  some  would  place  ^ar'o/cn«  and  sitav'olenst  but  these 
ought  to  be  considered  as  two  distinct  words,  grave  olens  and  suave 
olens.     {Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros,  p.  123.) 

2.  Vcmena  occurs  in  Horace,  Epist.,  2,  2,  120  ;  vimenti  in  Lucre- 
tius, 3,  153  ;  vementer  in  the  same,  2,  1023,  and  4,  821. 

3.  Ramsai/s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  124. 


FIGURES    OF   PROSODY. 


119 


Herat.      Sudando,  pinguem  vitiis  alhumque  neque  ostrea. 
Virg.         Una  esidemque  via  sanguis  animusque  sequuntur. 
Propert.  Hoc  eodem  ferro  stillet  uterque  cruor.     (Pentam.) 
Lucret.     Uvescunt,  eaedem  dispansm  in  sole  liquescunt. 
Id.  Eosdem  hahuit  secxim  quihus  est  elata  capillos. 

Id.  Quod  sitis  exurat  miseros  atque  arida  torreat. 

Id.  Pondera  quantum  in  se  est  deorsum  deducere  pug- 

nent. 
Id.  At  neque  seorsum  oculei,  neque  nareis,  nee  manus 

ipsa. 
Id.  Seorsus  item  sapor  oris  habet  vim,  seorsus  odores. 

Virg.        Bis  patricB  cecidere  manus  ;  quin  protenus  omnia. 
Herat.      Qui  sudor  vietis,  et  quam  mains  undique  membris, 
Prepert.  Et  qui  nunc  nulli,  maxima  turba  Gabii.  (Pentam.) 
Lucret.    Denique  ccelesti  sumus  omnes  semine  eriundi. 
Stat.         Nocturnique  canum  gemitus,  ubi  lumina  patrui. 
Lucret.    Per  malos  volgata  trabeisque  trementia  fluitant. 
Virg.       PrcEferimus  manibus  vittas  et  verba  precantia. 
Ovid.       lazyges  et  Colchi,  Metereaque  turba  GetcBque. 
Lucret.    LanigercB  pecudes,  et  equorum  duellica  ji/roZe^. 
CatuU.     Omnibus  his  Thesei  dulcem  praeeptarit  amorem. 
Herat.      Pasco  libatis  dapibus.     Preut  cuique  libido  est. 

V.  I  is  sometimes  considered  as  a  consonant,  and  in 
tliese  cases  had,  it  is  probable,  the  sound  of  the  English  y 
in  youngs  yes,  &,c.  Thus,  abiete,  abtetibus,  ariete,  parieti- 
bus,  were  pronounced  in  dactylic  verse  as  abyete,  abyetibus, 
aryete,  paryetibus,  the  first  syllable  being  considered  long 
by  position.' 

Virg.  JEdificant,  sectaque  intexunt  abiete  costas. 

Id.       Abietibus  juvenes  patriis  et  montibus  mquos. 

Id.       Custodes  sufferre  valent.     Labat  ariete  crebro. 

Id.       Hcerent  parietibus  scalcB,  postesque  sub  ipsos. 


VI.  Upon  the  same  principle,  although  without  the  plea 
1.  Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  131. 


120  FIGURES    OF   PROSODY. 

of  absolute  necessity,  we  find  jluviorum  in  a  passage  of 
Virgil  {Georg.y  1,  482),  where  it  must  be  pronounced  fluV' 
yorum;  and  Nasidieni  in  Horace  (^Sat.,  2,  8,  1),  which 
must  be  pronounced  Nasldyeni.  In  Propertius  likewise, 
we  have  abiegni  (4,  1,  42),  to  be  pronounced  ahyegni,  and 
abiegn(B'{dj  19,  12),  to  be  pronounced  abyegnm. 

Virg.        Fluviorum  rex  Eridanus,  camposque  per  omnes. 
Horat.      Ut  Nasidieni  ^"uuz^f  te  coena  beati?^ 
Propert.  Laeserat  abiegni  venter  apertus  equi.     (Pent.) 
Id.  Induit  abiegnae  cornua  falsa  bovis.     (Pent.) 


VII.  In  the  same  way  the  poets  took  advantage  of  the 
double  power  of  u,  and  made  it  a  consonant  in  words  where 
such  a  change  was  necessary  or  convenient.     In  this  way 
tenuia,  tenmus,  tenuis,  tenue,  tenuem,  tenui,  tenuis^  genua^ 
curruunij  firtmtus,  pituita,  become  tenvia,  tenvius,  tenvis, 
&c.,  genva,  currvum,fortvitus,pitvita,  Slc.^ 
Virg.        Velleraque  utfoliis  depectant  tenuia  Seres. 
Lucret.   Qua  neque  mobilius  quidquam  neque  tenuius  exstat. 
Virg.       Tenuis  ubi  argilla  et  dumosis  calculus  arvis. 
Id.  Genua  labant,  vastos  quatit  (Bger  anhelitus  artus. 

Id.  Per  campos  pascuntur  equi ;  qu(B  gratia  curruum. 

Juv.        Non  quasi  fortuitus,  sed  ventorum  rabie,  sed. 
Horat.    Prcecipue  sanus,  nisi  quum  pituita  molesta  est. 


Horat.    Nee  fortuTtum  spernere  cespitem.     (Alcaic.)* 
CatuU.   Mucusque  et  mala  pituita  nasi.     (Phalascian.) 

1.  Ndsidiene,  without  contraction,  occurs  in  Martial  (7,  8):  ^*  Aut 
vigila  aut  dormi,  NdsidieJie  tibiy     (Pentam.) 

2.  By  combining  the  processes  described  in  this  and  paragraph  V., 
tenmore  is  pronounced  tenv-yorc.     {Ramsay^ s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  132.) 

3.  Fortuiltis,  without  contraction,  occurs  also  in  Phaedrus  (2,  4,  4). 
On  the  other  hand,  in  Manilius  (1,  182)  we  h&ve  forlvitus. 


FIGURES   OF   PROSODY.  121 

IV.  Dleresis.' 

I.  Dimresis  is  defined  to  be  tlie  division  of  one  syllable 
into  two ;  as,  aurai  for  aurcB,  suddent  for  suddent,  miluus  for 
milvus,  sylua  for  sylva,  soluo  for  solvo,  &c. 

Virg.      ^thereum  sensum,  atque  aura'i  simpUcis  ignem. 
Lucret.  Atque  alios  alii  irrident,  Veneremque  suadent. 
Phaedr.   ColumbcB  smpe  quum  fugissent  miluijm.  .  (Iambic.) 
Horat.    Nunc  mare,  nunc  syluae.     (Dact.  Trim.  Cat) 
Tibull.  Nulla  queat  posthac  nos  soluisse  dies.     (Pentam.) 

II.  In  strictness,  however,  no  such  figure  as  diaeresis  ex-' 
ists,  nor  did  the  poets  ever  assume  the  power  of  stretching 
out  words,  although  they  sometimes  contracted  them.  The 
examples  usually  quoted  of  this  so-called  figure,  including 
those  given  under  the  preceding  paragraph,  are  in  reality 
archaisms,  or  antiquated  forms  of  expression,  which  were 
adopted  by  the  poets  for  the  sake  of  conveniertce  or  orna- 
ment. 

III.  As  the  Ionic  dialect  in  Greek  frequently  resolves  the 
diphthongs  et  and  y  into  rji,  the  Roman  poets  occasionally 
availed  themselves  of  that  license  in  words  of  Greek  origin, 
written  in  the  latter  language  with  either  of  those  diph- 
thongs ;  as, 

Ovid.  Flehilis  indignos,  Elegeia  solve  capillos, 

Stat.  Quas  inter  vultu  petulans  elegeia  propinquat. 

Ovid.  Invocat,  Hippomenes,  Cythereia,  comprecor  ausis, 

Virg.  Pares  metu  Cythereia  ;  manent  immota  tuorum. 

Ovid.  Quid  quod  avus  nobis  idem  Pelopeius  Atreus. 

Lucan.  Eumenidum  vidit  vultus  Pelopeius  Orestes. 

Propert.  Pleiadum  spisso  cur  edit  imbre  chorus.     (Pent.) 

Ovid.  Pleiades  incipiunt  humeros  relevare  paiernos. 

Id.  Pleias  enixa  est,  letoque  det  imperat  Argum. 

Virg.  Pleias,  et  Oceani  spreias  pede  repulit  amnes. 

1.  AiaifjeoL^,  "a  separation,"  "a  taking  or  drawing  asunder,"  from 
dcd  and  aipeco. 

h 


122  FIGURES   OF   PROSODY. 

So  also  PhcKheius  and  PhczhHus ;  Theseius  and  Thesei- 
us  ;  ThreiciuSf  Threcius,  and  Thrdcius ;  Pegaseius  and  Pe- 
gaseusj  &c. 


V.  Prosthesis.^ — Aphjeresis.* 

I.  Prosthesis  is  defined  to  be  the  addition  of  a  letter  or 
syllable  to  the  beginning  of  a  word ;  as,  gnatus  for  natus, 
gjiavus  {or*navus,  &,c. 

II.  In  strictness,  however,  no  such  figure  as  prosthesis 
exists.  On  the  contrary,  the  forms  which  are  cited  as  in- 
stances of  it  are  in  reality  archaisms,  or  antiquated  modes 
of  expression. 


III.  AphoBresis  is  defined  to  be  the  cutting  off  of  the  first 
letter  or  syllable  of  a  word ;  as,  maragdus  for  smaragduSj 
conia  for  ciconia. 

IV.  Aphseresis  is,  in  truth,  as  imaginary  a  figure  as  pros- 
thesis. The  forms  usually  cited  as  instances  of  it  are  ei- 
ther archaisms  or  colloquial  shortenings. 


VI.  Syncope.' — Epenthesis.* 

I.  Syncope  is  defined  to  be  the  dropping  of  a  letter  or 
syllable  out  of  the  body  of  a  word ;  as,  aspris  for  asperis, 
caldior  for  calidior,  circlos  for  circulos,  oraclum  for  oraculum, 
periclum  for  periculum,  &c. 

Virg.  Improvisum  aspris  veluti  qui  sentihus  anguem. 

Horat.  Caldior  est  ?  acres  inter  numeretur,     Opinor. 

Virg.  Ac  primum  laxos  tenui  de  vimine  circlos. 

CatuU.  Oraclum  Jovis  inter  cestuosi.     (Phalascian.) 

Virg.  Vota  metu  duplicant  matreSj  proptusque  periclis. 

II,  We  must  not  imagine,  however,  that  forms  such  as 

1.  UpoadeaL^y  "addition,"  from  Trpof  and  ridrj/ii. 

2.  'A(f>aipe(TLc,  "  a  taking  away,"  from  6,k6  and  alpeu. 

3.  IvjKdirij,  "  a  cutting  short  or  to  pieces,"  from  avv  and  koktu. 

4.  'Enivdeoic,  "an  insertion,"  from  kni,  h,  and  ridnfit. 


FIGURES    OF   TROSODY.  123 

these  were  all  peculiar  to  the  poets,  or  that  syncope  was  a 
fitrure  the  use  of  which  was  confined  to  this  class  of  wri- 
ters.  Many  of  these  shortened  forms,  on  the  contrary,  oc- 
cur also  in  prose.  Thus,  for  example,  vincla  is  found  in 
Cicero  {Ep.  ad  Fam.,  16,  18).  Quintilian  (1,  6)  says  that 
calfacit  was  more  common  in  his  time  than  calefacit ;  while 
from  the  contracted  periclum  we  have  the  verb  periclitorj 
and  so  on. 

III.  The  words  most  frequently  contracted  by  syncope 
are  the  praeter  tenses  of  verbs;  as,  scripsti  for  scripsisti, 
dixti  for  dixisti,  promisse  for  promisisse,  illuxe  for  illuxisse : 
the  participles  of  compound  verbs  ;  as,  repostum  for  repos- 
iturn :  genitives  plural ;  as,  deiim  for  deorum,  amantum  for 
amantium ;  and  words  which  have  a  w  in  the  penult  before 
the  consonant  I ;  as,  vinclum  for  vinculum,  &c. 


IV.  Epenthesis  is  defined  to  be  the  insertion  of  a  letter 
or  syllable  into  the  body  of  a  word  ;  as,  pluvi,  fuvi,  annuvi, 
genuvi,  which  is  done,  according  to  the  grammarians,  in 
order  to  lengthen  the  short  u  of  plui,  fui,  annul,  genui.  All 
these  so-called  instances  of  epenthesis  occur  in  Ennius. 

V,  Epe"nthesis  is,  however,  an  imaginary  figure,  like  those 
of  which  we  have  already  made  mention.  "  If  we  study," 
observes  Ramsay,  "  the  etymological  formation  of  the  Latin 
verb,  we  soon  discover,  that,  in  a  very  large  class,  the  per- 
fect tense  is  distinguished  by  the  addition  of  v  to  what 
Bopp  calls  the  crude  form ;  we  shall  also  readily  perceive 
that  the  v  is  frequently  dropped,  as  in  amasti,  amarunt,  au- 
dieram,  &lc.  We  shall  then  have  no  difficulty  in  recogni- 
sing the  true  old  perfects  oi  pluo,  fuo,  «fee,  in  pluvi,  fuvi, 
&c. ;  and,  as  might  be  expected,  they  are  found  in  the  very 
earliest  specimens  of  the  language,  and  scarcely,  if  ever, 
appear  after  the  time  of  Plautiis.  It  would  be  just  as  rea- 
sonable to  assert  that  a  v  had  been  inserted  in  audiveram  or 
ahivi,  in  order  to  lengthen  the  short  i  of  audii  and  ahii,  as 
to  advance  the  same  proposition  with  regard  to  pluvi,fuvi, 


124  FIGURES   OF   PROSODY. 

and  the  rest.  Moreover,  we  have  the  express  testimony  of 
Priscian,  that  preterites  in  ui  had  the  u  long  in  the  oldest 
writers,  especially  those  derived  from  the  present  in  uo ;  as, 
eruo,  erui ;  arguo,  argui ;  annuo,  annui ;  and  he  quotes  from 
Ennius,  '  Annuit  sese  mecum  decernere  ferro ;'  in  all  of 
which  it  is  clear  that  the  long  quantity  of  the  u  pointed  out 
the  recent  disappearance  of  the  u.'" 


VII.  Apocope.^ — Paragoge.' 

I.  Apocope  is  defined  to  be  the  omission  of  the  final  vow- 
el or  syllable  of  a  word  ;  as,  men'  for  mene. 

II.  In  such  instances  as  the  one  just  cited,  where  a  quick 
colloquial  interrogation  occurs,  the  figure  may  be  allowed 
to  stand.  In  other  cases,  however,  its  existence  is  purely 
imaginary ;  as,  for  example,  in  the  following  line  from  Lu- 
cretius : 

Disjectare  solet  magnum  mare  transtra,  gulerna, 
where  guherna  is  said  to  be  by  apocope  for  guhernacula. 


III.  Paragoge  is  defined  to  be  the  addition  of  a  letter  or 
syllable  to  the  end  of  a  word ;  as,  amarier  for  amarif  dace- 
rier  for  doceri,  legier  for  legi. 

IV.  Paragoge  is  also,  in  strictness,  an  imaginary  figure, 
and  amarier,  docerier,  legier,  &c.,  are  merely  archaisms,  or 
antiquated  modes  of  expression,  mistaken  for  a  poetical  or 
grammatical  figure. 

VIII.  Tmesis." 
I.   Tmesis  is  defined  to  be  the  separation  of  a  word  into 
two  parts,  for  the  purpose  of  inserting  another  word  be- 
tween them ;  as, 

1.  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  160. — Compare  Voss.,  de  Art.  Gramm.,  2,  13. 

2.  'ATTOKOTn/,  "  a  cutting  off,"  from  airo  and  kotttu. 

3.  Tiapayuyn,  "  a  leading  or  bringing  beside,"  from  rcapd  and  ayu. 
In  military  phraseology,  "  the  extending  a  lino  of  troops  beyond  the  flank, 
and  presenting  a  new  line  or  front." 

4.  Tfitjai^,  «'  a  cutting,"  from  t^/zvw,  •'  to  cut." 


FIGURES    OF    PROSODY.  125 

Virg.  Talis  JHyperloreo  Septem  subjecta  trioni. 
Lucret.  Languidior  porro  disjectis  disg'Me  supatis. 
Id.  C(Btera  de  genere  hoc,  inter  qucEquomque  pretantur. 

Id.  Conlaxat,  Taieque  facit  lateramma  vast. 

II.  Here  the  words  septemtrioni,  dissipatis,  interpretantur, 
and  rarefacit,  are  supposed  to  be  divided  by  the  figure  tme- 
sis. The  truth  appears  to  be,  however,  that,  in  the  earlier 
forms  of  the  language,  many  words  which  were  used  sep- 
arately were  in  process  of  time  compounded  together  ;  and 
hence,  just  as  we  should  expect,  these  separations  are  much 
more  frequent  in  Lucretius  and  the  older  writers  than  in 
those  who  succeeded  them.' 


IX.  Antithesis.^ — Metathesis.'* 

I.  Antithesis  is  defined  to  be  the  putting  of  one  letter  for 
another;  as,  olli  for  illi,  faciundum  (or faciendum. 

II.  Antithesis  is,  in  fact,  no  figure  at  all.  The  forms  com- 
monly assigned  as  instances  of  it,  are  merely  old  modes  of 
spelling  words,  which  are  found  under  this  shape  on  many 
monuments,  some  of  them  of  a  late  date,  and  certainly  many 
of  them  not  antiquated  even  in  the  age  of  Augustus.* 


III.  Metathesis  is  defined  to  be  a  transposition  of  letters  ; 
as,  Evandre  for  Evander,  Thymbre  for  Thymher,  corcodilus 
for  crocodilus* 

Virg.      H(BC  mea  magna  fides  ?     At  non  ^y BXidre  pudendis. 
Id.  Nam  tibi,  Thymbre,  caput  Evandrius  ahstulit  ensis. 

Phaedr.  A  corcodilis  ne  rapiantur,  traditum  est.    (Iamb.) 

1.  Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  161. — Compare  the  remark  of  Hermann  • 
"  Quam  tmesin  vacant  grammatici,  ea  et  natura  et  usu  prior  fuit  quam 
xjvvQecig.  Sed  nimirum,  quoniam  rcccntior  consuetude,  ad  quam  omnia 
exigebant,  cvvdeatv  usurpabat,  tmesin  istam  ut  discessionem  a  communi 
usu  animadvertere  jubebant."  {De  Emend.  Rat.,  G.  G.,\).  117.)  Con- 
salt  also,  on  the  subject  of  tmesis  in  early  Greek,  the  remarks  of  Mat- 
thiae  (G.  G.,  vol.  2,  p.  1398,  Zd  Germ,  ed.),  Kiihner  ((?.  G.,  vol.  2,  p. 
313),  and  Nagclsbach  {Anmerk.  zu  Bias,  Excurs.  16). 

2.  'AvTtdeaig,  "  a  substitution,"  from  dvTc  and  ridrifii. 

3.  Merudeatg,  '*  a  transposition,"  from  /ierd  and  Tidrj[iL, 

4.  Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p,  162. 

L2 


126  FIGURES    OF   PROSODY. 

IV.  The  instances,  however,  that  are  given  of  metathesis 
are  merely  antiquated  forms  of  expression.  Thus,  Evandre 
and  Thymhre  are  nothing  more  than  vocatives  regularly 
formed  from  old  nominatives  in  us ;  and  corcodilus  is  mere- 
ly another  form  for  crocodilus,  obtained  through  the  Greek.* 


X.  Systole.^ 

I.  Systole  is  defined  to  be  the  shortening  of  a  syllable, 
which,  from  its  natural  quantity  or  from  position,  ought  to 
be  long. 

II.  No  such  figure,  however,  as  systole  in  reality  exists ; 
and  we  must  not  suppose  that  the  poets  could  shorten  syl- 
lables at  their  own  caprice. 

III.  Under  systole  are  placed,  for  example,  those  com- 
pounds oijacio  which  sometimes  drop  the  j.     Thus, 

For  dbjicit,  abjiciy     we  find  abicit,  abtci. 
adjicit,  ddjici,  "        ddicit,  ddici. . 

conjicit,  "        comcit. 

Injicit,  **        tmcit, 

objicis,  dbjicit,  "        obicis,  obtcit. 

subjicit,  subjiciy        "        subicit,  sublet. 

IV.  These,  however,  are  by  no  means  cases  of  systole  or 
poetic  license,  but  are,  in  reality,  old  forms  of  the  language.^ 

1.  The  Greeks  appear  to  have  said  both  KpoKodei^.og  and  KopKoSeiXoc, 
as  they  said  Kpadia  and  Kapdia,  Kparepoq  and  Kaprepo^,  and  as  the  Scotch 
use  indifferently  frith  and  firth.  (Ramsay,  L.  P.,  p.  162.) — Gudius, 
indeed,  maintains  that  the  form  corcodilus  is  more  correct  than  crocodi- 
lus. His  words  are  as  follows :  "  Testari  possum,  in  optimis  ct  sep- 
tingentorum,  et  amplius  annorum  membranis,  non  tantum  apud  poetas, 
iis  in  locis,  ubi  metri  ratio  id  postulat,  sed  etiam  in  prosa  apud  oratores 
et  philosophos  reperiri  Corcodilus.  Neque  his  obstabit,  quod  belluae  is- 
tius  Niliacae  nomen  a  Graecis  Latini  acceperint,  qui  KpoxodftXof  scrip- 
serint.  Sic  enim  saepe  vocabula,  quae  a  Grascis  habent  Latini,  immuta- 
runt.  Sic  tardus  a  (3padvc,  etc.  Eodem  modo  Kaprepoc  et  Kparepoc. 
Non  negandum  vero  est,  poetas,  quoties  prima  foret  corripienda,  ad  im- 
itationem  Grajcorum  scripsisse  Crocodilus.  Sic  Hor.,  Epod.,  12,  11: 
Postea  unice  tandem  obtinuiX  ut  scriberetur  Crocodilus."  (Gud.  ad 
Phadr.,  1,  25,  4.) 

S.  l,vaT6?itj,  •'  a  drawing  together,"  from  avv  and  areTiXo. 

3.  Ramsay^s  LaL  Pros.,  p.  136.— Por«u*,  Lex.  Crit. — NiniSf  Cen^ 


FIGURES    OF   PROSODY.  127 

V.  Under  systole  we  also  find  ranked  the  shortening  of 
the  penultimate  syllable  in  the  third  person  plural  of  per- 
fects ;  as,  dederunt,  tulerunt,  steterunt,  &c.  It  is  probable, 
however,  that  we  have  here  the  ancient  pronunciation  ;  at 
least  the  analogy  of  the  language  is  in  favour  of  it.' 

VI.  To  systole  is  also  attributed  the  quantity  of  the  ini- 
tial syllable  in  aperio,  omittOj  hodie,  and  the  like,  which, 
being  compounded,  as  is  said,  of  ad  and  pario,  oh  and  mitto, 
hoc  and  die^  &c.,  ought  to  have  the  first  syllable  long.  It 
will  be  sufficient,  however,  to  observe,  in  reply,  that  the 
quantity  of  these  and  similar  words  is  invariable,  and  must 
therefore  have  been  the  result  of  the  ordinary  pronunciation, 
and  not  of  any  poetic  license.'^ 

VII.  A  similar  remark  may  be  made  with  regard  to  viderC 
for  videsne.     In  the  latter  of  these  two  forms  the  syllable  es 

otaph.  Pis.,  diss.  4,  c.  4. — Aul.  GelL,  16,  7.  The  last-named  writer 
blames  Laberius  for  using  coicior,  on  the  ground  that  it  was  '■^  ohsoletum, 
aut  ex  sordidiore  usu  vulgi  depromptum.'''' 

1.  By  some  these  anomalies  have  been  attributed  to  the  mistakes  of 
transcribers,  who,  it  is  supposed,  may  have  written  erunt  instead  of  erant, 
or  in  some  cases  crint,  both  which  terminations  are  occasionally  found 
in  MSS.  Thus,  in  the  following  line  from  Virgil's  Eclogues  (4,  61), 
"  Matri  longa  decern  tulerunt  fastidia  menses,"  we  find  three  readings 
in  the  MSS.,  tulerunt,  iulerant,  and  tulerint.  If  we  examine,  however, 
with  care  the  different  examples  adduced,  it  will  be  found  that  in  not  a 
few  of  these  the  indicative  perfect  cannot  be  struck  out  without  great  vi- 
olence ;  nor  can  we  fail  to  perceive  that  a  transcriber,  when  copying  a 
MS.,  if  he  came  to  such  a  quantity  as  tulerunt  or  steterunt,  which  he 
might  consider  anomalous,  would  be  much  more  likely  to  change  it  to 
tulerint  or  tulerant,  than  to  transform  one  of  these  into  tulerunt,  in  vio- 
lation of  all  ordinary  rules.  {Ramsay^ s  Lat.  Pros.  p.  105.) — Others, 
again,  have  boldly  contended  that  the  poets  who  used  these  forms  were 
inadvertently  guilty  of  a  breach  of  prosody.  There  might  be  some  plau- 
sibility in  this  assertion,  if  the  instances  of  this  pretended  violation  of  rule 
were  only  few  in  number.  It  happens,  however,  that  in  Lucretius  there 
are  no  less  than  15,  in  Virgil  five,  in  Propertius  five,  in  Ovid  19,  &c. 
It  is  idle,  therefore,  to  talk  in  such  a  case  of '*  inadvertent"  errors. — The 
supposition  in  the  text,  that  the  penult  of  the  perfect,  in  the  third  person 
plural,  was  originally  short,  seems  much  more  probable,  and  coincides  also 
with  the  general  rule  of  e  short  before  r,  or,  in  other  words,  with  the 
analogy  of  the  language  ;  and,  in  confirmation  of  this  opinion,  we  may 
cite  the  words  of  the  grammarian  Diomedes  :  "  Fere  in  tertio  ordine 
plerumque  veteres  tertia  persona  finitiva  temporis  perfecti,  numeri  plu- 
Talis,  E  mediam  vocalem  corripiunt,  quasi  legerunt,  emerunt,"  &c. 

2.  Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  156. 


128  FIGURES    OF    PROSODY. 

is  uniformly  long ;  whereas  in  viden^  tlie  e  is  as  uniformly 
short.  The  reason  probably  is  this,  that  in  viden\  as  well 
as  in  satin^  and  am\  the  pronunciation  was  so  rapid  that  the 
voice  was  not  permitted  to  dwell  upon  any  of  the  syllables.* 


XI.  Diastole.^ 

I.  Diastole  (or  Ectasis'')  is  defined  to  be  the  lengthening 
of  a  syllable  naturally  short.  Like  systole,  however,  it  is 
merely  an  imaginary  figure. 

II.  To  diastole  is  attributed  the  lengthening  of  the  first 
syllable  in  'Italia,  PriamideSj  'Arabia,  &c.,  from  "Italus, 
Priamus,  ''Arabs,  &c.  But  the  true  reason  is,  that  such 
forms  as  Italia,  Priamides,  Arabia,  &c.,  could  not  have 
been  used  in  dactylic  verse  unless  the  first  syllable  were 
lengthened.  This  license  was  therefore  assumed  by  the 
Roman  poets,  in  imitation  of  the  Greeks.* 

III.  To  diastole  is  also  attributed  the  lengthening  of  the 
first  syllable  in  certain  compounds  of  Re.     Thus,  we  find 

religio,         reUgione,  reUgionum,     reUgiosa. 

reUqui(B,       reUquiarum,        reUquias. 

recidere,      recidimus. 

reldtum,       remotum. 

reducit,        reducunt,  reducere. 

To  these  must  be  added  the  three  preterites  reperit,  repulit, 
retulit,  and  the  tenses  formed  from  them,  repereris,  repere- 
rit ;  repuleris,  repulerint ;  retuleram,  retulerat,  retulerisj  re- 
iulerit,  <fec.* 

IV.  Various  explanations  have  been  given  of  this  anom- 
aly. According  to  some,  such  words  as  religio,  reliqui<B, 
recidere,  could  not  find  a  place  in  dactylic  verse,  unless  the 
first  syllable  were  made  long ;  but,  although  this  is  true  as 
far  as  these  words  are  concerned,  it  will  by  no  means  ap- 

1.  Ramsaifs  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  156. 

2.  dktaaTOAf],  "a  geparation,"  "a  drawing  out,"  from  did  and  are^Mt. 

3.  'EKraaic,  "  a  atretching  out,"  from  Ik  and  rdvu. 

4.  Ramsay's  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  139,  scq. 


PIGtJRES  OP   PROSODY.  129 

ply  to  relatus,  remotus,  reducit,  Slc,  which  are  generally 
found  with  the  first  syllable  short ;  nor  will  it  explain  the 
quantity  of  repent^  repulit,  retulitj  which  is  invariable.' 

V.  Other  scholars,  following  the  old  grammarians,  con- 
tent themselves  with  doubling  the  consonant  after  re  in  all 
cases  where  that  syllable  is  long,  and  write  relUgio,  rel- 
liqui(B,  redduco,  remmotus,  <fec.,  but  this  at  best  is  but  an 
evasion  of  the  difficulty. 

VI.  A  more  plausible  explanation  is  grounded  upon  the 
supposition  that  the  ancient  form  of  re  was  red,  as  it  appears 
in  reddo ;  for  it  cannot  be  said  that  the  d  is  here  inserted 
for  the  sake  of  euphony,  as  may  be  urged  in  regard  to  such 
words  as  redeo,  redimo,  and  the  like.  In  this  way  the  ori- 
ginal form  of  refer 0,  recido,  removeo,  reduco,  &c.,  was  red' 
fero,  redcido,  redmoveo,  redduco,  &c. ;  and,  although  the  d 
was  afterward  dropped,  the  poets,  especially  the  earlier 
ones,  considered  themselves  entitled  to  make  use  of  either 
form,  as  best  suited  their  convenience. 

VII.  This  may  be  the  true  account  of  the  matter  in  most 
instances,  but  it  certainly  does  not  apply  to  the  preterites 
reperit,  repulit,  retulit,  which  ought  always  to  be  written 
with  the  consonant  doubled,  being  in  reality  contractions 
for  the  reduplications  repeperit,  repepulit,  retetulit.  This  is 
the  account  given  by  Priscian^  with  regard  to  repperit,  and 
it  applies  equally  to  the  other  two.^ 

VIII.  The  first  syllable  in  quatuor,  when  made  long,  has 
also  been  regarded  as  an  instance  of  diastole,  since  quat- 
uor is  found  short  in  Ennius,  and  its  derivatives  quater, 
quaterni,  quadrupes,  &c.,  have  the  a  short.  But  Gesner 
and  Vossius  correctly  maintain,  that  Virgil  should  be  made 
the  standard  of  pronunciation  with  regard  to  the  word  in 


1.  The  old  reading  in  Catullus  (66,  35),  **  Si  reditum  retulisset  is, 
aut  in  tempore  longo,  ei,"  is  now  changed  in  the  best  editions  to  "  Si 
reditum  tetulisset,"  &c. 

2.  Vol.  1,  p.  509,  ed.  Krehl. 

3.  Ramsay^ s  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  140. 


130  FIGURES   OF   PROSODY. 

question,  and  that  the  first  syllable  should  be  considered 
long,  as  he  uniformly  makes  it. 


XII.  Synapheia,^ 

I.  Synapheia  is  the  connecting  of  verses  together,  so  as 
to  make  them  run  on  in  continuation,  as  if  the  matter  were 
not  divided  into  separate  verses. 

II.  By  this  arrangement,  the  initial  syllable  of  a  succeed- 
ing verse  has  an  influence  on  the  final  syllable  of  the  pre- 
ceding, affecting  it  by  the  concourse  of  consonants,  by  ec- 
thlipsis,  and  by  synalcepha. 

III.  Synapheia  chiefly  prevailed  in  anapaestic  and  Ionic 
a  minore  verse,  in  which  strict  attention  was  paid  to  its  ob- 
servance. Its  occurrence  in  other  kinds  of  verse  was  occa- 
sional and  limited,  and  in  these  kinds  it  was  seldom  resort- 
ed to  by  good  writers. 

IV.  The  following  anapaestic  lines  furnish  examples  of 
the  effect  of  synapheia  : 

PrcRceps  I  sylvas  |1  mdntes\que  faglt  || 

Citus  Act\^dn,  II  agtUs\qu€  magis  || 

Pede  per  |  saltus  ||  et  sdx\a  vagus  II 

Metult  I  rndlas  ||  Zephyns  |  plumas,  JI  (Seneca.) 
The  short  final  syllables  oi  fugit,  magts^  and  vagus  here 
become  long  by  position  before  their  own  final,  and  the 
initial,  consonants  in  the  lines  that  immediately  follow. 

V.  Among  other  instances  of  synapheia,  the  following 
may  be  enumerated : 

Virg.     Inseritur  vero  etfxtu  nucis  arbutus  A(?m|da 
Et  steriles  platani  malos  gesaere  valentes. 

Virg.    Jactemur,  doceas :  ignari  hominumque  ZocorMmjque 
Erramus,  vento  hue,  et  vastis  Jluctibus  acti. 

Horat.  Dissidens  plebi,  numero  beato\T\Mi\ 
Eximit  Virtus,  populumque  falsis. 

1.  2vva^em,  "  a  junction,"  from  avv  and  (mru. 


i 


FEET.  131 

Horat.  Cur  facunda  parum  deco\ro - 

Inter  verba  cadit  liagua  silentio  1  * 

In  the  first  of  these  examples,  the  first  line  ends  with  horri^ 
and  the  «,  being  regarded  as  the  final  syllable  of  the  verse, 
becomes  long.  The  syllable  da  combines  with  Ht  in  the 
second  line,  and  by  synapheia  and  synalcepha  we  have  d^et 
as  the  initial  syllable  of  this  line. 

In  like  manner,  the  second  line  of  the  second  example 
commences  with  qu'erramus,  the  second  line  of  the  third 
with  r''eximit,  and  the  second  of  the  fourth  with  r' inter.  In 
r^eximitj  it  will  be  observed,  an  ecthlipsis  operates. 

VI.  In  most  cases  of  synapheia  (except  in  anapaestic  and 
Ionic  a  minore  measures)  there  is  little  or  no  pause  at  the 
end  of  the  line. 

VII.  The  rule  of  synapheia  is  carefully  observed  by  the 
Greek  tragic  writers  in  their  anapaestic  systems ;  and,  as 
far  as  our  authorities  go,  by  the  Latins  also.  The  law  of 
synapheia  was  discovered  by  Bentley.^ 

SECTION  XXVII. 

OF  FEET. 

I.  A  Foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  syllables,  with 
due  regard  to  their  times  or  quantities. 

II.  Feet  in  metre  are  so  called,  because  by  their  aid  the 
voice,  as  it  were,  moves  along  through  the  verse  in  a  meas- 
ured pace.^ 

III.  Feet  are  divided  into  simple  and  compound.  Of  the 
simple  feet,  four  are  of  two  syllables,  and  eight  of  three. 
The  compound  feet  are  sixteen  in  number,  and  contain  each 
four  syllables. 

1.  Dissertation  upon  Phalaris,  p.  190,  ed.  Dyce. — For  farther  obser- 
vations respecting  synapheia,  consult  remarks  on  the  Anapsstic  and 
Sapphic  measures. 

3.  "  Pes  vocatur,  sive  quia  in  percussione  metrica  pedis  pulsus  poni- 
iur  tolliturque ;  sen  quia,  ut  nos  pedibus  ingredimur  atque  progredimur, 
ita  et  versus  per  has  pedes  metricos  procedit  et  scandit.''^  {Mar.  Vict., 
p.  2485.)  --r-r 


132  FECT. 

k 
SIMPLE    FEfif   OF    TWO    SYLLABLES. 

I.  The  Spondee  (Spond<sus)  consists  of  two  long  sylla- 
bles, as  omnes,  and  derives  its  name  from  anovdrjj  "  a  liba- 
tion,^^  because  it  was  much  used  in  the  slow,  solemn  chant 
which  accompanied  a  sacrifice.' 

II.  The  Pyrrhich  (Pyrrhichius)  consists  of  two  short 
syllables,  as  deusj  and  was  so  called  from  the  martial  Pyr- 
rhic dance  (iruppCxr]),  which  was  performed  in  quick  time, 
and  in  the  measure  adapted  to  which  this  foot  predomina- 
ted.2 

III.  The  Trochee  (TtocTkbus)  consists  of  one  long  and 
one  short  syllable,  as  servat,  and  takes  its  name  from  rpe- 
X(»),  "  to  run,''  or  from  rpoxog,  "  a  wheel,"  in  consequence 
of  the  tripping  character  which  it  communicated  to  the 
verses  in  which  it  prevailed.^  It  was  also  called  by  the 
Greeks  x^P^^^^  (from  x^P^^^  "  ^  dance'^),  and  by  the  Lat- 
ins Chorius  or  Chor(BuSy  because  it  is  well  adapted  to  dan- 
cing.* -, 

IV.  The  Iambus  (Iambus)  consists  of  one  short  and  one 

1.  'O  aTTovSatoc,  hn  6vo  fxcKpuv  ovyKeifievoc  hK%7]6rj  6e  ovrug,  Sri  kv 
ralg  aizov6alq,  ug  i-Troiovvro  Trpof  Tovg  iJeovf,  tocovtu  fiirptf)  ixpC)VTO' 
K.  T.  X.  (Schol.,  HephcBst.,  p.  82,  4.)  According  to  Diomedes  (lib.  3, 
p.  473),  this  foot  was  called  by  Numa  Pompilius  Pontificius,  from  its 
being  employed  in  the  music  of  the  Salic  hymns.  (Consult  Terent. 
Maur.,  ed.  Santen.,  p.  62.) 

2.  iloXeixLKTj  6e  SokbI  elvat  rj  TrvfyliixV'  'EvoTrXot  yap  avTTjv  iraldec 
bpxovvrai.  Tdxovg  d^  dec  T(f)  rfoAe//^  eig  to  Siukeiv,  Kai  eig  to  rjTTUfii' 
vovg  (^evycLv,  fJLrjdk  (ievelv,  firjd'  aldeccdai  KaKovg  elvat.     {Athenaus,  14, 

^  p.  629,  c.) — Another  derivation  of  the  name  is  from  Pyrrhus,  the  son  of 
Achilles,  "  qui  crebris  et  citis  exsultalionibus  bis  breviter  prominenlcm 
clypeum  genibus  incumbctis,  et,  per  hunc,  tcrrorem  hostibtis  immiltcns, 
in/erebatur,  sicut  versus  illustrat,  VTraarriSta  npoSiduvTog.^*  (Diomed., 
3,  p.  471.) — The  Pyrrhich  was  also  called  ^ye/iuv,  "  the  leader,*'  because 
by  some  it  was  ranked  first  among  metrical  feet.  Another  name  was 
AiCpaxvg,  which  the  Latins  rendered  by  Bibrevis.  It  was  likewise  call- 
ed UapiafiSog  {Pariambus),  "  qitod  minus  habeat  unum  tempus  ab  lam- 
bo  :  napu  enim  Graeci  minus  dicunt."  (Mar.  Vict.,  p.  2489. — Compare 
Schol.  ad  Hevhcest.,  p.  11.) 

3.  Mar.  Victorin.,  p.  'iAS7.— Schol.,  Hephcest.,  p.  82.— PZofiu5,  p. 
2625.— Diowed.,  p.  474. — Santen.,  ad  Terent.  Maur.,  p.  69. 

4.  The  names  Cliorius  (or  Choraus)  and  Trochaus  were  also  given 
to  the  tribrach. 


FEET.  133 

long  syllable,  as  pios.  Most  of  the  old  grammarians  would 
derive  it  from  lambe,  the  name  of  a  damsel,  the  slave  of 
Eleiisinian  Celeiis,  who  amused  Ceres  by  dancing  and 
song  when  mourning  the  loss  of  her  daughter  Proserpina.^ 


SIMPLE    FEET    OF    THREE    SYLLABLES. 

I.  The  MoLossus  (Molossus)  consists  of  three  long  syl- 
lables, as  delectant,  and  derived  its  name,  according  to  the 
schoHast  on  Hephaestion,  from  Molossus,  son  of  P}'Trhus 
and  Andromache,  who  repeated  hymns,  in  which  this  was 
the  prevailing  foot,  at  the  shrine  of  Dodona  in  Epirus.^ 

II.  The  Tribrach  [Trihrachys)  consists  of  three  short 
syllables,  as  melius,  whence  its  name  is  derived  {rpelg, 
"  three"  and  ^paxvg,  "  short").  It  is  also  called  Chorius^ 
and  sometimes  TrochcBus.^ 

III.  The  Dactyl  (Dactylus)  consists  of  one  long  and 
two  short  syllables,  as  cdrmind,  and  derives  its  name  from 
daKTvXog,  ^^  a  finger"  because  each  finger  consists  of  one 
long  joint  and  two  short  ones.^ 

IV.  The  Anapaest  (Anapmstus)  consists  of  two  short 
syllables  and  one  long,  as  ammos,  and  it  is  thus  denomina- 

1.  Plotius,  p.  2625.—Schol.,  Nicand.  Alex.,  v.  130,  p.  \39.—  Schol., 
Hephcest.,  p.  81. — Eustath.  ad  Od.,  11,  277. — Other  derivations  may  be 
found  in  the  notes  of  Santenius  to  Terentianus  Maurus,  p.  67,  seqq. 

2.  Others  say  that  it  was  named  from  the  Molossi  in  Epirus,  who 
used  it  in  their  war-songs.  {Diomcd.,  p.  475.)  It  was  known  also  by 
several  other  names,  such  as  Vortumnus,  Extensipes,  Hippius,  Chaon- 
ius.     {Diomed.,  I.  c.) 

3.  Schol,  Hephcest.,  ip.  158. 

4.  Quintil.,  9,  4. — Terent.  Maur.,  v.  1446. — Sanlen.,  ad  loc. 

5.  Plotius,  p.  2625. — Cledonius,  p.  1885. — Victorinus,  p.  2488,  quo- 
ted, among  other  authorities,  by  Santen  {ad  Terent.  Maur.,  v.  1406). — 
Diomedes  gives  another  derivation  for  the  name  :  "  ab  Idais  Dactylis. 
Hi  namque  in  insula  Creta  Jovem  custodiendo,  ne  vagitu  se  parvulus 
proderet,  lusus  excogitato  genere,  cJypeolis  cEneis  inter  se  concurrentes, 
tinnitu  aris  illisi  rhythmica  etiam  pedis  Dactyli  compositione  celavere 
vocem  infantis.^^  To  the  same  effect  the  scholiast  on  Hephsestion  re- 
marks :  ^  airb  tuv  Aa/crvAuv,  ovg  hrcL^M&Ofj.hrj  r^f  yrig  avf/Kev  tj  Tea, 

ol  SeKa  ovT£c,  Kal  tovto)  T(p  fxeXet  g.dovTeg  koX  bpxovfJ-evoi,  tov 

Kpovov  ^Trdruv.  {Schol.,  Hephcest.,  p.  82.)  The  dactyl  was  also  call- 
ed Herous,  from  its  being  particularly  employed  in  relating  the  exploita 
of  heroes.     {Aristot.,  Rhet.,  3,  8, — Cic,  de  Orat.,  3,  47,  seq.)^'' 

M 


134  FEET. 

ted  from  the  verb  dvanatu),  "  to  strike  in  reverse  order"  be- 
cause the  order  of  its  syllables  is  directly  the  reverse  of  that 
observed  in  the  dactyl.'  Hence  the  anapaest  is  also  called 
'AvTiddKTvXog  (Antidactylus)  by  the  Greeks,  and  Retroac- 
tus  by  the  Latins.^ 

V.  The  Bacchius  (fiaKx^log)  consists  of  one  short  sylla- 
ble followed  by  two  long  ones,  as  dolores,  and  it  is  so  call- 
ed from  its  having  been  frequently  used  by  worshippers  in 
the  hymns  to  Bacchus.^ 

VI.  The  Antibacchius  (^Avri6aKX£logY  consists  of  two 
long  syllables  followed  by  a  short  one,  as  pelluntur,  and  it 
takes  its  name  from  its  opposition  to  the  Bacchius. 

VII.  The  Amphimacer  {^A.ii(piiiaKpog),  or  Cretic  (Creti- 
cus),  is  composed  of  one  short  syllable  between  two  long, 
or,  in  other  words,  of  a  long,  a  short,  and  a  long,  as  cdstt- 
tds.  Both  names  are  mentioned  by  Quintilian,  who  makes 
the  second,  however,  the  more  usual  one.  The  former  of 
these  two  appellations  comes  from  d/z^t,  "  on  both  sides,* 
and  fiaKpog,  "  long"  while  the  latter  is  said  to  have  been 
given  to  this  foot  from  its  resembling  in  time  the  blows 
struck  by  the  Corybantes  in  Crete  on  their  brazen  shields, 
to  drown  the  cries  of  the  infant  Jove,  lest  these  should 
reach  the  ears  of  Saturn.^ 

VIII.  The  Amphibrach  (Amphibrachys)  consists  of  one 
long  syllable  between  two  short,  or,  in  other  words,  a  short, 


1.  *^  Dictus  irapa  tov  avairaUiv,  Kara  to  avunaXiv  ^vriKpoveiv  irpo^ 
rbv  Att/cruAov,  quia  recurrendo  reperciitiens  Dactylum  sono  reciproco  ob- 
loquUur  ei  per  antislrophen.^*     (Diomed.,  p.  475.) 

2.  Diomed.,  I.  c.—Quintil.,  9,  4,  81. 

3.  A  great  deal  of  confusion  exists  among  the  old  gramoiarians  with 
regard  to  the  bacchius  and  antibacchius. — Terentianus  Maurus,  for  ex- 
ample, makes  the  former  consist  of  two  long  syllables  followed  by  a 

abort  ( -),  and  the  antibacchius  the  reverse  of  this  (-^ ).     The 

common  distinction,  however,  as  given  in  the  text,  has  the  authority  of 
Quintilian  (9,  4,  82)  in  its  favour.  (Consult  Santen.  ad  Terent.  Maur., 
I.  c.) 

4.  Called  also  PalimJbacchixis . 

5.  Compare  note  5,  page  133,  where  a  similar  etymology  is  given  for 
the  term  dactylus. 


FEET.  135 

a  long,  and  a  short ;  as,  amdre.     It  derives  its  name  from 
dii<j)l,  "  on  both  sides, ''^  and  jSpa^vg,  "  shorty^ 


[ 


COMPOUND    FEET. 

I.  The  DispoND^us,  or  Double  Spondee,  is  composed  of 
four  long  syllables,  or,  in  other  words,  of  two  spondees ; 
as,  Infmitis. 

II.  The  Proceleusmaticus  consists  of  two  pyrrhichs,  or 
of  four  short  syllables ;  as,  hommibus.  It  is  said  to  have 
taken  its  name  from  KeXevofia,  the  word  of  command  given 
by  the  ballet-master,  in  double  quick  time,  to  accelerate  the 
step.^ 

III.  The  DiiAMBUs,  or  Double  Iambus,  consists  of  two 
iambi ;  as,  severitds. 

IV.  The  Ditroch^us,  or  Dichor^us,  consists  of  two 
trochees ;  as,  permdnere. 

V.  The  loNicus  Major  (or  a  Majore)  consists  of  a  spon- 
dee and  a  pyrrhich,  that  is,  of  two  long  syllables  followed 
by  two  short ;  as,  calcdnbus. 

VI.  The  loNicus  Minor  (or  a  Minore)  consists  of  a  pyr- 
rhich and  a  spondee,  that  is,  of  two  short  followed  by  two 
long ;  as,  properdbdnt. 

The  two  feet  just  described  are  called  Ionic,  either  from 
their  having  been  favourites  with  the  lonians,  or  from  Ion, 
their  inventor.''  One  is  called  lonicus  Major,  or  a  majore, 
because  it  begins  with  the  greater  quantity,  that  is,  with 
two  long  syllables ;  and  the  other  is  called  lonicus  Minor, 


1.  The  amphibrach  is  also  called  Amphihrevis.  (Diomed.,  3,  p.  475.) 
Victorinus  styles  it  Mesites  (p.  1956). 

2.  'HvfiTO  6e  Kad'  iKaarov  x^pov  elq  uvr/p,  of  svedcdov  Tolg  aAAoif  tu 
TTJg  bpxfjOEug  Gxni^i^o.ra  irpcJTOc,  el6o(j>optJv  rag  Tro?.e/j,tKag  nal  (tvvtovov^ 
KLVTjattr  EV  rolg  TcpoKeXevafiaTiKolg  ug  to,  ttoXXo,  ^vdfiolg.  {Dion.  Hal., 
Ant.  Rom.,  1.  7,  p.  476.)  For  some  learned  observations  on  the  proce- 
leusmaticus, consult  Santen.  ad,  Terent.  Maur.,  v.  1460. 

3.  Gesner  thinks  that  the  Ionic  mode  of  dancing  was  adapted  to  these 
two  feet,  whence  their  name.  {Thesaur.  L.  L.,  s.  v.)  Plotius,  on  the 
contrary,  remarks,  ♦'  lonici  ab  lone  inventore  sua  dicti''^  (p.  2626). 


136  FEET. 

or  a  minore,  because  it  begins  with  the  less  quantity,  that 
is,  with  two  short  syllables.* 

VII.  The  CiioRiAMBUs  consists  of  a  choraeus  or  trochae- 
us  and  an  iambus,  that  is,  of  two  short  syllables  between 
two  long ;  as,  noUUtas} 

VIII.  The  Antispast  (Antispastus)  consists  of  an  iam- 
bus and  a  trochee,  that  is,  of  two  long  syllables  between 
two  short ;  as,  secu?iddre.  It  derives  its  name  from  dvTC- 
ondo),  "  to  draw  asunder,''^  two  long  syllables  being  separa- 
ted or  drawn  asunder  by  two  short  ones.^ 

IX.  The  Epitritus  Primus,  or  First  Epitrit,  is  compo- 
sed of  an  iambus  and  spondee,  and  consists  of  one  short 
syllable  and  three  long ;  as,  salutdntes. 

X.  The  Epitritus  Secundus,  or  Second  Epitrit,  is 
composed  of  a  trochee  and  a  spondee,  and  consists  of  a 
long,  a  short,  and  then  two  long  syllables  ;  as,  concitdtl. 

XL  The  Epitritus  Tertius,  or  Third  Epitrit,  is  com- 
posed of  a  spondee  and  an  iambus,  and  consists  of  two 
long  syllables,  followed  by  a  short  and  a  long ;  as,  commu- 
mcdnt, 

XII.  The  Epitritus  Quartus,  or  Fourth  Epitrit,  is 
composed  of  a  spondee  and  a  trochee,  and  consists  of  three 
long  syllables  and  one  short ;  as,  mcdntdre. 

1.  The  Greek  names  for  these  two  feet  are  6  cnrb  fietCovoc  ^luviKof 
and  6  inf  kXdaaovoc  'Icjvikoc. — The  greater  Ionic  was  also  called  Per- 
sicus,  because  Persian  histories  were  written  in  this  measure.  Uepoi- 
KOf  de,  dca  to  tu^  laropiag  tuc  JlepaiKa^  tovt(^  r^  fiirpif)  yeypd(p6ai. 
(Schol.,  Hephcest.,  p.  82.)  The  minor  Ionic  was  likewise  styled  Hypo- 
cyclius  {"TTroKVKTiioc. — Schol.,  Hephcest.,  I.  c). 

2.  The  choriambus  was  also  called  Cyclius  (KvkXio^),  and  Hypobac- 
chius  ('YTro6dKX£iog),  and  likewise  Bacchius  a  TrochcEO  (BaKxeiog  «ard 
Tpoxatov).  It  was  probably  used  in  the  circular  dances  around  the  altar 
of  Bacchus,  whence  the  names  just  mentioned,  which  are  given  by  the 
scholiast  on  Hephsestion  (p.  83).  Compare  Santen.  ad  Terent.  Maur., 
V.  1487. 

3.  The  antispast  was  also  called  Spondaacus  CZTrovdaiaKoc)  and  Bo/c- 
;tetoc  Kara  'la/x6ov.  (Schoi,  Hephcest.,  p.  83.) — This  foot  appears  to 
have  been  a  favourite  with  the  prose  writers.  Vossius  states  {Inst., 
Oral.,  4,  4)  that  he  counted  in  Cicero's  oration  for  Archias  twenty-six 
instances  of  an  antispast  at  the  end  of  a  clause.  Compare  Probus,  p. 
Ivii,  and  Diomedes,  p.  467. 


FEET.  137 

These  four  last-mentioned  feet  derive  their  name  from 
the  word  iTTCTplrog,  which  denotes  a  combination  or  pro- 
portion containing  some  particular  number,  together  with 
a  third  part  thereof.  Thus,  in  the  present  instance  we 
have  three  long  syllables,  which  may  be  regarded  in  one 
sense  as  the  basis  of  the  foot,  and  besides  these  we  have 
another  syllable,  a  short  one,  from  the  relative  position  of 
which  last  in  each  of  the  four  feet  are  derived  the  names 
oi  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth  epitrits.  In  other  words, 
we  have  three  syllables,  with  a  third  of  these,  namely,  one 
syllable,  added  thereto  (TpCrTj-ent).^ 

XIII.  The  P^ON  Primus,  or  First  Pceon,  is  composed 
of  a  trochee  and  a  pyrrhich,  and  consists  of  one  long  syl- 
lable followed  by  three  short ;  as,  conftcere. 

XIV.  The  PiEON  Secundus,  or  Second  Pmon,  is  compo- 
sed of  an  iambus  and  a  pyrrhich,  and  consists  of  a  short 
and  a  long,  and  then  two  short  syllables ;  as,  resolvere. 

XV.  The  PiEON  Tertius,  or  Third  Pcbou,  is  composed 
of  a  pyrrhich  and  a  trochee,  and  consists  of  two  short  syl- 
lables followed  by  a  long  and  a  short ;  as,  sociare. 

XVI.  The  PuEON  QuARTUs,  or  Fourth  P<Bon,  is  compo- 
sed of  a  pyrrhich  and  an  iambus,  and  consists  of  three  short 
syllables  and  one  long ;  as,  celentas. 

The  P(Bon,  according  to  some  authorities,^  derived  its 
name  from  Paeon,  an  ancient  poet,  its  alleged  inventor. 
According  to  other  and  better  accounts,  however,  this  foot 
was  so  denominated  from  its  having  been  particularly  used 
in  the  hymns  to  Apollo.^     Hence  also,  besides  the  appel- 

1.  Cicero  renders  knirptTog,  which  Plato  uses  in  his  Timaeus  (p.  36, 
a.,  ed.  Steph.),  by  the  Latin  sesquitertius  {Tim.,  c.  7),  a  term  likewise 
employed  by  Augustinus  (de  Mus.,  2,  p.  7G). — Aulus  Gellius  (18,  14) 
defines  an  epitritus  as  follows  :  "  Epitritus  est  qui  habet  totum  aliquem 
numerum,  et  ejusdcm  partem  tertiam^  (Compare  Macrob.,  in  Somn. 
Scip.,  2,  2.)  The  scholiast  on  Hephsestion  has  also  the  following; 
'ETrtrptrof  upidfibq  Xeyerai,  6  aptdfwv  riva  ix^v  h>  iavru,  kuI  to  rpcTov 

TOVTOV. 

2.  Plotius,  p.  26'26.—Isidor.,  Orig.,  1,  16,  p.  830. 

3.  01  elg  'AnoXXova  de  ypdijiovTec,  rcj  nodi  tovto),  tcj  Uaiuviy  XP^V' 

M  2 


1 38  FEET. 

lation  of  Paeon,  it  received  that  of  PcBan} — The  paeon  is 
directly  opposed  to  the  epitrit.  In  the  latter  there  is  one 
short  syllable  with  three  long  ones  ;  in  the  former,  one  long 
with  three  short.  The^r^^,  second,  third,  and  fourth  pseons 
are  so  named  from  the  relative  situation  of  the  long  sylla- 
ble in  each. 


To  the  list  of  compound  feet  are  sometimes  added  the 
following : 

I.  The  DocHMius  {AoxfJ'iog),  composed  of  an  antispast 
and  a  long  syllable,  and  consisting  of  five  syllables,  namely, 
a  short,  two  long,  a  short,  and  a  long ;  as,  dberrdverdnt,* 

II.  The  Mesomacer  (MeoofiaKpog),  composed  of  a  pyr- 
rhich  and  a  dactyl,  and  containing  also  five  syllables, 
namely,  two  short,  a  long,  and  two  short ;  as,  dvidlsstmusJ^ 


The  following  table  exhibits  the  feet,  both  simple  and  com' 
pound,  in  the  order  in  which  they  have  just  been  described. 


SIMPLE    FEET   OF    TWO    SYLLABLES. 

1.  Spondee 

2.  Pyrrhich 

3.  Trochee 

4.  Iambus 


raL.  (SchoL,  Heph(zst.,  p.  12.)  Compare  the  remark  of  another  scho- 
liast :  Tovg  izaidvag  g,^ovrec  kxpuvTO  avrolg  [IlaiejCTi]  oi  TraXaiol. 
{Schol,  Hermog.,  p.  394.) 

1.  Aristot.,  Rhet.,  3,  8.— Cic,  de  Oral.,  1,  59. — Santen.  ad  TererU. 
Maur.,  V.  1532. 

2.  The  Dochmius  takes  its  name  from  Soxfuoc,  "  obliquus"  in  allu- 
sion to  the  irregularity  that  marks  the  order  or  succession  of  its  compo> 
nent  times ;  or,  in  the  words  of  an  ancient  writer,  dia  to  ttoikIXov  koi 
LvdfiOLQv,  KoL  TO  /17}  kut'  Evdv  ^eupetodai  ttjv  l)v6fio7rouav.  (Artstid.,  de 
Mus.,  1,  p.  39.) — This  foot  is  sometimes  called  Dochinvus,  but  incor- 
rectly. {Erncisti  ad  Cic,  Orat.,  64. — Santen.  ad  TererU.  Maur.,  v. 
1551,  p.  130,  acq.) 

3.  From  ueaog,  "  middle,^*  and  fiaKoog,  "  long,'^  the  name  being  de- 
rived from  the  position  of  the  long  syllable,  in  the  middle,  between  two 
short  on  each  side. 


FEET. 


139 


simple  feet  of  three  syllables 

i  1.  molossus 

2.  Tribrach 

3.  Dactyl      . 

4.  Anap-iEst  . 

5.  Bacchius  . 

6.  Antibacchius 

7.  Amphimacer 

8.  Amphibrach 


COMPOUND    FEET. 

FOUR    WITH    THE    SAME    FOOT   DOUBLED. 
1.    DlSPOND^US 


Proceleusmaticus 

DlTROCH^US 


4.    DlIAMBUS 


FOUR    OF   CONTRARY   FEET. 


1.  Greater  Ionic 

2.  Minor  Ionic 

3.  Choriambus 

4.  Antispast 


FOUR    in   WHICH   LONG    TIMES    EXCEED. 

1.  First  Epitrit 

2.  Second  Epitrit 

3.  Third  Epitrit 

^,4.  Fourth  Epitrit 


FOUR   in    which    short   TIMES   EXCEED. 

First  Pjeon 

Second  Pjeon 

Third  P^on     .        .        .        .         . 
Fourth  P-ff:oN  .         .         .        . 


two  other  compound  feet, 

1.  dochmius  .         .         .         . 

2.  Mesomaceb 


of  five  syllables. 


ik 


140  METRE. 


SECTION  XXVIII. 
OF  METRE. 

I.  Metre,  in  the  general  acceptation  of  the  word,  signi- 
fies a  combination  of  verses  belonging  to  the  same  or  to 
diflferent  classes,  which  succeed  each  other  in  a  fixed  or- 
der. When  we  speak  of  Dactylic  metre,  Iambic  metre,  &c., 
the  word  metre  is  employed  in  this  general  sense,  and  is 
then  synonymous  with  verse. 

II.  But  a  metre,  in  the  technical  and  restricted  sense, 
signifies  either  a  single  foot  in  a  verse,  or  a  combination  of 
two  consecutive  feet,  according  to  circumstances. 

III.  In  Latin  poetry,  the  metres  employed  are  the  follow- 
ing : 

1.  Dactylic. 

2.  Anap^stic. 

3.  Iambic. 

4.  Trochaic. 
6.  Choriambic. 
6.  Ionic. 

IV.  These  metres  have  received  their  respective  names 
from  the  frequent  recurrence  in  them  of  some  particular 
foot ;  and  it  has  been  supposed  that  each  species  was  ori- 
ginally made  up  of  those  feet  only  from  which  it  is  denom- 
inated, but  that  others,  equal  in  time,  were  afterward  ad- 
mitted under  certain  restrictions. 

V.  Metres,  however,  are  often  called  also  after  the  name 
of  some  celebrated  poet,  who  used  a  particular  species  of 
verse ;  as,  Sapphic,  Anacreontic,  Hipponactic,  (fee. 

VI.  Metres  are  likewise  classified  according  to  the  num- 
ber of  feet  or  measures  which  they  contain.     Thus,  a  verse 

of  seven  metres  is  called  Heptameter. 
"  six  "  "       Hexameter. 

*'fa)e         "  "       Pentameter, 


METRE.  141 

of  four  metres  is  called   Tetrameter. 
"  three        "  "        Trimeter. 

"  two  "  "       Dimeter. 

"  one  "  "       Monometer. 

VII.  In  Anapcsstic,  lamhic,  and  Trochaic  verses,  a  metre 
consists  of  two  feet ;  but  in  the  other  kinds  of  verse  a  sin- 
gle foot  constitutes  a  metre. 

VIII.  Thus,  in  Anapcsstic^  Iambic,  and  Trochaic  versifica-    <^ 
tion, 

a  Monometer  contains  two  feet. 


Dimeter 

li 

four 

Trimeter 

ki 

six 

Tetrameter 

u 

eight 

Pentameter 

ii 

ten 

Hexameter 

a 

twelve 

Heptameter^ 

li 

fourteen 

On  the  other  hand,  in  Dactylic,  Choriambic,  and  all  other 
measures  except  the  three  just  mentioned, 
a  Monometer  contains  one  foot. 
Dimeter  *'         two       feet. 

Trimeter  "         three      ** 

Tetrameter  "  four  " 
Pentameter  "  Jive  ** 
Hexameter        "         six  " 

Heptameter       "         ^cuen      " 

IX.  A  combination  of  two  consecutive  feet  is  sometimes 
termed  a  dipodia  {dnrodia)  or  syzygy  (av^vyla).  Most 
usually,  however,  the  combination  of  two  dissyllabic  feet 
is  called  a  dipodia,  and  that  of  two  trisyllabic,  or  a  dissyl- 
labic ahd  trisyllabic,  a  syzygy. 

X.  The  conjunction  of  two  feet  is  often  likewise  termed 
a  base.^ 

1 .  Some  of  these,  of  course,  do  not  occur.  They  are  given,  however, 
to  illustrate  the  rule  laid  down. 

2.  Diomed,Tp.  501.— ilfar.  Vict.,  p.  2489. 


142  ISOCHRONOUS   FEET. 


SECTION  XXIX. 

OF  ISOCHRONOUS  FEET. 

I.  By  Isochronous  (or  even-timed^)  feet  are  meant  those 
that  are  interchangeable  in  metre. 

II.  In  order  to  ascertain  what  feet  are  thus  interchange- 
able, recourse  must  be  had  to  the  arsis  and  thesis. 

III.  As  has  already  been  observed,^  that  part  of  the  foot 
which  receives  the  ictus,  the  stress  of  the  voice,  or  beat  of 
the  time,  is  called  arsis,  or  "  elevation."  The  rest  of  the 
foot  is  termed  thesis,  or  "  depression." 

IV.  The  natural  place  of  the  arsis  is  the  long  syllable  of 
the  foot,  and  hence  in  the  iambus  it  falls  on  the  second  syl- 
lable ;  in  the  trochee,  on  the  first ;  while  the  spondee  and 
tribrach  leave  its  place  alike  uncertain. 

V.  The  fundamental  foot  of  a  verse,  however,  deter- 
mines the  arsis  for  the  other  feet,  and  hence  the  spondee, 
in  iambic  and  anapaestic  verse,  has  the  arsis  on  the  second 
syllable,  but  in  trochaic  and  dactylic  on  the  first. 

VI.  So,  again,  the  tribrach,  when  it  stands  for  the  iam- 
bus, is  to  be  pronounced  ^  -^  ^;  but  when  it  stands  for 
the  trochee,  ^  ^  ^. 

VII.  Now  the  ancients  considered  those  feet  only  iso- 
chronous which  were  capable  of  being  divided  into  parts 
that  were  equal  in  time ;  so  that  a  long  syllable  should 
have  either  a  corresponding  long  syllable  or  two  short 
ones.' 

VIII.  The  following  scheme  will  exemplify  this  more 
clearly,  the  place  of  the  arsis  being  denoted,  as  above  (VI.), 
by  a  mark  resembling  that  of  the  acute  accent. 

{ Iambus  .     .     ^  I  —  C  Trochee  .     .        ~  I  ^ 

(  Tribrach     .     ^  |  w  ^       /  Tribrach  .     .     v^^  w  |  w 

1.  'IffOf,  **  eaual,^^  and  xp<JVog,  "iim«." 

2.  Page  106,  note  1. 

3.  Dawes,  Misc.  Crit.,  p.  62,  seqq.,  ed.  Kidd.  *» 


ISOCHRONOUS    FEET.  143 

!  Dactyl    .     ,     ^  \  ^  ^      i  Anapaest  .     .     ^  ^  I  -^ 
Spondee      .     —  |  —  (  Spondee  .     .        -*  |  -^ 

IX.  By  this  we  perceive  that  the  iambus  and  the  trochee 
are  each  interchangeable  with  the  tribrach,  and  that  the 
dactyl,  spondee,  and  anapaest  are  interchangeable  with  each 
other. 

X.  In  like  manner  it  will  appear  that  the  iambus  and  the 
trochee  are  not  interchangeable,  and  that  an  iambus  never 
admits  a  trochee  into  iambic  verse,  nor  a  trochee  an  iambus 
into  trochaic  verse.     Thus, 

Iambus 

Trochee      .     .     ,     .     - 


Here  it  will  be  perceived  that  the  long  syllable  of  the  iam- 
bus has  neither  a  correspondent  long  syllable  in  the  tro- 
chee, nor  two  short  ones  in  the  same.  And  the  case  is 
precisely  similar  with  the  long  syllable  of  the  trochee, 
which  has  nothing  to  correspond  to  it  in  the  iambus. 
Hence  the  two  feet  are  not  interchangeable  or  isochronous.* 
XI.  Again,  it  may  be  shown  in  the  same  way  that  the 
spondee  and  amphibrach  are  also  not  interchangeable. 
Thus, 

Spondee     ... 

Amphibrach    .     .     ^  - 

Here,  in  whatsoever  way  the  amphibrach  be  divided,  each 
division  contains  either  more  or  less  than  the  correspond- 
ent part  of  the  spondee.  Hence  the  two  feet  are  not  iso- 
chronous ;  and,  for  the  same  reason,  the  amphibrach  is  not 
isochronous  with  the  dactyl  or  anapaest. 

1.  For  this  reason  the  scholiast  on  Hephaestion  calls  the  iambic  and 
trochaic  measures  avrnradovvTa  fierpa,  and  Tricha  remarks,  avrnradT/g 
Kol  olov  VTTEvavTiog  rCi  ld[M6u  6  rpoxalog.  {Schol.  ad  Hephcest.,  p.  76. 
—  Trich  ,  de  Mctr.,  p.  9,  ed.  Herm. — Compare  Daices,  Misc.  Crit.,  p. 
103,  ed.  Kidd.) 


144  VERSE. 

SECTION  XXIX. 

OF  VERSE. 

I.  A  Verse  is  a  certain  number  of  feet  disposed  in  a  reg- 
ular order,  and  forming  a  line  of  poetry. 

II.  A  Hemistich^  is,  properly  speaking,  a  half  verse  ;  the 
name,  however,  is  commonly  applied  to  either  portion  of  a 
hexameter  line  divided  at  the  penthemimeris  ;  as, 

uEre  ciere  virosj  ||  Martemque  accendere  cantu, 

III.  Scanning  is  the  dividing  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  of 
which  it  is  composed,  and  the  assigning  of  their  proper 
quantity  to  the  respective  syllables  of  each  foot. 

IV.  Verses  are  denominated  Acatalectic,  CatalectiCj 
Brachycatalecticj  Hypercatalectic  (or  Hypermeter),  and 
Acephalous. 

V.  An  Acatalectic  verse  is  one  that  is  complete  in  all  its 
parts,  and  comes  to  a  full  termination ;  as  the  following, 
which  is  Iambic  Dimeter  Acatalectic.^ 

Muses  I  Jovis  II  suntfll^.  || 

VI.  A  Catalectic  verse  is  one  that  wants  a  syllable  at  the 
end  to  complete  the  measure ;  as  the  following,  which  is 
Iambic  Dimeter  Catalectic? 

MusTb  I  Jovem  \\  cane\bant.  —  || 

VII.  A  Brachycatalectic  verse  is  that  which  wants  two 
syllables  at  the  end  to  complete  the  measure ;  as  the  fol- 
lowing, which  is  Iambic  Dimeter  Brachycatalectic.^ 

Mus'ak  I  Jovis  II  gndt^  \ II 

1.  From  ijfii,  *'half,^*  and  arixoi,  "averse.^^ 

2.  Acatalectic,  from  uKara'krjKTLKo^  (u  and  Kara'X^yci,  to  stop),  i.  e., 
not  having  an  abrupt  termination.  Compare  Hephaestion  (c.  4,  p.  24, 
ed.  Gaisf.):  'AKardXijKTa  KaXelrat  fiirpa  Haa  tov  reXevTcuov  noda  6X6- 
K^ijpov  ^x^i. 

3.  Catalectic,  from  KaTaXijKTiKoc,  which  ia  itself  a  derivative  from 
KaraXTJ-yu,  denotes  verses  that  stop  before  they  reach  their  full  ending. 
Compare  the  language  of  Hcpha38tion  (/.  c.) :  KaTaTirjKTiKu  de  6aa  jmC' 
[leiufiivov  Ix^'-  "^^^  TcKevralov  nSSa. 

4.  BpaxvKaTa?i,Ti>^Ta  de  Ka?.etTat,  baa  arrb  dtiro6iac  iirl  reXovc  6^ 
iroSl /iefieiuTau     {Hephast.,  I.  c.) 


DACTYLIC    MEASURES.  145 

VIII.  A  Hypercatalectic  or  Hypermeter  verse  is  that  which 
has  a  syllable  at  the  end  beyond  the  complete  measure  ;  as 
the  following,  which  is  Iambic  Dimeter  Hypercatalectic  or 
Hypermeter? 

MuscB  I  sordr\\es  sunt  \  MmervW^. 

IX.  An  Acephalous  verse  is  that  which  wants  a  syllable 
at  the  beginning ;  as  the  following,  which  is  Acephalous 
Iambic  Dimeter.^ 

Non  I  ebur  \\  neque  aur\eum.  || 

SECTION  XXX. 

DACTYLIC  MEASURES. 

I.  The  only  feet  admissible  in  dactylic  verses  are  the 
dactyl  and  spondee. 

II.  Originally  all  the  feet  were  dactyls,  but  the  spondee 
was  afterward  admitted,  as  being  an  isochronous  foot,  and 
in  order  to  impart  more  gravity  and  dignity  to  the  line. 

III.  It  will  be  remembered  that  in  dactylic  verses  a  sin- 
gle foot  constitutes  a  metre ;  and  hence  a  dactylic  hexam- 
eter contains  six  feet,  a  dactylic  pentameter ^ve,  a  dactylic 
tetrameter /our,  &c. 

IV.  In  treating  of  the  dactylic,  as  of  other  measures,  we 
will  commence  with  the  simplest  in  use,  and  end  with  those 
of  the  greatest  length. 


1.  Dactylic  Dimeter  Acatalectic,  or  Adonic. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  two  feet,  a  dactyl  and  spon- 
dee ;  as, 

Terruit  j  urbem. 
Vtsere  \  montes. 

II.  The  dactylic  dimeter,  or  Adonic,  is  usually  subjoined 

1.  'TirepKaralrjKTa  6e  oca  Trpof  tcj  reXet^  irpoae^.aSe  [lepog  irodof. 
{Hephast.,  I.  c.)  Some  call  it  Hyperacatalectic  (TTrepa/faraAr/zfrof),  L 
e.,  going  beyond  acatalectic. 

2.  Acephalous,  from  aKe<f>a?MC,  "vnthout  a  A«ad".(a  and  Ke^oX^). , 

N 


146  DACTYLIC    MEASURES 

to  three  Sapphic  lines,  thus  forming  what  is  called  the  Sap- 
phic stanza,  of  which  an  account  will  be  given  elsewhere. 

III.  In  tragic  choruses,  the  Adonic  is  arbitrarily  added 
to  any  number  of  Sapphics,  without  regard  to  uniformity.* 

IV.  This  measure  was  called  Adonic  (Adonium  metrum 
— ^AdojVLov  fierpov)  because  employed  originally  by  the 
Greeks  in  the  lamentations  for  Adonis.*^ 

V.  Sappho  is  said  to  have  composed  entire  poems  in  this 
measure,  now  lost.  Terentianus  Maurus,  from  whom  we 
derive  this  information,  has  also  left  us  a  short  piece  of  this 
kind,^  and  another  of  thirty-one  successive  Adonics  occurs 
in  Boethius.'* 


2.  Dactylic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

I.  This  measure,  also  called  Archilochian  Penthemime- 
ris,  is  an  heroic  penthemimeris,  or  the  first  five  half-feet  of 
a  dactylic  hexameter.  In  other  words,  it  consists  of  two 
feet  and  a  half. 

II.  Horace,  who  uses  this  verse  in  one  of  his  odes  (4,  7) 
alternately  with  the  dactylic  hexameter,  uniformly  has  two 
dactyls  and  a  semifoot ;  as, 

Horat.  Arbdn\busque  com\(e. 

Id.  Flumlnd  |  prdBtere\unt. 

Id.  Ducere  |  nudd  chdr\ds. 

Id.  Qu^  rdpit  I  hord  di^m,  &c. 

III.  Ausonius,  however,  who  has  a  poem  of  fifty-seven 
lines, '^  all  in  this  measure,  sometimes  makes  the  first  foot  a 
spondee,  and  in  two  instances  uses  a  spondee  also  in  the 

1.  Senec,  (Ed.,  110,  seqq.—Id.,  Troad.,  1010,  seqq.—Id.,  Thyest., 
546,  seqq.,  &c. 

2.  Mar.  Vict ,  p.  2564— P/o/tu*,  p.  2640. 

3.  Terent.  Muur.,  v.  2160. — Some  commentators  think  that  the  words 
*0  Tdv  'Aduviv,  cited  by  Plttius  (p.  2640),  belonged  to  the  .\donic  poem 
of  Sappho  mentioned  by  Terentianus.     (Santen.  ad  Ter.  Maur.,  t.  c.) 

4.  Dc  Cons.  Phil.,  1,  metr.  7. 

5.  Auton.,  Prof.,  10. 


DACTYLIC    MEASURES.  147 

second  place.     But  the  spondee,  in  either  case,  is  a  dispar- 
agement to  the  verse,  particularly  in  the  latter. 

Auson.  Doctri\na  exigu\us. 

Id.  et  U\berti\nd. 

Id.  et  tu  I  Cdncdr\di, 


3.  Dactylic  Trimeter  Acatalectic. 

I.  The  Dactylic  Trimeter  Acatalectic  consists  of  the  last 
three  feet  of  a  dactylic  hexameter ;  that  is,  the  first  foot 
may  be  either  a  dactyl  or  spondee,  but  the  second  must  be 
a  dactyl,  and  the  third  a  spondee ;  as, 

Herat.  Grato  (  Pyrrha  sub  }  dntro. 

II.  But  the  lines  which  are  usually  thus  denominated 
are  with  greater  propriety  included  in  the  class  of  choriam- 
bics,  and  ranked  with  Pherecratics. 


4.  Dactylic  Trimeter  with  a  Base. 
I.  This  measure  consists  of  two  dactyls,  followed  by  a 
spondee,  with  a  base  (that  is,  one  long,  or  two  short  sylla- 
bles) prefixed  to  the  beginning  of  the  line. — Ausonius  will 
afford  an  example.'     Thus, 

Modu\ldrMne  \  immd  |  tristl, 
Tdcit\um  sine  hbn\dre  re\tinquat, 
Super  I  indole  \  cujus  dd  \  ulli, 
Mdg\nc^  bond  \  copid  \  laudts. 


5.  Dactylic  Trimeter  Hypercatalectic. 
I.  This  measure  consists  of  three  dactyls,  and  a  syllable 
over.     The  following  example  of  its  use  is  taken  from  Au- 
sonius.* 

Pdrva  eti\dmfmt  \  lddU\d, 
Normne  j  praditd  \  qu^  Pdph.i\ce, 

1.  Parent.,  17,  1. 

2.  lb.,  28. 


148  DACTYLIC    MEASURES. 

Et  speci\em  meruit  Fcner|w, 
QuoR  gentt\a  est  miht  \  peine  so\rdrf 
FlUa  I  namfuit  \  Kcec  amit\m, 
Qudm  cele\brat  sub  hdn\dre  pi\dj 
NcBTiid  I  carmine  \funere\d. 

II.  A  variety  of  this  measure  is  found  in  Boethius  (3, 
metr.  6),  wliich  admits  of  a  spondee  in  the  first  two  places. 
Thus, 

Hie  claus^t  memhr\zs  dmm\ds. 
Unus  e\mm  re\rum  pater  |  est. 
Ni  viti^s  pej\drd  fov\ens. 

III.  The  Dactylic  Trimeter  Hypercatalectic  is  called  by 
some  Tetrameter  Catalectic. 


6.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  Meiurus,  or  Faliscan.' 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  the  last  four  feet  of  an  ordi- 
nary hexameter,  except  that  the  concluding  foot  is  an  iam- 
bus instead  of  a  spondee.     Thus, 

Sept.  Ser.   Vitis  et  \  ulmus  ut^  simul  |  ednt. 
Id.  Liberdt  j  drvd  p'n\us  fruti\cibus, 

Boeth,         Fdlce  rub\ds  fiU\cemque  re\secdt. 

II.  The  dactyl  was  preferred  in  the  first  three  places, 
though  the  spondee  was  nevertheless  admissible  into  the 
first  and  «?econd. 

1.  The  name  Meiurus  is  from  the  Greek :  „dTro  tov  fieiovadai  t^v 
oipdv,  quod  veluti  cauda  minor  et  mutilus  sit."  {Forccll.,  Lex.)  Dio- 
medes  calls  such  verses  "  Ecaudes^^  (3,  p.  499),  and  Marius  Victorinus 
styles  them  Teliamhi  (p.  2512). — The  origin  of  the  name  Faliscan  has 
been  much  disputed.  The  form  Phaliscus,  given  in  some  editions  of 
Terentianus  Maurus,  as  well  as  Palisais  {Augustin.,  de  Mus.,  4,  p.  83), 
are  erroneous.  It  is  probable  that  the  appellation  Faliscan  was  given 
to  this  species  of  verse  from  the  poet  Annianus,  who  frequently  employ- 
ed it,  and  who  was  of  the  nation  of  the  Falisci.  {Santen.  ad  Tcrerit. 
Maur.,  1998.)  Victorinus  states  that  this  measure  was  called  by  the 
Greeks  Calabrion  (p.  2578), — Servius,  the  grammarian,  styles  Faliscan 
poems  "  docta,^*  the  reason  for  which  appellation  is  unknown.  {Scrv.^ 
in  Centimetr.y  p.  1824.) 


DACTYLIC    MEASURES.  149 

7.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a  posteriore,  or  Spondaic 
Tetrameter. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  the  last  four  feet  of  a  dac- 
tylic hexameter,  and  hence  it  is  called  Tetrameter  a  poste- 
riore, because  supposed  to  be  taken  from  the  latter  part  of 
an  hexameter  line  {a  posteriore  parte  versus  hexametri). 

II.  In  other  words,  the  first  two  feet  of  this  measure  may 
be  either  dactyls  or  spondees,  the  third  is  generally  a  dac- 
tyl, rarely  a  spondee,  but  the  fourth  is  invariably  a  spondee. 
Thus, 

Horat.  Ibimus,  \  o  sdci\i  comit\esque. 
Certus  e\nim  prd\mis'it  Ap\dlld. 
Me  nee  \  tdm  pati\ens  Ldce\dcBmdn. 
0  fort\es  pej\drdque  \  pdssi. 
in.  In  the  following  line  a  spondee  is  found  in  the  third 
foot,  preceded  by  a  dactyl,  answering  to  the  spondaic  line 
of  the  hexameter ;  and  in  such  a  case  as  this,  the  prece- 
ding foot  ought  always  to  be  a  dactyl,  or  the  line  will  b6 
too  heavy.     Thus, 

Horat.  Mensor\em  cdhi\bent  Arch\yta. 


8.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a  priore,  or  Alcmanian.^ 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  the  first  four  feet  of  a  dac- 
tylic hexameter,  with  merely  this  difference,  that  the  fourth 
or  last  foot  is  always  a  dactyl.  And  it  is  called  a  priore 
because  taken  from  XhQ  first  part  of  an  hexameter  (a  priore 
parte  versus  hexametri).     Thus, 

Boeth.  Lumini\biiisque  pri\dr  redt\tt  vigor. 
Id.  Desuper  ]  in  terr\am  nox  |  fundttur. 

Auson.  Dice\bds  In  \  me  md\terterd. 

II.  The  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a  priore  is  also  called  the 
Alcmanian  Tetrameter,  from  the  Greek  poet  Alcman,  by 
whom  it  was  frequently  employed  ' 

III.  This  metre  was  much  used  in  tragic  choruses. 

1.  Sero.,  p.  1820,  ed.  Putsch. 
N  2 


150  DACTYLIC    MEASURES. 

9.  PhaLjEcian  Dactylic  Pentameter. 

I.  This  measure,  which  is  called  Phalaecian  on  the  au- 
thority of  Terentianus/  consists  of  a  dactylic  penthemime- 
ris  (two  feet  and  a  half),  followed  by  a  dactylic  dimeter  or 
Adonic ;  as, 

Boeth.   Vise\bdt  gelid\k  H  siderd  |  brunm. 

Id.         Heu  qudm  \  pr^ciptt\i  \\  mersd  prd\fundd. 

II.  Like  the  ^olic  Pentameter,  this  species  of  Phalae- 
cian verse  admits  a  trochee  in  the  first  place  ;  as, 

Senec.  Arvd  \  mutdn\tes  ||  qudsque  M^\dtis, 

Id.  Allu^t  gent\es  \\/rigidd  \jiuctu. 

Id.  Qudsque  \  despect\dt  1|  vertice  \  summo. 

III.  Besides  the  trochee,  Boethius  uses  the  iambus  in  the 
first  and  second  places ;.  as,  . 

Htc  e\mm  cau\sds'ijii  cernere  |  promptum  est. 
Illic  I  ldten\tes  II  pectord  |  turhdnt. 
Cunctd  I  qucB  rdr\d  ||  provehit  \  cstds. 
Stupet  I  cum  subi\tts  \\  mobile  \  vulgus. 

IV.  A  Phalaecian  Dactylic  Pentameter  may  be  formed 
from  an  hexameter,  by  striking  out  the  fourth  foot  and  the 
latter  half  of  the  third.     Thus, 

Hex.        At  re\gind  grdv\ijdm  (  dudum  j  saucid  j  curd, 
"  Cdnsed\ere  du\ces  et  \  vulgi  \  stdnte  cdr\dnd, 

**  Sanguine\dque  mdn\u  crepi\tdntid  \  concuttt  \  drma. 


Phalaec.  At  re\  gind  grdv^  ||  saucta  |  curd.  \ 
"         Consed  \ere  du\ces  ||  stdnte  cor\ond.  | 
"         Sdnguine\dque  mdn\u  ||  concuttt  |  drmd. 


1.  "  Namque  hie  de  genere  est  Pkalaeiorum.*^  (Ter.  Maur.,  v. 
1946.)  The  name  is  derived  from  that  of  the  poet  Phalsecus,  who  was 
said  to  have  been  the  inventor  of  this  species  of  verse,  along  with  the 
others  that  went  under  this  general  appellation.  The  true  form  is  PAo- 
Icuian,  not  Phaleucian.     {Santen.  ad  Ter.  Maur.,  v.  2545.) 


DACTYLIC   MEASURES. 


151 


V.  Those  Phalsecian  lines  in  which  neither  the  trochee 
nor  iambus  occur,  may  be  scanned  as  Choriambic  Tetram- 
eters Catalectic.     Thus, 

Vtse\hdt  gelidcB  |  sidera  brum\cB 

Jam  nunc  |  hlanda  melds  \  cdrpe  Did\ne. 


10.  iEoLic  Pentameter. 

I.  The  ^olic  Pentameter,  so  called  from  its  native  dia- 
lect, was  invented,  it  is  said,  by  Sappho,  a  native  of  the 
.^olic  island  of  Lesbos.* 

II.  It  consists  of  four  dactyls,  preceded  by  a  spondee,  a 
trochee,  or  an  iambus.  In  other  words,  it  is  a  Dactylic 
Tetrameter  Acatalectic  with  a  base.'^     Thus, 

Terent.  Maur.  Cordi  \  qudndo  fu\isse  si\bt  cdmt  \  dtthida» 
Id.  edi\dit  tuba  \  terribi\lem  sdnit\um  procul. 


11.  Dactylic  Pentameter. 
I.  The  Dactylic  Pentameter  was  so  called  in  consequence 
of  the  manner  in  which  it  was  scanned  by  some  of  the  old 
grammarians,  who  viewed  it  as  consisting  of  five  continu- 
ous feet,  namely,  two  dactyls  or  spondees,  followed  by  a 
spondee  and  two  anapaests,  according  to  the  following  scale  : 


1 2 3 4 5 


Frigidi\us  gldci\e  pect\us  dmdnt\ts  erdt. 
Nil  mihi  I  rescrib\ds  dt\tdmen  ips\e  vent, 
Ldssd\ret  vidu\ds  pend\uld  tel\d  mdnus. 
Flebdm  \  success\u  pds\se  cdre\re  dolos. 

1.  Terent.  Maur.,  v.  2148.— Compare  Mar.  Vict.,  p.  2559.— Plot., 
p.  2636.— Serr.,  p.  1824.  — The  29th  Idyl  of  Theocritus  is  in  this 
measure:  Oivoc,  |  w  ^i^e  |  ttcu,  /l?7c|rai  Kat  a\Mdea,  |  /c.  r.  A.  For  oth- 
er examples,  consult  Gaisford  ad  Hephcest.,  p.  275. 

2.  Terent.  Maur.,  v.  l7%2.^Diomed.,  p.  dO^.—QutniU.j  9,4. 


152 


DACTYLIC   MEASURES. 


II.  Hephaestion,  however,  who  has  been  followed  by  al- 
most all  modem  scholars,  regards  it  as  composed  of  two 
dactylic  penthemimers.  In  other  words,  the  first  two  feet 
may  be  either  dactyls  or  spondees  ;  then  comes  a  long  syl- 
lable, to  which  succeed  two  dactyls,  followed  by  another 
long  syllable.^     Thus, 


1 2  3 4 5  6 


Fngldilus  glaci\e  \\  pectus  am\antis  er\dt. 
Nil  rriihi  \  rescrib\as  ||  attdmen  |  ipse  ven^. 
I  Ldssa\ret  vidu\ds  \\  penduld  |  tela  mdn\us 

Flebdm  |  success\u  \\  posse  cdr\ere  ddl\ds, 

III.  That  this  last  is  the  proper  view  to  take  of  the  struc- 
ture of  the  pentameter  seems  certain  from  the  fact,  that  a 
division  of  the  verse  takes  place  invariably  at  the  end  of 
the  fifth  half-foot,  as  well  in  the  Greek  as  in  the  Latin  wri- 
ters. 

IV.  Ovid  is  considered  the  model  of  this  species  of  verse 
among  the  Romans,  and  the  wonderful  smoothness  and 
melody  of  his  compositions  are  the  result  of  close  atten- 
tion to  a  number  of  minute  observances,  which  were  alto- 
gether neglected  by  the  Greeks,  and  by  their  imitators,  Ca- 
tullus, TibuUus,  and  Propertius.*  These  rules  will  now 
be  given. 

Rules  for  the  Structure  of  Dactylic  Pentameters. 

I.  The  pentameter  must  always  be  so  constructed  as  to 
have  the  caesural  pause  after  the  penthemimeris,  and  thus 

1.  ToiJ  dh  SaKTvXiKov  nevdijfiifiepov^  d/f  XafiSavofiivov  yivercu  rd 
kleytlov,  K.  T.  X.  (Hcphast.,  p.  92,  ed.  Gaisf.)  Compare  the  language 
of  the  scholiast  (p.  186):  BiXriov  de  oUtu  fiETpelv  kirel  kcu  eif  dvo  dt^' 
prjrai  TTevdrjfiiuepv,  k.  t.X. 

2.  Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  184. —  Tate,  Remarks  on  Dactylic  PetK- 
tameters,  in  the  Classical  Journal. 


DACTYLIC    MEASURES.  153 

be  divisible  into  two  equal  portions  of  two  feet  and  a  half 
each.  And  the  pause  ought  always  to  be  strictly  the  last 
syllable  in  a  word,  and  not  fall  on  any  syllable  before  this.* 
Hence  the  following  line  is  faulty  : 

Inter  nostras  geniilis  oherrat  equus. 

2.  It  is  also  deemed  a  blemish  for  the  caesura  to  fall  af- 
ter a  syllable  which  has  become  the  last  by  elision ;  as  in 
the  following  lines  from  Catullus  : 

Quam  veniens  una  atque  ||  altera  rursus  hi/ems. 
Troia  virum  et  virtutum  \\  omnium  acerba  cinis. 
Nee  desistere  amare  |I  omnia  si  facias* 

3.  If  the  first  caesural  syllable  be  a  monosyllable,  which 
ought  not  to  happen  frequently,  it  must  be  preceded  by  a 
long  monosyllable,  or  by  a  word  of  the  same  time,  i.  e.,  a 
word  consisting  of  two  short  syllables  ;  as, 

Ovid.  Et  mihi  ^j'non  vis  ll  parcere,  parce  meis. 
Id.         Tu  dominus^  tu  vir,  ||  tu  mihi  f rater  eras. 
Id.        Nulla  tibi  sine  me  11  gaudia  facta  neges. 
Id.        Prmterito  magis  est  ||  iste  pudendus  amor. 
An  exception  to  this  rule,  however,  is  made  when  the 
monosyllable  is  est,  and  the  word  before  it  suffers  elision. 
Such  lines  as  the  following  are  not  uncommon  : 

Ovid.  Litteraque  invisa  est,  H  hac  mea  parte  tibi. 
Id.        Quo  nisi  consilio  est  11  usa  puella  tuo. 
•  But  such  as  the  following  are  very  rare  in  Ovid : 
Sed  sic  inter  nos  11  ut  latuisse  velint. 
Quod  licet  inter  vos  |1  nomen  habete  meum. 
Justaque  quamvis  est,  |1  sit  minor  ira  dei. 
Qucere  suburbana  hie  11  sit  mihi  terra  locum. 

4.  The  last  word  of  a  dactylic  pentameter  is,  in  the 
great  majority  of  instances,  a  dissyllable  in  Ovid.     We  oc- 

1.  There  is  no  exception  to  this,  even  in  Greek,  except  in  a  proper 
name ;  as, 

'Upa  vvv  6e  AiooKovpideu  yeve^.     {Callim.,  frag,  czcii.) 


154  DACTYLIC    MEASURES. 

casionally  find  est  in  this  place,  preceded  by  a  dissyllable 
which  suffers  elision ;  as, 

Hie  est  cujus  amans  hospita  capta  dolo  est. 
Nee  repetor ;  cessas,  iraque  lenta  tua  est. 
More  rarely  two  monosyllables  ;  as, 

Prcemia  si  studio  eonsequor  istOj  sat  est. 
But  such  a  line  as  the  following  must  be  considered  al- 
together unworthy  of  imitation ; 

Omnis  an  in  magnos  culpa  deos  scelus  est.' 
5.  The  trisyllabic  ending,  although  very  common  in  the 
Greek  poets,  in  Catullus,  «fcc,  may  be  said  to  be  altogeth- 
er excluded  from  the  O vidian  pentameter.  We  find  one 
example  only  in  his  earlier  works,  and  five  others  in  the 
Epistles  from  Pontus,  which,  together  with  the  Tristia, 
were  composed  while  the  poet  was  plunged  in  the  deepest 
despondency,  and  bear  tokens  of  less  accurate  revision 
than  his  other  productions. 

Qum  tamen  externis  danda  forent  generis.* 


Ne  non  peecarim,  mors  quoque  non  faciet.* 
Quolibet  ut  saltern  rurefrui  liceat."* 
Aut  quod  scspe  soles,  exigis  ut  recitent.* 
Vix  excusari  posse  mihi  videor.^ 
Spectarem,  qualis  purpura  te  tegeret.' 

6.  The  quadrisyllable  ending  is  likewise  very  uncommon, 
except  in  the  Tristia  and  Epistles  from  Pontus.    We  have, 
however,  two  or  three  examples  in  his  other  works. 
Unda  simul  miserum  vitaque  deseruit.' 
Et  circumfusis  invia  fluminibus.' 
Cantahat  mastis  tibia  funeribus.'" 


1. 

Ooid,  Ep.  ex  Pont., 

1,  6,  26. 

2. 

Ovid,  Heroid.,  14, 

62. 

3. 

Id.,  Ep.  ex  Pont.,  1, 

1,66. 

4. 

Id.  Ep.  ex  Pont.,  I, 

8,40. 

5. 

Id.  ib.,  3,  5,  40. 

6. 

Id.  ib.,  3,  6,  46. 

7. 

Jd.  ib.,  4,  9,  26. 

ST. 

Heroid.,  19,  202. 

9. 

Fasti,  5,  582. 

10 

1.  Ib.,  6,  660.— Other 

examples  are 

given 

in  Ramsay,  p.  184. 

DACTYLIC    MEASURES,  155 

7.  The  quinquesyllabic  ending  is  still  more  rare  than  the 
quadrisyllable . 

Lis  est  cum  forma  magna  pudicitiae.* 
Nee  sedeo  duris  torva  superciliis.^ 

8.  As  to  the  kind  of  words  that  conclude  the  line,  they 
ought  to  possess  some  emphasis.  They  are  usually  nouns, 
the  personal  and  possessive  pronouns,  or  verbs.  Adjec- 
tives do  not  often  occur  in  this  place,  adverbs  still  more 
rarely,  and  less  frequently  than  either,  the  present  participle 
active. 

9.  Elisions  should  be  resorted  to  sparingly,  especially  in 
the  second  half  of  the  verse,  where  they  are  by  no  means 
harmonious.  They  may  be  allowed  in  the  first  of  the  two 
dactyls ;  as, 

Ultimus  est  aliqua  decipere  arte  labor. 
Incipis,  incipiet  desinere  esse  mea. 
But  when  they  fall  on  the  second  dactyl,  the  melody  of 
the  line  is  destroyed  ;  as, 

Quis  scit  an  hcBC  smvas  tigridas  insula  habet  ?^ 

10.  At  the  beginning  of  the  verse  it  is  better  to  have  a 
dactyl  followed  by  a  spondee  than  the  reverse.     Thus, 

Vix  Priamus  tanti  totaque  Troja  fuit. 
Res  est  solUciti  plena  timoris  amor. 


V.  Dactylic  pentameters  are  never  found  in  a  system  by 
themselves,  in  the  classic  writers  (unless  seven  lines  in 
Ausonius  can  be  taken  as  an  exception),  but  always  in  com- 
bination with  hexameters. 

VI.  Hexameters  and  pentameters,  placed  alternately, 
constitute  what  is  termed  the  Elegiac  Distich.* 

1.  Heroid.,  16,288. 

2.  lb.,  17,  16. — For  other  instances,  consult  Ramsay,  p.  184. 

3.  lb.,  10,  86. 

4.  The  Greeks  employed  this  combination  of  the  two  measure»  in 
war-songs,  hymns,  and  epigrams  or  inscriptions  ;  the  Romans  in  epi- 
grams, epistles,  and  amatory  poetry. 


156  DACTYLIC    MEASURES. 

VII.  The  name  of  Elegy  ("E/leyof)  was  first  applied  to 
the  alternating  hexameter  and  pentameter  in  the  time  of  the 
Greek  poet  Simonides  ;  whether  it  was  that  he  himself  in- 
troduced the  name,  or  whether  the  mournful  and  plaintive 
nature  of  his  themes  justified  this  appellation  from  others.^ 

VIII.  Ovid,  in  some  of  his  elegiac  pieces,  employs  oc- 
casionally a  species  of  metrical  echo,  if  we  may  so  term  it, 
the  second  half  of  the  pentameter  being  a  repetition  of  the 
commencement  of  the  preceding  hexameter,  either  pre- 
cisely the  same  words  being  used,  or  else  a  slight  change 
being  made  in  them.     Thus, 

Militat  omnis  amans,  et  habet  sua  castra  Cupido ; 
Attice  crede  mihi.  militat  omnis  amans} 


Grata  juvenca  venit,  qucs  te  patriamque  domumque 
Perdat.     lo  prohibe  !     Graia  juvenca  venit? 


Invida  vestis  eras,  qucB  tarn  bona  crura  tegebas ; 
Quoque  magis  species,  invida  vestis  eras.* 


Ars  tua,  Tiphy,jacet,  si  non  sit  in  (Bquore  fluctus. 
Si  valeant  homines,  ars  tua  Phabe  jacet? 


Auspiciis  animisque  patris,  puer,  arma  movebis, 
Et  vinces  animis  auspiciisque  patris,^ 


IX.  Martial  also,  in  one  of  his  epigrams  (9,  98),  has  six 
consecutive  distichs,  each  commencing  and  ending  with  the 
words  rumpitur  invidia? 

1.  This  combination  of  hexameters  and  pentameters  is  said  to  have 
been  invented  by  Callinus,  and  applied  by  him  to  martial  themes.  It 
was  not  called  iXeyo^  at  first,  but  hiro^,  the  latter  of  which  terms  was 
afterward  confined  to  heroic  verse,  when  Simonides  brought  in  the  name 
l^eyo^,  and  along  with  it  the  handling  of  plaintive  themes  in  this  species 
of  measure. 

2.  Am.,  1,9,  1.  3.  /fer.,  6,  117. 

4.  Am.,  3,  2,  27.  5.   Trist,  4,  3,  77. 

6.  A.  A.,  1,  191. 

7.  This  species  of  play  upon  words  gave  rise,  in  later  ages,  when 
taste  had  become  thoroughly  corrupted,  to  entire  poema.     Verses  of  thi* 


DACTYLIC    MEASURES.  157 

•    Rumpitur  invidia  quidam,  carissime  Juli, 
Quod  me  Roma  legit,  rumpitur  invidia. 
Rumpitur  invidia,  quod  turba  semper  in  omni, 
Monstramur  digito,  rumpitur  invidia,  &c. 

12.  Dactylic  Hexameter. 

I.  The  Dactylic  or  Heroic  Hexameter  was  considered 
to  be  the  most  ancient  as  well  as  the  most  dignified  species 
of  verse,  and  was  said  to  have  been  invented  by  Phemonoe, 
the  first  priestess  of  the  Delphian  Apollo,  who,  when  in- 
spired by  the  god,  was  wont  to  chant  his  oracles  in  this 
measure.' 

II.  The  origin  of  dactylic  versification,  however,  is  to  be 
traced  back  to  the  earliest  periods  of  the  Greek  language, 
and  connects  itself  with  the  peculiar  mode  of  intonation 
that  characterized  the  iEolic  tribes.^ 

kind  were  called  *'  Versus  Lyrici,  Ophites,  and  Serpentiniy  Some  of 
these  pieces  may  be  found  collected  in  the  Miscell.  Obs.  Nov.  (vol.  5,  p, 
475,  seqq.).  WernsdorfF  gives  in  his  collection  {Poet.  Lat.  Min.,  vol. 
3,  p.  268)  a  poem  of  this  kind  by  Pentadius,  "  De  Adventu  Fern,"  the 
commencement  of  which  is  as  follows  : 

Sentio  fugit  hyems,  Zephyrisque  moventibus  orbem 
Jam  tepet  Eurus  aquis ;  sentio  fugit  hyems. 

Parturit  omnis  ager,  prcesentit  terra  calorem, 
Germinibusque  novis  parturit  omnis  ager. 

Lata  vireta  tument,  foliis  sese  induit  arbor, 
Vallibus  apricis  Iceta  vireta  tument,  &c. 

1.  Schott.  ad  Procl,  p.  18. —  Voss.,  Inst.  Poet.,  3,  3,  2.— Fabric., 
Bibl.  Gr.,  vol.  1,  p.  154.— PZiw.,  H.  N.,  7,  56.—Pausan.,  10,  5.— 
Schol.  ad  Eurip.,  Or  est.,  1093. 

2.  Gbltling^s  Greek  Accentuation,  ^  2,  seq. — The  tendency  in  the 
.^olic  pronunciation  was  to  throw  the  accent  back  on  the  root,  or  as 
near  to  it  as  possible,  so  that  the  dactylic  rhythm,  with  the  arsis  on  the 
first  syllable  of  the  foot,  could  easily  and  naturally  arise  from  this  kind 
of  pronunciation.  As  the  ^'Eolic  dialect  was  spoken  at  Delphi,  the  na- 
tive city  of  Phemonoe,  the  two  accounts  just  given  may  easily  be  recon- 
ciled.— The  most  ancient  hexameters  known  are  those  which  Herodotus 
informs  us  (5,  59)  that  he  himself  saw  at  Thebes,  in  the  temple  of  the 
Ismenian  Apollo,  inscribed  on  certain  tripods,  consecrated  by  Amphitry- 
on, and  by  two  other  princes  of  the  13th  or  14th  century  before  our  era. 
It  is  more  than  probable,  however,  that  the  historian  was  here  imposed 
upon  by  the  priests.  {B'dhr  ad  Herod.,  I.  c. —  Wolf,  Prolegom.  ad  Horn., 
p.  Iv.) 

o 


158  DACTYLIC    MEASURES. 

III.  The  dactylic  hexameter  was  introduced  into  Latium 
by  the  poet  Ennius,  who  first  discarded  the  rude  Saturnian 
measure  of  his  predecessors/ 

IV.  This  species  of  verse  is  also  called  the  Heroic,  from 
its  having  been  selected  by  both  the  Greeks  and  Romans 
as  the  proper  medium  for  heroic  or  epic  themes.  It  was 
also  employed  in  didactic  and  satiric  compositions. 


V.  The  Dactylic  Hexameter  consists,  as  its  name  im- 
ports, of  six  feet,  whereof  the  fifth  is  usually  a  dactyl,  and 
the  sixth  always  a  spondee,  while  each  of  the  other  four 
feet  may  be  either  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee,  at  the  pleasure 
of  the  writer ;  as, 

Virg.      Sic  abe\unt  rede\untque  me\l  vari\antque  tim\dres. 
CatuU.  Et  qudm\vis  te\cum  mult\d  cdn\jungerer  \  usu. 
Virg.      TdUs  et  \  Ipse  ju\bdm  cer\vice  eff\udlt  e\quind. 
Id.  Cdllect\umque  frem\ens  volv^t  sub  \  ndribus  |  ignem, 

VI.  Sometimes,  however,  in  a  solemn,  majestic,  or  mourn- 
ful description,  or  in  expressing  astonishment,  consternation, 
vastness  of  size,  &lc.,  a  spondee  is  admitted. in  the  fifth  foot, 
and  the  line  is  thence  termed  Spondaic ;  as, 

Virg.    Cara  deum  soboles,  magnum  Jovis  \  lncre\mentum. 
Id.        Constitit,atque  ociilis  Phrygia  agmina  \  ctrcum\spexit. 
Cat.     ^quorecB  monstrum  Nereides  \  ddmir\antes. 
Man.   Scorpius  ingentem  perterruit  \  Ori\ona. 

VII.  In  spondaic  lines  the  fourth  foot  is  usually  a  dac- 
tyl ;  not  uniformly,  however.     Thus, 

Virg.  Saxa  per  et  scopulos  et  \  depress\ds  cdn\valles. 
Id.       Aut  leves  ocreas  lent\d  du\ctint  dr\gento. 

VIII.  The  older  poets  do  not  scruple  to  use  lines  con- 
taining spondees  alone ;  as, 

Enn.       OlU  I  respdnd\et  rex  \  Alba!^  ldng\du 


I.  Lucret.,  I,  118,  segq.—Sil.  Ital.,  12,  410,  seq. ^Column.,  Ennii 
Vit.,  p.  6. — For  an  account  of  the  Saturnian,  vid.  page  199. 


DACTYLIC    MEASURES.  159 

Enn.        CHves  |  Rdmd\m  tunc  \  factl  \  sunt  Cdm\pani. 
Lucret.  An  coel\um  nd\bis  nd\tura  ult\rd  cdr\ruptum. 
Catull.     Quls  te  \  leni\rem  nd\his,  neu  |  cdndr\ere. 

IX.  Spondaic  lines  are  much  more  common  in  the  Greek 
than  in  the  best  Latin  poets.  There  are,  for  instance,  some 
twenty-eight  of  this  description  in  Virgil,  while  in  a  single 
piece  of  Catullus*'  (containing  409  lines),  who  formed  his 
verses  upon  the  Greek  model,  we  find  a  greater  number.'^ 

C(Bsura  in  Dactylic  Hexameters. 

X.  The  beauty  and  harmony  of  hexameter  verse  depend 
in  a  very  great  degree  upon  the  proper  management  of  the 
caesura.  In  its  application  to  single  feet,  the  caesura  has 
already  been  explained  ;  it  only  remains  to  consider  it  with 
reference  to  whole  verses,  in  which  acceptation  it  may  be 
more  correctly  termed  the  CcBsural  Pause. 

XI.  The  caesural  pause  most  approved  of  in  heroic  po- 
etry, and  which,  above  all  others,  tended  to  give  smooth- 
ness and  rhythm  to  the  line,  was  that  which  took  place 
after  the  penthemimeris.  This  was  particularly  distin- 
guished as  The  Heroic  Caesural  Pause.     Thus, 

Virg.  At  domus  \  interi\orf  \\  regali  splendida  luxu. 
Id.       Julius  I  a  magn\o  11  demissum  nomen  liilo. 

XII.  Sometimes  the  penthemimeral  pause  is  found  com- 
bined with  others ;  as, 

Virg.  Ad  nos  vix  tenuis  \\  fam<B  \  perlabitur  aura. 
Id.  Insignis  ||  reserat  |1  stridentia  limina  consul. 
Id.       Sunt  gemincB  H  helli  H  portcs,  |1  sic  nomine  dicunt. 

XIII.  Instead,  however,  of  the  caesural  pause  at  the  ex- 
act penthemimeris,  a  different  division  was  equally  admitted 
as  heroic,  which  took  place  after  a  trochee  in  the  third  foot ; 
as, 

Virg.  Effigi\em  statu\ere,  \\  nefas  qu<B  triste  piaret. 
Id.       Tecta  met\u  peti\ere,  \\  ruunt  de  montibus  amnes. 

1.  Catull,  64.  2.  Ramsay's  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  173. 


160  DACTYLIC    MEASURES. 

XIV.  Next  in  merit  to  the  penthemimeral  was  the  heph- 
themimeral  pause.     Thus, 

Virg.  Arhori\husque  sat\isque  Not\us^  II  pecorique  sinister. 
Id.       Hand  mora  \  prosilu\ere  su\is :  \\  ferit  <Bthera  clamor. 

XV.  In  some  instances  we  find  lines  where  the  penthe- 
mimeral is  combined  with  the  triemimeral ;  as, 

TibuU.  Di  patrii  \\  purgamus  agros,  ||  purgamus  agrestes. 
Virg.      Prima  tenet,  ||  plausuque  volat,  \\  fremituque  secundo. 

XVI.  The  caesural  pause  the  least  approved  of  in  heroic 
poetry  was  that  which  divided  the  verse  exactly  into  halves, 
since  it  gave  the  line  an  undignified  air,  and  degraded  it  to 
a  Priapean.^     Thus, 

Virg.   Cui  non  |  dictus  Hy\las  puer  \\  et  La\tonia  |  Delos  ? 
Id.       Exple\ri  ment\em  nequit  \\  ardes\citque  tu\endo. 

XVII.  The  caesural  pause  between  the  fourth  and  fifth 
feet  was  considered  by  grammarians  as  peculiarly  adapted 
to  pastoral  poetry,  more  especially  when  the  fourth  foot 
was  a  dactyl ;  and  it  was  termed,  from  this  circumstance, 
the  Bucolic  caesural  pause  ;^  as, 

Calpum.  Idas  \  laniger\i  domi\nus  gregis,  11  Astacus  horti. 
Auson.      Commu\nis  Paphi\e  dea  \  siderts  \\  et  deajioris. 


13.  Priapean. 

I.  The  Priapean  measure  was  so  called  because  origi- 
nally employed  on  themes  having  relation  to  Priapus,  the 
god  of  gardens. 

II.  This  measure  is  generally  regarded  as  a  species  of 
hexameter,  the  first,  as  likewise  the  fourth,  foot  of  which 
was  most  commonly  a  trochee,  often,  however,  a  spondee, 

1.  The  Priapean  will  be  considered  after  the  hexameter. 

2.  Valckenaer  was  the  first  to  marie  the  bocolic  caesura  in  Theocritus. 
The  first  seven  Idyls,  with  the  tenth  and  eleventh,  contain  927  lines,  of 
which  not  less  than  711  have  this  caesura.  Virgil's  Eclogues  consist  of 
830  lines,  but  of  these  only  232  conform  to  the  bucolic  model.  {War- 
ton,  de  Foes.  Bucol.—Tkcocrit.y  vol.  1,  p.  xxxvi.) 


ANAP^STIC    MEASURES. 


161 


but  rarely  a  dactyl ;  the  second  almost  always  a  dactyl ; 
the  third,  though  sometimes  a  dactyl,  much  more  frequently 
an  amphimacer.     The  scale  is  as  follows : 


1 

2 

3 

1          4 

5 

6 

— 

—  w  ^ 

--- 

--- 



Catull.  O  cdl\omd  |  quce  cupls  1|  ponte  \  ludere  \  longo. 
Id.  lnfdss\a  Ligu\ri  jdcet  \  supper\ndtd  se\curi. 

III.  A  preferable  mode  of  scanning,  however,  is  to  make 
the  first  hemistich  a  Glyconic,  and  the  second  a  Pherecratic 
verse,  and  thus  to  consider  the  line,  not  as  forming  one 
dactylic  verse,  but  as  composed  of  two  choriambics. 


14.  Hexameter  Meiurus. 

I.  The  Hexameter  Meiurus  is  a  defective  species  of  hex- 
ameter, having  an  iambus  in  the  sixth  place  instead  of  a 
spondee ;  as, 

Liv.  Andron.  Dirige  odorisequos  ad  certa  cubilia  canes. 

II.  It  is  to  be  considered,  however,  rather  as  a  vicious 
and  defective  hexameter,  than  as  forming  a  separate  spe- 
cies of  verse  ;  though  Livius  Andronicus  designedly  wrote 
such  lines  as  these,  which  he  alternately  mingled  with  per- 
fect hexameters.  They  have  all,  however,  perished  except 
two. 

SECTION  XXXI. 

ANAP^STIC  MEASURES. 

I.  In  Anapaestic  verse  the  feet  admissible  without  restric- 
tion are,  the  anapaest,  the  spondee,  and  the  dactyl. 

II.  Dactyls,  however,  ought  to  be  employed  sparingly  in 
Latin  anapaestics.  When  introduced,  they  ought  to  be  the 
first  foot  in  the  dipode,  and  ought  to  be  followed  by  a  spon- 
dee in  preference  to  an  anapaest. 

02 


162  ANAP.ESTIC    MEASURES. 

III.  Anapaestig  verse  is  scanned  by  metres  of  two  feet 
each ;  thus,  an  anapaestic  monometer  contains  two  feet ;  a 
dimeter,  four ;  a  trimeter,  six,  &c. 

IV.  No  specimen  of  anapaestic  verse  is  extant  in  the  pu- 
rer Latin  writers.  Those  that  have  reached  us  belong  to 
a  later  age. 

V.  No  Latin  poet  ever  wrote  anapaestics  necessarily  con- 
sisting of  four  anapaests  (with  the  exception  of  a  few  in 
Seneca  and  Ausonius) ;  but  they  all  appear  to  have  intend- 
ed their  anapaestics  for  single  measures  or  monometers, 
leaving  the  reader  to  connect  or  disjoin,  as  the  sense  might 
require  or  his  own  judgment  dictate.  Convenience  in 
printing,  however,  is  answered  by  the  division  into  dime- 
ters, and  hence  they  are  generally  exhibited  in  this  form 
in  editions  of  ancient  authors. 

VI.  Anapaestic  verses  arranged  in  monometers  or  dime- 
ters, and  thus  forming  a  succession  of  many  lines,  are  call- 
ed Systems. 

VII.  The  species  of  anapaestics  most  in  use  among  the 
Greek  tragic  writers  was  the  AnapcBstic  Dimeter  Acatalec- 
tic,  which  is  frequently  found  in  systems  interspersed  with 
the  Monometer  Acatalectic. 

VIII.  These  systems  of  anapaestic  dimeters  are  usually 
closed,  among  the  Greeks,  by  an  AnapcRstic  Dimeter  Cata- 
lectic,  otherwise  called  a  Parmmiac,  it  having  been  a  favour- 
ite vehicle  for  proverbs  (JlapocuCat). 

IX.  The  Latin  writers  do  not,  as  often  as  the  Greeks, 
close  a  system  of  dimeters  by  a  Paroemiac.  Seneca  never 
does. 

X.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  anapaestic  systems  pro- 
ceed on  the  principle  of  continuous  scansion.  Hence  the 
last  syllable  of  every  verse  is  not  common,  but  is  subject  to 
the  ordinary  rules  of  prosody,  unless  at  the  end  of  a  sen- 
tence, or  any  considerable  pause  in  the  sense.' 

1.  Consult  remarks  under  the  article  Synapheia,  page  130. 


ANAPiESTIC    MEASURES. 


163 


XI.  The  only  exception  to  the  rule  laid  down  in  the  pre- 
ceding paragraph  is  in  the  case  of  the  Paroemiac,  the  last 
syllable  of  which  is  common.  An  anapaestic  system,  there- 
fore, is,  in  fact,  one  long  line  broken  up  into  several  lines, 
the  end  of  which  long  line  is  marked  by  the  Parcemiac. 

XII.  Hence  we  see  why  the  last  syllable  of  the  Paroemi- 
ac is  the  only  one  in  the  entire  system  that  is  common,  it 
being  in  reality  the  concluding  syllable  of  a  long  line,  which 
line  is  supposed  to  commence  with  the  first  verse  of  the 
system. 

1.  Anap^stic   Monometer  AcATALECTic,  or  Anap^stic 
Base. 

I.  The  AnapcBstic  Monometer  consists  of  two  feet,  which 
may  be  either  anap8ests,  spondees,  or  dactyls. 

II.  The  scale,  therefore,  of  this  measure  is  as  follows ; 


1 2__ 


Senec.  ululass\e  canes.  || 
Id.  FundXte  \  fletus  || 

Edite  I  planctus  || 
Fingite  I  luctus  \\ 
Resonet  \  tristi  || 
Clamor^ forum.  I1 


2.  Anap^stic  Dimeter  Acatalectic. 

I.  The  Anap<BStic  Dimeter  Acatalectic  consists  of  four 
feet,  which  may  be  either  anapaests,  spondees,  or  dactyls. 

II.  The  scale  is  as  follows  : 


1 2  3 4__ 


164 


ANAP^STIC    MEASURES. 

Senec.  Indus  \  geUdum  ||  potat  Ar\axem,  1| 

Alblm  I  Pers^i  ||  Rhenum\que  bihunt. 
Venient  \  annis  H  saculd  \  sens  || 
Quihus  0\ceanus  ||  vlnculd  |  rerum  ll 
Ldxet  et  \  ingens  ||  pdtedt  |  ieZZw^  || 
Tethys\que  riovos  ||  detegdt  \  orbes  \\ 
Nee  sit  I  terns  \\  ultlmd  I  Thule.  Il 


3.  Anap^stic  Dimeter  Catalectic,  or  Par(emiac. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  three  feet,  followed  by  a 
catalectic  syllable. 

II.  The  third  foot  of  a  Paroemiac  must  always  be  an  an- 
apaest. The  dactyl  is  less  frequently  used  in  the  first  and 
second  places  than  the  spondee. 

III.  The  following  is  the  scale. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

— 



""" 

Prudent.   Vement  \  cito  scBc\uld  cum  \  jam 
Socius  I  cdlor  dss\\d  revisit, 
Animdt\dque  sdng^utne  viv\d 
Hdbitdc\uld  prist^md  gcst\et, 

IV.  Prudentius,  from  whom  the  above  lines  are  taken, 
does  not  admit  a  dactyl,  and  uses  a  spondee  in  the  first 
place  only.  Boethius,  however,  allows  himself  greater  lat- 
itude, as  may  be  seen  by  the  following : 

Qui  se  I  volet  ess\e  pdtent\em. 

Ammos  I  domct  ill\\e  ferd\ceSf 

Nee  vict\d  IibiWdtne  cdU\d 

Fadis  I  submitt\dt  hdbe\nis, 

Etcnim  I  licet  Ind\\icd  ldng\e 

Tellus  I  tudjurWd  tremis\\cdtf 

£t  seni\idt  ultWimd  TAu|/ff, 

Tdmen  dtr\ds  pelDjiere  cur\dSf 


IAMBIC    MEASURES.  165 

Mtseras\que  fugd\\re  quere\las 
Non  pdss\e,  pdtent\\id  non  |  est. 

SECTION  XXXII. 

IAMBIC  MEASURES. 

I.  Iambic  verses  are  scanned  by  measures  of  two  feet, 
it  having  been  usual,  in  reciting  them,  to  make  a  short 
pause  at  the  end  of  every  second  foot,  with  an  emphasis. 

II.  This  kind  of  verse  derived  its  name  from  the  iambus, 
of  which  foot  it  was  originally  composed,  to  the  exclusion 
of  all  others. 

III.  Afterward,  in  order  to  vary  the  rhythm,  and  dimin- 
ish the  labour  of  the  poet,  a  spondee  was  allowed  in  the 
odd  places  of  the  verse,  the  iambus  still  occupying  the 
even  places. 

IV.  In  the  even  places,  the  long  syllable  of  the  iambus 
was  resolved  into  two  short  ones,  and  thus  the  tribrach, 
which  is  isochronous  with  the  iambus,  gained  admission. 

V.  In  the  odd  places,  by  resolving  the  first  long  syllable 
of  the  spondee,  an  anapaest  was  formed ;  and,  by  resolving 
the  second  syllable,  a  dactyl. 

VI.  Thus  eventually  all  these  feet  were  employed  in 
iambic  measures,  subject,  however,  to  certain  restrictions, 
which  will  now  be  specified.' 

1.  An  iambus  is  admitted  into  everyplace,  which  maybe 
resolved  into  a  tribrach  in  every  place  except  the  last, 
where  there  must  be  invariably  an  iambus. 

2.  The  spondee  may  be  used  in  the  uneven  places ;  that 
is,  in  the  first  and  third  of  the  dimeter,  and  in  the  first, 
third,  and  fifth  of  the  trimeter. 

3.  The  dactyl  may  be  used  in  the  uneven  places,  like 
the  spondee ;  but  its  appearance  in  the  fifth  place  of 
the  trimeter  is  very  rare. 

1.  The  rules  here  given  are  much  less  strict,  as  regards  the  dactyl 
and  anapaest,  than  those  which  regulate  the  Greek  iambic  trimeter. 


166  IAMBIC    MEASURES. 

4.  The  anapaest  also  is  admitted  into  the  uneven  places, 
and  in  the  fifth  place  seems  to  have  been  particularly 
affected  by  the  Roman  tragedians. 

6.  A  proceleusmaticus  is  sometimes  found  in  the  first 
place  of  the  iambic  trimeter. 


1.  Iambic  Dimeter  Catalectic. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  three  feet,  properly  all  iam- 
bi, and  a  catalectic  syllable. 

II.  It  admits,  however,  the  tribrach,  spondee,  and  ana- 
paest into  the  first  place,  but  suffers  no  variation  in  the  third 
foot. 

Petron.     anus  \  rec5ct\\a  vin\o 
trement\ibus  \\  ldbeU\ts. 


Prudent.  Lex  K^x  \  data  est  ||  cadu\cis 
Deo  I  jubentWe  memlr^s 
ut  temp\eret  ||  ldhdr\em 
medicd\bilts  ||  vdlupt\ds. 


2.  Iambic  Dimeter  Acephalous.' 

I.  This  measure  is  an  iambic  dimeter,  wanting  the  first 
syllable. 

II.  Horace  and  Prudentius  made  no  variations,  but  uni- 
formly employed  the  iambus  in  the  few  lines  they  have 
left  us  of  this  metre. 

Horat.  Non  j  ebur  \\  neque  aur\eum, 
Prud.    Dd\nd  cdn\scien\t%m. 

III.  Some  consider  such  lines  as  catalectic  trochaic  dim- 
eters, and  scan  them  as  follows  : 

Non  eb\ur  ne^que  aure[um. 
Dona  I  cdnsct\enti^. 

1.  Acephalous,  i.  e.,  vtithout  a  fiead  (or  initial  syllable),  from  d,  priv., 
and  Ke<j>ai^,  "  a  Atfarf." 


IAMBIC    MEASURES. 


167 


3.  Iambic  Dimeter  Hvpeecatalectic. 

I.  This  measure,  likewise  called  Archilochian,  and  form- 
ing the  third  line  in  the  Alcaic  stanza,  is  an  iambic  dimeter 
with  an  additional  syllable  at  the  end. 

II.  According  to  the  usage  of  Horace,  the  first  foot  may 
be  either  a  spondee  or  an  iambus,  but  is  generally  a  spon- 
dee ;  the  second  foot  is  an  iambus  ;  the  third  is  invariably  a 
spondee,^  and  the  fourth  an  iambus.  The  Horatian  scale, 
therefore,  is  as  follows  : 


12  3  4 


Horat.  Sylvas  |  lahor^antes  \  gelu^que. 
Id.  Deprd\mG  quddr\\imum  |  Sdbin\\d. 

Id.         Puer  I  quis  ex  ||  aula  j  cdplll\\is. 

III.  The  practice  of  Horace  differs  from  that  of  Alcaeus 
as  regards  the  third  place,  the  latter  having  uniformly  an 
iambus  in  this  part  of  the  line. 

IV.  This  measure  is  called  by  some  the  Alcaic  Ennea- 
syllabic} 

4.  Iambic  Dimeter  Acatalectic. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  four  feet  or  two  metres. 

II.  Properly  speaking,  all  the  feet  are  iambi.  It  admits, 
however,  the  variations  that  are  usual  in  iambic  verse,  and 
its  scale  is  as  follows : 


1.  The  line  of  Horace,  which  occurs  Od.,  2,  19,  15,  "  Disjecta  non 
Icvi  ruina,"  has  been  corrected  by  Bentley,  from  MSS.,  as  follows : 
"  Disjecta  non  lent  ruina." 

2.  Consult  remarks  on  the  Alcaic  measure. 


168  IAMBIC    MEASURES. 

Horat.      tndrs\it  etst\\uds\ius.  |] 
Id.  Vel  fued\us  e\\reptus  |  lupo.  \\ 

Id.  Imbres  \  nivesWque  cdm\pardt.  || 

Id.  dst  ego  I  vtctss\\im  ris\ero.  \\ 

Id.  Vtder\e  properWdntes  \  domum.  \\ 

Prudent.  Jam  mell\d  de  \\  scopulis  \  fiuunt. 
Hadr.       dmmu\ld  vdgu^ld  bldnd\uld,  \\ 
Hdspes  I  comesWque  cdrp\dris,  \\ 
QucR  nunc  \  dhV\his  In  |  locd^  || 
PdlUdu\ld  rigiMuld  nu\duld  1  || 
Nee  ut  I  soles  ||  ddhis  \  jocos.  \\ 


III.  Although  Horace  has  not  used  this  metre  except  in 
conjunction  with  verses  of  a  different  kind,  other  authors 
wrote  entire  poems  in  it,  as  Prudentius,  St.  Ambrose,  Pope 
Damasus,  Sedulius,  &;c. 

IV.  The  Liturgy  of  the  Church  of  Rome  has  several 
hymns  in  this  metre.  The  following  lines  form  the  com- 
mencement of  one  of  them,  and  will  also  furnish  an  instance 
of  rhyming  or  Leonine  versification. 

Salutis  humancB  sator^ 
Jesu  voluptas  cordium, 
Orbis  redempti  conditor 
Et  casta  lux  amantium  : 
Qua  victus  es  dementia 
Ut  nostra  ferres  crimina  ?  &c. 


5.  Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

I.  This  measure  is  the  iambic  trimeter,  wanting  the  last 
syllable.  In  other  words,  it  consists  of  five  feet,  properly 
all  iambi,  followed  by  a  catalectic  syllable  ;  as, 

Horat.       Vocd\tus  dt\que  non  |  vocd\\tus  aud\U. 
Prudent.  Plus  \fidc\\tis  tn\ndcens  \\  pudi\cus, 

II.  Like  the  trimeter,  however,  it  admits  the  spondee 


^ 


IAMBIC    MEASURES. 


169 


into  the  first  and  third  places,  but  not  into  the  fifth,  which 
would  render  the  verse  too  heavy  and  prosaic. 

Horat.       Trdhunt\que  sic\\cds  ma\chincs  ||  cari\nds. 
Prudent.  Ndnnull\d  querc\u  sunt  \  cdva\[ta  et  ulm\d. 
III.  Terentianus  prefers  scanning  this  kind  of  verse  as 
part  of  an  iambic  trimeter,  with  three  trochees  following. 
Thus, 

TTdhunt\que  slc\cds  H  mdchi\ncR  carinas. 


6.  Iambic  Trimeter  Acatalectic. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  three  metres,  or  six  feet, 
originally  all  iambi,  and  when  a  line  of  this  kind  still  oc- 
curs, it  is  called  a  pure  iambic  line. 

II.  The  other  feet  that  were  subsequently  allowed  to  en- 
ter, and  the  places  proper  to  each,  have  been  considered 
elsewhere.* 

III.  When  other  feet  besides  the  iambus  enter  into  the 
line,  it  is  called  a  mixed  iambic. 

IV.  Another  name  for  this  measure  is  the  Senarius,  from 
the  six  feet  of  which  the  line  is  composed. 

V.  The  caesural  pause  most  commonly  falls  after  the 
fifth  semifoot ;  as, 

Phdse\lus  ill\e  ||  quern  \  vide\ti8  hosp^tes. 

VI.  The  scale  of  the  mixed  iambic  trimeter  is  as  follows : 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

w    _ 

-- 

^  - 

w_ 

w_ 

WW- 

::: 

Pure  Iambics. 
Horat.    Comes  \  mindr\\e  sum  |  futur^us  in  \  metu.  \\ 
Catull.  Es  im\pudi'^cus  et  \  vordx  ||  et  dl\ed.  \\ 

1.  Consult  introductory  remarks  on   iambic  verse,  paragraphs  III., 
IV ,  v.,  VI. 


170  IAMBIC    MEASURES. 

Spondee  in  1  and  3. 
Catull.  Per  cdns\ula\\tum  pe\jerat  ll  Vdtin'^us.  1| 

Spondee  in  1,  3,  6. 
Horat.   tynxe\re  md\tres  1\U<b  dd\\dlctum  \  fens.  \\ 

Tribrach  in  i,  and  Spondee  in  5. 
Horat.   Sed  dti\us  drdlor  out  |  pueU\\iB  cdnd\idcR.  || 


Tribrach  in  2  and  4,  Spondee  m  1,  3  and  5. 
Horat.    Vectd\bdr  humerus  tunc  \  ego  im\micis  \  eques.  fl 

Tribrach  in  3,  and  Spondee  in  5. 
Horat.  Libet  \  jdce\\re  modo  |  sub  dn\\tlqua  tl\ice,  i| 

Dactyl  in  1,  Spondee  in  3  and  5. 
Horat.  Aut  dmi\te  le\vi  rdr\d  tend\\it  re\tid.  H  • 

Dactyl  in  3,  Spondee  in  1  and  5. 
Horat.    Quo  quo  \  scelest^  rui\tis  out  \\  cur  dex\terts.  Ii 


AnaptBst  in  1 ,  Spondee  in  3  and  5. 
Horat.  Pdsitds\que  vernWds  di\tis  ex\\dmen  J  domds.  }{ 

AnapcBst  in  1  and  5,  Tribrach  in  2. 
Horat.  Pdvidum\que  lepd\\rem  et  dd\vendm  \\  Idqueo  \  gruem.^ 


Dactyl  in  1,  Tribrach  in  3  and  4. 
Horat.  AUti^us  dt'^ue  cdm]f)us  homi^cidam  Hect\orem.  \\ 


VII.  The  prevalent  caesural  pause  in  iambic  trimeters  is, 
as  we  have  already  remarked,  the  penthemimeral.  If  this 
be  wanting,  the  line  must  then  have  the  hephthemimeral 
pause.     Thus, 

Catull.  Aitfuisse  ||  navium  celerrimus. 

Id.         Rhodumve  nobilem  \\  horridamve  Thraciam. 

Horat.  Defixa  coelo  ||  devocare  sidera. 

Id.         Cave  !  cave  namque  \\  in  malos  asperrimus. 


IAMBIC    MEASURES.  171 

CatuU.  Neque  ullius  natantis  ll  impetum  trahis. 
Id.         Propontida  trucemve  \\  Ponticum  sinum. 
VIII.  There  is  no  instance  in  Catullus  of  the  total  omis- 
sion of  the  caesural  pause,  and  only  two  in  Horace,  namely, 
(Epode,  1,  19)   Ut  assidens  implumihus  pullis  avis. 
{Epodcj  11,  15)  Quod  si  meis  incestuat  prcBcordiis, 


Porsonian  Pause. 

IX.  Porson,  in  his  celebrated  preface  to  the  Hecuba,  as- 
serted that  the  following  rule  was  always  observed  by  the 
Greek  tragedians  : 

*'  When  the  iambic  trimeter  has,  after  a  word  of  more 
than  one  syllable,  the  cretic  termination  ( -  ^  — ),  either  in- 
cluded in  one  word,  or  consisting  of  —  ^  and  a  syllable,  or 
of  a  monosyllable  and  --^  — ,  then  the  fifth  foot  must  he  an 
iamb  us. ^^ 

X.  There  is  no  exception  to  this  law  in  Catullus,  whose 
iambic  trimeters  are  almost  all  pure  ;  but  it  is  constantly 
violated  by  Horace,  in  those  odes  in  which  iambic  trime- 
ters are  combined  with  other  kinds  of  verse  ;  whereas  in 
Epode  17,  where  these  form  a  system  by  themselves,  it  is 
but  once  neglected : 

Alitibus  atque  canibus  homicidam  Hectorem.' 


7.  ScAzoN,  or  Choliambus. 

I.  This  measure,  called  also  Hipponactean^  is  a  variety 
of  the  Senarius.  It  differs  from  it  in  this,  however,  that 
while  the  iambic  trimeter  has  invariably  an  iambus  in  the 
sixth  place,  the  scazon  has  invariably  a  spondee  in  the 
sixth  place,  and  an  iambus  in  the  fifth. 

II.  In  all  other  respects  the  scazon  is  the  same  as  the 
trimeter. 

III.  An  iambus  is  necessary  in  the  fifth  place,  in  order 
that  the  line  may  not  be  too  lame  and  heavy  ;  as  in  spon- 

1.  Ramsay's  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  208. 


172  IAMBIC    MEASURES. 

daic  hexameters,  we  usually  find  the  fourth-  foot  a  dactyl 
for  a  similar  reason. 

IV.  The  terms  Scazon  (2/cd^a)v,  "  limping^*  or  "  halting") 
and  Choliambic  (XG)Xi,afi6Lfc6g,  "  lame  iambic")  have  refer- 
ence to  the  peculiar  characteristic  of  this  measure,  namely, 
its  lame  and  halting  gait,  occasioned  by  the  spondee  in  the 
sixth  place,  in  opposition  to  the  brisk  and  lively  ending  of 
the  regular  trimeter. 

V.  The  name  Hipponactean  is  derived  from  that  of  the 
virulent  poet  Hipponax,  who,  according  to  some,  invented 
this  measure.  After  his  example  it  was  much  employed 
in  invectives  and  in  sarcastic  composition  generally. 

VI.  The  following  may  be  taken  as  a  specimen  of  this 
measure. 

CatulL  SU,ffe\nus  Ist^e  Vdr\e  quern  H  prohe  |  nostl^  || 

Homo  est  \  venust\us  et  |  dicax  H  et  urb\dniis,  i| 
ldem\que  ldng\\e  plur^mos  |1  fdclt  \  versus.  || 
Puto  ess\e  ego  ill\\i  miU\ia  out  \\  decern  out  \  plurd  || 
Perscnpt\d  nee  |1  sic,  ut  \  fit,  in  ||  pdllm\psestd  || 
Reld\td :  ckdrt\\ce  reg\i^,  ||  novi  |  libri,  |j 
Novi  iimb\ili\\ct,  ldr\d  rdbrWd,  membr\dnd  \\ 
Direct\d  plilmb\\o,  et  pu\mice  dmn\^a  ce\qudtd,  || 


8.   Comic  Iambic  Trimeter. 

I.  In  comedy,  satire,  and  fable,  the  poets  indulged  in 
very  great  licenses  as  regarded  the  structure  and  scansion 
of  the  trimeter. 

II.  They  admitted  the  spondee  and  its  equivalents,  the 
dactyl  and  anapaest,  into  the  second  and  fourth  places,  not 
confining  themselves  to  the  iambus  except  in  the  sixth.' 
Thus, 

1.  "  Cum  non  solum  Terentius,  sed  etiam  Plautus,  Ennius,  Acciu^- 
que  et  Netvius  atqut  Pacuvius  Turpliu^que,  et  omncs  tarn  tragadice 
qvM,m  comadicc  veteris  Latina  scriptores  eodem  metri  modo  lambici  sunt 
tt«,  ut  omnibus  in  loeis  indtfferenter  poncrent  quinque  pedes ;  id  est 
iambumf  vel  tribrachyn,  vel  anapcestum,  vel  dactylum,  vel  spondaum^ 
absque  postremo  loco,  in  quo  vel  iambum  vel  pyrrhichium  omnino  posu» 


IAMBIC   MEASURES.  173 

Petron.  An  ut  \  mdtrd\\na  drna\ta  phale\ns  pela\gus.  |i 

Id.  Tud  \  pala\\td  clau\sus  pav^o  pdsc^tur.  || 

Id.  JEquum  est  |  mdue\\re  nupt\dm  ven\\tum  text\tlem,  \\ 

Phaedr.  Pen\culd\\sdm  fe\cU  medi\\cmdm  |  lupo.  || 

Id,  Est  dr\deUd\\num  qud£\ddm  Rd^rricE,  nd\ti5,  || 

Id.  Rex  urb\is  e\\jus  ex\perien\\dt  grd\tid.  \\ 

Id.  lgnd\tds  fdllWtt  nd\tls  est  \\  den\sul.  || 

Terent.  Fide  et  \  tdcitur\\nitd\te,     Exspect\\o  quid  \  veRs.  || 

Id.  Cur  simu\lds  igi\\tur  rem  Qm\nem  dprinWcipio  du\dies.  \\ 

Id.  Quod  ple\rtque  dm\\nes  fdci\unt  ddu\\lescen\tuU.  \\ 

Id.  Alere  out  \  canes  \\  dd  ven\dndum  out  ||  dd  ph%lo\sd- 

phos.  II 
Id.  Nunqudm  \  prdBpdn\\ens  se  iU\is  ltd  \\  fdciU\iime.  || 

Id.  Age\bdt  ldn\\a  dc  te\ld  vict\\um  quos\ritdns.  || 

Id.  Egoniet  I  cdntinu\(d  me\cum  cer\\te  cdpt\us  est.  \\ 

Id.  Die  sd\des  quis  her^i  Chrys\idem  hdbu\\it  nam  An\ 

dnce.  II 
Id.  QucBre\bdm  cdm\^perie\bdm  nihil  ||  dd  Pdm\philum.  || 


9.  Iambic  Tetrameter  Acatalectic,  or  Octonarius. 

I.  This  species  of  verse  consists  of  four  measures  or 
eight  feet,  properly  all  iambi,  but  subject  to  the  same  vari- 
ations as  the  iambic  trimeter;  so  that,  by  prefixing  one 
measure  to  a  common  iambic  trimeter,  we  convert  it  into 
an  Octonarius. 

II.  This  metre  is  often  used  by  the  Latin  comic  writers. 
Terent.  Sdn^  \  pol  is\[td  te  \  mulent\\a  est  muU\er  et  ||  tern- 

erdr\id.  \\ 
Id.  Nunc  hic  |  dies  |j  dUdm  \  viiam  au\\fert  dli\ds  mo-\\ 

res  pdst\uldt.  \\ 
Id.  Pdtere\tur  :  nam  \\  quemferr\et  si  ||  pdrent\em  non  \\ 

ferret  \  suHm  ?  || 

issc  inveniuntur ;  miror  quosdam  vel  abnegare  esse  in  Terentii  comoediis 
metra,  vel  ea  quasi  arcana  qucsdam,  et  ah  omnibus  doctis  semota,  sibi 
solis  esse  cognita,  conjirmare."  {Priscian^  de  Vers.  Com. — vol.  2,  p. 
403,  ed.  Krehl.) 

P2 


% 


174  IAMBIC    MEASURES. 

Terent.    Lend  \  sum  fdte\\dr  per\mctes  \\  cdmmu\ms  ddo\\leS' 

centrum.  || 
Id.  Nequid  I  propter  ||  tudm  \  fidem  \\  decept\d  pdie-^ 

retur  \  malt.  || 
Id.  Cujus  I  nunc  mise\\rce  spes  |  dpes\^que  sunt  \  in  te 

u\[no  omnes  |  sttoB.  || 
Plaut.       lllos  I  qui  ddnt  ||  eos  \  deri^des;  qui  |  delu^dunt  cZe-J 

perls.  II 


10.  Iambic  Tetrameter  Catalectic. 

I.  This  measure,  called  likewise  Hipponactic,  from  its 
inventor,  Hipponax,  is  the  tetrameter  or  Octonarius  depri- 
ved of  its  final  syllable. 

II.  The  same  variations  are  admissible  here  as  in  the 
case  of  the  trimeter  and  tetrameter,  and  the  comic  writers, 
who  sometimes  used  this  species  of  verse,  took  as  great 
liberties  with  it  as  with  the  trimeter;  always  observing, 
however,  to  make  the  seventh  foot  an  iambus. 

CatuU.    ReTmtt\e  pdll\\ium  |  rmhi  \\  meum  |  quod  ln\\volds\ti. 
Id.  Deprens\d  ndv\\is  In  \  mart  \\  vesd\nien\\te  vent\o. 

Id.  Quum  de  \  via  ||  mulier  \  dves  ||  dstend\tt  dsc\\itdnt\es. 

Terent.  Non  pdss\um  sdtV  \\  ndrrdr\e  quos  ||  ludos  \  pr^bue-W 

ris  lnt\us. 
Id.  Ndstrd\pte  cul^pd  fdci\mus  ut  ||  molds  \  expediWdt 

ess\e. 

III.  In  this  measure  there  is  uniformly  a  division  of  the 
verse  at  the  end  of  the  fourth  foot.     Thus, 

Remitte  pallium  mihi  \\  meum  quod  involasti 
Deprensa  navis  in  mari  ||  vesaniente  vento. 

IV.  This  species  of  verse  is  a  great  favourite  with  the 
Greek  comic  poet  Aristophanes,  and  is  also  found  in  many 
passages  of  the  Latin  comedians.  The  only  specimen  of 
it,  however,  in  a  pure  state  in  the  Latin  classics,  is  a  short 
poem  of  Catullus'.' 

1 .  This  measure  comes  to  our  ears  with  a  very  lively  and  graceful 
cadence  in  those  lines  where  accent  and  qaautity  do  not  clash.     Thus, 


IAMBIC    MEASURES. 


175 


11.  Galliambus. 

I.  This  measure  derives  the  first  part  of  its  name  from 
the  Galli,  or  priests  of  Cybele,  by  whom  it  was  employed 
in  their  wild  orgies. 

II.  The  only  specimen  of  this  verse  extant  is  the  poem 
of  Catullus  on  the  legend  of  Atys,  consisting  of  93  lines, 
and  remarkable  for  the  wild  dithyrambic  spirit  that  per- 
vades it. 

III.  From  the  scanty  remains  that  we  possess  of  this 
measure,  it  becomes  a  difficult  task  to  determine  its  struc- 
ture with  any  great  degree  of  precision.  The  following, 
however,  is  the  scheme  given  by  Vulpius,  an  eminent  com- 
mentator on  the  Roman  poet : 

1.  The  first  foot  of  the  six  into  which  he  divides  the 
measure  is  generally  an  anapasst,  but  sometimes  a 
spondee  or  a  tribrach. 

2.  The  second  is  generally  an  iambus,  rarely  an  anapaest, 
a  tribrach,  or  a  dactyl. 

3.  The  third  is  generally  an  iambus,  rarely  a  spondee. 

4.  TlOiQ  fourth  is  a  dactyl  or  spondee. 

5.  The  fifth  is  often  a  dactyl,  sometimes  a  cretic  or 
spondee. 

6.  The  sixth  is  an  anapasst,  and  sometimes  an  iambus, 
preceded  by  a  cretic. 

According   to  this  view  of  the    Galliambic  measure,  the 
scale  is  as  follows  : 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

— 

w  — 



-  w- 

-- 

-WW 

Idemque  Thalle  turbida  rapacior  procella ; 

And  thus  we  daily  dance  and  sing,  and  cast 


like  the  English  ballad, 
all  care  behind  us.^^ 


176 


TROCHAIC    MEASURES. 


IV.  The  following  lines  will  afford  an  idea  of  the  meas- 
ure : 

Super  dl\ta  vect\us  At\ys  celer\i  rate  |  mana. 
TJbi  capita  MdE,\nades  j  vl  jdci\unt  hed^rtgercB. 
Vtridem  |  citus  dd\U  l\ddm  prdper\dnte  pe\de  chorus, 
Aberd  I  ford  |  pdlast\rd  stddi\o  et  gymn\dsvis. 

V.  Some  prosodians,  however,  make  the  Galliambic 
measure  consist  of  an  iambic  dimeter  catalectic  (the  first 
foot  of  which  is  generally  a  spondee  or  an  anapaest),  fol- 
lowed by  another  such  dimeter  wanting  the  last  syllable. 
Hence  they  give  the  scale  with  its  variations  as  follows : 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7     ■ 

:::„ 

::. 

::_ 

•^ 

v^    — 

Super  dlt\d  vect\us  At\ys  ||  celeri  \  rate  md\nd. 
TJhi  cdpi\td  McBn\ddes  \  vl  \\  jdciunt  |  hederi\ger'cB. 
Vtridem  \  citus  dd\it  i\ddm  \\  prdperdnt\e  pede  \  chorus. 


SECTION  XXXIII. 

TROCHAIC  MEASURES. 

I.  Trochaic  verse  derives  its  name  from  the  foot  which 
prevails  in  it,  namely,  the  trochee. 

II.  Originally  the  trochee  was  the  only  foot  allowed  to 
enter  into  the  line ;  but  variations  were  afterward  introdu- 
ced, as  in  the  case  of  iambic  verse. 

in.  The  trochee,  like  the  iambus,  is  convertible  into  a 
tribraclL  Hence  this  last-mentioned  foot  is  allowed  to  en- 
ter, and  so  are  the  spondee  and  anapsst.  The  dactyl, 
however,  is  in  general  not  admitted,  except  in  the  case  of 
a  proper  name. 

IV.  A  difference,  deserving  of  careful  notice,  exists  be- 
tween the  iambic  and  trochaic  measures,  in  that  the  former 


TROCHAIC    MEASURES.  177 

admits  the  spondee  and  anapaest  into  the  uneven  places, 
but  the  trochaic  into  the  even  only. 


1.  Trochaic  Dimeter  Catalectic. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  three  feet,  properly  all  tro- 
chees, and  a  catalectic  syllable  ;  as, 

Horat.  Non  e\bur  ne\que  aure\um. 
Prud.    Dona  |  cdnsci\lentt\dB. 

II.  In  the  second  place  it  admits  the  spondee,  the  dac- 
tyl, and  likewise  the  anapaest. 

Senec.  Leriis  |  ac  mddt\\cum  Jiu\ens, 
Aura  I  nee  vsr^gens  ldt\us 
Ducat  I  mtrepiWddm  rdt\em 
Tutd  I  me  medi\\d  ve\hdt 
Vitd  I  decurr\ens  vi\d» 

III.  The  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic  is  otherwise  scanned 
as  an  Iambic  Dimeter  Acephalous. 


2.  Trochaic  Dimeter  A  catalectic. 

I.  The  trochaic  dimeter  consists  of  four  feet,  properly 
all  trochees ;  as, 

Boeth.  Ndnfd\cit  quod  1|  bptdt  (  ipse.\\ 

II.  The  spondee,  however,  and  its  equivalents  in  quan- 
tity, the  anapaest  and  dactyl,  are  admitted  into  the  second 
place. 

Buchanan.  Incd\lck  terrWdrum  ah  \  ortu,  1 
SoUs  j  ultiWmum  dd  cu\btle  ti 
Ejd  j  Domino  ^  jubi\ldte.  | 
Cdnsci\ds  sceler^is  ne\fandi.  H 


3.  Trochaic  Tetrameter  Catalectic. 
I.  This  measure  consists  of  seven  feet  and  a  catalectic 
syllable. 

XL  Originally  all  the  feet  were  trochees,  but  variations 


178 


TROCHAIC    MEASURES. 


having  been  subsequently  introduced,  the  following  result 
was  finally  obtained : 

1.  The  trochee  may  in  every  place  be  resolved  into  a 
tribrach. 

2.  In  the  even  places,  that  is,  the  second,  fourth,  and 
sixth,  in  addition  to  the  trochee,  a  spondee  is  admis- 
sible, which  may  be  resolved  into  an  anapaest. 

3.  A  dactyl  is  admissible,  in  the  case  of  a  proper  namey 
in  any  place  except  the  fourth  and  seventh. 

III.  The  caesura  uniformly  takes  place  after  the  fourth 
foot,  thus  dividing  the  verse  into  a  trochaic  dimeter  acata- 
lectic  and  a  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic. 

IV.  The  scale,  according  to  what  has  just  been  laid 
down,  is  as  follows  : 


Proper  Name. 


1 

2 

r  ■ 

4 

5 

6 

7 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-- 

-^ 

-- 

-w 

-- 





-^w 

^ 

^ 

Crds  am\et  qui  U  nunquam   am\dvit  \\  quique  dm\dvit  \\  eras 

dm\et. 
Ver  nov\um,  ver  ||  jam  cdn\drum  \\  vere  \  ndtus  ll  orhis  j  esU 
Vere  \  cdncdrd\dnt  dm\dreSi  \\  vere  \  nuhunt  ||  dUt\eSj 
£t  nem\us  com\\dm  re\sdlvtt  \\  de  mdr^tls  ||  imhri\hus,^ 

V.  The  following  lines  are  given  without  the  marks  of 
scansion,  to  show  the  place  of  the  caesura. 

Quando  ponebam  novellas  ||  arbores  malt  et  piri 
Cortici  summcB  notavi  ||  nomen  ardoris  mei. 
Nulla  Jit  exinde  finis  ||  vel  quies  cupidinis  : 
Crescit  ardor,  gliscit  arbor,  ||  ramus  implet  literas? 


VI.  This  metre  was  much  used  in  hymns,  for  which, 

1.  These  lines  are  taken  from  the  Pervigilium  Veneri», 

2.  Burmanrif  Anthol.  Lot.,  vol.  1,  p.  687. 


CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES.  179 

from  its  grave  and  sonorous  character,  it  is  well  adapted. 
The  division  made  in  the  line  by  the  caesural  pause  would 
suit,  no  doubt,  the  convenience  of  the  chorus,  one  portion 
of  their  number  singing  the  complete  dimeter,  the  other  the 
catalectic.     Thus, 

Prudent.  Made  judex  mortuorum^  || 

Made  rex  viventium. 
M.  Cap.    Scande  cali  templa  VirgOj  \\ 

Digna  lanto  fczdere. 


VII.  The  comic  writers  took  equal  liberties  with  this  as 
with  the  iambic  measure,  introducing  the  spondee  and  its 
equivalents,  the  anapaest  and  dactyl,  into  the  trochaic  places. 
Terent.  Q,uot  mod^s  con\iemtus  \  spretus  1  |1  fddd  |  trdnS' 

dd^a  dmni\a  hem. 
Id.  Tdntdm  \  rem  tdm  |1  necle\genter  \\  dgere  ?  \  prceten-W 

ens  mdd\d. 
Id.  Obstipu^  cen\serC  me  \  verbum  \\  pdtulss\e  ullum  || 

prdld\qui  out. 
Id.  Tot  me  tm\pediunt  |]  cur  a  |  qu^  m^\um  animum  \ 

divor^soi  trd\hunt. 
Id.  AUqutd  I  fdcerem,  ut  |1  hoc  ne  |  fdcerem  \\  sed  nunc  | 

quid  priWmum  exse\qudr  ? 

SECTION  XXXIV. 

CHORIAMBIC  MEASURES. 

I.  Choriambic  verses  are  so  denominated  from  the  foot 
(or  measure)  which  predominates  in  them,  namely,  the 
choriambus,  compounded  of  a  choree  (or  trochee)  and  an 
iambus ;  as,  TdntdUd^. 

II.  The  structure  of  choriambic  verses  is  extremely  sim- 
ple, the  first  foot  (with  the  exception  of  the  dimeter)  being 
generally  a  spondee,  sometimes  a  trochee  or  iambus,  the 
last  £01  iambus,  while  one,  two,  or  three  choriambi  are  in- 
terposed. 


160  CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES. 

1.  Choriambic  Dimeter. 

I.  The  Choriambic  Dimeter  consists  of  a  choriambus 
and  a  bacchius  ;  as, 

Horat.  Lydia  die  \  per  omiies. 
Perdere  cur  |  dpricum. 
Cur  neque  7m\Utdrls. 
Temperdt  d\rd  frenls. 

II.  This  measure  occurs  once  in  Horace,  in  conjunction 
with  another  species  of  choriambic  verse. 

2.  Choriambic  Trimeter  Acatalectic,  or  Glyconic. 

I.  This  measure,  called  Glyconic  from  the  poet  Glycon, 
its  inventor,  consists,  as  it  appears  in  Horace,  of  a  spondee, 
a  choriambus,  and  an  iambus  ;  as, 

Sic  te  I  Divd  potens  |  Cypri. 
Ventd\rumqu€  regdt  \  pater. 
Ndvts  j  qucB  tilii  cre\ditum. 

II.  This  species  of  choriambic  verse  is  not  used  in  a 
system  by  itself  in  the  works  of  either  Horace  or  Catullus, 
but  in  combination  with  other  species  of  choriambic  meas- 
ures. 

III.  Horace,  who  was  very  fond  of  the  Glyconic,  invari- 
ably adheres  to  the  spondee  in  the  first  place,  except  in  the 
two  following  instances,  where  a  trochee  occurs : 

Teucer  et  Sthenelus  sciens.     \0d.,  1,  15,  24.) 
Igriis  Iliacas  domos.     (lb.,  1,  15,  36.) 
The  best  editions,  however,  now  read, 

Teucer^  te  Sthenelus  sciens. 
Ignis  Pergameas  domos. 

IV.  Catullus,  however,  frequently  has  a  trochee  in  the 
first  place ;  as, 

Rust%\ca  dgricola  |  bonis, 
Cinge  I  temp5rd  Jldr\ibus. 
Fldmme\um  cdpe  lcB\tus  hue. 


CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES.  181 

Nuptt\aUa  cdn\cmens. 
Voce  I  carrmna  t'inn\ula. 

V.  The  same  poet  also  occasionally  uses  an  iambus  in 
the  first  place  ;  as, 

Puell\(B  et  pueri  tn\tegn. 

VI.  In  the  following  line  Horace  lengthens  a  short  final 
syllable  by  the  force  of  the  caesural  pause  : 

Siji\git  adamant\inos. 


3.  Choriambic  Trimeter  Catalectic,  or  Pherecratic. 

I.  The  Pherecratic  verse,  so  called  from  the  poet  Pher- 
ecrates,  is  the  Glyconic  (which  we  have  just  been  consid- 
ering) deprived  of  its  final  syllable.  It  consists  of  a  spon- 
dee, a  choriambus,  and  a  catalectic  syllable ;  as, 

Horat.   Grato  \  Pyrrha  sub  an\trd. 
Id.  Nigns  j  "dzqudra  vent^s» 

Id.         Sperat  j  nescms  aurjcB. 

II.  This  species  of  verse,  like  the  preceding,  is  not  found 
in  a  system  by  itself  in  the  works  of  either  Horace  or  Ca- 
tullus. 

III.  In  Horace,  the  first  foot  is  invariably  a  spondee.  In 
Catullus,  although  a  spondee  is  sometimes  employed  in  the 
first  foot,  a  trochee  is  far  more  common ;  as, 

Amm\umque  sondnt\um. 
Dicta  I  lurnine  Lun\a, 
Tecta  I  frugihus  ex\ples. 

IV.  An  iambus  also  occurs  in  Catullus,  but  rarely  ;  as, 

Puell^que  cana\mus. 
Hymen  j  O  Hymen^\e. 

V.  In  one  instance  in  Catullus,  a  long  syllable  is  found 
supplying  the  place  of  the  two  short  ones  that  contriljute  to 
form  the  choriambus  ;  as, 

Nutri\unt  humor\e, 

Q 


182  CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES. 

VI.  The  Pherecratic,  as  it  appears  in  Horace,  with  a 
spondee  in  the  first  place,  is  scanned  by  some  as  a  dactylic 
trimeter  acatalectic.     Thus, 

Grdto  I  Pyrrha  sub  |  antro. 

Nlgris  I  cequora  |  vends. 

Sperat  \  riescius  \  akra. 


4.  Choriameic  AscLEPiADic  Tetrameter. 

I.  This  measure  (sometimes  called  the  Minor  Asclepia- 
die)  consists  of  a  spondee,  two  choriambi,  and  an  iambus. 

II.  The  name  Asclepiadic  is  derived  from  that  of  the 
poet  Asclepiades,  who  is  said  to  have  been  the  inventor  of 
the  measure. 

III.  The  following  are  specimens  of  it : 
Horat.  Mmce\nds  dtdvis  \\  edite  re\gihus. 
Senec.  Nbn  ill\um  poterdnt  |1  figere  cusp^des. 
Prud.    Hostis  I  dirus  ddest  |(  cum  duce  per\fidd. 

IV.  The  csesural  pause  always  falls  after  the  first  chori- 
ambus,  as  marked  in  the  lines  just  given ;  and  in  the  fol- 
lowing verses  this  pause  lengthens  a  short  syllable. 

Horat.  Quam  si  quidquid  ardt  ||  impiger  Appulus. 
Certa  sede  manet,  \\  humor  et  in  genas. 

V.  The  position  of  the  casural  pause  after  the  first  chori- 
ambus,  facilitates  the  scansion  of  this  measure  as  a  dactylic 
pentameter  catalectic.     Thus, 

M'^ce\nds  dtd\vis  11  edite  \  regibus. 
Non  iU\um  pdle\rdnt  ^figere  \  cuspldes. 
Hostis  I  dirus  dd\est  H  cum  duce  \  perfido. 

VI.  This  latter  mode  of  scanning  was,  as  we  learn  from 
Terentianus  Maurus,  adopted  by  many  of  his  contempora- 
ries.     He  himself,  however,  condemns  the  practice.* 

1.  Sunt  qui  tradiderint,  ultima  vrrsni 

Tanquam  pentametro  syllaha  dempta  sii, 

Quam  si  resiituas,  pentanutrum  fore,  &c.     {Ter.  Maur  ,  2650.) 


CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES.  183 

VII.  Sometimes,  though  very  rarely,  the  first  foot  of  the 
Asclepiadic  was  made  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Senec.         Effugi\um,  et  miseros  libera  mors  vocet. 
M.  Capell.  Omntge\num  genitor  regna  movens  Deum. 


5.  Choriambic  Tetrameter  Acatalectic. 

I.  This  species  of  verse  consists  of  three  choriambi  and 
a  bacchius  (w ) ;  as, 

Sept.  Ser.  Jane  pater,  \  Jane  tuens  \  dive  bleeps  j  biformis. 
Auson.  Tu  bene  si  j  quid  facias  ]  non  memmissle  fas  est. 

Claud.  Omne  nemus,  \  cum  fuvus,  \  omne  candt  \  pro- 

fundum, 

II.  It  admits,  however,  of  variations,  each  of  the  three 
choriambi  being  changeable  to  other  feet  of  equal  lime  ;  as, 

Seren.   Cui  resera\td  mugiunt  \  aurca  claust\ra  mundi. 
Id.  Tibi  vetus  dr\d  caluit  dbo\rigineo  j  sacello. 


6.  Choriambic  Pentameter  Acatalectic. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  a  spondee,  three  choriambi, 
and  an  iambus ;  as, 

Horat.    Tu  ne  \  qucesieris,  \  scire  nefds,  j  quern  rmhi,  quern  j 

tibu 
Id.  Niilldm  \  Vdre  sdcrd  |  vite  prius  \  severts  drb\orem. 

Catull.  Alphe\ne  immemor,  dt\que  undnimls  \  false  s6dd\Ubus, 

II.  This  species  of  verse  is  sometimes  called  the  Great- 
er Asclepiadic, 


Epichoriambic  Verse. 
I.  By  Epichoriambic  verse  is  meant  a  species  of  measure 
which  admits  some  feet  that  do  not  properly  belong  to  cho- 

And  again : 

Quod,  jam  pentametri  non  patilur  modus  ; 

Nam  sic  ires  videas  esse  pedes  dalos.     {Id.,  2663.) 


184  CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES. 

riambic  measure,  but  which  are,  as  it  were,  superadded 
thereto.' 

II.  The  most  important  varieties  of  this  species  of  meas- 
ure are  the  two  following  : 

1.  Epichoriambic  Trimeter  Catalectic,  or  Sapphic. 

I.  This  measure  is  a  variety  of  the  choriambic  trimeter 
catalectic,  and  is  composed  of  a  second  epitrit,  a  choriam- 
bus,  and  a  bacchius  ;  as, 

Horat.    Jam  satis  ter\ris  ruvis  at\que  dira. 
Catull.   Ccesdns  vts\ens  monument\a  mdgm. 

II.  In  practice,  however,  it  is  more  convenient  to  con- 
sider it  as  composed  of  a  trochee,  a  spondee,  a  dactyl,  and 
two  trochees ;  as. 

Jam  sdi^s  terras  nivis  |  dtque  |  «flrS. 
Cmsdr^s  vis\ens  mbnu\mentd  j  mdgm. 

III.  Horace  invariably  has  a  spondee  in  the  second 
place ;  but  Catullus,  imitating  the  example  of  the  Greeks, 
admits  a  trochee  ;  as, 

Seu  Sdc\ds  sdg^ttyer\dsque  \  Pdrthds. 

IV.  Horace  generally  makes  the  first  syllable  of  the  dac- 
tyl caesural ;  as, 

Pindarum  quisquis  ||  studet  amulare, 
Sanguinem,  per  quos  ||  cecidere  justa. 
Integer  vit<B  ||  scelerisque  purus. 

V.  More  rarely  the  first  two  syllables  of  the  dactyl  close 
a  word,  thus  forming  a  species  of  trochaic  caesura  ;*  as, 

1.  The  term  Epichoriambic  is  from  ini,  "tn  addition  to,**  and  xopi- 
afiSo^. 

2.  Horace,  however,  seems  to  have  changed  his  opinion  with  regard 
to  this  pause.  In  the  first  three  books  of  the  Odes  it  occurs  but  seldom 
(as,  for  example,  1,  10;  1,  12;  1,  25;  2,  30;  2,  6,  &c.),  while  in 
book  fourth  it  happens  eleven  times  in  odes  second  and  sixth,  four  times 
in  ode  eleventh,  and  twelve  times  in  the  Carmen  Saculare.     The  fornB 

Nuntium  eurvaque  lyrct  parentem, 

where  the  enclitic  que  is  the  second  syllable  of  the  dtct>],  occurs  twice 


CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES.  185 

Laurea  donandus  ||  Apollinari. 
Pinus  aut  impvlsa  1|  cupressus  Euro. 

VI.  In  one  instance,  Horace  lengthens  a  short  syllable 
in  the  caesura  ;  as, 

Angulus  ridet  ||  uhi  non  Hymetlo,     (^Od.,  2,  6,  14.) 

VII.  Catullus,  following  the  Greeks,  neglects  this  caesu- 
ra altogether ;  as, 

Seu  Sacas  sagittiferosque  Parthos.     (11,  6.) 
Ultimi  Jlos  prcBtereunte  postquam,     (11,  22.) 


Sapphic  Stanza, 

I.  This  stanza,  so  called  from  the  two  celebrated  frag- 
ments of  the  gifted  Sappho  that  have  reached  our  times, 
consists  of  three  Sapphic  lines,  such  as  have  just  been  de- 
scribed, followed  by  an  Adonic,  or  Dactylic  Dimeter  AcaU 
alectic. 

II.  Taking  Horace  for  our  model,  the  scale  of  the  Latin 
Sapphic  stanza  will  be  as  follows : 


Jam  satis  terris  \\  nivis  atque  dircB 
Grandinis  misit  ||  pater,  et  rvhcnte 
Dextera  sacras  ||  jaculatus  arces 
Terruit  urhem. 


III.  There  is  one  feature  prominently  conspicuous  in  the 
Sapphic  stanza,  namely,  a  close  connexion  between  the 
third  and  fourth  lines,  and  hence  Horace  four  times  divides 
a  word  between  them  : 

only  in  the  first  three  books,  namely,  Oi.,  1,  10.  6,  and  18,  while  in  the 
fourth  book  it  is  found  four  times  in  odo  second,  once  in  ode  sixth,  and 
seven  times  in  the  Cur  men  SiDculare.     '{Ramsay^s  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  195.) 

Q2 


186  CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES. 

Labitur  ripa,  Jove  non  prohante^  ux- 

-orius  amnis.     (1,  2,  19.) 
Thracio  bacchante  magis  sub  inter- 

'lunia  vento.     (1,25,11.) 
Grosphe  non  gemmis  neque  purpura  ve- 

-nale  nee  auro.     (2,  16,  7.) 
Pendulum  zona  bene  te  secuta  e- 

-lidere  collum.    (3,  27,  59.) 

IV.  We  have  a  similar  instance  in  Catullus  (11,  11) : 

Gallicum  Rhenum  horribilisque  ultim- 
-osque  Britannos. 

V.  This  division  of  a  word  is  confined,  it  will  be  remem- 
bered, to  the  third  and  fourth  verse;  no  example  being 
found  of  such  a  division  at  the  end  of  the  first,  second,  or 
fourth.  Hence  it  has  been  conjectured,  and  the  supposi- 
tion is  a  very  probable  one,  that  neither  Sappho,  nor  Catul- 
lus, nor  Horace  ever  intended  the  stanza  to  consist  of  four 
separate  verses,  but  wrote  it  as  three,  namely,  two  five  foot 
Sapphics,  and  one  of  seven  feet  (the  fifth  foot  of  the  long 
verse  being  indiscriminately  either  a  spondee  or  trochee) ; 
thus  :^ 

Jam  satis  terris  nivis  atque  dira 
Grandinis  misit  pater,  et  rubente 
Dextera  sacras  jaculatus  arces,  terruit  urbem. 


IlicR  dum  se  nimium  querenti 

Jactat  ultorem,  vagus  et  sinistra 

Labitur  ripa,  Jove  non  probante,  uxorius  amnis. 


Otium  bello  furiosa  Thrace, 
Otium  Medi  pharetra  decori, 
Grosphe,  non  gemmis,  neque  purpura  venale  nee  auro. 


VI.  Elision  sometimes  takes  place  between  the  second 
1.  Monthly  Review,  January,  1798,  p.  46. 


CHORIAMBIC    MEASURES.  187 

and  tliird,  and  the  third  and  fourth  lines.     Thus,  in  Hor- 
ace, 

2.  Dissidens  plebi  numero  beator(um) 

3.  Eximit  virtus,  &c.     (2,  2,  18.) 


! 


(  2.  Mugiunt  vaccoiy  tibi  tollit  hinnit(vira) 
\  3.  Apta  quadrigis  equa,  &c.      (2,  16,  34.) 

r  2.  Plorat,  et  vires  animumque  mores^qvLG) 

<  3.  Aureos  educit  in  astra,  nig-ro(que) 

f  4.  Invidet  Oreo.     (4,  2,  22.) 

!3.  RomultB  genti  date  remque  prol€m(c^e) 
4.  Et  decus  omne.     (C,  S.,  47.) 


VII.  Elisions  of  this  kind,  however,  are  not  necessary 
in  their  nature.     Thus  we  find  an  hiatus  between  the  third 
and  fourth  lines  in  the  following,  from  Horace  ; 
Neve  te  nostris  vitiis  iniquum 

Odor  aura,     (1,2,  47.) 
Between  the  first  and  second,  from  the  same  : 

Sive  mutata  juvenem  figura  ^ 

Ales  in  terris,  &c.     (1,  2,  41.) 
And  between  the  second  and  third : 

Aut  super  Pindo  gelidove  in  Haemo 
Unde  vocalem  temere  insecutcB 

Orphea  sylvcB.     (1,  12,  6.) 


2.  Epichoriambic  Tetrameter  Catalectic,  or  Greater 
Sapphic. 
I.  This  measure  consists  of  a  second  epitrit,  two  chor- 
iambi,  and  a  bacchius  ;  as  follows  : 


Horat.   7^  deos  dr\o  Sybdrm\\cur properds  \  dmdndo. 


18S  IONIC    VERSES. 

II.  It  is,  in  fact,  the  ordinary  Sapphic,  with  the  addition 
of  a  choriambus  in  the  third  place. 

III.  The  first  syllable  of  the  first  choriambus  ought  to  be 
caesural,  and  there  ought  to  be  a  division  of  the  verse  after 
the  first  choriambus.^ 

SECTION  XXXV. 

IONIC  VERSES. 
Ionic  verses  are  of  two  kinds,  the  Ionic  a  majore  and 
Ionic  a  minore,  which  are  so  denominated  from  the  feet  or 
measures  of  which  they  are  respectively  composed. 


1.   Ionic  a  Majore  Verses. 
Of  these  the  most  celebrated  is  the 

Ionic  a  Majore  Tetrameter  Brachycatalectic. 

I.  This  measure  is  otherwise  called  the  Sotadean,  from 
Sotddes,  a  Thracian,  who  lampooned  Ptolemy  Philadelphus. 

II.  In  its  pure  state  it  consists  of  three  Ionic  a  majore 
feet,  followed  by  a  spondee,  according  to  the  following 
scheme  : 

*       Tuid  mans  \  Iras  vtdet  \  e  Itttore  \  naula. 

III.  Several  of  these  Sotadean  verses  are  to  be  found  in 
the  remains  of  the  Greek  poets,  and  have  been  carefully 
analyzed  by  Hermann.  In  Latin,  a  short  fragment  of  En- 
nius,  and  a  few  irregular  lines  in  Martial  and  Petronius 
Arbiter,  are  the  only  specimens  of  the  measure,  except 
such  as  are  met  with  in  Plautus.     (AuL,  2,  I,  30  ;  3,  2.) 

IV.  The  Ionics  a  majore  of  Martial,  and  these  are  but 
two  lines,  have  the  proper  foot  in  the  first  two  places,  and 
a  ditrochaeus  in  the  third,  followed  by  a  spondee. 

Has  cum  gemtn\d  compede  \  dcdhdt  cdt\ends 
Sdlurne  tib\l  Zbilus  \  dnnulos  pri\dres.^ 

1.  Hermann,  D.  M.  E.,  3,  \6.— Ramsay's  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  199. 

2.  Ep.,  3,  30. 


IONIC   VERSES.  189 

V.  This  change  of  the  third  measure  to  a  ditrochaeus 
seems  to  have  been  a  favourite  with  the  writers  in  this 
species  of  verse,  as  tending  to  give  greater  softness  and 
harmony  to  the  otherwise  stiff  and  monotonous  line. 

VI.  By  a  farther  variation,  either  of  the  long  syllables 
in  each  of  the  three  Ionic  measures  might  be  resolved  into 
two  short,  which  resolution  was  regarded  as  an  improve- 
ment ;'  but  it  does  not  appear  that  both  the  long  syllables 
were  ever  thus  resolved  at  the  same  time. 

Petron.  Pede  tendite,  |  cursum  addite,  convolute  planta. 

Ciecilius  er|i^  consimilis  pedis  Jigura} 

Solet  integer  \  anapaestus  et  |  in  fine  locari. 

Hunc  effici\et  Minucius  |  ut  quis  vocitetur. 

Catalexis  enim  dicitur  \  ea  claiisula  |  versus. 
Petron.  Ferrum  timuif  quod  trepi\dd  male  dabat  |  usutn. 


2.   Ionic  a  Minore  Verses. 

I.  The  Ionic  a  minore  verse  is  entirely  composed  of  that 
foot  or  measure  called  the  Ionic  a  minore. 

II.  We  have  one  specimen  of  this  kind  of  verse  in  Hor- 
ace (^Od.,  3,  12),  which  is  differently  arranged  by  different 
editors,  but  is  usually  considered  as  a  system  of  Tetrame- 
ters Acatalectic. 

III.  Ionic  a  minore  verses,  in  fact,  are  not  confined  to 
any  particular  number  of  feet  or  measures,  but  may,  like 
anapaestics,  be  extended  to  any  length,  provided  only,  that, 
with  due  attention  to  synapheia,  the  final  syllable  in  each 
measure  be  either  naturally  long,  or  be  made  long  by  the 
concourse  of  consonants ;  and  also  that  each  sentence  or 
period  terminate  with  a  complete  measure,  having  the 
spondee  or  two  long  syllables  of  the  Ionic  foot  for  its  close. 

1.  "  Nam,  quo  fuerint  crebrius  hi  pedes  minuti, 

Vibrare  sonum  versiculos  magis  videmus.^^ 

{Terent.  Maur.,y.  2054,  seq.) 

2.  This  line,  together  with  the  three  that  follow,  are  taken  from  Te- 
rentianus. 


190  LOGAOSDIC    VERSES. 

IV.  The  specimen  from  Horace  above  alluded  to  is  as 
follows : 

Miserarum  est  \  neque  dmori  \  dare  ludum,  \  neque  dulci 
Mala  Vino  \  lavere ;  out  ex\animari  |  metuentes 
Pdtruce  verb\erd  llngum.  |   Tibi  qualiXm  \  Cytherece 
Puer  dies,  \  tibi  telds,  \  operds'^\que  Mhiervoi 
Studium  aufertf  |  Neobule,  |  Lipdrei  |  rittdr  Hebri,  &c. 

SECTION  XXXVI. 

LOGACEDIC  VERSES. 

I.  Logaadic  verses  are  those  which  are  formed  by  add- 
ing any  number  of  trochees  to  any  dactylic  verse. 

II.  They  receive  their  name  from  ?i6yog,  ^- discourse,^* 
and  doidrj,  ^'song"  because  dactylic  verse  is  the  lofty 
language  of  poetry,  whereas  the  trochaic  approaches  more 
nearly  to  ordinary  discourse.' 

III.  Of  logaoedic  verses  the  most  important  are  the  fol- 
lowing : 

1.  Archilochian  Heptameter. 

I.  This  measure  is  composed  of  a  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a 
priorei  followed  by  a  pure  Trochaic  Dimeter  Brachycata- 
lectic. 

II.  The  first  three  feet  may  be  either  dactyls  or  spon- 
dees ;  the  fourth  is  always  a  dactyl ;  the  last  three  are  tro- 
chees.    Thus, 


1 

2 

3 

4         j        5 

6 

7 

_     S-.     w 



_   ^   w 

—  "^ 

—  w 

Horat.   Solvitur  \  dcris  hy\ems  grd\td  vice  ||  veris  |  et  Fdv\dn%. 

III.  The  first  syllable  of  the  third  foot  ought  to  be  caesu- 
ral,  and  the  fourth  foot  ought  to  end  with  a  word. 


1.  The  iambus  is  the  true  foot  for  discourse,  and  the  trochee  for  dan- 
cing. Thus  Aristotle  roniarks, /mAzara  "keKTLKov  rdv  fiirpuv  to  lau- 
6elov  koTi.     {A.  P.,  4.) 


LOGACEDIC    VERSES.  191 

IV.  Horace  uses  this  species  of  verse  once  in  Od.,  1,  4, 
where  it  is  placed  alternately  with  an  Iambic  Trimeter 
Catalectic. 


2.  Alcaic  Decasyllabic,  or  Minor  Alcaic. 

I.  This  measure  consists  of  a  pure  Dactylic  Dimeter 
Acatalectic,  followed  by  a  pure  Trochaic  Manometer  Acat- 
alec  tic ;  as, 

Flumma  \  cdnstiter\mt  ac\utd. 

II.  This  forms  the  fourth  line  of  the  celebrated  Alcaic  or 
Horatian  stanza,  which  we  are  presently  to  consider. 


3.    PHALiECIAN    HeNDECASYLLABIC. 

I.  This  measure,  termed  Phalaecian  from  the  poet  Pha- 
laecus,  and  Hendecasyllabic  because  consisting  of  eleven  syl- 
lables (evdeKa  avXXa6al),  is  composed  of  five  feet,  a  spon- 
dee, a  dactyl,  and  three  trochees  ;  as, 

Mart.     Non  est  \  tnvere  \  sed  val\ere  \  vita. 
CatuU.   Qudi  ddn\d  lepid\um  ndv\um  Ub\ellum. 

II.  In  other  words,  it  consists  of  a  Dactylic  Dimeter 
Acatalectic^  followed  by  a  Trochaic  Dimeter  Brachycatalectic. 

III.  Catullus,  with  whom  this  is  a  favourite  measure, 
uses  a  trochee  not  unfrequently  in  the  first  place,  and  some- 
times air  iambus  ;  as, 

Aridja  modo  pumice  expolitum.     (1,  2.) 
T5ta  1  millia  me  decern  poposcit.     (41,  2.) 
Ami|co5  medicosque  convocate.     (41,  6.) 
Meas  I  esse  aliquid  putare  nugas.     (1,  4.) 

IV.  This  liberty,  however,  w^as  rarely  taken  by  the  po- 
ets subsequent  to  Catullus.^ 

V.  Catullus  has  in  some  instances  marred  the  elegance 

1.  In  Statius,  for  instance,  not  a  single  example  of  the  kind  occurs  in 
upward  of  450  lines ;  in  Prudentius,  not  one  in  above  260  ;  not  one  in 
Ausonius,  who  has  more  than  2000  verses  in  this  measure  ;  while  Sido- 
nius  ApoUinaris,  in  upward  of  1200  Phalaecians,  has  not  aho\e  two  that 
can  bo  proved,  and  these  are  proper  names.    {Carey^s  Lot.  Pros.,  p.  282.) 


193  COMPOUND    MEASURES. 

and  harmony  of  this  measure,  by  introducing  a  heavy  spon- 
dee into  the  second  place ;'  as, 

Te  camp\d  c^^B\ivimus  minore.     (55,  3.) 
Et  mult\is  \kx\g\uoribus  peresus.     (55,  31.) 

VI.  The  same  poet,  in  one  line  of  a  very  irregular  piece, 
has  a  tribrach  in  the  first  place,  a  license,  however,  which 
appears  authorized  by  the  difficulty  of  otherwise  employing 
a  proper  name. 

CdLmQxi\um  mihi  pessimcs  puellcR.     (55,10.) 

VII.  The  name  Hendecasyllahic  does  not  exclusively  be- 
long to  Phalaecian  verse,  since  there  are  other  measures  to 
which  it  is  equally  applicable.  For  instance,  the  Sapphic 
and  a  variety  of  the  Alcaic  not  only  contain  the  like  num- 
ber of  syllables,  but  also  in  like  proportion  of  long  to  short, 
so  that  the  same  words  sometimes  may,  in  different  posi- 
tions, become  either  a  Phalaecian,  a  Sapphic,  or  an  Alcaic. 
Thus, 

(Phal.)  Summum  \  nee  metu\as  di\em  nee  \  bptes. 
(Sapph.)  Nee  di\em  summ\um  metu\as  nee  \  optes. 
(Ale.)        Summum  \  nee  dpt\es  ||  nee  metu\as  diem. 

SECTION  XXXVII. 

COMPOUND  MEASURES. 

1.    DACTrLICO-lAMBIC. 

I.  This  measure  occurs  in  the  eleventh  epode  of  Horace, 
being  used  there  alternately  with  the  Iambic  Senarius,  and 
consists  of  a  Daetylie  Trimeter  Cataleeticy  followed  by  an 
Iambic  Dimeter  Acatalectic ;  as, 

Scribere  \  versicu\lds  ||  amdr\e  per\\ciissum  |  grdvi.  \\ 

II.  This  measure  properly  falls  under  the  head  of  Asy- 
nartet^  verses,  that  is,  the  component  parts  are  not  subject 

1 .  This  is  made  by  some  a  separate  measure,  and  called  Pseudo-Pka- 
lacian. 

2.  From  d,  privative,  and  owapTou,  "  to  join  together  ;"  hence  uaw- 
dprrjTo^,  "  not  closely  joined  together.'' 


COMPOUND    MEASURES.  193 

to  the  ordinary  laws  of  prosody  and  versification,  since  the 
last  syllable  of  the  first  member  of  the  verse  may  be  ei^er 
long  or  short,  just  as  if  it  were  the  final  syllable  of  a  separ- 
ate line ;  and,  moreover,  an  hiatus  may  take  place  between 
the  two  members  of  the  measure.     Thus, 

Jnachia  furere,  ||  silvis  honorem  decuiit. 

Arguit  et  latere  il  petitus  imo  spiritus. 

Libera  consilia  ||  nee  contumeluB  graves. 

Fervidiore  mero  ||  arcana  promdrat  loco. 

Vincere  moUitia  Q  amor  Lycisci  me  tenet. 
These  lines  all  occur  in  the  eleventh  epode  of  Horace.  In 
the  first,  second,  and  third,  the  short  final  syllables  in  fu' 
rere,  latere,  and  consilia  are  considered  long,  by  virtue  of 
their  position  at  the  end  of  the  dactylic  trimeter  catalectic ; 
while  in  the  fourth  and  fifth  there  is  an  hiatus  between  the 
two  members  of  the  verse  [mero  arcana  and  moUitia  amor). 

2.  Iambico-Dactylic,  or  Elegiambic. 

I.  This  measure  is  directly  the  reverse  of  the  preceding, 
that  is,  it  consists  of  an  Iambic   Dimeter,  followed  by  a 
Dactylic  Trimeter  Catalectic.    Thus, 
Horat.  Ta  vi\na  Tdrq\\uatd  \  move  ||  consule  |  pressa  me[d. 
Id.         Redii\cet  in  \\  sedem  \  vice.  \  Nine  et  A\chchnem\o. 
Id.         Levar\e  Jtr||w  pect\dra  |{  sdlUci\titdini\bus. 
Id.         Findunt  |  Scamdnd^juri  fliim\ina  ||  liibriciis  |  et  Sim6\is. 

n.  This  measure,  like  the  preceding  one,  belongs  prop- 
erly to  the  class  of  Asynartete  verses ;  and  hence,  in  the 
second,  third,  and  fourth  lines  just  cited,  the  short  final  syl- 
lables in  vice,  pectora,  and  flumind  are  considered  long,  by 
virtue  of  their  position  at  the  end  of  the  iambic  dimeter. 

III.  There  are  in  all  nine  lines  belonging  to  this  species 
"of  verse  in  Horace.  It  is  not  used  in  a  system  by  itself, 
but  is  placed  alternately  with  the  heroic  hexameter  in 
Epode  13. 

R 


194  COMPOUND    MEASURES. 

3.  Alcaic  Hendecasyllabic,  or  Greater  Alcaic. 

I.  This  measure  is  compounded  of  an  Iambic  Monome- 
ter  Hypercatalectic  and  a  pure  Dactylic  Dimeter  Acatalectic  ; 
as, 

Horat.    Vides  |  ut  dU\a  \\  stet  ntve  |  cdndidum. 
Claud.   Venus  [  rm)ers\um  \\  sperndt  A\ddnidem. 

II.  But  the  first  foot  of  the  iambic  portion  is,  of  course, 
alterable  to  a  spondee  ;  as, 

Horat.   O  md\tre  pul\ckrd  \\  fiUd  |  pulchnor. 
Claud.   Victum  \  fdt^\tur  \  Delos  A\pdlUnem, 

III.  Horace  much  more  frequently  has  a  spondee  than 
an  iambus  in  the  first  place,  and  Prudentius  always  a  spon- 
dee. 

IV.  The  Alcaic  is  sometimes  scanned  with  a  choriambus 
and  an  iambus  in  the  latter  colon  or  member ;  as, 

Vides  I  ut  dlt\d  H  stet  ntve  cdnd\tdum. 
Venus  I  rcvers\um  \\  sperndt  Add\mdem. 

V.  Although  Horace,  who  has  made  greater  use  of  this 
measure  in  his  lyric  compositions  than  any  other,  never 
employed  it  except  in  conjunction  with  two  other  species 
of  verse  (see  Alcaic  Stanza^  below),  other  writers  have 
composed  entire  poems  in  it  alone,  as  Prudentius,  who  has 
a  long  piece  entirely  consisting  of  unmixed  Alcaics  (Peris» 
tepL,  14),  and  Claudian  a  shorter  production  (In  Nupt, 
Hon.  Aug.  et  Mar.). 

VI.  Claudian's  piece  begins  as  follows  : 

Princeps  corusco  sidere  pulchrior, 
Parthis  sagittis  tendere  certior, 
Eques  Gelonis  imperiosior, 
QucB  digna  mentis  laus  erit  arducB  ? 
Qu<B  digna  formcB  laus  erit  ignea  ?   &c. 


The  Alcaic  Stanza. 
I.  This  consists  of  four  lines :  the  first  two  are  Aleak 


COMPOUND    MEASURES. 


195 


Hendecasyllabics,  or  Greater  Alcaics ;  the  third  is  an  lam- 
hie  Dimeter  Hypermeter,  or  Alcaic  Enneasyllahic ;  and  the 
fourth  is  an  Alcaic  Decasyllabic,  or  Minor  Alcaic. 

II.  The  scheme  of  the  Alcaic  stanza  is  therefore  as  fol- 
lows : 


Lines 
and  2, 


1  2      J    3 4 5 


■m 


Line  3. 


Line  4.     \-^^\-^^\-^\-^ 


Vides  ut  alta  stet  nive  candidum 
Soracte  nee  jam  sustineant  onus 
SylvcB  laborantes  geluque 
Flumina  constiterint  acuto  ? 


III.  According  to  the  scheme  which  has  just  been  given, 
it  will  be  seen  that  the  first  foot  in  each  of  the  first  two 
lines  may  be  either  an  iambus  or  a  spondee.  Horace, 
however,  as  we  have  already  remarked,  gives  a  decided 
preference  to  the  spondaic  commencement.  Out  of  634 
Alcaic  Hendecasyllabics  extant  in  his  works,  18  only  have 
an  iambus  in  the  first  place  ;  that  is,  about  one  in  thirty-five. 

IV.  Once  only  do  we  find  in  the  same  poet  two  lines  in 
succession  beginning  with  an  iambus ;  as, 

Metu  deorum  continuit?  quibus 

Pepercit  aris?     O  utinam  nova.     (1,  35,  37.) 

V.  The  fifth  syllable  in  the  first  and  second  lines  ought 
always  to  be  caesural ;  as, 

Non  si  trecen[is  j  quotquot  eunt  dies. 

VI.  Horace,  however,  directly  violates  this  rule  twice.' 

1.  Special  rules  for  the  structure  of  the  Alcaic  stanza  may  be  found 
in  Ramsay,  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  220,  seqq. 


196  MISCELLANEOUS    MEASURES. 

Mentemque  lympTiatam  Mareotico.     (1,  37,  14.) 
Spectandus  in  certamine  Martio.     (4,  14,  17.) 

SECTION  XXXVIII. 

MEASURES  NOT  INCLUDED  UNDER  THE  PREVIOUS 
CLASSIFICATION. 

1.  Cretic  Verse. 

I.  Cretic  numbers  belong  in  strictness  to  the  trochaic, 
and  are  nothing  else  but  a  Catalectic  Trochaic  Dipodia, 
which  consists  of  arsis,  thesis,  and  arsis  again. 

II.  Since  this  order  is  periodic,  it  is  plain  that  the  thesis 
cannot  be  doubtful,  but  consists  always  and  necessarily  of 
one  short  syllable  only,  but  that  each  arsis  may  be  resolv- 
ed ;  whence  it  comes  to  pass  that  both  the  first  and  fourth 
paeon,  and,  moreover,  even  five  short  syllables,  may  be  put 
for  the  cretic.     Thus, 


in.  It  must  also  be  remarked,  that  when  several  cretic 
feet  are  conjoined  in  one  verse,  no  one  coheres  with  an- 
other in  a  periodic  order  ;  and  the  last  syllable  of  the  last 
foot,  as  every  final  syllable,  cannot  be  resolved  except  in 
systems  in  vi^hich,  since  the  numbers  are  continued  in  one 
unbroken  tenour,  the  last  foot  of  the  verses,  unless  it  is  at 
the  same  time  the  last  foot  of  the  whole  system,  is  subject 
to  the  same  law  as  each  intermediate  foot. 

IV.  Cretics  are  much  used  by  the  Roman  tragedians  and 
comedians,  and  with  the  same  license  as  to  prosody  as  the 
rest  of  the  metres.  Whence,  if  they  ever  put  a  molossus 
for  a  cretic,  they  do  it  in  such  a  manner  as  to  conceal  the 
faultiness  of  the  measure  under  the  ambiguity  of  a  familiar 
pronunciation.'     Thus, 

Plaut.  Aut  solu\tds  sinat,  \  quos  argent\o  emerit.* 

1.  Bentlcy  ad  Cic,  Tusc,  3,  19.— /<Z.  ad  Ter.  Adelph.y  4,  4,  2.— 
Hermann,  1).  E.  M.,  2,  19. 

2.  Capliv.,  2,  1,  11. 


MISCELLANEOUS    MEASURES.  197 

1 


Plaut.  Qu(B  ne  eject\(B  e  mari  amh\(e  sumus,  \  te  obsecro 
Id.        Ut  tuo  J  recipids  |  tecto,  serv\esque  nos^ 

V.  As  they  commonly  use  the  tetrameter,  they  often 
made  the  verse,  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  asynartete.* 
Thus,  Ennius  in  the  Andromacha : 

Qxad  pctdm  j  prcesidi  out  j  exsequdr,  j  quove  nunc 
Aut  auxiU\o  exsiU  J  — autfugd  \fretd  sim? 

VI.  Plautus  has  not  only  dimeters  sometimes,  but  still 
oftener  catalectic  tetrameters,  and  that,  too,  with  the  third 
foot  having  the  last  syllable  doubtful,  and  the  fourth  admit- 
ting a  resolution  of  the  arsis.  Thus,  in  the  Trinummus 
(2,  1,  17,  5.^^.): 

Da  mihi  hoc,  |  mel  meum,  j  si  me  dmds,  |  si  audis  : 

Ibi  pendent\em  fent :  \  jam  dmplius  \  drat, 

Non  satis  id  |  est  mdli,  |  ni  dmpUUs^t  \  ettdm,  &c. 


2.  Bacchiac  Verse/ 

I.  The  ancient  metricians  referred  bacchiac  numbers  to 
the  paeonic  kind,  as  having  arisen  from  the  contraction  of 
the  second  or  fourth  paeon. 

II.  Modern  scholars,^  however,  on  account  of  the  iambic 
anacrusis,  have  joined  them  with  trochaic  numbers,  although 
they  are  in  reality  spondaic  with  an  iambic  anacrusis. 

III.  The  numbers  of  the  amphibrach  (>-'  —  -^),  if  repeat- 
ed, were  with  reason  displeasing  to  the  ancients,  on  account 
of  their  too  great  weakness.  Wherefore,  to  give  them 
strength,  they  changed  the  trochee  into  a  spondee,  and 
thus  produced  the  bacchius  (^ ). 

IV.  The  Roman  tragedians  and  comedians  made  great 
use  of  bacchiac  verses,  joining  also,  for  the  most  part,  many 
of  them  together. 

1.  Rud.,  1,  ,5,  15.  2.  Ibid.,  1,  5,  19. 

3.  Vid.  page  192. 

4.  Herm.,  Elem.  Doctr.  Metr.,  2,  22. 

R2 


198  MISCELLANEOUS    MEASURES. 

V.  The  legitimate  measure  of  a  bacchius  in  the  middle 
of  verses  is  this,  ^ ;  but  in  the  end  of  verses  this, 


The  freer  prosody  of  the  Latins,  however,  tolerates  both  a 
long  anacrusis  and  a  dissyllabic  one.  And  a  dissyllabic 
one  was  usually  admitted  by  Plautus  in  the  first  and  third 
foot  of  tetrameters,  that  is,  in  the  beginning  of  each  mem- 
ber, which  is  commonly  composed  of  two  feet ;  sometimes 
in  the  second  and  fourth  foot  also.  Thus,  in  the  Aulula. 
ria  (2,  1,  4,  seq.) : 

Quamquam  hand  fdls\a  sum  nos  \  odiosas  |  haberi. 

Nam  multum  (  loquaces  |  mento  omnes  j  hahemur. 
In  the  Men(Bckm.  (5,  6,  6)  : 

Mento  hoc  nd\b%sfit  qui  |  quidem  hue  ven\enmus. 
In  the  Amphitryon  (2,  1,  15)  : 

Tun^  me  verh\ero  dudes  |  herum  lu\diftcdn. 

VI.  Tetrameters  having  a  caesura  at  the  end  of  the  sec- 
ond foot  are  a  kind  very  much  in  use.  That  caesura,  how- 
ever, is  often  neglected.  Plautus,  who  delighted  very 
much  in  this  measure,  sometimes  inserted  a  dimeter  in  the 
midst  of  tetrameters.  Sometimes  he  even  coupled  two 
verses  by  means  of  an  elision  ;  as  in  the  Amphitryon  (2,  2)  : 

Sdtm  pdrv\d  res  est  \  vdluptd\tum  in  vita  a^|(que) 
In  0Btd\te  agundd,  \  prm  qudm  quod  \  molestum  est. 

VII.  These  tetrameters  sometimes  appear  to  have  clau- 
Bulae  of  an  iambic  dimeter  catalectic  ;  as  in  Terence,  An- 
drian.  (3,  2,  4) : 

Quodjussi  ei\ddri  biber\e  et  quantum  im\perdvt  ||  date  mox  \ 
ego  hue  I  revert\dr. 

VIII.  Bacchiac  verses  sometimes  appear  to  be  continued 
an  systems,  so  that  a  doubtful  syllable  has  no  place  in  the 
end  of  the  verses,  and  words  may  be  divided  between  two 


MISCELLANEOUS    MfiASURES. 


199 


verses.     Thus,  we  have  the  following  from  Varro  (nepl 
^E^ayoyyTj^,  ap.  Non.^  p.  336)  : 

Quemndm  te  ess\e  dicdm  \  ferd  qui  \  mdnu  cdr-\ 
pons  ferv\tdds  fdnt\tum  dpens  \  Idcus  sdn-\ 
guinls,  te\que  vita  \  levds  ferr\eo  ensa.  | 
IX.  Catalectic  bacchiacs,  having  the  last  foot  an  iambus, 
are  remarkable  i».  Plautus.     Thus,  we  have  the  following 
dimeters  in  the  Persa  (2,  28,  30) : 
Perge,  ut  cce\perds, 
Hoc,  lend  \  tihl 
Delude,  ut  \  lubet, 
Herus  dum  hinc  j  dbest. 
Vtdesne,  ut  |  tuts 
Dtctis  pdr\eo  ? 


3.  Saturnian  Verse. 

I.  The  Saturnian  verse,  which  some  rank  among  the  asyn- 
artete  measures,  appears  to  have  been  the  only  one  used  by 
the  most  ancient  Roman  poets. 

II.  In  it  both  inscriptions  and  poems  were  written.  Liv- 
ius  Andronicus  translated  the  Odyssey  into  this  measure, 
and  in  it  Naevius  wrote  his  poem  on  the  First  Punic  War. 

III.  The  Saturnian  has  the  following  scheme : 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

^  — 

v^    — 

w  — 

— 

—    w 

—  ^ 

—  ^ 

Ddhunt  I  malum  \  MeteU\l  \\  N(Bvi\d po\et^, 

IV.  But  the  rude  poets  of  this  early  age  both  disregard- 
ed the  caesura  often,  and  used  every  kind  of  resolution,  re- 
solving even  the  doubtful  syllable  in  the  end  of  the  first 
member.  After  the  manner  of  ancient  language,  too,  they 
allowed  spondees  in  all  the  places.  Nay,  the  most  ancient 
of  the  poets  seem  to  have  thought  it  sufficient  if  their  verses 
only  bore  some  sort  of  resemblance  to  these  numbers.    The 


200  UNION   OF   DIFFERENT   KINDS    OF   VERSE. 

verses  of  the  inscription  composed  by  Naevius  on  himself, 
and  preserved  by  Aulus  Gellius  (1,  24),  are  tolerable 
enough : 

Mdrtd\Us  tm\mdrtd\lis  ^fiere  \  sifdr\etfds, 
Flerent  \  divS  |  Cdm'cB\na>.  \\  NcRvi\um  pd\etdm. 
Itdque  I  postquam  est  \  Orci\nd  ||  trddi\tus  thes\aurdf 
ObU\ti  sunt  I  RomcR  \  loquV\er  Ldt\im  \  lingua. 
V.  The  last  of  the  Romans  who  used  this  measure  ap- 
pears to  have  been  Varro  in  his  Satires/ 

SECTION  XXXIX. 

ON  THE  UNION  OF  DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  VERSE.2 

I.  A  poem  receives  the  name  of  Monocolon,  Dicolon,  Tri' 
colon,  &DC.,  according  to  the  number  of  different  species  of 
verse  which  it  contains. 

II.  When  a  poem  contains  one  species  of  verse  only,  it 
is  called  Monocolon  (from  [lovog,  " alone"  "  single,''^  and 
KCdXov,  "  a  limb,'^  or  "  member''^).  The  Eclogues,  Georgics, 
and  Mxie'idi  of  Virgil,  the  Satires  and  Epistles  of  Horace, 
the  Metamorphoses  of  Ovid,  are  all  examples  of  Carmina 
Monocola,  since  they  consist  of  hexameters  alone.  So  also 
the  first  ode  of  the  first  book  of  the  Odes  of  Horace  is  a 
Carmen  Monocolon,  since  it  is  a  system  of  choriambic  As- 
clepiadics,  unbroken  by  any  other  species  of  verse ;  and 
so  on. 

III.  When  a  poem  contains  two  species  of  verse,  it  is 
called  Dicolon.  The  Fasti  and  Epistles  of  Ovid,  the  Ele- 
gies of  TibuUus  and  Propertius,  which  are  composed  of 
dactylic  hexameters  and  dactylic  pentameters,  placed  alter- 
nately, are  Carmina  Dicola.  So  also  those  odes  which  are 
written  in  the  Sapphic  stanza :  the  third  of  the  first  book 
of  Horace,  which  contains  two  different  species  of  .chor- 
iambic verse,  and  numerous  others. 

1.  Herm.,  Doctr.  Elem.  Metr.,  3,  9. 

2.  Ramsay's  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  230,  seq. 


UNION    OF   DIFFERENT   KINDS    OF    VERSE.  201 

IV.  When  a  poem  contains  three  different  species  of 
verse,  it  is  called  Tricolon.  Of  this  we  have  an  example 
in  the  Alcaic  stanza  of  Horace,  which  is  composed  of  three 
different  kinds  of  verse. 

V.  Another  series  of  terms  has  been  devised  in  order  to 
point  out  the  intervals  after  which  the  first  species  of  verse 
used  in  any  poem  regularly  recurs. 

VI.  When  the  first  species  of  verse  regularly  recurs 
after  the  second  line,  the  poem  receives  the  epithet  of 
Distrophon. 

VII.  Thus,  poems  composed  in  elegiac  verse  are  called 
Carmina  Dicola  Distropha.  But  a  poem  in  the  Sapphic 
stanza,  although  Dicolon,  is  not  Distrophon,  because  the 
first  species  does  not  recur  regularly  until  after  the  fourth 
line. 

VIII.  When  the  first  species  of  verse  recurs  after  the 
third  line,  the  poem  receives  the  epithet  Tristrophon ;  after 
the  fourth  line,  Tetrastrophon ;  and  after  the  fifth  line,  Pen- 
tastrophon. 

IX.  According  to  this  system,  a  poem  written  in  the 
Sapphic  stanza  is  termed  Carmen  Dicolon  Tetrastrophon; 
in  the  Alcaic  stanza,  Carmen  Tricolon  Tetrastrophon ;  while 
the  Epitlialamium  of  Julia  and  Manlius,  in  Catullus,  is  Di- 
colon Pentastrophon. 

-X.  This  species  of  nomenclature,  however,  is  by  no 
means  perfect,  as  it  does  not  point  out  the  circumstances 
under  which  the  first  species  of  verse  is  repeated .  Thus,  in 
the  Alcaic  stanza,  the  first  two  lines  ^re  in  the  same  species 
of  verse,  the  third  and  fourth  are  different  from  this  and 
from  each  other ;  the  grammarians,  however,  call  a  poem  in 
this  stanza  Tricolon  Tetrastrophon.  But  if  a  stanza  of  four 
lines  is  arranged  in  such  a  manner  that  the  first  line  is  one 
species  of  verse,  the  second  and  the  third  different  from  the 
first,  but  the  same  with  each  other,  and  the  fourth  different 
from  any  of  the  preceding ;  or  if  the  first  and  second  are 
different  from  each  other,  the  third  and  fourth  different  from 


202  LATIN    ACCENTUATION. 

the  two  preceding,  but  the  same  with  each  other,  then,  in 
either  of  these  cases,  the  poem  must  be  called  Tricolon 
Tetrastrophon.  So  a  poem  in  the  Sapphic  stanza  is  called 
Dicolon  Tetrastrophon  ;  but  if  a  stanza  were  composed  con- 
taining one  Sapphic  line  followed  by  three  Adonics,  the 
poem  would  still  bear  the  same  appellation. 

SECTION  XL. 
LATIN  ACCENTUATION.' 

In  every  word  of  more  than  one  syllable,  one  is  distin- 
guished by  a  peculiar  stress  or  elevation  of  the  voice,  which 
is  called  accent^  of  which  those  that  precede  or  follow  are 
destitute.  The  syllable  so  distinguished  is  said  to  have 
the  acute  accent,  which  is  sometimes  marked  thus  (') ;  the 
grave  (^),  which  is  seldom  marked,  is  supposed  to  be  placed 
over  those  syllables  which  are  pronounced  without  that 
stress  of  the  voice  before  spoken  of.  The  circumflex,  (*)  or 
(~),  is  supposed  to  be  formed  by  a  combination  of  the  acute 
and  the  grave,  and  hence  is  usually  placed  over  contracted 
syllables. 

In  modern  languages,  the  accent,  when  it  falls  upon  a 
short  syllable,  has,  in  most  cases,  the  same  effect  as  if  it 
were  long ;  but  in  Latin  and  Greek,  accent  and  quantity 
were  distinguished  from  each  other  ;  and,  by  care  and  prac- 
tice, this  may  be  done  in  reading  those  languages. 

Words  of  two  syllables  have  in  Latin  the  accent  on  the 
first :  if  this  is  naturally  long,  as  in  Roma,  mater,  there  is 
no  difficulty ;  if  short,  as  homo,  pater,  we  must  endeavour 
to  give  the  first  syllable  that  percussion  of  the  voice  which 
constitutes  the  accent,  without  lengthening  the  vowel,  or 
yet  doubling  the  following  consonant. 

The  accent  never  falls  on  the  last  syllable  of  Latin  words, 
except  when  words  of  the  same  letters,  but  different  senses, 
are  to  be  distinguished  by  it :  e.  g.,  pon^,  behind  ;  ergd,  on 

1.  Zumpfs  Latin  Grammar,  Kcnrick's  edition,  p.  469,  aeqq. 


LATIN   ACCENTUATION.  203 

account  of;  to  distinguish  them  from  p6ne  (imper.  of  pono), 
and  ^rgo,  therefore. 

Words  of  three  syllables  or  more  have  the  accent  on  the 
last  syllable  but  one  (penultima)  when  it  is  long,  and  on  the 
last  but  two  (antepenultima)  when  the  penult  is  short ;  as, 
amdsse,  audisse^  imperdtor,  homines,  Constantinopolis.  No 
accent  is  in  Latin  thrown  farther  back  than  the  antepenult- 
ima. 

Some  words,  from  their  close  connexion  with  those  which 
precede  them,  are  pronounced  as  if  they  were  the  last  syl- 
lables of  those  words ;  e.  g.,  prepositions  when  they  are 
placed  after  their  cases,  and  ne,  que,  ve.  They  are  called 
enclitics;  and  the  last  syllable  of  the  word  to  which  they 
are  appended  always  has  the  acute  accent ;  as,  pectoribus- 
que. 

As  the  system  of  accents  in  Latin  is  so  simple,  no  ac- 
centual marks  are  used  except  the  circumflex,  which  is 
placed  over  some  contracted  syllables,  and  over  the  abla- 
tives of  the  first  declension  [musd,  poetd),  to  distinguish 
them  from  the  nominative.  The  Latins  themselves  do  not 
place  the  circumflex  over  the  genitive  ;  and  it  is  doubtful 
if  this  form  arose  from  contraction. 


% 


4tL 


APPENDIX. 


RELATIVE  VALUE  OF  THE  LATIN  POETS  AS  METRICAL 
AUTHORITIES.! 

I.  We  will  first  give  a  list  of  the  Latin  poets,  with  the 
dates  of  their  birth  and  death,  where  these  particulars  can 
be  ascertained,  and  then  a  statement  of  their  relative  value 
as  authorities  in  matters  of  a  metrical  nature. 


Livius  Andronicus  .      B.C. 

NiEVIUS 

Ennius        239   . 

Plautus 227   . 

C^CILIUS 

Pacuvius     ......  219   . 

Terentius 194   . 

Attius 170  . 

LuciLius 149   . 

Afranius 

Lucretius 96   . 

Catullus    ......  87  . 

ViRGILIUS 70    . 

HORATIUS 65    . 

TiBULLUS 59  (?) 

Propertius 54  (?) 

Ovmius 43   . 

Cornelius  Gallics. 
Pedo  Albinovanus. 
Puhlius  Syrus. 
Marcus  Manilius. 
Gratius  Faliscus. 
Aulus  Sabinus. 
CcBsar  Germanicus^ 


Flourished 

Died. 

.   240 

.     .   220 

.   235 

.     .   204 

.     .    169 

.     .    184 

.    179 

.    168 

.    130  (?) 

.    160 

.    139  0 

ilive  103) 

.    121    . 

.    103 

.    100  . 

• 

.    .     62 

.     46 

.     19      ' 

8 

.     20 

.      14 

A.D.  17 

I,  Ramsay^ s  Lat.  Pros.,  p.  vii.,  seqq. 
S 


206 


APPENDIX. 


Ph^drus  .... 
SiLius  Italicus  .  . 
Persius       .... 

LUCANUS         .       .       .       . 

juvenalis  .  .  .  . 
Martialis  .  .  .  . 
Petronius  Arbiter  . 
Valerius  Flaccus  . 
Statius  .... 
sulpitia     .... 


A.D. 


25 
34 
38 
40 
40 


61 


Avianus 

Dionysius  Cato  .... 
Serenus  Sammonicus  .  . 
Commodianus        .... 

Nemesianus 

Calpurnius 

Porphyrins 

Juvencus     

AusoNius 309 

Falconia 

Prudentius 348 

Claudianus 365  (1) 

Numatianus 

Paulinus 353 

Prosper  Aquitanus  .  .  . 
Sedulius       .     .     .     .     .     . 

Mamercus 

Sidonius  Apollinaris  .     .     .     438  (?) 

Draconiius 

Martianus  Capella     .     .     . 

Avitus 

Boethius 470  (1) 

Verrantius  Fortunatus    .     .     530 


Flouruhed 

48 


61 
69 

88 

160 
160 

265 
280 
284 
326 
337 

394 
392 
400 
416 


450 


456 
474 
490 


Died. 

100 

63 

65 

120 

101 


96 


212 


394 


431 
463 

474 

484 


524  (1) 


II.  In  the  above  list,  some  who  precede  Lucreuos  must  be 
thrown  out  of  consideration  altogether.  We  can  attach  no 
importance,  in  controverted  points,  to  these  early  bards,  of 
whom  nothing  has  descended  to  us  except  short  and  mutila- 
ted fragments.    It  is  well  known  that  these  scraps  are  all 


APPENDIX.  207 

collected,  at  second  hand,  from  the  old  grammarians  and 
others,  who  cited  them  for  the  purpose  of  proving  or  illus- 
trating particular  points,  which  seldom  have  any  reference 
to  quantity.  The  quotations,  it  would  seem,  were  frequently 
made  from  memory,  and  therefore  subject  to  every  kind  of 
change  and  corruption  in  the  first  instance,  in  addition  to  the 
subsequent  mutilations  which  they  suffered  in  transcription, 
arising  from  the  strange  and  uncouth  dialect  in  which  many 
of  them  were  expressed. 

III.  The  comic  dramatists,  Plautus  and  Terence,  must  also, 
in  strictness,  be  excluded.  We  are  still  comparatively  igno- 
rant of  the  laws  by  which  their  verse  is  regulated,  notwith- 
standing the  labours  of  such  men  as  Erasmus,  Scaliger,  Fa- 
ber.  Hare,  Bentley,  Hermann,  and  a  host  of  others. 

IV.  Lucretius  and  Catullus,  although  inferior  in  genius  to 
none  of  their  successors,  scarcely  occupy  the  first  rank  in 
the  estimation  of  the  prosodian,  because  they  may  be  said  to 
exhibit  the  language  in  its  transition  state,  at  a  period  when 
much  of  the  ancient  roughness  was  removed,  but  when  it  had 
not  yet  received  the  last  brilliant  polish. 

V.  Virgil,  Horace,  TibuUus,  Propertius,  and  Ovid  are  our 
great  standards  ;  yet  even  among  these  slight  differences  may 
be  perceived.  The  first  two  never  admit  the  double  i  in 
the  genitive  of  nouns  of  the  second  declension  in  turn  and  ius, 
which  is  common  in  Ovid ;  and  the  shortening  of  final  o  in 
verbs,  which  was  afterward  extended  to  nouns  and  adverbs, 
first  begins  to  appear  in  the  immediate  successors  of  Virgil. 

VI.  Of  the  above,  Propertius  is  the  least  valuable,  on  ac- 
count of  the  small  number  and  imperfections  of  the  MSS., 
which  have,  in  many  passages,  baffled  the  acuteness  of  the 
most  practised  editors. 

Vn.  Next  follows  a  group  of  seven,  all  of  Uttle  moment. 
After  these  we  come  to  Phaedrus,  whose  fables  are  now  gen- 
erally received  as  authentic ;  but  the  text  is  derived  from  one 
or  two  indifferent  MSS.,  and  is,  consequently,  in  many  places 
confused  and  unsatisfactory. 

VIII.  With  regard  to  those  who  come  after,  up  to  the  end 
of  the  first  century,  it  may  be  laid  down  as  a  rule,  that  their 
authority  is  admissible  in  points  where  we  can  obtain  no 
information  from  purer  sources,  but  must  never  be  placed 


208  APPENDIX. 

in  competition  with  that  of  the  great  masters  who  went 
before. 

IX.  All  the  successors  of  Statins  must  be  regarded  as  of 
little  value  for  matters  of  prosody,  except  Calpumius,  Auso- 
nius,  and  Claudian,  the  latter  of  whom  is  not  more  remark- 
able for  the  purity  of  his  diction  than  for  the  false  gUtter  of 
his  style. 


INDEX. 


A.  final 66-68 

A     "    in  numerals        n.  3  on  68 
A  ending  \st  member  of  cam- 
pound  words 43 

A  in  sing-,  increment  of  1st 

declension 49 

A  in  sing,  increment  of  Sd  de- 
clension       50 

A  in  plural  increment  of  nouns     59 
A  in  increment  of  verbs     .     .     61 
A  the  preposition  in  composi- 
tion   40 

A  in  Greek  compounds  n.  on  43 
A  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in 

es  and  e      ...      n.  2  on  68 
Ab,  the  preposition  in  compo- 
sition      41 

Abicit,  abici 126 

Abiegni  as  ab-yegni  .  .  .  120 
Abiete  a*  ab-yete  .  .  .  ,119 
Abscidi  and  abscidi  ...  33 
Academla  .  .  .  n,  2  on  22 
Acatalectic  verses     ....  144 

Accent,  Latin 202 

Acephalous  verses  ....  145 
Achille  ....  n.  1  on  69 
Ad,  preposition  in  composition  41 
Adicit  (adjicit),  adici,  4-c.  .  126 
Adjectives  ending  in  -acus, 
-icus,  (IJ-c,  quantity  of  pe- 
nult of 99 

Adonic  verse 146 

Ador n.  1  on  57 

Aeta n.  on  25 

^gaeon 57 

Molic    dialect,   pronunciation 

of n.  2  on  157 

Molic  pentameter  .  .  ,  .151 
Afranius,  metrical  authority  of  206 
Agnitum    .     .     .     .     .     .    37,  40 

Agri-cultura 45 

Ai  in  genitive  of  \st  declension 
explained    .     .     .     .     n.  on  17 

Ai,  quantity  of 19 

S2 


Page 

Aid  (trisyllabic  and  dissylla- 
bic)     19 

Aio  explained      .     .      n.  2  on  19 
Al,  nouns  ending  in,  incre- 
ment of 51  and  n. 

Alcaic  verse  (the  greater)  .  .194 
"  "  (minor)  .  .  .191 
"  enneasyllabic  .  .  .167 
"  decasyllabic  ....  191 
"  hendecasyllabic  .  .  .  194 
"  stanza  ....  194-5 
Alcmanian  tetrameter  .     .     .  140 

Alexandrea 21 

Alius 18 

Alterius     ....      n.  1  on  18 

Ambe 23 

Ambitus  and  ambitus 

25,  35,  n.  on  40 
An,   Greek  accus.  from  nom. 

a n.  2  on  85,  87 

An,  Greek  accus.  from  nom.  as     85 

Anapast 162 

Anapastic  verses     .     .     .    161-5 
"  dimeter  .     .     .     .163 

"  "        catalectic  .  164 

"         monometer  .     .     .163 

Anas 90 

Anceps,  ancipes,  ^c.     n.  1  on  49 
Antea,  <SfC.,  formation  of  n.  1  on  66 

Antithesis 125 

Aperio,  quantity  of  initial  syl- 
lable   127 

Apharesis 122 

Apocope     .     . ' 124 

Appendix,  increment  of 

n.  1  on  56 
Ar,  nouns  in,  increment  of 

66  and.  n. 
Arabia,  quantity  of  1st  syllable  128 

Archaisms 121 

Archilochian    iambic    dimeter 

hypermeter 167 

Archilochian  heptameter     .     .190 
Ariete  as  ar-yete    .     .     .     .119 


210 


INDEX. 


Page 

Aristophanes,  metre  much  used 

by 174 

As  final 62,  89 

As,  Greek  nouns  in,  increment 

of 62 

As,  Greek  nominative  ...  90 
As,  "  accusative  plural  .  90 
Asclepiadic  verse  (minor)  .  .182 
A.T  in  contracted  preterites  .  81 
Atreides,  Atrides  .  n.  2  on  98 
Attius,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     206 

Ausonius,  value  as  metrical 

authority 208 

Authority  in  quantity     .     .     *     15 

B. 

B  final 80 

Bacchiac  verse 197 

Base  in  metre 141 

Bebryx,  increment  of    ...     56 

Bibi, /ram  bibo 32 

Biduum,  4-c 46  and  n. 

Bigae,  cf-c n.  3  on  45 

Bimus,  4-c.  .  .  .  n.  6  on  45 
Bobus  and  bubus  .  n.  1  on  48 
Brachycatalectic  verse  .  .  .  144 
Britto,  increment  of     ...     57 


C. 


81 


.  .  206 
.  .  101 
.  .  102 
.  .  104 
106-107 
.  .  18 


C  final 

Caecilius,   value   as   metrical 

authority     .     . 
Casura      .     .     . 

"       kinds  of 

"       rules  for 

"       power  of 
Gains,  trisyllabic 
Callinus,  inventor  of  elegy     .  156 
Calpurnius,  value  as  metrical 

authority 208 

Catalectic  verses      ....  144 
Catullus,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     207 

Causidieus 40 

Cave,  quantity  of    .      n.  2  on  70 
Cecidi  and  cecidi    ....    31 

Celtiber 60,  88 

Censltum,  censitor,  <f-c. 

n.  2  on  36 

Cholianibus 171 

Chorea  and  chorea  ....     20 
Choriambic  verses    .     .     179-188 


Page 
Choriambic  pentameter      .     .183 
"           tetrameter  .     .     .183 
"          Asclepiadic       te- 
trameter       182 

Choriambic  tetrameter  catalec- 
tic       161 

Choriambic  trimeter  acatalectic  180 
"               "       catalectic    181 
"          dimeter  acatalectic  180 
Ciris,  value   as  metrical  au- 
thority     n.  on  77 

Citum,  citum,  and  compounds    35 
Claudian,   value  as  metrical 

authority 208 

Cognitum,  <^c 37,  40 

Compendi-facio 45 

Compound  words,  quantity  of    39 
"  metres    .     .     192-196 

Concitus 34-35 

Conjicio 126 

Conjugations,  ancient  form  of 

n.  4  on  23 

Connubium 40 

Conopeum  and  Conopium 

n.  1  on  22 

Consonants 13 

Contracted  syllables     .     .,   23-24 
Contraction  of  ea,    .     .     .     .  1 14 

"  ei     .     .     .     .  115 

"  "  eo    .    .    .     .  115 

"  "  ia     .     .     .     .  116 

"  ii     .    .     .     .  116 

"  io     .     .     .     .  116 

"  "  iu     .     .     .     .  116 

"  00    .     .     .     .  117 

"  ee    .     .     .     .  117 

Corcodilus  and  crocodilus     .  126 
Cretic  verse    .     .     .     .     .     .196 

Cui  (dissyllabic)      ....     74 

Cur n.  1  on  88 

D. 

Dfitud 80 

Dactylic  verses    .     .     .     145-161 

"  "      casura  in      .  159 

"        versificaMon,    origin 

of      .     .     ..mmL-     •     .  167 

Dactylic  hexameter  .     .     .     .   167 

Mcturus  .   161 

"        Pnapean   ....  160 

"       pentameter      .     .     .151 

"  "  rules  for  162 

"  ^olic     .  151 


INDEX. 


211 


Page 

Dactylic  PhalcEcian 'pentameter  150 
"  tetrameter  a  priore  .  149 
"  "        aposteriore  149 

"  "        Meiurus    .  148 

"  "        catalectic   .  148 

"       trimeter      .     .     .     .  147 
"  "      with  a  base  .  147 

"  "       hypercatalec- 

tic 147 

Dactylic  trimeter  catalectic     .  146 

"       dimeter       .     .     .     .145 

Dactylico-iambic  metre       .     .192 

De,  preposition  in  composition    40 

Bedi  from  do 32 

Dejero 40 

Deponent  verbs    .     .       n.  1  on  60 
Derivatives,  quantity  of     .     .     37 
"  "         "  excep- 

tions to  .  .  .  n.  3  on  37,  39 
Desiderative  verbs  in  -urio  .  100 
Di,  preposition  in  composition    40 

Diaresis 121 

Diana n.  on  19 

Diastole 128 

Dicare,  dicere 38 

Dicolon 200 

Dionaeus,  remarks  on  quantity 

of  SB 25 

Diphthoyigs 13 

"           quantity  of     .     .     25 
"          erroneously  rank- 
ed as 26 

Dipodia 141 

Dirimo n.  on  40 

Dirutum n.  on  35 

DTsertus n.  on  40 

Distrophon 201 

Diu n.  1  on  79 

Do,  increment  of 

61-62,  and  n.  1  on  61 

Donee n.  1  on  81 

Double  letters 13 

Duo n.  1  on  47 


"E  final 68-72 

E     "     of  adveJ^  ....     70 
E     "     "  mon^kables     .     .     71 
E  in  Greek  neuter  plural  .     .     70 
E  in  increment  of  3d  declen- 
sion       52-54 

E  in  contracted  gen.  and  dat. 
of  5th  declension  .      n.  1  on  69 


E  in  plural  increment  of  nouns  59 
E  in  verbal  increment  ...  62 
E  before  R  {in  verbs)    ...     62 

E        "        RAM,  RIM,  RO  .      .      .      63 

E  terminating  1st  member  of 

compound  words  ....  44 
E,  preposition  in  composition  40 
E  long  from  Greek  ec  .  .  .  21 
E  in  imperative  of  verbs  of  2d 

conjugation  .  .  n.  2  on  70 
Ea,  Greek  accusative  from  eus     22 

Ectasis 128 

Ecthlipsis 112 

Ego,  quantity  of  final  syllable 

n.  1  on  78 

Eheu n.  1  on  20 

Ei  of  5th  declension  .  n.  on  17 
El  in  Hebrew  names  .  .  53,  83 
Elegiambic  measure      .     .     .193 

Elegiac  distich 155 

Elegy,  origin  of  {e?,eyoc)  .  .156 
Elision  of  final  vowels  .  .  .  108 
"  o/  M  final  and  its  vow- 
el sometimes  neglected  .  .113 
Elision,  effect  of  in  poetry  .  108 
"  at  the  end  of  a  verse  113 
"  of  the  vowel  of  ne  109 
it  it  <(  (( 

sometimes  neglected  .     .     .110 
Elision  of  a  short  voioel  neg- 
lected in  Virgil     .     .     .     .112 
Elision  in  compound  words    .     24 
"       of  final  s 

n.  2  on  108,  107,  108 
Elision,  rules  for  .  .  .  .113 
Endo /or  in  .  .  .  n.  3  on  23 
Ennehemimeris  .  .  n.  1  on  102 
Ennius,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     206 

Eos,  Cheek  genitive  from  lEus     22 

Epenthesis 123 

Epichoriambic  verse      .     .     .183 
"            trimeter  catalec- 
tic      184 

Epichoriambic  tetrameter  .  .187 
Er,  nouns  in,  increment  of   53-54 

Ergo n.  1  on  77 

-erunt  of  preterite,  shortening 
of  penult  in      .  63,  n.  1  on  127 

Erutum n.  on  35 

Es  final  .  .  ,  90,  n.  2  on  90 
Es  of  Greek  nouns  ....  92 
Es  Gi-eek  masc.  singular  .    53-54 


212 


INDEX. 


Page 

Es/romedo  ...  n.  1  on  91 
"Ea  from  sum,  and  compounds 

n.  1  on  91 
EiJs,  adjectives  in    ....     21 
Eus,  Greek  proper  nam^s  in  .     26 
"     according  to  Latin  de- 
clension        26 

Excitus 34-35 

F. 

Fac n.  3  on  81 

Facio,  verbs  compounded  with  44 
Faliscan  verse  .  .  n.  1  on  148 
Fame,  quantity  offimal  syllable 

n.  1  on  69 

Far n.  1  on  88 

Feety  metrical 131 

"  "         table  of .     138-139 

"  simple  ....  132-135 
"  compound  .  .  .  135-138 
"     isochronous     .     .     142-143 

Fere 71 

Fidi  from  findo 32 

Figures  of  Prosody       101-131 

Final  syllables 66 

**  "         of  a  verse      .     97 

Fio,  quantity  of  penult      n.  on  16 

*'    verbs  compounded  o/ .     .     44 

Fluviorum  as  fluv-yorum      .  120 

Foris n.  1  on  94 

Fortuitus 120 

Fur n.  1  on  28 

Fuvi,  an  old  perfect      .     .     .123 

G. 

Galliambus 175 

Gerunds  in   do,  quantity  of 
■  final  syllable    .     .      n.  3  on  76 

Glyconic  verse 180 

Gratis n.  1  on  94 

H. 
H  a  mere  breathing      .  14,  16,  27 
H  dropped  between  two  vowels     24 
Hannibal  .     .     .     n.  1  on  51,  82 

Hemistich 144 

Hephthemimeris  .  .  n.  1  on  102 
Heroic  ccesural  pause    .     .     .159 

"      verse 158 

Hexameters  most  ancient 

n.  2  on  157 
Hexameters  introduced  into  the 

Latin  by  Ennius       .     .     .156 
Hie  and  hoc  ...    82  and  n.  1 


Hipponactic  tetrameter      .     .174 
"  trimeter     .     .     .172 

Hodie 127 

Horace,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     207 

Hymen 53 

Hyper'catalectic  verses  .     .     .145 
Hypermeter  verses   ....  143 

I. 

\  as  a  consonant,  and  sounded 

a^  initial  y 119 

I  terminating  \st  member  of 

compound  words  ....     45 
I  in  singular  increment  of  3d 

declension 54 

I  in  plural  increment  of  nouns    59 
I  in  verbal  increment    ...     63 

Ifnal 72 

I  long  from  Greek  ei     .     .     .     21 
I  Greek  vocative  of  3d  declen- 
sion   72 

I  final  lengthened  by  arsis 

n.  1  on  72 
I  in  2d  fut.  ind.  and  perf  subj. 

65  and  n.  1 
I  in  Greek  dative  Sd  declension  72 
Iambic  verses      .     .     .     165-176 

"       trimeter 169 

172 
168 

"       scazon 171 

"       tetrameter     .     .     .     .173 
"  '  "  catalectic    .  174 

"       dimeter 167 

"  "       acephalous      .  166 

"  "       hypermeter      .  167 

"  "       catalectic    .     .166 

lamhico-dactylic  metre       .     .193 

Iambus,  origin  of  name     .     .133 

Iber 50,  86 

Ibi n.  2  on  73 

Ibidem 46 

Idem n.  2  on  45 

Iesus 97 

I  LIS,  adjectives  in^uantity  of 

penult    .     •HB   .     .     •     99 
In,  preposition^fffmposition    41 
Increment  of  nouns  .     ...     48 
"               "        1st  and  2d 
declension  ...     50  and  n.  2 
Increment  of  nouns,  3d  declen- 
sion      60-59 


comic    . 
catalectic 


INDEX. 


213 


Increment,  plural  of  nouns    59-60 

"         of  verbs  .     .     .    60-66 

Indu      .     .     .     .    79  and  n.  2,  23 

Injicit  (illicit) 126 

Innuba 40 

Intjs,  adjectives  in  .  .  .  99-100 
lo  and  io  .  .  .  .  20  and  n.  2 
Ionic  verses    ....     188-190 

"     amajore 188 

"     a  minore 189 

Is  in  verbs  of  Uh  conjugation  93 
Is  in  2d  fut.  ind.  and  perf. 

subj n.  2  on  94 

Is  final 92 

Isochronous  feet 142 

It  in  contracted  preterites  .     .     81 

ItaHa 128 

Iter  and  Itiner  .  n.  1  on  48-49 
Itum,  supines  in  .  36  and  n.  2 
lus,  genitive  in  .  .  .  n.  on  18 
lus,  proper  names  in  .  n.  on  18 
Ivi  in  the  preterite  ....  64 
Ix,  increment  of  nouns  in      .     55 


.  14 
.  27 
27-28 
.  126 


J  not  a  double  consonant 
J,  vowel  long  before 
Jacio,  compounds  of     . 
Jecur,  increments  of 

n.  1  on  48-49 
Juvencus,  valu£  as  metrical 
authority     .     .     .     .     n.  on  47 


Kdjxavdpog 


K. 


L. 


n.  2  on  28 


82 


h  final 

Labare,  labi 

Lar,  quantity  of  a  in      n.  1  on  89 

Legare,  legere 38 

Leonine  verses 168 

Letters 13 

Liquefacio      ......     44 

Liquids 13 

Livius  Andronicus,  value  as 

metrical  authority  .  .  .206 
Logaoedic  verses  -.  .  190-192 
Lucema /rom  luceo  .  n.  on  38 
Lucilius,  value  as  metrical  au- 

thonty 206 


Lucretius,  value  as  metrical 

authority 207 

Lucrifacio  and  lucrlfio      .     .  45 

Ludi-magister 45 

M. 

M  final  short 84 

M     "     elided 84 

M     "        "      {the  reason)  ^ 

n.  1  on  84 
M     "    not  elided    ....     84 
M     "     in  the  best  writers  eli- 
ded except  in  compounds  of 
com  (con)  and  circum  .     ,     85 
Maeotis,  quantity  of  1st  sylla- 
ble      n.  on  25 

Maledicus 40 

Mamercus,  value  as  metrical 

authority     .     .     .     .     n.  on  47 
Maragdus  {MdpaySoc)    n.  2  on  28 
Martianus  Capella,  value  as 
metrical  authority       n.  1  on  89 

Mas,  maris 51 

Mastix,    -Igis,    and  mastix, 

-ichis 55 

MeiUnis  tetrameter  .     .     .     .148 

Metathesis 125 

Metre,  definition  of  .     .     .     .140 
"      classification  of       140-141 
Mihi,  sibi,  tibi,  4-c.  .      n.  2  on  73 
Modo,  quantity  of  final  syllable 

n.  1  on  78 
Molestus  from  moles 

n.  3  on  37-38 

Monocolon 200 

Mutes 13 

"      and  liquids    .     .     .    29-30 

N. 

'^  final 85 

Naevius,  value  as  metrical  aun 

thority 206 

Nasidienus  as  Nasid-yenus  .  120 

Ne,  elision  in 109 

Necesse,  nefas,  4-c.  n.  3  on  44 
Nenu  .....  n.  2  on  79 
Nequeo  ....  n.  3  on  44 
Nequis,  nequam,  cfc.  n.  3  on  44 
Nescis  .     .     .     .  n.  4  on  93,  100 


O. 


0  final .     .     .     . 
O  ^«  composition 


74-79 
.     47 


214 


INDEX. 


Page 

O  in  Greek  cases  ....  56 
O  in  "  nominatives  .  .  75 
O  in  singular  increment  of  M 

declension 56 

O  terminating  1st  member  of 

compound  Greek  words  .  .  47 
O  terminating  1st  member  of 

compound  Latin  words  .  .  47 
O  in  plural  increment  of  nouns  59 
O  in  the  gerund  .  .  n.  3  on  76 
O  in  increment  of  verbs  .  .  66 
O  of  adverbs  .  .  .  n.  4  on  76 
Ob,  preposition  in  composition 

41,42 

Objicio  (obicio) 126 

Octo 78-79 

Octonarius 173 

Odyssey  translated  in  Satur- 

nian  verse 199 

Ohe 19  a7id  n.,  71 

Olus,  diminutives  in    .     .     .100 

Omitto 127 

On,  Greek  singular  ...  87 
On  (QN),  Greek  gen.  plural  .  85 
Ophites  versus  .  .  .  n.  on  157 
Or,  Greek  nouns  in  ...  57 
Orion    ....    23  and  n.  1,  57 

Oafinal 95 

Ovid,  value   as  metrical  au- 
thority     207 


Pacuvius,  value  as  metrical 

authority 206 

Pseonius  and  Paeonius 

n.  2  on  116 

Palus 96  and  n.  2 

Par,  paris,  and  compounds 

51,  n.  1  on  89 

Paragage 124 

Parietibus  as  par-yetibus      .119 

Parcsmiac 162,  164 

Patefacio 44 

Patronymics,  quantity  of  pe- 
nult of  98-99 

Pejero 40 

Peleldes  and  Pelides     n.  2  on  98 

Penes 92 

Pentadius,  de  adventu  veris 

n.  1  on  157 

Pentastrophon 201 

Penthemimeris    .     .    n.  1  on  102 
PenuLtima 15 


Page 

Penultima  of  words,  quantity 

of 98-100 

Pepedi 31 

Per,  preposition  in  composition  41 
Perfects,  old,  how  formed  .  .  123 
Phaedrus,   value  as    metrical 

authority 207 

Phalcecian  dactylic  pentameter 

150,  191 
PhalcBcian  hendecasyllaMc  .  191 
Pherccratic  verse  .  .  .  .181 
Placare,  placere      ....     38 

Platea 21 

Plautus,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     207 

Pluvi,  old  perfect     ....  123 
Poets,  Latin,  relative  value  as 
metrical  authorities   .     .     .  205 

Polypus 97 

Porsonian  pause     .     .     .     .171 

Position 27 

Possis n.  4  on  93 

Postea n.  1  on  67 

Prae,  preposition  in  composi- 
tion before  a  vowel    .   25  and  n. 
Prepositions  in  composition  40—43 
Preterites,  reduplicating   .     .     31 
"  of  two  syllables 

32  and  n. 
"        in  ui  anciently  had 

u  long 124 

Priamides 128 

Priapean  verse 160 

Pro,  the  preposition  in  compo- 
sition      42-43 

Pronuba 40 

Propago 43 

Propertius,  value  as  metrical 

authority 207     j 

P*ropino ^    I 

Prosody 13     * 

Prosodial  rules,  origin  of      .15 

Prosthesis 122 

I*rudentius,  roZue  as  metrical 

authority  ...  n.  1  on  21 
Puta  .  .  r  ,  .  n.  2  on  67 
Putrefacio      .V    ....    44    i 


Q,  sound  of    .' 14    : 

Quadngee 45 

Quando     ....      n.  1  on  47 
Quandoque 47 


INDEX. 


215 


Page 

Quandoquidem 47 

Quantity,  definition  of  .     .     .     14 

Quasi n.  1  on  72 

Quatuor,  4-c 129 

Quia,  final  syllable  of  n.  3  on  67 
Quivis,  4-c.  .  ,  .  n.  1  on  46 
Quomodo  ....  n.  3  on  78 
Quotidianus  .  .  .  n.  4  on  46 
Quotidie    ....      n.  4  on  46 

R. 

Rfind 87 

Rare — ^facio,  tmesis  in  .  .125 
Re  in  composition  ....  41 
Re,  vocative  from  nominative 

in  ER 126 

Re  made  long  in  religio,  djf-c.  128 
Recensitum    .     .    .      n.  2  on  36 

Refert 41  and  n. 

Regula /rom  rego  .  .  n.  on  38 
Reperit,  repulit,  and  retulit 

128-129 
Rutum  and  compounds     .     .     35 


S  final 80 

S     "     elided 108 

Sal,  salis  .     .     .    51,  n.  1  on  83 

Sandix,  -icis 56 

Sanscrit  analogies  in  Latin  .    17, 
18,  33,  45,  n.  1  on  46,  n.  2  on  83 
Sapphic  verses    .     .     .     184-185 
"  "      connexion    be- 

tween 3d  and  Uh  line  in     .  185 
Sapphic  verses,  elision  in  .     .186 

"       greater 187 

Sappho,  inventress  of  Molic 

pentameter 151 

Satin' n.  2  on  86 

Saturnian  verse 199 

Sc,  sp,  SQ,  ST,  4-c.,  initial  .  28 
Scamander  and  Camander 

n.  2  on  28 

Scanning .  144 

Scazon 171 

Scidi  from  scindo  ....  32 
Scio  and  nescio  ....  75 
Se,  preposition  in  composition  40 
Sedare,  sedere,  sidere,  sedes    38 

Selibra 44 

Semisopitus        40 

Semivoioels 13 

Senarius    .......  169 


Page 

Serpen tmi  versus  .  .  n.  on  157 
Sidon,  increment  of  ...  57 
Sis  from  sies  .     .     .      n.  3  on  93 

Sm  initial 28 

Smaragdus  and  Maragdus 

n.  2  on  28 

Sol n.  2  on  83 

Solvo,  soluo  .     .     .      n.  3  on  35 

Sotadic  verse 188 

Spondaic  tetrameter      .     .     .149 

Statim 100 

Statira n.  1  on  100 

Statum,  quantity  of  penult  of    34 

Steti  and  stiti 33 

Sub,  preposition  in  composition  41 
Subjicio  (subicio)  .  .  .  .126 
Supellex,  increment  of 

n.  1  on  48^9 
Supines  of  two  syllables  33  and  n. 
"  "  "       short, 

as  cltum,  4-c 34 

Supines,  polysyllabic     .     .    35-37 

"        contracted        n.  1  on  37 

Syllable,  definition  of   .     .     .     13 

"        length  of  ....     14 

Synceresis 114 

"  in    compounds    of 

semi 119 

Synalcepha     .     .     .     .     .     .108 

"  absorbs  2  syllables  108 

"  confounded        by 

Quintilian   with  synceresis 
and  ecthlipsis  .     .     n.  1  on  107 

Synapheia 130 

"         vnth  elision      .     .131 

Syncope 122-123 

Syphax,  -acis  ...  52  and  n. 
Systole 126 

^yzygy i4i 

T. 

T:  final 80 

Tantidem  ...  n.  2  on  46 
Tenuia  as  ten-via  .    .    .     .120 

Tepefacio 44 

Terence,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     207 

Tetrastrophon 201 

Tiblcen      ....      n.  1  on  45 

Tim,  adverbs  in 100 

Tibullus,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     207 

Tmesis      .     .       124,  n.  I  on  125 


216 


INDEX. 


Page 

Trans  in  composition   ...     42 

Tricolon 201 

Triemimeris  .     .     .     n.  1  on  102 

Tristrophon 201 

Trochaic  verses  .     .     .     176-179 

"         tetrameter  catalectic  177 

"         dimeter      .     .     .     .177 

"  "       catalectic     .  177 

Tubicen    ....      n.  1  on  45 

Tuli 32 

U. 

U  sounded  as  W,  and  not  form- 
ing a  diphthong  with  follow- 
ing vowel 26 

U  sounded  as  V,  and  used  as 

a  consonant 120 

U  in  \st  member  of  compound 

words 46 

U  in  singular  increment  of 

nouns 58-59 

U  in  plural  increment  of  nouns     59 
U  in  increment  of  verbs     .     .     66 

V  final 79 

U,  contracted  dative  of  4th  de- 
clension .  .  .  n.  1  on  79 
Ubi  and  compounds  n.  2  on  73,  74 
XJbicunque  .  .  .  n.  5  on  46 
Ubique  and  ubivis  .  a  5  on  46 
Ulus,  diminutives  in  .  .  .100 
Ulysse  {vocative)  .  n.  1  on  69 
Urio,  quantity  of  verbs  end- 
ing in 39,  100 

Urus,  future  participle  in      .     66 

Vafinal 95 

Us,  genitive  of  4th  declension, 

how  formed  .  .  n.  3  on  96 
Uti  and  compounds  .  .  .  73-74 
Utum,  supines  in 

36  and  n.  2,  n.  3  on  36 


V. 

V,  tise  of  .     .     .         ...     14 

Value  of  Latin  poets  as  met- 
rical authorities    .     .     205-208 
Vemens,  4-c.  .     .     .    n.  2  on  118 

Verse,  union  of  different  kinds 

of 200 

Verse,  Latin,  how  denominated  144 
Viden'  .     .     127,  n.  2  on  86,  109 

Vin'  for  visne 109 

Virgil,  value  as  metrical  au- 
thority     207 

Volvo,  voluo  .     .    .      n.  3  on  36 

Vowels 13 

Vowel  before  another  vowel    .     16 

((  a  ((  ((       j^ 

Greek  words    .     .     .     .     .     20 

Vowel  before  h 16 

Vulteius    ....      n.  2  on  18 

X. 

X,  double  letter,  equivalent  to 

what 13 

"X.  initial 28 

Y. 

Y  final 72,80 

Y  terminating  1st  member  of 
compound  words  ....    45 

Y  in  increment  of  nouns   .     .  54 

Yi  as  diphthong 26 

Yafinal 92 

Yx,  increment  of  nouns  in     .  55 

Z. 

Z,  double  letter,  equivalent  to 

what 13 

Z  initial 28 

Z,  reason  for  preceding  vowel 
remaining  short  before 

n. 3  on  28 


THE   END. 


ANTHON's    series    of    classical    WORKl 
FOR     SCHOOLS    AND    COLLEGES. 


In  presenting  the  volumes  of  this  series,  as  far  as  it  has  been  comple- 
ted, to  the  notice  of  the  public,  the  subscribers  beg  leave  to  say  a  few 
words  respecting  its  general  features,  and  the  advantages  that  are  to  re- 
sult from  it  both  to  students  and  instructers. 

The  plan  proposed  is  to  give  editions  of  all  the  authors  usually  read  in 
our  schools  and  colleges,  together  with  such  elementary  and  subsidiary 
works  as  may  be  needed  by  the  classical  student  either  at  the  commence- 
ment, or  at  particular  stages,  of  his  career. 

The  editions  of  the  Classical  authors  themselves  will  be  based  on  the 
latest  and  most  accurate  texts,  and  will  be  accompanied  by  English  com- 
mentaries, containing  everything  requisite  for  accurate  preparation  on 
the  part  of  the  student  and  a  correct  understanding  of  the  author.  The 
fear  entertained  by  some  instructers,  lest  too  copious  an  array  of  notes 
may  bribe  the  student  into  habits  of  intellectual  sloth,  will  be  found  to  be 
altogether  visionary.  That  part  of  the  series  which  contains  the  text- 
books for  schools  must,  in  order  to  be  at  all  useful,  have  a  more  ex- 
tensive supply  of  annotations  than  the  volumes  intended  for  college  lec- 
tures ;  and  when  these  last  make  their  appearance,  the  system  of  com- 
menting adopted  in  them  will  not  fail  to  meet  with  the  approbation  of  all. 

The  advantages,  then,  which  this  series  promises  to  confer  are  the 
following  :  the  latest  and  best  texts  ;  accurate  commentaries,  putting  the 
student  and  instructer  in  possession  of  the  opinions  of  the  best  philolo- 
gists ;  together  with  all  such  subsidiary  information  as  may  serve,  not 
only  to  throw  light  upon  the  meaning  of  the  author,  but  also  to  give 
rise  in  the  young  student  to  habits  of  correct  thinking  and  to  the  for- 
mation of  a  correct  taste. 

Many  of  the  works  at  present  used  in  our  Classical  schools  are  either 
reprints  of  antiquated  editions,  swarming  with  errors,  not  merely  in  the 
typography,  but  in  the  matter  itself;  or  else  they  are  volumes,  fair  to 
the  view,  indeed,  as  far  as  manual  execution  is  concerned,  but  either 
supplied  with  meager  and  unsatisfactory  commentaries,  or  without  any 
commentaries  at  all.  These  are  the  works  that  drive  students  to  the 
use  of  translations,  and  thus  mar  the  fairest  prospects  of  youthful 
scholarship,  producing  an  infinitely  stronger  habit  of  intellectual  in- 
dolence than  the  most  copious  commentary  could  engender.  Indeed, 
to  place  this  matter  in  its  proper  light,  and  to  show,  within  a  very 
brief  compass,  how  much  good  the  projected  series  is  about  to  ac- 
complish, it  may  be  sufficient  to  state,  that  the  printed  translations  oi 
those  authors  whose  works  have  been  thus  far  published  in  the  series 
.'  meet  now  with  a  much  less  ready  sale  than  formerly  ;  and  are  seldom, 
if  ever,  seen  in  the  hands  of  those  whose  instructers  have  the  good 
sense  and  judgment  to  give  a  decided  preference  to  the  volumes  edited 
by  Professor  Anthon. 

The  publishers  take  the  liberty  to  subjoin  a  few  of  the  communica- 
tions relative  to  the  pubUshed  volumes  of  the  series,  which  they  have 
received  from  gentlemen  of  high  classical  reputation  in  diiferent  parts  of 
the  country. 

Harper  &  Brothers, 

Mew-York,  May,  1839.  82  cliff-street. 


ANTHON'S  SERIES  OF  CLASSICAL  WORKS 
FOR  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES. 


From  H.  Humphrey,  D.D.,  Presi- 
dent of  Amherst  College,  at  Am- 
herst, Mass. 

1  am  very  happy  to  see  that  you  have 
undertaken  to  furnish  uniform  editions 
of  the  Latin  classics  for  the  use  of  our 
grammar  schools  and  higher  seminaries 
of  learning.  Professor  Anthon  deserves 
and  will  receive  the  thanks  of  the  public 
for  the  labour  which  he  has  so  judicious- 
ly and  successfully  bestowed  upon  Sal- 
lust,  CcBsar,  and  Cicero.  The  explan- 
atory notes  or  commentaries  are  more  co- 
pious and  comprehensive  than  those  of 
any  other  edition  I  have  seen,  and  much 
better  adapted  to  the  wants  of  young  stu- 
dents. Among  the  most  valuable  of 
these  notes  are  those  which  divert  atten- 
tion to  the  beautiful  uses  of  the  moods 
and  tenses,  and  explain  the  delicate 
\  shades  of  meaning  and  peculiar  beauties 
that  depend  upon  them,  which  our  lan- 
guage often  expresses  imperfectly  and 
with  difficulty,  and  which  young  learn- 
ers rarely  regard.  The  explanations  of 
the  force  and  meaning  of  the  particles 
are  also  very  useful. 

The  historical,  geographical,  and  oth- 
er indexes  are  also  highly  valuable,  fur- 
nishing the  student,  as  they  do,  with  fe- 
licitous ilhistrations  of  the  text,andmuch 
general  information. 

The  text  seems  to  be  settled  with  much 
care  and  ability.  The  editions  adopted 
as  the  basis  or  referred  to  as  authority 
are  those  in  the  highest  repute  among 
scholars.  The  typographical  execution 
is  very  fine,  and  this  is  a  high  merit. 
The  wretched  reprints  of  foreign  editions 
of  the  classics,  got  up  in  cheap  offices, 
on  wretched  paper,  with  incompetent 
proof-readers  aiid  no  editors,  to  which, 
until  within  a  very  few  years,  our  stu- 
dents have  been  univcrsiMy  condemned, 
have,  by  taking  them  y^uvg,  been  as 
fucccssful  in  making  them  uncertain  and 
inaccurate  scholars  a*  if  that  had  been 
one  of  the  main  objects  of  the  publishers. 
School  books  of  oil  kinds,  instead  of  be- 
ing the  uwrst  (as  they  often  are),  should 
be  the  most  carefully  printed  book»  we 
have. 

H.  Humphrey. 


From  the  Rt.  Rev.  Bishop  M'Il- 
VAiNE,  President  of  Kenyon  Col- 
lege, at  Gambler,  Ohio. 

I  anticipate  the  greatest  benefits  to  our 
schools  and  colleges  from  the  admirable 
edition  of  the  classics  which  you  are  now 
publishing,  under  the  superiritendence 
and  illustrated  by  the  copious  and  learn- 
ed notes  of  Professor  Anthon.  What 
your  accomplished  editor  has  aimed  at 
in  his  Horace,  CcBsar,  and  other  volumes 
of  the  series,  few  can  have  been  much 
connected  with  classical  institutions  in 
this  country  without  learning  to  be  pre- 
cisely the  one  nee.dfid  thing  to  their  stu- 
dents. The  object  is  most  satisfactorily 
attained.  The  needed  books  we  have, 
so  far  as  your  series  has  yet  been  pub- 
lished ;  and  as  to  what  are  yet  to  come, 
we  have  learned  from  what  we  have,  if  I 
may  use  the  words  of  one  of  your  authors, 
quae  a  summa  virtute  summoque  in- 
genio  expectanda  sunt,  expectare. 
Wishing  you  the  most  abundant  encour- 
agement in  your  important  enterprise,  I 
remain  your  obedient  servant, 

Chas.  p.  M'Iltaine. 


From  William  A,  Duer,  LL.D., 

President  of  Columbia  College,  in 
the  City  of  New- York. 

From  the  manner  in  which  this  under- 
taking has  been  so  far  executed,  as  well 
as  from  the  established  character  and 
reputation  of  Professor  Anthon  as  a 
scholar,  his  experience  as  an  instructer, 
and  the  accuracy  and  judgment  previous- 
ly evinced  by  him  as  an  editor  and  com- 
mentator, I  can  entertain  no  doubt  of  the 
success  of  the  enterprise,  so  far  as  his 
editorial  labours  a?id  your  own  skill  and 
experience  as  publishers  are  concerned ; 
and  I  trust  that,  from  the  increasing 
value  of  classical  studies  in  tke  estima- 
tion of  the  public ,  this  juau:tous  and  spir- 
ited effort  to  facilitate  and  promote  so  im- 
portant a  branch  of  education  will  be 
duly  appreciated  arid  liberally  rewarded. 
I  remain,  gentlemen. 
Your  obedumt  servant, 

W.  A.  DOEE. 


ANTHON  S    SERIES    OF   CLASSICAL    WORKS. 


Letters  of  Recommendation — continued. 


From  the  Rev.  M.  Hopkins,  D.D., 
President  of  Williams'  College,  at 
Williamstown,  Mass. 

Professor  Anthon  has  unquestionably 
done  much  service  to  the  cause  of  clas' 
sical  learning  in  this  country  by  his  edi- 
tions of  the  Latin  classics,  given  to  the 
public  with  unusual  accuracy  and  ele- 
gance from  your  press.  His  Sallust, 
Ca;sar,  and  Cicero  cannot  fail  to  find 
their  way  into  very  extensive  use,  and  to 
render  the  entrance  upon  classical  studies 
much  more  inviting  and  profitable. 

M.  Hopkins. 

From  Wilbur  Fisk,  D.D.,  Presi- 
dent of  the  Wesleyan  University, 
at  JVIiddletown,  Conn. 
/  am  highly  gratified  to  notice  that 
you  have  commenced  a  series  of  the  clas- 
sics under  the  editorial  supervision  of 
that  accomplished  scholar,  Professor 
Anthon  of  Columbia  College.  No  man 
in  our  country  is  better  qualified  for  this 
office  than  Professor  Anthon.  To  show 
in  what  estimation  he  is  held  in  Eiigland 
as  a  classical  scholar,  it  need  only  be 
known  that  an  edition  of  his  "  Horace" 
has  been  published  in  London,  and  the 
publishers  informed  me  that  the  entire  edi- 
tion had  met  with  a  ready  sale ;  showing 
that,  notwithstanding  the  numerous  edi- 
tions of  this  standard  work  by  the  first 
scholars  in  Etigland,  the  credit  of  the 
work  by  our  American  scholar  had  car- 
iedr  it  successfully  through  the  English 
market,  ajid  that,  too,  by  virtue  of  its  in- 
trinsic merit.  Your  editions  of  his  Ccb- 
sar,  Cicero,  and  Sallust  are  now  before 
me,  and  show  that  there  is  no  falling  off 
from  the  reputation  of  the  edition  of  Hor- 
ace. The  copious  notes  and  commenta- 
ries cannot  fail  to  shed  a  flood  of  light 
upon  the  mind  of  the  young  student,  and 
will  contribute  much,  I  trust,  to  foster  m 
the  rising  generation  of  scholars  a  taste 
for  the  ancient  classics. 

Wilbur  Fisk. 

From  Silas  Totten,  D.D.,  Presi- 
dent of  Washington  College. 
The  volumes  which  I  have  examined  I 
entirely  approve,  and  think  them  better 
adapted  to  the  purposes  of  classical  in- 
struction than  any  edition  of  the  same 
OMlhors  yet  published  in  this  country. 
The  well-known  ability  of  the  learned 
editor  admits  no  doubt  of  the  excellence 
of  Vie  volumes  yet  to  be  published. 

S,  TOTTKN. 


From  the  President  and  Faculty  of 
Miami  University,  at  Oxford,  Ohio. 

These  three  volumes,  enriched  by  a 
copious  and  valuable  apparatus  of  crit- 
ical notes,  and  judiciously  arranged  his- 
torical, geographical,  archcBological,  and 
legal  matters,  furnished  by  so  ripe  a 
scholar  as  Dr.  Anthon,  are  specimens 
well  calculated  to  recommend  the  series 
of  which  they  are  the  commencement. 
They  are  well  adapted  to  promote  thor- 
ough classical  learning,  and  are  entitled 
to  a  high  grade  of  popular  favour.  By 
order  of  the  Faculty, 

R.  H.  Bishop,  President. 


From  RuFus  Babcock,  Jr.,  D.D., 
late  President  of  WaterviUe  Col- 
lege, in  Maine. 

/  have  examined  with  considerable 
care,  and  with  high  and  unmingled  sat- 
isfaction, your  recent  edition  of  Profes- 
sor Antho7i^s  Latin  Classics.  The  dis- 
tinguished editor  of  Horace  has  rightly 
judged,  that  in  order  to  elevate  the  range 
and  standard  of  scholarship  in  this  coun- 
try, it  is  requisite  to  facilitate  the  thor- 
ough acquisition  of  those  elementary 
text-books  which  are  usually  first  put 
into  the  hands  of  pupils.  By  the  beau- 
tiful volumes  which  you  have  now  given 
to  the  public  from  his  pen,  more  has  been 
done  to  make  the  student  thoroughly  ac- 
quainted with  those  three  prime  authors, 
Casar,  Salbist,  and  Cicero,  than  by 
any  other  helps  within  my  knowledge. 
I  need  not  minutely  specify  the  various 
points  of  excellence  by  which  these  books 
are  distinguished.  Their  practical  value 
will  immediately  be  appreciated  by  teach- 
ers and  learners. 

Allow  me,  gentlemen,  to  tender, 
through  you,  my  hearty  thanks  to  Pro- 
fessor Anthon  for  the  very  valuable  ser- 
vice he  has  performed  in  aid  of  the  great 
cause  of  classical  learning.  May  he 
continue  his  labours  for  the  public  good. 
RuFus  Babcock,  Jr. 


From  Professor  Dennis,  of  Haver- 
ford,  Penn. 

•  •  •  •  I  have  examined  Anthonys  Greek 
Grammar,  and  have  no  hesitation  in 
saying  that,  as  a  class-book  for  schools 
and  colleges,  I  think  it  superior  to  any 
other  with  which  I  am  acquainted.  .  .  . 
Wm.  Dennis. 


anthon's  series  op  classical  works. 


Lettars  of  Recommendation — continued. 


From  Jeremiah  Dav,  D.D.,  LL.D., 

President  of  Yale  College,  at  New- 
Haven,  Conn. 

/  estimate  highly  the  impor- 
tance of  furnishing  for  our  schools  and 
colleges  accurate  and  neat  editions  of  the 
ancient  Classics  ;  and  I  am  much  pleas- 
ed with  the  general  appearance  and  typ- 
ographical execution  of  the  specimens 

which  you  have  given  us It  would 

be  presumptuous  in  one  so  little  conver- 
sant with  the  fair  fields  of  elegant  litera- 
ture to  undertake  to  pass  sentence  on  the 
finely -wrought  productions  of  so  accom- 
plished a  scholar  as  Professor  Anthon. 
....  His  works  have  a  reputation  al- 
ready too  well  established  to  need  or  to 
receive  additional  value Jrom  any  recom- 
mendation which  I  can  give 

Jeremiah  Day.  , 

From  the  Rev.  B.  Hale,  D.D.,  Pres- 
ident of  Geneva  College,  at  Gene- 
va, N.  Y. 

.....  Your  object  "  to  furnish  accu- 
rate and  uniform  editions  of  Classical 
authors,  read  in  colleges  and  schools,  ac- 
companied by  a  useful  body  of  commen- 
tary, maps,"  <SfC.,  is  a  very  useful  one, 
and  highly  deserving  of  the  public  pat- 
ronage, and  no  one,  in  our  country,  is 
more  competent  to  the  editorial  supervi- 
sion of  such  an  undertaking  than  Pro- 
fessor Anthon.  It  is  fortunate  for  the 
cause  of  Classical  learning  in  our  coun- 
try, that  so  learned  and  enterprising  a 
scholar  has  been  brought  into  co-opera- 
tion with  publishers  so  enterprising. 

So  far  as  I  have  examined  the  works 
above  mentioned,  they  appear  to  me  ex- 
ceedingly well  adapted  to  their  end,  and 
to  do  credit  both  to  the  editor  and  the 
publishers.  We  have  specified  these  ed- 
itions in  the  requirements  for  admission 
to  this  college.      Bbnjamin  Hal£. 

From   the  Rev.  Josbph  Penney, 
D.D.,  President  of  Hamilton  Col- 
lege, at  Clinton,  N.  Y. 
/  have  examined  with  much  interest 
and  attention  Dr.  Anthonys  editions  of 
the  ancient  classics  so  far  as  published  by 
you.     I  think  there  can  be  but  one  opin- 
ion as  to  the  merit  of  these  works,  and 
the  advantage  to  our  country  of  so  noble 
an  enterprise.     It  is  not  only  honoured 
by  the  learning  of  the  editor,  and  the 
ability  and  taste  of  the  jniblishers,  but 
directly  and  greatly  benefited  in  the  vital 
interest  of  the  education  of  our  youth. 


We  possess  no  means  of  sound  mental 
discipline  and  cultivated  taste  that  can 
supersede  the  relics  of  Greece  and  Rome ; 
and  thus  to  enrich  them  to  the  inquiring 
mind,  and  to  adorn  them  to  the  eye  of 
our  studious  youth,  is  a  service  not  like- 
ly to  be  appreciated  as  it  deserves  except  by 
those  who  have  toiled  through  the  crowd- 
ed and  careless  page  of  former  days.  I 
earnestly  hope  that  you  may  be  encour- 
aged  greatly  to  extend  these  labours. 
Joseph  Penney. 


From  the  Rev.   J.  M.  Mat; 
D.D.,  Chancellor  of  the  New-York 

University. 

Professor  Anthon  has  rendered  an 
important  service  to  the  cause  of  learn- 
ing in  this  country  by  his  editions  of  the 
various  Classics ;  and  I  am  gratified  to 
see  that  your  valuable  press  is  employed 
in  furnishing  them  to  the  public. 

J.  M.  Mathews. 

From  the  Rev.  D.  M'Conaughy, 
D.D.,  President  of  Washington 
College,  at  Washington,  Penn. 

The  typographical  execution 

is  correct  and  handsome,  the  binding  sub- 
stantial, the  notes  copious  and  valuable. 
All  agree,  that  it  is  not  much  reading, 
but  thorough  reading,  which  secures 
knowledge  and  makes  the  scholar.  To 
this  purpose  your  edition  of  the  classics 
is  eminently  adapted.  If  well  employed 
by  students  and  instructers,  they  cannot 
fail  to  make  accurate  and  well-instructed 
scholars  ;  and  must  render  the  study  of 
Classic  authors  more  interesting  and 
more  profitable  than  it  has  generally  been. 
I  hope  that  you  will  find  extensive  pat- 
ronage. D.  M'Conauqhy. 

From  the  Rev.  Alonso  Potter, 
D.D.,  of  Union  CoUfcge,  Schenec- 
tady, N.  Y. 

/  have  had  occasion  to  exam- 
ine these  editions  with  some  care,  arid,  it 
would  be  superfltious  to  add,  with  great 
pleasure.  The  reputation  ofProfessor 
Anthon  for  learning  and  critical  skill, 
and  the  singular  success  with  which  he 
adapts  his  labours  to  the  wants  of  the 
student,  are  too  well  knoum  and  too  gen- 
erally appreciated  to  need  any  recom- 
mendation. It  is  proper,  however,  to 
add  that  these  volumes  will  he  used  m 
our  classes,  and  are  held  in  the  highest 
esteem.  Alonso  Pottkk. 


ANTHUN's    series    of    classical    WORB.S. 


Commendatory  Letters — continued. 


From  the  Rev.   Dr.  Milledoler, 

President  of  Rutger's  College,  at 

New- Brunswick,  N.  J. 

.  ,  .  .  Notwithstayiding  the  objections 
of  some  eminent  men  to  the  study  of  the 
Greek  and  Roman  Classics,  it  is  now 
almost  generally  conceded  that  they  form 
an  important  if  not  necessary  part  of  a 
liberal  education. 

A  respectable  acquaintance  with  those 
languages,  in  which  the  greatest  masters 
in  belles  lettres  and  science  have  written, 
cannot  be  dispensed  with  by  professional 
men.  We  do  twl  indeed  see,  without  re- 
sorting to  these  ancient  and  admired 
fountains  of  taste  and  learning,  how  el- 
egant literature  can  be  cultivated  to  ad- 
vantage, or  how  even  a  competent  knowl- 
edge of  our  own  tongue  can  be  acquired. 
Whoever,  therefore,  has  so  mastered 
these  works  that  he  can  teach  their  gram- 
matical structure  not  only,  but  by  accu- 
rate reference  to  ancient  history,  geogra- 
phy, and  philology,  can  trace  their  nice 
and  varied  shades  of  meaning,  unfold 
their  beauty,  and  inspire  the  youthful 
mind  with  literary  enthiisiasm,  deserves 
well  of  the  Republic  of  Letters. 

Professor  Anthon,  in  his  recent  edi- 
tions of  the  Classics,  has,  in  the  judg- 
ment of  the  undersigned,  very  ably  ac- 
complished this  difficult  service. 

With  these  works  in  their  haiids,  our 
youth  will  not  be  left  to  waste  time  and 
mental  energy  in  unnecessary  and  dis- 
couraging investigations,  but  will  be 
lighted  on  their  way,  and  excited  to  ex- 
ertion. 

The  typographical  part  is  correctly 
and  elegantly  executed. 

With  my  best  wishes  that  both  editor 
and  publishers  may  be  amply  remunera- 
ted by  the  rapid  sale  of  these  works,  and 
their  extensive  diffusion  through  the 
academies  and  colleges  of  our  country, 
1  remain,  gentlemen. 

Yours  very  respectfully, 
Philip  Milledolkr. 


From  the  Rev.  James  Carnahan, 
D.D.,  President  of  the  College  of 
New- Jersey,  at  Princeton,  N.  J. 
Having  examined  in  a  cursory  man- 
ner your  series  of  Anthonys  Classical 
authors,  I  add,  with  pleasure,  the  testi- 
mony of  my  apyrobation  to  the  numer- 
ous recommendations  given  by  others. 
Professor  Anthonys  character  as  a  Clas- 
sical scholar  is  a  sufficient  pledge  for  the 
accuracy  of  the  edition.     If  the  ability 


of  the  learned  editor  and  the  rgat  and 
handsome  appearance  of  the  volumes  be 
justly  appreciated,  your  work  cannot  fail 
to  receive  a  liberal  patronage. 

Your  obedient  strtiant, 
James  Carnahan. 


From  the  Rev.  Dr.  Baldwin,  Presi 

dent  of  Wabash  College,  at  Craw* 

fordsville,  Indiana. 

....  I  have  read  Anthon' s  Sallust  and 
his  CcBsar^s  Commentaries  with  much 
satisfaction.  We  have  adopted  the  for- 
mer in  the  preparatory  course  connected 
with  our  college  ;  and  propose  to  use  his 
editions  of  Ccssar  and  of  Tully^s  Ora- 
tions, in  preference  to  all  others.  My 
opinion  of  the  merits  of  Professor  An- 
thon, as  a  Latin  scholar  and  editor  of  the 
Latin  Classics,  and  particularly  as  a 
critical  commentator,  is  very  high.  I 
most  cheerfully  commend  his  literary 
labours  to  the  patronage  of  classical 
teachers  as  second  to  none  in  his  depart- 
ment, with  which  I  am  acquainted. 
Y'ours  sincerely, 
Elihu  W.  Baldwin. 


From  the  University  of  St.  Louis» 
Missouri. 

We  have  examined  them  part- 
ly ourselves,  and  submitted  them  for 
farther  examination  to  persons  fully 
competent  to  pronounce  on  their  merit. 
We  feel  happy  in  stating,  that  there  has 
been  but  one  opinion  on  the  subject,  viz., 
that  the  highest  encomiums  are  due  to 
Professor  Anthon  as  a  scholar  and  a 
friend  to  education,  and  that  the  typo- 
graphical execution  is  not  inferior  to 
that  of  the  best  schoolbooks  published  in 

England  and  in  France 

Your  obedient  servants, 

J.  A.  Elet, 
Rector  of  St.  L-ouis  University. 
J.  B.  EsNING, 
Profes,  Ling. 

From  the  Rev.  Richard  H  Wall, 
D.D.,  Prmcipal  of  the  Preparatory 
Schoolof  Trinity  College,  Dublin, 
and  Minister  of  the  Chapel  Royal. 
Doctor  Anthon  is  an  admira- 
ble  commentator.      His  works  have  a 
great  sale  here.     And  I  shall  be  anxious 
to  see  anything  in  the  Classical  way 
which  comes  from  his  pen.      We  hav9 
his  Cicero,  Sallust,  and  Horace  in  gen- 
eral circulation  in  our  schools 


anthon's  series  op  classical  works. 


Letters  of  Recommendation — continued. 


From  the  Rev.  B.  P.  Aydelott, 
President  of  the  Woodward  Col- 
lege, at  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
From  some  personal  acquaintance,  but 
much  more  from  general  reputation,  I 
formed  a  very  high  opinion  of  Professor 
Anthonys  abilities  to  prepare  a  full  series 
«/■Latin  and  Greek  Classics /or  </ie 
tise  of  schools,  colleges,  ^-c.  Accord- 
ingly, as  soon  as  I  could  obtain  the  va- 
rious authors  edited  by  him,  I  procured 
them,  and,  upon  a  careful  examination, 
was  so  impressed  with  their  superior 
character,  as  to  introduce  them  as  fast 
as  possible  into  the  different  departments 
of  the  institution  under  my  charge. 

The  various  Delphin  editions  are  very 
good,  so  far  as  ancient  geography,  mythol- 
ogy, usages,  4-c.,  are  concerned ;  but  in 
respect  to  critical  remarks  and  grammat- 
ical illustrations  they  are  of  little  worth  ; 
they  were,  in  general,  however,  the  best 
we  had. 

But  besides  being  abundantly  full  and 
clear  in  everything  archaeological,  Pro- 
fessor Anthon  has  done  more,  in  the 
editions  of  the  classical  authors  prepared 
by  htm,  to  unfold  the  grammatical  struc- 
ture, and  thus  throw  light  upon  the  mean- 
ing and  spirit  of  the  original,  than  any 
other  commentator  whom  I  have  consult- 
ed. It  is  a  striking,  and,  I  think,  de- 
cisive, proof  of  their  superiority,  that  the 
students  show  in  their  recitations  that 
they  have  read  his  notes  and  profit- 
ed by  them,  which  they  never  seemed  to 
me  to  have  done  when  using  other  edi- 
tions. 

Some  time  ago  I  commenced  a  careful 
collation  of  the  Greek  Grammar  of  the 
same  author  with  those  of  Butmann,  Val- 
py,  tfc,  making  full  notes  as  I  went 
along,  with  the  design  of  preparing  a  re- 
view of  it  at  the  request  of  the  editor  of 
an  extensively  circidated  periodical,  and 
such  was  my  conviction  of  its  peculiar 
fitness  for  the  use  of  schools,  that  I  have 
since  recommended  no  other  to  our  pu' 
piU. 

I  would  add  that  the  neatness  and 
taifle  with  which  Professor  ArUhon's 
clfussics  are  got  up  (though  they  are  far 
cheaper  than  the  Delphin  editions)  ought 
to  Jorm  no  small  recommendation  of 
them,  (hir  stwlents  purchase,  study, 
arid  preserve  them  with  manifest  pleas- 
ure ;  and  whatever  has  these  effects  upon 
the  pupil,  will  certainly  do  much  to  pro- 
mote the  cause  of  sound  and  thorough 
classical  learning. 

B.  P.  Aydelott. 


From  the  Rev,  J.  S.  Tomlinson, 
D.D.,  President  of  Augusta  Col- 
lege, Kentucky. 

/  take  this  opportunity  to  acknowledge 
the  receipt  (some  time  since)  of  four  vol- 
umes of  the  Classical  Series  of  Profes- 
sor Anthon  of  New-  York  ;  and,  after 
a  careful  examination  of  them,  I  can 
truly  say  that  I  am  more  than  pleased  ; 
I  am  delighted  with  them.  The  avowed 
object  of  the  publication,  that  of  furnish- 
ing accurate  and  uniform  editions  of  all 
the  classical  authors  used  in  colleges  and 
schools,  is  one  that,  in  my  judgment,  has 
long  been  a  desideratum  in  literature, 
and  I  am  gratified  to  find  is  about  to  be 
accomplished,  especially  by  one  so  entire- 
ly equal  to  the  task  as  Professor  An- 
thon has  shown  himself  to  be. 

The  biographical  sketches,  commen- 
taries, and  annotations  with  which  the 
volumes  are  accompanied,  while  they  re- 
flect great  credit  upon  the  erudition  and 
research  of  the  author,  cannot  fail  to  en 
hance  to  the  student,  in  a  high  degree, 
the  attractions  and  value  of  classical 
reading.  As  an  evidence  of  the  estimate 
we  place  upon  the  series,  we  have  hither- 
to used  it  as  far  as  it  was  attainable,  and 
shall,  with  great  pleasure,  avail  ourselves 
of  the  opportunity  now  afforded  to  adopt 
the  whole  of  it.  Allow  me  to  add,  that 
the  neat,  tasteful,  and,  at  the  same  time, 
substantial  style  of  the  mechanical  exe- 
cution of  the  work,  fully  sustains  the 
well-earned  reputation,  in  that  respect,  of 
the  enterprising  establishment  whence  it 
emanates.     Respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 
J,  S.  Tomlinson. 


From  Alonzo  CnuRf  h,  D.D.,  Pres- 
ident of  the  University  of  Georgia. 

As  far  as  time  and  a  press  of  busi- 
ness would  permit,  I  have  examined 
these  volumes,  and  am  much  pleased 
with  them.  They  are,  I  think,  well 
adapted  to  the  wants  of,  particularly, 
young  students,  and  ivill,  J  doubt  not, 
furnish  what  has  long  been  a  desidera- 
tum in  our  preparatory  schools,  vis., 
cheap,  yet  correct  editions  of  the  common 
classics,  accompanied  with  judicious 
English  notes.  I  do  not  hesitate  to 
say  that,  were  I  engaged  in  giving  in- 
struction to  youth  from  these  authors,  1 
should  prefer  the  editions  of  Professot 
Anthon  to  any  which  J  have  seen. 

A.  Church. 


ANTHONYS    SERIES    OF   CLASSICAL   WORKS. 


Commendatory  Letters — continued. 


From  the  Rev.  John  M'Caffrey, 

D.D.,    President    of    Mount    St. 

Mary's  College,  at  Eramitsburgh, 

Maryland. 

Nearly  all  the  Classical  works 

edited  by  Professor  Anthon  have  al- 
ready been  introduced  by  me  into  the 
college  under  my  government.  As  a 
classical  teacher  myself,  I  am  practical- 
ly acquainted  with  the  merits  of  several 
of  them  It  is  not  so  much  the  exten- 
sive lenmvig  and  accurate  criticism  of 
the  editor  that  I  admire  {highly  as  he  is 
to  be  esteemed  for  these  important  quali- 
ties), as  the  judicious  adaptation  of  ev- 
erything to  the  benefit  of  the  learner. 
The  learner^s  wants  are  always  kept  in 
view,  and  he  receives  the  precise  amount 
and  kind  of  assistance  which  ought  to 
be  given  him.  I  shall  therefore  continue 
to  examine  these  works  as  they  are  is- 
sued from  your  press,  with  a  sanguine 
hope  of  deriving  the  same  gratification 
from  the  remaining  volumes  of  the  series 

as  from  the  past 

Very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 
John  M'Caffrey. 


From  the  Rev.  Dr.  Burnet,  Presi- 
dent of  Bacon  College,  at  George- 
town, Kenn. 

I  have  looked  at  the  Series  of 

Classical  Works  prepared  by  Professor 
Anthon.  Our  professor  of  languages, 
Mr.  Mullins,  has  been  able  to  give  more 
time  to  the  examination  than  1  have. 
We  are  prepared  to  commend  the  series 
as  decidedly  an  improvement  in  the  ne- 
!  cessary  facilities  for  leaching  andlearn- 
'  ing.  The  co-pious  English  notes,  and 
the  superior  mechanical  execution  of  the 
works,  will  not  fail  to  secure  you  a  very 
extensive  patronage.  We  have  used 
the  Sallustfor  some  time,  and  intend  to 
adopt  all  of  the  remaining  books  which 
tue  read  in  our  course. 

Very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 
D.  S.  Burnet. 


From  the  Professor  of  Ancient  Lan- 
guages in  the  College  of  Charles- 
ton, S.C. 

Since  you  commenced  the  publication 
of  Professor  Anthonys  series  of  the 
Classical  authors  of  antiquity,  the  lan- 
guage of  commendation  has  become  so 


familiar  to  you,  that  anything  lean  saj 
with  regard  to  the  enterprise,  must  ap 
pear  trite.  I  cannot,  however,  omit  to 
express  the  pleasure  tvhich  I  experienced 
upon  examining  your  late  edition  of  Hor- 
ace, put  up  in  so  convenient  a  shape,  so 
very  neatly  bound,  and,  in  a  typography 
ical  point  of  view,  executed  in  a  manner 
that  would  reflect  credit  upon  any  press 
in  either  hemisphere.  With  Professor 
Anthon  as  a  scholar  I  have  been  for 
many  years  acquainted,  and  of  late  have 
been  fortunate  enough  to  form  his  per- 
sonal acquaintance.  His  editorial  la- 
bours have  been  a  source  of  improvement 
to  myself,  and  have  assisted  me  not  a 
little  while  I  was  in  the  discharge  of  the 
duties  of  the  grammar-school  department, 
where  my  attention  was  first  attracted 
by  his  improved  editions  of  Alvary's 
Latin  Prosody  and  Neilson's  Greek 
Exercises.  Since  that  period,  each  sicc- 
cessive  work  edited  by  the  professor  has 
contributed  to  corfirm  the  opinion  I  at 
first  entertained  of  his  profound  scholar- 
ship, and  of  his  entire  devotion  to  the 
cause  of  Classical  literature,  both  of 
which  are  clearly  evinced  by  his  able 
and  lucid  commentaries  upon  the  Roman 
authors  already  published,  and  by  his 
minute  attention  to  the  wants  of  the  clas- 
sical student,  in  furnishing  its  with  the 
best  system  of  Greek  prosody  that  has 
yet  appeared.  Professor  Anthon  is  a 
living  illustration  of  the  fact,  that  schol- 
arship and  literature  belong  exclusively 
to  no  clime  ;  for,  without  wishing  to  de- 
tract in  the  slightest  degree  from  the 
meritorious  and  untiring  labours  of  our 
New-England  brethren  in  the  vineyard 
of  literature,  it  must  be  universally  con- 
ceded, that  the  reputation  of  Professor 
Anthon  will  descend  to  posterity  as  one 
of  the  greatest  Classical  scholars  of  the 
present  age,  and,  unquestionably,  the 
most  learned  and  practically  useful  phi- 
lologist that  has  ever  appeared  in  the 
(Jtiited  States.  I  shall  anticipate,  with 
no  inconsiderable  degree  of  pleasure,  the 
period  at  which  the  series  may  be  ex- 
pected to  have  attained  its  completion, 
for  many  of  our  college  Classics  stand 
in  need  of  elucidation  and  the  texts  of  re- 
vision. Of  your  success  in  publishing 
under  such  auspices,  there  can  be  no 
doubt ;  and  that  your  most  sanguine 
hopes  may  be  fully  realized  is  the  sin- 
cere wish  of,  gentlemen, 

Yours  very  respectfully, 

Wm.  Hawkesworth, 
Professor  of  ancient  languages, 

College  of  Charleston,  S.  C. 


ANTHON  S   SERIES   OF  CLASSICAL   WORKS. 


Commendatory  Letters — continued. 


From  Alpheus  S.  Packard,  A.M., 
Professor  of  the  Greek  and  Latin 
Languages  in  Bowdoin  College, 
Maine. 

. .  .  /  introduced  into  my  classes  the 
edition  of  Horace  which  Dr.  Anthon 
prepared,  soon  after  it  was  published, 
and  most  cheerfully  express  my  sense 
of  its  great  value  to  the  student,  as  con- 
taining a  full  apparatus  for  a  thorough 
understanding  and  a  just  appreciation 
of  this  author.  I  regard  it  as  in  many 
respects  the  best  edition  of  a  Classic  to 
which  our  students  have  had  access. 
His  edition  of  Sallust  has  become  com- 
mon in  our  preparatory  schools,  and  is 
in  the  highest  repute.  From  these  spe- 
cimens of  Dr.  Anthonys  judgment  and 
accurate  and  copious  learning,  I  should 
feel  great  confidence  in  the  success  of 
similar  efforts  from  his  hand.  No  oth- 
er individual  has  contributed  so  largely 
to  the  cause  of  classical  learning  in  our 
country. 

Your  obedient  servant, 

Alpheus  S.  Packard. 


From  Mr.  A.  H.  Weld,  Teacher 
of  the  Ancient  Languages  in  the 
North  Yarmouth  Seminary,  Maine. 

Gentlemen, 
.  .  .  I  have  examined  these  volumes 
as  they  have  successively  appeared,  and 
some  of  them  are  now  used  as  text  books 
in  our  institution.  At  first  I  feared 
that  Professor  Anthon's  copious  notes 
and  comments  might  be  rather  too  "  la- 
bour saving"  for  the  student ;  but,  by 
more  mature  experience,  and  by  actual 
trial  of  the  books,  I  have  become  fully 
persuaded  that  the  facilities  they  afford 
are  such  as  the  student  needs,  and  are 
calculated  not  only  to  give  him  proper 
encouragement,  but  to  enlarge  his  views 
and  promote  his  general  knowledge. 
Very  respectfully,  yours, 

Allen  H.  Wbld. 

From  the  Rev.  Wm.  C.  Larrabeb, 
A.M.,  Principal  of  the  Wesleyan 
Seminary  at  Keadfield,  Maine. 

Oentlemen, 
.  .  .  I  have  examined  the  works  thor- 
oughly, and  am  highly  pleased  with 
them.  I  am  vtclined,  if  ciroumstavces 
will  admit  of  it,  to  introduce  the  entire 
series  in  our  classical  department  of  this 
seminary. 

Yours,  respectfully, 
W.  C.  Larkabbe. 


From  James  Boyd,  LL.D.,  one  of 

the  Masters  of  the  High  School, 
Edinburgh,  in  an  advertisement 
to  the  fourth  London  Edition  of 
Anthon's  Horace, 

The  high  estimation  in  which  the  tal- 
ents, scholarship,  and  critical  acumen 
of  Dr.  Anthon  are  held  in  the  literary 
world,  and  his  well-earned  celebrity  as 
a  Classical  Editor,  render  any  com- 
mendation of  his  works,  and  any  apolo- 
gy for  their  reproduction  among  our- 
selves, alike  superfluous. 

James  Boyd. 


From  B.  Manly,  President  of  the 
University  of  Alabama,  at  Tus- 
caloosa. 

From  previous  familiarity  with  apor- 
tion  of  Frofessor  Anthon's  Series  of 
the  Classics,  as  well  as  an  examination 
of  those  you  have  sent,  our  Professor  of 
Ancient  Languages  and  myself  agree 
in  a  high  conviction  of  their  excellence 
as  editions,  and  their  importance  as  aids 
to  Classical  learning.  The  editor  of 
the  best  edition  of  Horace  ever  given 
to  the  public  has  fully  sustai7ied  his 
well  earned  reputation  in  these  volumes  ; 
each  possessing  its  own  peculiar  merit, 
and  all  furnishing,  in  their  places ,  just 
the  aid  the  real  student  needs,  and  no 
more.  For  facilitating,  extending,  and 
elevating  Classical  literature,  these  vol- 
umes deserve  to  be  reckoned  among  the 
ablest  contributions  of  any  age.  Such 
of  the  Series  as  are  required  by  our  col- 
lege course  we  shall  u^e  in  preference  to 
others ;  and  shall  recammend  them  aU 
to  the  schools  around  us.  We  shaU 
await  with  anxiety  the  completion  of 
the  series. 

Very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 
B.  Manly. 


From  the  Rev.  Alfrrd  Saxe  one 
of  the  Principals  of  the  Prepara- 
tory School  of  the  Wesleyan  Uni- 
versity at  Middletown,  Conn. 

.  .  .  I  am  pleased,  highly  so,  indeed, 
with  the  success  I  have  met  with  in  the 
use  of  Anthon's  Latin  and  Greek  Les- 
sons. The  classes  that  have  lately 
commenced  in  them  do  admirably. 
Yours,  truly, 
Alfred  Saxb. 


anthon's  series  of  classical  works. 


Jjetlers  of  Recommendation — continued. 


From  the  Rev.  E.  Nott,  D.D.,  Pres- 
ident of  Union  College  at  Sche- 
nectady, N.  Y. 

The  Jurnishing  of  our  schools  and 
colleges  with  accurate  and  uniform  edi- 
tions of  the  Classical  authors  in  use, 
accompanied  by  a  useful  body  of  com- 
mentary, maps,  ilUuslrations,  tf'C-,  is  an 
undertaking  worthy  alike  of  commenda- 
tion and  of  patronage.  The  competeticy 
ofProfessor  Anthonfor  the  editorial  su- 
pervision assig7ied  him,  is  well  known  to 
me.  The  whole  design  meets  my  entire 
approbation,  and  you  are  quite  at  liberty 
to  make  use  of  my  name  in  the  further- 
ance of  its  execution. 

Very  respectfully, 

Eliphalet  Nott. 

From  the  Rev.  F.  Wayland,  D.D., 

President  of  Brown  University  at 

Providence,  R.  I. 

1  have  not  been  able,  owing  to  the  pres- 
sure of  my  engagements,  to  examine  the 
above  works  with  any  degree  of  accuracy. 
I  however  beg  leave  to  thank  you  for  the 
volumes,  and  cheerfully  bear  testimony 
to  the  distinguished  scholarship  of  their 
editor.  No  classical  scholar  of  our 
country  enjoys  a  higher  reputation,  and 
I  know  oj  no  one  in  whose  labours  more 
decided  confidence  may  be  reposed. 
Yours  truly, 

F.  Wayland. 

From  the  Rev.  John  P.  Dckbin, 
A.M.,  President  of  Dickinson  Col- 
lege at  Carlisle,  Penn. 

For  some  moiiths  past  my  attention 
has  been  directed  to  the  series  of  Classi- 
cal works  now  in  the  course  of  publication 
from  your  press,  edited  by  Professor  An- 
thon.  I  can  with  confidence  recommend 
them  as  the  best  editions  of  the  several 
works  which  have  appeared  in  our  coun- 
try, perhaps  in  any  country.  The  mat- 
ter is  select,  and  the  notes  are  copious 

and  clear 

Respectfully, 

J.  P.  Dubbin. 


From  Thomas   R.  Ingalls,  Esq., 
President  of  Jefferson  Collx^ge  at 
St.  James,  Louisiana. 
I  have  examined  them  with  atten- 
tion, and  have  no  hesitation  in  saying 
that  I  prefer  them  to  any  books  I  have 
seen  for  the  schools  for  which  they  are  in- 


tended. The  editions  by  Dr.  Anthon 
seem  to  me  to  supply,  in  a  very  judicious 
manner,  what  is  wanting  to  the  student, 
and  cannot  fail,  I  should  think,  to  aid  in 
restoring  Classical  studies  from  their 
unhappily  languishing  condition. 
Your  obedient  servant, 

Tho.  R.  Ingalls. 

From  C.  L.  Dubuisson,  A.M.,  Presi- 
dent of  Jefferson  College  at  Wash- 
mglon,  Miss. 

/  have  examined  with  some  care  the 
first  five  volumes  of  Anthon's  Series  of 
Classical  Works.  They  are  such  as  1 
should  expect  from  the  distinguished  ed- 
itor. The  "  Horace"  and  "  Sallust" 
of  this  gentleman  have  long  been  known 
to  me  as  the  very  best  books  to  be  placed 
in  the  hands  of  a  student.  As  a  com- 
mentator, Professor  Anthon  has,  in  my 
estimation,  no  equal.  His  works  have 
excited  a  great  and  beneficial  influence 
in  the  cause  of  Classical  learning,  and 
the  present  undertaking  will  infinitely 
extend  the  sphere  of  that  influence.  No 
one  so  well  as  a  teacher  can  appreciate 
the  value  of  uniform  editions  of  the  text- 
books to  be  used  by  his  classes.  The 
undertaking  of  publishing  a  complete 
series  of  all  those  standard  works  which 
students  must  read  is  a  noble  one,  and 
I  sincerely  hope  it  will  be  completed. 
With  such  a  series  as  the  present  prom- 
ises to  be,  there  will  be  nothing  left  to 
desire.  It  is  be  hoped  that  editor  and 
publishers  will  meet  with  such  encourage- 
ment as  their  truly  valuable  undertaking 
deserves. 

Your  obedient  servant, 

C.  L.  Dubuisson. 

From  the  Rev.  John  Ludlow,  Pres- 
ident of  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania at  Philadelphia. 

The  object  is  worthy  your  en- 

terp-ising  spirit,  and  you  have  been  sin- 
gularly fortunate  in  securing  the  services 
of  Professor  Anthon  to  direct  it  to  its 
completion.  The  volumes  which  you 
have  kindly  sent  me  fully  sustain  the 
reputation  of  that  distinguished  scholar^ 
and  afford  a  sure  pledge  of  what  may  be  1 
expected  in  those  which  are  to  follow. 
Most  heartily  do  I  recommend  your  un- 
dertaking, and  sincerely  hope  it  will  meet 
with  the  encouragement  which  it  richly 
deserves. 

With  great  respect,  yours,  il^-c.^ 
John  Ludlov^t. 


ANTHONYS   SERIES   OP   CLASSICAL   WORKS. 


Letters  of  Recommendation — continued. 


From  the  Rev.  S.  Chapin,  D.D., 
President  of  Columbian  College, 
at  Washington,  D.  C. 
Ptcfessor  Anthonys  editions  of  Hor- 
ace, Sallust,  Cicero,  and  Ccssar  are  so 
extensively  known  and  so  justly  appre- 
ciated, that  to  recommend  them  farther 
would  seetn  a  work  of  supererogation. 
No  one  who  examines  them,  if  in  any 
degree  a  competent  jvdge,  can  fail  to 
perceive  that,  in  respect  to  the  object 
for  which  they  were  designed,  they  are 
works  of  distinguished  merit,  and  leave 
nothing  to  be  desired  ;  furnishing  as  they 
do  a  test  than  which  none  probably  more 
correct,  and  a  body  of  notes  so  luminous, 
copious,  and  comprehensive  as  to  meet 
all  the  wants  of  the  young  student,  while 
the  acute  judgment,  and  profound  and 
various  learning,  which  they  everywhere 
exhibit,  cannot  but  afford  delight  and 
profit  to  the  most  advanced  scholar, 
xours,  with  sentiments  of  great  respect, 
S.  Chapin. 

From  the  Rev.  Hector  Humphreys, 
D.D.,  President  of  St.  John's  Col- 
lege, Annapolis,  Md. 
The  perfect  accuracy  and  uniform- 
ity of  the  Anthon  Classics,  with 
the  copious  and  discriminating  notes 
and  learned  disquisitions  in  English  by 
which  they  are  illustrated,  and,  more 
especially,  the  substantial  and  tasteful 
manner  in  which  they  are  printed  and 
bound,  fitting  them  for  actual  service, 
recommend  them  most  strongly  to  our 
colleges  and  academies.  The  copies  of 
many  existing  editions  are  so  slightly 
put  together,  apparently  more  for  sale 
than  for  use,  and  so  abound,  withal,  in 
false  readings,  that  I  should  be  heartily 
glad  to  see  them  superseded  by  the  above 
elegant  and  correct  series. 

Hector  Humphreys. 

From  Gessnkr  Harrison,  M.D., 
Chairman  of  the  Faculty,  and  Pro- 
fessor of  Ancient  Languages  in  the 
University  of  Virginia,  at  Char- 
lottesville, Va. 

/  have  given  a  hasty  examination  to 
Professor  Anthonys  school  edition  of 
Bome  of  Cicero's  orations,  C<Bsar's  Me- 
moirs of  the  Gallic  War,  and  Sallust, 
and  am  happy  to  say,  that  for  the  use 
of  preparatory  a  •hools,  more  especially, 
it  is,  in  my  opinion,  far  better  suited  than 
anv  other  with  which  I  am  acquainted. 
There  is,  indeed,  no  class  of  learners 


who  may  not  derive  useful  information 
from  the  copious  notes  which  it  contains, 
and  which  are  highly  valuable  for  the 
geographical,  historical,  and  other  mat- 
ter they  convey  explanatory  of  the  text. 
The  help  thus  afforded  will  not  only 
serve  to  lighten  the  leamen^s  burden  and 
make  his  task  a  cheerful  one,  but  both 
directly  and  indirectly  tend  to  encourage 
to  a  better  way  of  rendering  the  Latin 
Classics,  and  to  cherish  a  taste  for  their 
study. 

Although  I  have  been  able  to  do  little 
more  than  turn  over  the  pages  of  Pro- 
fessor Anthon's  Greek  Prosody,  J  have 
satisfied  myself  of  its  value,  and  hope 
that  it  may  prove  greatly  useful  by  pla- 
cing in  the  hands  of  the  students  of  Greek 
in  schools  and  colleges,  in  a  very  neat  and 
convenient  form,  the  means  of  becoming 
acquainted  more  readily  with  a  subject 
so  unworthily  neglected  in  our  country. . . 
The  typographical  execution  and  the 
paper  in  all  these  works  are  deserving 
of  very  high  praise,  and  entitle  the  en- 
terprising publishers  to  the  commenda- 
tion of  the  public. 

Gessner  Harrison. 


From  the  Hon.  D.  L.  Swain,  Pres- 
ident of  the  University  of  North 
Carolina,  at  Chapel  Hill,  N.  C. 
/  have  examined  with  as  much  atten- 
tion as  paramount  engagements  have 
permitted,  the  first  three  volumes  of  the 
series  of  Latin  Classics  edited  by  Pro- 
fessor Anthon,  and  have  taken  pains  to 
ascertain  the  opinions  of  others  with  re- 
spect to  them,  in  whose  judgment,  on  all 
suibjects  connected  with  Classical  litera- 
ture, I  have  mv^h  more  confidence  than 
in  my  own.  The  result  of  this  examina- 
tion and  inquiry  has  been  to  create  a  lively 
interest  in  the  early  and  successful  com- 
pletion of  your  enterprise,  under  the  con- 
fident expectation  that  it  will  prove  alike 
creditable  to  the  editor,  the  publishers, 
and  the  country. 

D.  L.  SwAiN. 

From  the  Very  Rev,  Wii.  M'Srbr- 

RY,  S.  J.,  President  of  George- 
town College,  D.  C. 
I  have  examined  your  editions  of  Cic- 
ero's Orations,  Sallust,  and  Caesar,  and 
consider  them  highly  creditable  to  your 
press.  The  notes  contain  a  variety  of 
informatian,  and  are  wfil  calculated  to 
improve  the  student. 

Wm.  M'Sherry. 


ANTHON  S    SERIES    OF   CLASSICAL   WORKS. 


Commendatory  Notices — continued. 


"  The  great  problem  in  the  art  of 
teaching  is,  that  the  teacher  should 
forget  that  he  knows  himself  what  he 
is  teaching  to  others  ;  should  remem- 
ber that  what  is  clear  as  day  to  him 
is  all  Cimmerian  darkness  to  his  pu- 
pil. This  problem,  long  since  proved. 
Professor  Anthon  has,  in  our  opinion, 
been  the  first  to  put  in  practice  ;  and, 
in  consequence,  his  are,  we  may  well 
believe,  the  best  classbooks  ex- 
tant . " — Knickerbocker  Mag  azine. 

"To  relieve  the  youthful 

mind  from  this  bootless  burden  we 
count  no  small  praise.  We  hold  it, 
indeed,  to  be  among  the  noblest  ends 
to  which  true  learning  can  ever  de- 
vote itself.  We  are  sure  it  never  ap- 
pears more  pleasing  than  in  such  con- 
descension ,  and,  what  is  still  better, 
we  know  no  labour  more  useful  to 
the  community.  This  meed  of  praise, 
whatever  it  be,  belongs  unquestiona- 
bly to  no  scholar  on  this  side  of  the 
Atlantic,  and  to  few  on  the  other, 
more  truly  than  to  Professor  An- 
thon."— Church  Quarterly  Review. 

"In  all  these  points  Profes- 
sor Anthon's  schoolbooks — if  it  be 
not  a  sin  to  call  those  schoolbooks 
■which  clever  men  might  study  to 
advantage— are  surpassingly  excel- 
lent and  able  ;  while  exercising  the 
most  painfully  critical  research,  he 
has  not  disdained  the  lucidus  or  do  ; 
he  has  remembered  that  he  was  wri- 
ting for  the  education  of  the  young 
unpractised  mind,  not  for  the  culti- 
vation of  the  ripe  and  ornate  intellect ; 
and  hence,  while  his  English  notes, 
whether  critical  or  explanatory,  are 
as  copious  and  comprehensive  as  the 
most  abstruse  commentary,  they  are, 
at  the  same  time,  so  simple  and  so 
luminous  as  to  be  within  the  scope 
of  the  earliest  and  feeblest  reaeon. 
....  We  have  only  to  say  in  conclu- 
sion, that  every  school  ought  at  once 
to  adopt  this  series  of  works,  which 
may,  in  truth,  be  looked  upon  as  in- 
troducing a  new  era  into  the  educa- 
tion of  our  country,  and  as  reflecting 
much  honour  on  the  talent  of  the 
learned  professor  by  whom  they  were 
prepared." — American  Monthly  Mag- 
azine. 

"  They  go  beyond  any  of  the  ele- 
mentary works  printed  here,  which 
is  saying  a  great  deal," — Boston  Ad- 
vocate. 


"Mr.  Anthon  is  essentially  aid- 
ing the  acquisition  of  the  ancient 
tongues ;  and  we  trust  that  he  will 
enjoy  all  the  success  which  his  val- 
uable labours  so  justly  merit," — 
Christian  Intelligencer. 

.  ..."  So  correct  in  text,  so  elab- 
orate in  commentaries,  so  vastly  su- 
perior, in  clearness,  depth,  and  vari- 
ety of  information,  to  any  which  have 
gone  before,  that  no  man,  however 
thoroughly  imbued  with  classic  lore, 
has  any  right  to  consider  these  admi- 
rable works  beneath  his  notice,  or 
suited  only  to  the  half-formed  intel- 
lect of  young  beginners," — Christian 
Advocate  and  Journal. 

"  Teachers  owe  an  incalculable 
debt  of  gratitude  to  this  accomplish- 
ed and  patriotic  scholar,  for  the  mas- 
terly and  successful  elfort  that  he 
has  made  to  put  them  in  possession 
of  the  means  of  raising  themselves 
and  pupils  to  a  high  standard  of  schol- 
arship. He  has  laid  a  sure  founda- 
tion, on  which,  with  ordinary  labour, 
they  may  rear  a  superstructure  that 
will  throw  its  shadow  across  the  At- 
lantic waves,  and  win  for  America  the 
veneration  of  those  who  have  hith- 
erto looked  to  us  as  moving  sluggish- 
ly on  in  the  paths  of  Grecian  and  Ro- 
man literature." — Family  Magazine. 

"  Professor  Anthon  deserves  the 
thanks  of  the  country  for  the  zeal  with 
which  he  has  undertaken,  and  the 
abihty  with  which  he  has  thus  far  ex- 
ecuted, his  task." — Rochester  Repvb- 
licaJi. 

"  This  is  a  beautiful  edition,  with 
very  valuable  notes,  by  a  hand  every 
way  competent.  It  forms  a  most 
valuable  addition  to  the  stock  of 
useful  classics  pubhshed  by  the  Har- 
pers,"— N.  Y.  American. 

"  As  a  philologist  and  a  classical 
scholar.  Professor  Anthon  has  no  su- 
perior in  the  United  States  :  and  his 
schoolbooks  are  deservedly  popular, 
both  in  England  and  in  this  country." 
—N.  Y.  Times. 

"  On  this  side  of  the  Atlantic  at 
least,  and  to  some  extent  beyond  it, 
Professor  Anthon  is  equally  known 
as  admirably  qualified  to  edit  and  en- 
rich a  version  of  the  classics  for  our 
own  times  and  the  higher  seminaries 
of  learning  now  so  thickly  scattered 
through  our  country." — The  New- 
Yorker. 


anthon's  series  op  classical  works. 


Commendatory  Notices— continued. 


"  Professor  Anthon  has  been  long 
favourably  known  by  his  publica- 
tions ;  and  their  reproduction  in  this 
country  is  the  best  criterion  of  their 
n\erit.  On  no  writings  of  antiquity 
has  he  laboured  with  such  zeal  and 
success  as  on  those  of  Horace ;  and 
the  publisher  conceives  that  he  has 
done  a  service  to  literature  by  pre- 
senting his  masterly  annotations  to 
the  British  scholar  in  a  form  at  once 
cheap  and  elegant.  The  great  value 
of  the  professor's  notes  results  from 
the  skill  with  which  he  conveys  to 
the  pupil  the  connexion  of  the  poet's 
thoughts,  and  develops  the  train  of 
ideas  which  links  each  fresh  image 
or  new  argument  with  its  precursors. 
Next  in  importance  to  this  ample 
illustration  of  the  meaning  of  his 
author,  are  the  numerous  notices 
gleaned  from  recent  travellers,  to 
clear  up  the  historical,  geographical, 
and  antiquarian  minutiae,  without  a 
full  understanding  of  which,  the  spir- 
it of  many  of  the  finest  ideas  of  the 

ancients  becomes  a  dead  letter 

The  professor  has  sedulously  incor- 
porated all  that  is  valuable  in  the 
notes  of  During  and  of  preceding 
commentators  ;  and  it  may  be  men- 
tioned, as  no  mean  praise,  that  his 
translations  of  numerous  passages, 
apparently  within  the  reach  of  the 
learner,  will  be  found  to  impart  an  in- 
sight into  the  curiosa  felicitas  of  the 
poet's  excursions,  unattainable  by 
the  mere  aid  of  the  dictionary." — 
From  the  preface  to  the  second  London 
edition  of  Anthonys  Horace. 

"  A  publication  of  greater  merit, 
or  of  more  information  and  utihty  in 
its  class,  we  have  never  seen.  It  is, 
indeed,  Sosiorum pumice  mundus ;  and 
if  Professor  Anthon  proposed  in  it  ad 
umbilicum  addticere  m  the  best  possi- 
ble manner,  we  must  accede  to  him 
that  he  has  fairly  accomplished  his 
task." — London  Literary  Gazette. 

"This  is  by  far  the  best  school 
edition  of  Horace  that  has  yet  been 
published  in  Kngland.  Professor  An- 
thon has  selected  and  condensed  the 
works  of  the  best  previous  commen- 
tators, removing  those  redundancies 
which  rendered  the  study  of  the  notes 
more  difficult  than  that  of  the  text, 
but  preserving  everything  necessary 
to  illuRtrate  the  author."— iondon 
Athenanm. 


"  The  present  is  a  very  useful  and 
excellent  edition.  We  use  it  in  pref- 
erence to  any  other." — Gentleman^» 
Magazine  {London). 

"  This  is  the  most  complete,  as 
well  as  the  most  correct  and  the  most 
elaborate  edition  of  Horace  extant. 
It  would  be  needless  for  us  to  des- 
cant upon  the  merits  of  a  publication 
which  the  world  prizes  so  much  as, 
in  less  than  three  months,  to  demand 
a  second  edition." — Metropolitan  Mag- 
azine {London). 

"  The  series  of  Classical  works 
which  Harper  and  Brothers  are  now 
publishing,  under  the  editorial  super- 
vision of  Professor  Anthon,  are  pre- 
cisely adapted  to  remove  many  of 
those  obstructions  which  formerly  im- 
peded both  the  amplified  understand- 
ing and  the  rapid  progress  of  the  stu- 
dent as  a  linguist  in  these  tongues. 
The  narrative  by  Caesar,  the  select 
orations  of  Cicero,  and  the  history  by 
Sallust,  which  have  already  been  is- 
sued, are  prepared  in  that  very  style 
which  will  not  only  encourage  the 
student  to  alacrity  and  perseverance, 
but  the  information  which  the  anno- 
tations impart  are  directly  fitted  to 
allure  him  onward,  by  continually 
opening  to  him  the  vast  universe  of 
knowledge  in  which  he  is  inv'ted  to 
expatiate ;  while  they  furnish  that 
exact  quantum  of  aid  which  sets 
aside  otherwise  insurmountable  hin- 
derances,  and  by  its  attractiveness 
encourages  strenuous  effort,  by  his 
own  energies,  to  comprehend  the  au- 
thors whose  works  he  is  perusing,— 
Cincinnati  Christian  Journal. 

"  The  enviable  reputation  that 
Professor  Anthon  has  acquired  as  a 
profound  scholar,  a  distinguished  phi- 
lologist, and  an  abstruse  commenta- 
tor ;  for  critical  acumen,  untiring  re- 
search, and  redundancy  of  learning, 
is  a  sure  guarantee  that  every  task  he 
sets  himself  to  will  be  undertaken 
with  zeal  and  executed  with  more 
than  ordinary  ability."— rA«  JBjyo#- 
itor. 

"  The  author  has  proved  himself 
completely  master  of  his  subject, 
certainly  one  of  great  difficulty.  Not 
only  is  he  deserving  of  the  patronage 
of  the  community,  but  even  of  some- 
thing like  gratitude  from  our  young 
men  who  are  seeking  a  liberal  educa- 
tion."—American  Traveller  (Boston). 


COMfl'iS^DSt 


468613 


1i 


*. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


'm  .'SWe 


